Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Table of Contents
Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT Edition Help ........................................................................................ 6
Getting Started .....................................................................................................................................................................................................6
What is Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT? .................................................................................................................................... 6
Whats New in Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT .........................................................................................................................6
Installation, Upgrades, and Updates .......................................................................................................................................... 7
CONNECT Services in Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT ......................................................................................................... 8
Documentation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 15
Be Communities Search Button ............................................................................................................................................... 15
RSS Feeds ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
Contacting Us .................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
Introducing the Workspace .........................................................................................................................................................................17
Workspace ..........................................................................................................................................................................................17
Ribbon Interface - Getting Started .......................................................................................................................................... 22
Menus and Toolbars (MicroStation and ArcGIS Only) ................................................................................................... 27
Dynamic Manager Display ...........................................................................................................................................................53
Using Named Views ........................................................................................................................................................................56
Starting a Project ..............................................................................................................................................................................................57
Welcome Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................................................................... 58
Projects ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 58
Setting Project Properties ............................................................................................................................................................59
Setting Options ................................................................................................................................................................................. 59
Using ProjectWise ........................................................................................................................................................................... 67
Importing Data From Other Models ........................................................................................................................................74
Exporting Data ............................................................................................................................................................................... 111
Long Term Continuous Simulations in SewerGEMS V8i Using the SWMM Engine ..........................................115
Copying and Pasting Data To and From Tables ...............................................................................................................117
Using Modelbuilder ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 117
Preparing to Use ModelBuilder .............................................................................................................................................. 118
ModelBuilder Connections Manager ....................................................................................................................................119
ModelBuilder Wizard ..................................................................................................................................................................120
GIS-IDs ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 129
Reviewing Your Results ............................................................................................................................................................. 130
Multi-select Data Source Types .............................................................................................................................................. 130
Exporting X/Y Coordinates .......................................................................................................................................................131
ModelBuilder Warnings and Error Messages .................................................................................................................. 131
Esri ArcGIS Geodatabase Support ......................................................................................................................................... 132
Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder ........................................................................................................134
Handling Collection and Curve Data in Modelbuilder .................................................................................................. 135
Oracle as a Data Source for ModelBuilder ......................................................................................................................... 136
Using ModelBuilder to Import Time Series Data ............................................................................................................ 138
Integrating with Bentley Map ................................................................................................................................................ 139
Creating Your Model .................................................................................................................................................................................... 140
Elements and Element Attributes ......................................................................................................................................... 141
Adding Elements to Your Model .............................................................................................................................................246
Connecting Elements ...................................................................................................................................................................248
Troubleshooting
Because of the multitasking capabilities of Windows, you may have applications running in the background that make
it difficult for software setup and installations to determine the configuration of your current system. If you have
difficulties during the installation or uninstallation process, please try these steps before contacting our technical
support staff:
1. Shut down and restart your computer.
2. Verify that there are no other programs running. You can see applications currently in use by pressing Ctrl+Shift
+Esc in Windows XP and Vista. Exit any applications that are running.
License Check
Contact Bentley Systems if you want product information, to upgrade your software, or need technical support.
Related Topics
If the user has not logged into the CONNECTION client, none of the options under Bentley Cloud Services will be
available. If the user does not have internet access, CONNECTION client will not be available. In general, Bentley
Cloud Services refers to the environment fostered by the CONNECT edition, where users can collaborate on projects
using the web and the cloud through the user's Personal Portal.
A user can also see CONNECTION Client status at the rightmost end of Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT's status in the
standalone version. (Other platforms will differ.) If user has not logged in, they will see a "Sign-In" button. Clicking on
it will open CONNECTION Client login dialog where a user can enter credential information to login. If user has
logged in, the
drop-down button gives a user quick access to either open a personal portal of currently logged-in
user or Sign Out.
The user interacts with the CONNECTION client through the user's Personal Portal. The user opens the Personal Portal
by selection Bentley Cloud Services from the main menu in Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT and picking Personal
Portal. Once the user logs into the CONNECTION client, the user has access to a variety of capabilities including
Learning, Cloud Services, Software Downloads, Bentley Communities, License Management and Service Requests
from the Personal Portal. The user can also publish i-models and pdf files from within Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT
and access them on other devices or share them with others using Personal Share. In general, the Personal Portal is the
starting point for Bentley CONNECT features, as opposed to the modeling features in Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT.
This dialog allows the user to determine when they are prompted to assign a CONNECTED project with their hydraulic
model. By default the association dialog will be displayed on creating a new hydraulic model or opening a hydraulic
model without an associated CONNECTED project. However, with this dialog the user can disable the prompt to
associate CONNECTED project by selecting "Never prompt (I will manually make this association later if desired). If
the user also checks "Do not notify me again" then by using both of these options the "Assign Project to Hydraulic
Model" dialog will not be shown when creating or opening any hydraulic model.
If the user leaves the default setting of "Always prompt to make this association" and checks "Do not notify me again"
then every time a user creates hydraulic model or opens a hydraulic model without an associated CONNECTED project
the user will be prompted with the "Assign Project to Hydraulic Model" dialog.
To change the settings for this dialog when "Do not notify me again" is checked go into the Tools->Options dialog and
click the prompts button. Uncheck the item labeled "CONNECTED Project Notification" and click OK. The next time a
hydraulic model is created or opened the aforementioned dialog will be displayed.
The following dialog is displayed if the user selects "Always prompt to make this association."
10
In order to assign a project to a hydraulic model, the user must be signed in to the CONNECTION server. If the user is
not signed in or does not have internet access, the user can still use the hydraulic model independent of CONNECT.
A user can break the association between a project and a hydraulic model by selecting Bentley Cloud Services >
Disassociate Project while the model is open.
For more details on specific CONNECT functions, see the detailed help topics listed below.
CONNECT Integration
Bentley CONNECT is used to connect the people, information, systems, and resources for the projects in your
organization. Bentley SewerCAD integrates with CONNECT so you can associate your file with a CONNECTED
project for tracking application usage to that project.
Get CONNECTED
If you do not already have a CONNECT account, it is fast and free to register. Your Bentley CONNECT account
provides access to:
11
Opens the Register a Project page in your browser from where you can register a project.
Refresh
View
Allows you to choose the list of projects that you want to see in the list box. Following are the options:
Search
List box
Favorite - Allows you to favorite a project. Select the star icon in this column for the project that
you want to mark as favorite.
Number - Displays the number of the project.
Name - Displays the name of the project.
Location - Displays the geographic location of the project.
Industry - Displays the industry of the project.
Asset Type - Displays the asset type of the project.
12
13
Project ID officially used in Organization for tracking project internally (e.g., EAP id, like
DMO-063 VP 778).
Name
Common name for project within an Organization (e.g. I-565 Interchange at County Line Road).
Asset industry An Industry is a group of like organizations with a common business function centered on a like
set of infrastructure assets. Example, Electric Utility.
Asset type
An Asset Type is a set of related Assets. Example, the Asset Class Electric Network is comprised
of the following Assets: Distribution Network, Substation, and Transmission Network.
Location
Status
Project state, either Active meaning the project is open for participation or inactive, closed for
participation.
3. Click Save.
A list of registered projects within your organization opens. The newly created project is highlighted in green.
Project ID officially used in Organization for tracking project internally (e.g., EAP id, like
DMO-063 VP 778).
Name
Common name for project within an Organization (e.g. I-565 Interchange at County Line Road).
Asset industry An Industry is a group of like organizations with a common business function centered on a like
set of infrastructure assets. Example, Electric Utility.
Asset type
An Asset Type is a set of related Assets. Example, the Asset Class Electric Network is comprised
of the following Assets: Distribution Network, Substation, and Transmission Network.
Location
14
Project state, either Active meaning the project is open for participation or inactive, closed for
participation.
3. Click Save.
Documentation
Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT documentation comes in three parts:
Online help: The online help is accessible from the Help menu or by pressing F1. Additionally, when you are using
Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT, you can call the online help at any time by clicking a help button in any dialog box
or window. The context-sensitive online help is designed to make it easy for you to quickly find specific
information about a feature you are using in Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT. The online help makes extensive use
of hyperlinks and provides a table of contents, index, and keyword search to help you locate the information you
need.
Online PDF Book: The content in the online help is also available in .pdf format and is available at
docs.bentley.com. This pdf contains the same content as the online help, but includes hypertext and is designed to
be printed by you from a local printing device. As well as being more easily printable than the online help, the
online book also uses hypertext and is searchable.
Note: On-screen display of graphics in .pdf files is dependent on the zoom level you use. For more optimal
viewing of graphics in Adobe Acrobat Reader, try using 167% and 208% zoom.
Related Topics
RSS Feeds
The RSS Feeds dialog displays a continuously updated, customizable, and searchable selection of wiki entries and Be
Communities forum posts.
Search for keywords using the search bar along the top of the dialog.
Sort and filter the displayed content by category using the Filter button at the top of the dialog.
15
Contacting Us
Contact Bentley Systems if you want product information, to upgrade your software, or need technical support.
Related Topics
Sales
Bentley Systems professional staff is ready to answer your questions. Contact your account manager or use any of the
methods below for any questions regarding Bentley Systems latest products and prices.
Technical Support
We hope that everything runs smoothly and you never have a need for our technical support staff. However, if you do
need support, our highly-skilled staff offers their services seven days a week, and may be contacted by phone, chat, and
the Internet.
For information on the various levels of support that we offer, contact our sales team today and request information on
our Bentley SELECT program, or visit our Web site.
You can contact our technical support team at: http://selectservices.bentley.com where the following options are
available:
Service Ticket Manager: Open a new service ticket or monitor the status of your own or your entire company's service
tickets. You can review work notes added to the incident by our staff, or update the incident yourself for our input. A
variety of search tools are also available that can let you narrow in on a specific solution that was answered in the past.
Live Chat: Provides Bentley SELECT subscribers access to technical support personnel through the use of Internet
chat. Hours for Live Chat are 24 hours a day, Sundays at 6 p.m. through Fridays at 5 p.m. Eastern Time (EST/EDT).
Phone: Call a local technical support analyst via the toll-free number for your region.
When calling for support, in order to assist our technicians in troubleshooting your problem, please be in front of your
computer and have the following information available:
16
A note of exactly what you were doing when you encountered the problem.
Any error messages or other information displayed on your screen.
When contacting support, please provide the following details, in addition to the above, to enable us to provide a more
timely and accurate response:
Note: When sending files, it is best to zip the model files and not include any model output files such as .out
or .rpc.
Workspace
You use Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT in one of these modes:
Stand-Alone Editor
The Stand-Alone Editor is the workspace that contains the various managers, toolbars, and menus, along with the
drawing pane, that make up the Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT interface. The Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT
interface uses dockable windows and toolbars, so the position of the various interface elements can be manually
adjusted to suit your preference.
By default, the Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT environment looks like this:
17
18
The zoom toolbar is available, by default, in the top-left corner of the drawing view. Each open hydraulic model
drawing will have its own zoom toolbar available for use with that hydraulic model. You can also hide the zoom
toolbar by going to the View tab and clicking on the Zoom and View Settings button (
).
In the menu that appears, uncheck the item labeled "Show "Zoom" toolbar in the drawing view" to hide the zoom
toolbar. This will hide the toolbar for all open hydraulic models.
19
Use:
Select elements in the drawing. This is the default tool and becomes active when most
Select Tool
interactions are completed.
Set the view so that the entire model is visible in the drawing pane. Zoom extents is
the default behavior for the toolbar button.
Open the Zoom Center dialog box where you can set X and Y coordinates and then
percentage of Zoom.
Activate the manual zoom tool, where you can specify a portion of the drawing to
enlarge. Only visible if zoom window is the default command for the zoom window/
zoom in button in the ribbon (on the View tab).
Zoom Window
Magnify the current view in the drawing pane. Only visible if zoom in is the default
command for the zoom window/zoom in button in the ribbon (on the View tab).
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Enable the real-time zoom tool, which allows you to zoom in and out by moving the
mouse while the left mouse button is depressed.
Zoom Real-time
Enable you to zoom to specific elements in the drawing. You must select the elements
Zoom Selection
to zoom to before you select the tool.
20
Use:
Return the zoom level to the most recent previous setting. If there is no available
previous zoom level, the menu item will be disabled. The button is always enabled in
case Zoom Next is available. Zoom previous is the default behavior for the toolbar
button. If the drawing cannot be zoom previous, nothing will happen.
Zoom Previous
Reset the zoom level to the setting that was active before a Zoom Previous command Zoom Next
was executed. If there is no available next zoom level, the menu item will be disabled.
Activate the Pan tool, which allows you to move the model within the drawing pane.
When you select this command, the cursor changes to a hand, indicating that you can
click and hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to move the drawing.
Pan
MicroStation Mode
MicroStation mode lets you create and model your network directly within your primary drafting environment. This
gives you access to all of MicroStations drafting and presentation tools, while still enabling you to perform Bentley
SewerCAD CONNECT modeling tasks like editing, solving, and data management. This relationship between Bentley
SewerCAD CONNECT and MicroStation enables extremely detailed and accurate mapping of model features, and
provides the full array of output and presentation features available in MicroStation. This facility provides the most
flexibility and the highest degree of compatibility with other CAD-based applications and drawing data maintained at
your organization.
Note: For more information about runnning Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT in MicroStation mode, see
MicroStation Environment (on page 832).
ArcGIS Mode
ArcGIS mode lets you create and model your network directly in ArcMap. Each mode provides access to differing
functionalitycertain capabilities that are available within ArcGIS mode may not be available when working in the
Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT Stand-alone Editor. All the functionality available in the Stand-alone Editor are,
however, available in ArcGIS mode.
Note: For more information about running Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT in ArcGIS mode, see Working in ArcGIS
Mode.
AutoCAD Mode
AutoCAD mode lets you create and model your network directly within your primary drafting environment. This gives
you access to all of AutoCAD's drafting and presentation tools, while still enabling you to perform Bentley SewerCAD
CONNECT modeling tasks like editing, solving, and data management. This relationship between Bentley SewerCAD
CONNECT and AutoCAD enables extremely detailed and accurate mapping of model features, and provides the full
21
The most commonly used buttons are large with a text description; less commonly used button are smaller and less
commonly used are buttons only. Some have a drop down option to reach more choices. For example, the Compute
button has the following sub-options, which you can reach by picking the small arrow under Compute instead of the
large green and white arrow which would run a scenario.
Note: The wider the screen, the more buttons and text that appears. As the screen gets narrower for some tabs,
buttons may disappear. Making the Bentley SewerCAD window as large as possible ensures that all buttons are
visible.
The Select button is important for getting back to the ribbon and can be found on the Home, Analysis and Layout tabs
and alongside of the Zoom buttons.
The File tab opens a special list of features that are typical of most windows programs. This is referred to in some
places as the "backstage". Here you will find such common functions such as New, Open, Save and Help.
22
At the top of the program window, you will find the Quick Access Toolbar. This toolbar contain access to common
functions such as New, Open and Save but you can use the drop down menu at the end of the toolbar to customize the
buttons, or locate the Quick Access Toolbar.
If you have trouble locating a function used in an earlier version of the program, type the name of the button in the
Search box at the top right corner and the location of the function in the ribbon will be identified.
The ribbon can be minimized by picking the arrow at the upper right of the ribbon. It can return to full size by picking it
again. Selecting the ALT key displays keyboard shortcuts to each selection.
The current scenario is displayed at the top of the drawing pane, just below the ribbon. Next to it are some other
commonly used commands such as scenario manager, zoom and pan.
23
Analysis Tab
The Analysis tab contains the buttons for setting up and running models.
Components Tab
The Components tab provides you with a way to edit components such as storm data and pump definitions.
24
Tools Tab
The Tools tab gives you access to more of the advanced tools such as ModelBuilder, Hyperlinks, and PondMaker.
The general options which were available under Tools > Options are now available from the small arrow to the right of
the word Tools.
25
Report Tab
The Report tab provides a quick way to open element flex tables and produce custom reports.
26
Menus
Menus are located at the top of Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT stand-alone editor window and provide access to
program commands, which are broken down by type of functionality.
The following menus are available:
File Menu
The File menu contains the following commands:
New
Open
Close
Close All
27
Save
Save As
Save All
Import
Export
Seed
Page Setup
28
Print Preview
Recent Files
Exit
Edit Menu
The Edit menu contains the following commands:
Undo
Redo
Delete
29
Select All
Invert Selection
Select by Element
Select by Attribute
Clear Selection
Clear Highlight
Find Element
Analysis Menu
The Analysis menu contains the following commands:
Compute Center
30
Scenarios
Alternatives
Calculation Options
Statistics
Time Browser
Calculation Summary
User Notifications
Validate
Compute Hydrology
Compute
31
Components Menu
The Components menu contains the following commands:
Storm Data
Opens the Storm Data dialog box, which lets you create,
edit, and delete storm data. These storms are available for
you to select for a catchment. For more information, see
Adding Storm Data-461.
RTK Tables
Opens the RTK Tables dialog box, which lets you create
wet weather flow hydrographs using the RTK method.
For more information, see Adding Hydrographs Based
On the RTK Method-503.
Inlet Catalog
Opens the Inlet Catalog dialog box, which lets you create,
edit, and view catalog inlets. Catalog inlets are an
efficient way to reuse common physical inlet definitions.
For more information, see Inlet Catalog Dialog
Box-297.
32
Conduit Catalog
Pump Definitions
Vortex Valves
SWMM Extensions
Opens a submenu containing the following SWMMspecific commands: Climatology Opens the
Climatology dialog box, allowing you to view and edit
climatology data for use in SWMM calculations. Snow
Pack Opens the Snow Pack dialog box, allowing you to
view and edit snow pack data for use in SWMM
calculations. Aquifers Opens the Aquifers dialog box,
allowing you to view and edit aquifer data for use in
SWMM calculations. Control Sets Opens the Control
Sets dialog box, allowing you to view, edit, and create
control sets for use in SWMM calculations. Pollutants
Opens the Pollutants dialog box, allowing you to view
and edit pollutant data for use in SWMM calculations.
Pollutographs Opens the Pollutograph dialog box,
allowing you to view and edit pollutograph data for use in
SWMM calculations. Land Uses Opens the Land Use
dialog box, allowing you to view and edit land use data
for use in SWMM calculations. For more information, see
Using the SWMM Solver-320.
33
Opens the Pattern Manager where you can create and edit
diurnal loading patterns for use with extended period
simulations. For more information, see Defining
Patterns-417.
Pattern Setups
Patterns
Engineering Libraries
View Menu
The View menu contains the following commands:
Element Symbology
Background Layers
Network Navigator
Selection Sets
Queries
Prototypes
FlexTables
34
Profiles
Contours
Named Views
Aerial View
Properties
Auto-Refresh
Refresh Drawing
Zoom
35
Activates the Pan tool, which lets you move the model
within the drawing pane. When you select this command,
the cursor changes to a hand, indicating that you can click
and hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to
move the drawing.
Toolbars
Reset Workspace
Tools Menu
The Tools menu contains the following commands:
Active Topology Selection
Thiessen Polygon
LoadBuilder
Hyperlinks
ModelBuilder
TRex
36
Hydraulic Reviewer
Scenario Comparison
37
Database Utilities
Layout
38
External Tools
Options
Report Menu
The Report menu contains the following commands:
Element Tables
Scenario Summary
Project Inventory
Report Options
Opens the Report Options box where you can set Headers
and Footers for the predefined reports.
Help Menu
Toolbars provide access to frequently used menu commands and are organized by the type of functionality offered.
Many of the toolbars have additional buttons available that are not displayed by default. You can display these
additional buttons by following the procedure in Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons-47.
The following toolbars are available:
Standard Toolbar-32
Edit Toolbar-33
Components Toolbar-33
Scenarios Toolbar-36
Analysis Toolbar-36
Compute Toolbar-36
View Toolbar-38
Help Toolbar-39
Layout Toolbar-40
Zoom Toolbar-43
Report Toolbar-44
Tools Toolbar-44
Select Toolbar-45
39
Toolbars
Toolbars provide access to frequently used menu commands and are organized by the type of functionality offered.
Many of the toolbars have additional buttons available that are not displayed by default. You can display these
additional buttons by following the procedure in Adding and Removing Toolbar Buttons .
The following toolbars are available:
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar contains the following buttons:
New
Open
40
Save
Print Preview
Edit Toolbar
The Edit toolbar contains the following buttons:
Undo
Redo
Find Element
Components Toolbar
The Components toolbar contains the following buttons:
Controls
Storm Data
41
RTK Tables
Inlet Catalog
Conduit Catalog
Gutter Catalog
Extreme Flows
Pump Definitions
42
Flow-Headloss Curves
Vortex Valves
Pollutographs
Land Uses
Engineering Libraries
Patterns
43
Pattern Setups
Scenarios Toolbar
The Scenario toolbar contains the following buttons:
Scenario List Box
Scenarios
Alternatives
Calculation Options
Analysis Toolbar
The Analysis toolbar contains the following button:
Statistics
44
Compute Toolbar
The Compute toolbar contains the following buttons:
Compute Center
Validate
Compute Hydrology
Compute
Calculation Summary
Time Browser
45
User Notifications
View Toolbar
The View toolbar contains the following buttons, which give you easy access to many of the managers in Bentley
SewerCAD CONNECT.
Element Symbology
Background Layers
Selection Sets
Network Navigator
Queries
Prototypes
FlexTables
Graphs
46
Profiles
Contours
Aerial View
Properties
Help Toolbar
The Help toolbar provides quick access to the same commands that are available in the Help menu. The Help toolbar
contains the following buttons.
Check for SELECT Updates
Training
Bentley.com
Help
Layout Toolbar
You use the Layout toolbar to lay out your model in the drawing pane.
Note: Less commonly used elements are not displayed in the Layout toolbar by default but are still available for
use. For instructions on adding these elements to the toolbar see Customizing the Toolbars-44.
The Layout toolbar contains the following buttons:
47
Layout
Manhole
Transition
48
Pond
Pump
Wet Well
Pressure Junction
Pump Station
49
Air Valve
Border
Text
Line
Zoom Toolbar
The Zoom toolbar provides access to the zooming and panning tools. It contains the following buttons:
Zoom Extents
Zoom Window
50
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Zoom Realtime
Pan
Refresh Drawing
Report Toolbar
The Report toolbar provides quick access to commands that are available in the Report menu. The Report toolbar
contains the following buttons.
Scenario Summary
Project Inventory
Report Options
Tools Toolbar
The Tools toolbar provides quick access to commands that are available in the Tools menu. The Report toolbar contains
the following buttons.
51
ModelBuilder
TRex
LoadBuilder
Thiessen Polygon
Scenario Comparison
Select Toolbar
The Select toolbar provides quick access to commands that allow you to select elements in the drawing using a variety
of methods. The Select toolbar contains the following buttons:
52
Select By Polygon: Lets you select elements in your model by drawing a polygon in the drawing pane. Click in the
drawing pane to draw each side of the polygon.
Select All: Selects all of the elements in the network.
Select by Element: Opens a submenu listing all available element types. Select one of the element types from the
submenu to select all elements of that type in the mode.
Select By Attribute: Opens a menu listing all available attribute types. Select one of the attribute types from the
menu and the Query Builder dialog box opens.
Clear Selection: Deselects the currently selected element(s).
Invert Selection: Selects all of the currently unselected elements and deselects the currently selected element(s).
Opening Managers
To open a manager:
Do one of the following:
53
Manager
Keyboard Shortcut
ALT+1
ALT+2
ALT+4
CTRL+1
CTRL+3
CTRL+4
54
Manager
Keyboard Shortcut
CTRL+7
CTRL+8
CTRL+0
F4
F7
F8
Customizing Managers
When you first start Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT, you will see the default workspace, in which a limited set of
dockable managers are visible. You can decide which managers will be displayed at any time and where they will be
displayed. You can also return to the default workspace any time.
55
Docked Static: A docked static manager attaches to any of the four sides of the Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT
window. If you drag a floating manager to any of the four sides of the Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT window, the
manager will attach or dock itself to that side of the window. The manager will stay in that location unless you close it
or make it dynamic. A vertical pushpin in the manager's title bar indicates its static state; click the pushpin to change
the manager's state to dynamic. When the push pin is pointing downward (vertical push pin), the manager is docked.
You can also:
Close a docked manager by left clicking on the x in the upper right corner of the title bar.
Change a docked manager into a floating manager by double-clicking the title bar, or by dragging the manager to
the desired location (for example, away from the side of the Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT window).
Change a static docked manager into a dynamically docked manager by clicking the push pin in the title bar.
Switch between multiple docked managers in the same location by clicking the manager's tab.
Docked Dynamic: A docked dynamic manager also docks to any of the four sides of the Bentley SewerCAD
CONNECTi window, but remains hidden except for a single tab. Show a docked dynamic manager by moving the
mouse over the tab, or by clicking the tab. When the manager is showing (not hidden), a horizontal pushpin in its title
bar indicates its dynamic state.
You can also:
Close a docked manager by left clicking on the x in the upper right corner of the title bar.
Change a docked dynamic manager into a docked static manager by clicking the push pin (converting it from
vertical to horizontal).
Switch between multiple docked managers in the same location by moving the mouse over the manager's tab or by
clicking the manager's tab.
Closed: When a manager is closed, you cannot view it. Close a manager by clicking the x in the right corner of the
manager's title bar. Open a manager by selecting the manager from the View menu (for example, View > Element
Symbology), or by selecting the button for that manager on the appropriate toolbar.
56
Delete
Rename
Go to View
Help
Starting a Project
This chapter contains the following sections:
57
You can access the Welcome dialog box at any time from the Help menu.
Projects
All data for a model are stored in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i as a project. Bentley SewerGEMS V8i project files have
the file name extension csd. Bentley SewerGEMS V8i lets you open more than one project at a time. You can assign a
title, date, notes and other identifying information about each project using the Project Properties dialog box. You can
have up to five Bentley SewerGEMS V8i projects open at one time.
Starting with the SELECTseries 3 release, SewerGEMS V8i, SewerCAD V8i, CivilStorm V8i and StormCAD V8i all
share the same project file format. This means that a *.stsw file created in SewerGEMS V8i can be opened in any of the
other three products, and vice versa, without data loss or conversion.
SewerGEMS V8i SELECTseries 3 can also open SewerGEMS (*.swg), SewerCAD (*.swc), CivilStorm (*.csd) and
StormCAD (*.stc) project files created in releases prior to V8i SELECTseries 3.
Starting a New Project
To start a new project, select File > New or press Ctrl+N. An untitled project is opened in the drawing pane.
Opening an Existing Project
58
File Name
Displays the file name for the current project. If you have
not saved the project yet, the file name is listed as
Untitled.stsw.
Engineer
Company
Date
Notes
Setting Options
You can change global settings for Bentley SewerGEMS V8i in the Options dialog box. The Options dialog box
contains four tabs, each of which lets you change a different group of global settings.
Click one of the following links to learn more about the Options dialog box:
59
60
Foreground Color
Selection
Layout Settings
Display Inactive Topology
Auto Refresh
61
62
Result Files
Specify Custom Results File Path?
When this box is checked, the result files are placed in the
directory as specified in the Path field described below.
When this option is checked, the result files are moved (as
opposed to copied) to a temp directory when the project is
opened. They are moved back to the custom location
when the project is closed (not when the project is saved).
When this box is unchecked, the result files get saved to
the project directory
63
Path Format
Path
Pipe Length
Round Pipe Length to Nearest
Controls the scale of the plan view. This value affects the
text height when printing-to-scale and does not affect the
scaled length or area results.
64
Load
Reset Defaults - SI
Reset Defaults - US
65
Units Table
Load
Reset
66
Labeling Table
Default Datasource: Displays the current ProjectWise datasource. If you have not yet logged into a datasource, this
field will display <login>. To change the datasource, click the Ellipsis (...) button to open the Change Datasource
dialog box. If you click Cancel after you have changed the default datasource, the new default datasource is
retained.
Update Server on Save: When this is checked, any time you save your SewerGEMS V8i project locally using the
File > Save menu command, the files on your ProjectWise server will also be updated and all changes to the files
will immediately become visible to other ProjectWise users. This option is turned off by default.
Note: This option, when turned on, can significantly affect performance, especially for large, complex projects.
Using ProjectWise
Bentley ProjectWise provides managed access to Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT content within a workgroup, across a
distributed organization, or among collaborating professionals. When ProjectWise is integrated with Bentley
SewerCAD CONNECT, project files can be accessed quickly, checked out for use, and checked back in directly from
within Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT.
If ProjectWise is installed on your system, Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT automatically installs all the components
necessary for you to use ProjectWise to store and share your Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT projects.
To learn more about ProjectWise, refer to the ProjectWise online help. To learn more about using ProjectWise with
Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT, see the following topics:
67
If set to true and project file is opened from ProjectWise, then all subsequent prompt (file open/save dialog) during
application interaction is to/from ProjectWise Only.
If set to false and project is opened from ProjectWise, then all subsequent prompt shows ProjectWise dialog first.
Upon canceling ProjectWise dialog, a local file dialog is opened.
If set to false and project is opened locally, then settings doesn't have any affect. The subsequent prompt are always
local referring to local files.
68
Login to ProjectWise: The first prompt that user gets during ProjectWise interaction is to log into a ProjectWise
datasource.
The datasource the users log into remains the current datasource until you change it from Tools > Options
>ProjectWise > ellipsis button.
Creating a new Project: Use File > New command to create a new project. The project is not stored in ProjectWise
until you select File > Save. User is prompted to save the project on ProjectWise. Upon cancel, the user is given an
option to save project locally.
Opening a Project: Use File > Open command shows ProjectWise prompt first to open a project from ProjectWise.
Upon cancel, local prompt is given to open a project locally. The user can quickly tell whether or not the current
project is in ProjectWise or not by looking at the title bar and the status bar of the window. If the current project is
in ProjectWise, "pwname://" will appear in front of the file name in the title bar, and a ProjectWise icon will appear
on the far right side of the status bar.
Saving a Project: Use File > Save command to save a copy of the current project to either on ProjectWise or locally,
depends upon from where it was opened in the first place.
Saving a local project to ProjectWise:
To copy an open project from one ProjectWise datasource to another:
To make a local copy of a project stored in a ProjectWise datasource:
To change the default ProjectWise datasource:
Closing a Project::
When you Close a project already stored in ProjectWise using File > Close, you are prompted to select one of the
following options:
Importing files: User can also import files (e.g. Submodel, SWMM, LandXML, InRoads, etc) before any model is
opened from File > Import. These import prompts will refer to files saved using ProjectWise simply based on if
ProjectWise integration is enabled. The model that is created during this import is considered as a local model
unless and until it is saved to ProjectWise.
Updating Server copy: In the Tools > Options dialog box, there is a ProjectWise tab with the Update server on Save
check box. This option, when turned on, can significantly affect performance, especially for large, complex projects.
When this is checked, any time you save your project locally using the File > Save menu command, the files on the
ProjectWise server will also be updated and all changes to the files will immediately become visible to other
ProjectWise users. This option is turned off by default.
Opening a recent file: Projects associated with ProjectWise appear in the Most Recently Used Files list (at the
bottom of the File menu) in the following format: pwname://PointServer:_TestDatasource/Documents/TestFolder/
example.stsw
Working with background layers:
69
70
Water/Storm/Sewer Products publish their changes to an application repository. An application schema is adhered so
that only relevant properties are published.
A consensus repository exists in some shared location (perhaps on a server of some sort) and may be in a completely
different (consensus) schema. If the schema is incompatible with the schema of the applications using it, transformation
services need to be written to transform data between the two schemas.
Bentley Water/Storm/Sewer products only write our data out to the application repository, so the part of the process
handled by those products looks like this:
Workflow Walkthrough
Initial creation of a consensus repository:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
71
Going from left-to-right across the top toolbar of the upper section of the dialog, the buttons are as follows:
Home: Restores the grid view back to its original state after following any relationships.
Back: Goes back a step after following any relationships.
Filter: Filters on an elements of the chosen types.
Show Added: Toggles the showing of newly added elements in the grid view.
72
Show Deleted: Toggles the showing of the newly deleted elements in the grid view.
Show Modified: Toggles the showing of the newly modified elements in the grid view.
Show Unchanged: Toggles the showing of the elements that haven't changed since the latest repository revision.
Show Accepted: Toggles the showing of elements whose changes have all been accepted.
Show Rejected: Toggles the showing of elements whose changes have all been rejected.
Show Partial: Toggles the showing of elements whose changes are a mixture of accepted, rejected, and undecided.
Show Undecided: Toggles the showing of elements whose changes are all undecided.
Check Box: Selects/deselects the element as part of the set of elements affected by the bottom toolbar (described
below).
Type: The element type.
Label: The element's label.
Status: The status (added, deleted, modified, etc.) of the element.
Change: The current state of the decision to include the changes or not (accepted, rejected, etc.).
Going from left-to-right across the bottom toolbar of the upper section of the dialog, the buttons are as follows:
Select All: Checks all of the check boxes for the elements listed in the grid view above it.
Clear All: Unchecks all of the check boxes for the elements listed in the grid view above it.
Accept: Sets the change state of all of the checked elements in the grid view above it to accepted.
Reject: Sets the change state of all of the checked elements in the grid view above it to rejected.
Undecide: Sets the change state of all of the checked elements in the grid view above it to undecided.
Selected Objects: Gives the count of elements in the grid view above it that are checked.
In the lower section of the dialog, the Properties tab shows the properties of the currently selected elements in the grid
view of the upper section of the dialog.
Going from left-to-right across the top toolbar of the lower section of the dialog, the buttons are as follows:
Show Added: Toggles the showing of newly added properties in the grid view.
Show Deleted: Toggles the showing of the newly deleted properties in the grid view.
Show Modified: Toggles the showing of the newly modified properties in the grid view.
Show Unchanged: Toggles the showing of the properties that haven't changed since the latest repository revision.
Show Accepted: Toggles the showing of properties that have been accepted.
Show Rejected: Toggles the showing of properties that have been rejected.
Show Undecided: Toggles the showing of properties that are still undecided.
Check Box: Selects/deselects the property as part of the set of properties affected by the bottom toolbar (described
below).
Property: The name of the property.
New Value: The new (changed) value of the property.
Old Value: The previous value of the property.
Status: The status (added, deleted, modified, etc.) of the property.
Change: The current state of the decision to include the change or not (accepted, rejected, etc.).
Going from left-to-right across the bottom toolbar of the lower section, the buttons are as follows:
Select All: Checks all of the check boxes for the properties listed in the grid view above it.
Clear All: Unchecks all of the check boxes for the properties listed in the grid view above it.
73
Accept: Sets the change state of all of the checked properties in the grid view above it to accepted.
Reject: Sets the change state of all of the checked properties in the grid view above it to rejected.
Undecide: Sets the change state of all of the checked properties in the grid view above it to undecided.
Selected Properties: Gives the count of properties in the grid view above it that are checked.
Conduits with a diversion are marked in the drawing pane with a symbol as shown in the screenshot below:
In the Bentley Wastewater toolbar, click the Export > Data command.
In the dialog that appears, select all of the listed element types.
Click the File button and select a destination output file.
Use the MicroStation Place Fence tool and draw a fence surrounding the model.
74
75
Importing a Submodel
Using the Submodel Import feature, you can import another model, or any portion thereof, into your project. Input data
stored in the Alternatives as well as any supporting data will also be imported. It is important to notice that existing
elements in the model you want to import the submodel into (i.e. the target model) will be matched with incoming
elements by using their label. Incoming input data will override existing data in the target model for any element
matched by its label. That also applies to scenarios, alternatives, calculation options and supporting data. Furthermore,
76
77
Importing a Bentley InRoads Storm and Sanitary V8i Model into Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT
The following tables describe how various InRoads element attributes are mapped to their Bentley SewerCAD
CONNECT counterparts.
Note: You can import an InRoads file to both new and existing projects; however, you can only import to existing
projects that contain no elements in the model.
Note: If the SDB file being imported uses imperial units, you will receive a prompt asking if you want to use
Survey Feet as the unit. If so, the coordinate values for the project are set appropriately. Conversely, if the
display unit on coordinates is survey feet, then that is what is written to the SDB file on export (coordinate
values only).
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
Pipes
95
Conduit
96
Note: The units landxml project will be exported based on the unit system for new projects attribute in the
project options dialog.
Importing From MX
Drainage data can be imported from MX using the File > Import > MX Drainage menu. It can be exported to MX using
the File > Export > LandXML menu.
The following requirements must be met when using MX import:
1. MX must be installed on the computer for the import process to work, but it does not need to be running.
2. You need to have MX version 08.11.09.700 or later installed.
3. You can only import data if you are using the 32 bit version of the Storm-Sewer products. If you are using the 64 bit
version (by default you will be on a 64 bit operating system) then you will get a message telling you that the
functionality is not available. To run the 32 bit version, locate the relevant exe in Windows Explorer, and double
click it to start the product. For example, for StormCAD browse to "C:\Program Files (x86)\Bentley\StormCAD8"
then double click StormCAD.exe.
4. You can import MX Drainage data to both new and existing projects; however, you can only import to existing
projects that contain no elements in the model.
The following tables describe how the MX Drainage data is mapped on import:
97
Notes:
1. An external flow in MX Drainage is imported in to the Storm-Sewer products (as a Known Flow) but the External
ToC is not. In the Storm-Sewer products, a Known Flow is considered to be a constant flow, which does not vary
with time. If you need to model a flow which does vary with time, then you can either create a catchment and attach
it to an inlet, or enter the External CA and External Tc values. These are only available for inlets, not manholes.
2. Inlet capacities in MX Drainage can be calculated using a rules file. The import process does not automatically
create the equivalent data in the Storm-Sewer products, but in many cases you can replicate it yourself - either by
using an Inlet Catalog, or by defining an Inflow-Capture Curve.
3. Headwalls in MX Drainage are imported in to the Storm-Sewer products, but their hydraulic information is not. If
the headwall represents an inlet to a culvert, then you can enter the required data as Culvert Inlet Coefficients, or
use an appropriate entry from an existing library.
4. In MX Drainage, if there is a bypass flow from an inlet, then the target inlet for that bypass flow is found (either
automatically or manually defined). This information is imported as a gutter element in the Storm-Sewer products,
and the gutter shape and dimensions are taken from the inlet where the bypass occurs. Gutter elements are only
created if a bypass flow exists. You can force this situation to occur by locking the network, and selecting a larger
storm event.
98
Notes:
1. Fixture control pipes are not imported.
2. Offset pipes, and pipes of a constant radius, are modelled in the Storm-Sewer products by the addition of points in
the geometry collection.
3. A Conduit Catalog is created when MX Drainage data is imported, using the information in the pipe library, and the
pipes then use the data from this catalog. The Conduit Catalog does not include information from the MX Drainage
Open Channel or Culvert Barrel libraries, so the relevant information for these types of conduit is added to the
individual conduits.
Notes:
1. Transition elements are not imported.
2. Offset open channels, and open channels of a constant radius, are modelled in the Storm-Sewer products by the
addition of points in the geometry collection.
99
Note: If a subcatchment in MX Drainage uses the Kinematic Wave equation, then this information is imported if
the subcatchment is 100 % pervious or impervious. If it isn't, then the resulting Time of Concentration calculated
by MX Drainage is imported.
Transferring Rainfall Data from MX Drainage to the Bentley Storm-Sewer Products
Rainfall data can be exported from MX Drainage in IDF format using the Scheme > Export > LandXML menu. This
creates an XML file, and also a CSV file which contains the rainfall data in IDF format. To use this data in a StormSewer product, go to Components > Storm Data, and create a new User Defined IDF Table. Make sure the units for the
Duration column are minutes (right click on the column and click Units and Formatting if they're not). Finally, click the
Import icon and browse to the CSV file to import the data. This will import a series of storm events - one for each of
the return periods. You can then select the storm event you want to use in the Components > Global Storm Events
dialog.
MX Drainage Import Dialog Box
This dialog lets you choose the MX Drainage scheme to import, and specify the locations of the various libraries.
Scheme Name: select the scheme to import from the list.
Styles: Select the paths for the MX public, project, and private styles folders. If you are running MX, then these paths
are read from the MX project file (*.mmd). If MX is not running, then by default the paths to the project and private
styles folders will both be set to the same path, which is that of the \styles folder for the MX project. You can use the
browse buttons to manually set any paths which are not correct.
100
Attribute
Mapping
PipeLabel
Label on Conduit
kRoughness (mm)
Darcy-Weisbach roughness
on Conduit
PipeNumber
Length (mm)
Area (ha)
Diameter (mm)
Time of Concentration
(min)
15
17
21
24
101
Notes
Attribute
Mapping
25
26
27
Downstream Manhole
Number
30
Upstream Manhole
Diameter (mm)
31
Downstream Manhole
Diameter (mm)
32
33
Downstream Manhole
Width (mm)
41
42
43
44
102
Notes
Attribute
Mapping
53
88
Mannings N
Notes
103
104
105
106
107
Note: For junction loss equations and reduction, the SewerGEMS V8i method will be set to Absolute with a loss
value of 0.0.
108
109
110
Other values that may not necessarily map directly into SewerGEMS V8i are brought in as User Defined Attributes.
Some of these attributes include Network Name, Pay Items and Pay Item Descriptions. These attributes can be used in
FlexTables, Queries and Reports in SewerGEMS V8i.
Exporting to GEOPAK Drainage Files
You can create or update a GEOPAK Drainage File library and drainage file using this command. If the StormCAD
project was created using GEOPAK import, you will be prompted if you want to sychronize back to those files.
Otherwise, you can create these files from scratch.
Note that you are prompted for two files, first is the DLB or drainage library in GEOPAK, second is the GDF or
GEOPAK drainage file. There are also no MicroStation elements created from this export command, only the file data
is written.
The mapping is the inverse of that described above.
Note: Headwalls are exported to GEOPAK but the hydraulic information is not, so you may need to review the
data and adjust it if you need to do further hydraulic calculations in GEOPAK. For example, if the headwall
represents a culvert inlet, you may need to specify the inlet characteristics.
Additional
There are two additional commands available as keyins only. You can import and export only library data (storm data,
conduits catalogs and inlet catalogs) using these commands.
Exporting Data
You can export your Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT data as a SWMM .INP file, you can export all or a part of a
model as a submodel, or export the graphical representation of your model as a .DXF file.
111
Each tab contains a table that allows you to specify a prefix and suffix for the associated dxf layer. The Preview field
displays how the label will appear.
Note that specifying a prefix or suffix also creates new layers for each prefix/suffix. If no prefix or suffix is specified all
links/nodes/polygons will be exported to the same DXF layer.
The Link Layers tab has additional controls: Entering a value in the Pipe Size Significant Digits field allows you to
organize the pipe layer into multiple layers taking the pipe sizes into account using the Layer by Pipe Size checkbox.
Exporting to SWMM 5
You can export your Bentley SewerCAD model data to a SWMM 5 .INP file.
To export the current project to a SWMM 5 file:
112
Exporting a Submodel
You can export any portion of a model as a submodel for import into other projects. Input data is also stored in the file
that is created in the process of Exporting a Submodel. This input data will be imported following a label-matching
strategy for any element, alternative, scenario, calculation option or supporting data in the submodel. For more
information about input data transfer, see Importing a Submodel (on page 76).
To export a submodel
1. In the drawing view, highlight the elements to be exported as a submodel. To highlight multiple elements, hold
down the Shift key while clicking elements.
2. Click the File menu and select Export...Submodel.
3. In the Select Submodel File to Export dialog box, specify the directory to which the file should be saved, enter a
name for the submodel and click the Save button.
Note: User-defined data is not transferred during submodel import and export operations.
Exporting to Shapefile
It is possible to export model elements and data to create a shapefile. Unlike the other export features in Bentley
SewerCAD , the export to shapefile operation occurs in a FlexTable as opposed to the File > Export menu. Shapefiles
must be created one element type at a time. That means there will be a separate shapefile to junctions, pipes, tanks, etc.
To create a shapefile, open the FlexTable for the type of element. Use selection sets or filtering to reduce the size of the
FlexTable to what is desired in the shapefile. Use the table edit feature to eliminate any columns that are not desired.
When the FlexTable is in the correct form, pick the first button at the top left of the table which is the Export button. A
drop down list will appear, pick Export to Shapefile. The user is asked for the name of shapefile and path. When the
user names the file and hits Save, the dialog below appears.
113
It is important to ensure that any shapefile field names are less than or equal to 10 characters. The default name for
shapefile field is the name of the column in the FlexTable. (If the user changes the name to something different from
the FlexTable column name, the editor remembers it when other shapefiles are created from this table.) Once the names
are acceptable, hit OK to create the shapefile. A shapefile consisting of .dbf, .shx and .shp files are created.
Exporting to LandXML
You can export a model to LandXML format. See Importing from LandXML (on page 95) and LandXML Attribute
Mappings (on page 95) for information about the data that will be exported.
To export the current project to a LandXML .xml file:
1. Select File > Export > LandXML.
2. Type the name of the xml file , then click Save.
3. You may now open the .xml file in another program.
Exporting to MicroDrainage
You can export a model to MicroDrainage .sws format.
To export the current project to a MicroDrainage .sws file:
1. Select File > Export > MicroDrainage.
2. If there is more than one network, select the outfall for the network to export.
3. In the Select MicroDrainage File dialog, type the name of the sws file , then click Save.
Notes on exporting data:
Outfalls
All outfalls can be selected. Headwalls which serve as outfalls can also be selected.
114
Laterals
All laterally connected catchments will be consolidated and applied to start node of the reference conduit
All laterally connected fixed\constant loads will be consolidated and applied to the start of lateral's reference pipe
Catchments
All catchments associated with the start node of the pipe as well as all laterally connected catchments associated
with the pipe are consolidated into a single catchment
Each area is multiplied by its runoff coefficient, and the resultant values are summed
The longest Tc of each of the catchment is applied to the Time of Concentration attribute of the Micro Drainage
Pipe
Manholes
All manholes, transitions, catch basins, and non-outfall headwalls will be exported as MicroDrainage manholes
The MicroDrainage manhole will have the same label as the Bentley element
The shape data will exported as follows: For Manholes, and Catch Basins - the diameter is exported if the structure
is circular, otherwise the length and width are exported if the structure is rectangular. For Transitions and Headwalls
- they are exported as circular structures with a diameter of zero.
The ground elevation is exported as the cover level
The Sump Depth is determined based on the distance of lowest adjacent pipe invert to the invert of the structure
Only constant loads on the Wet Weather Inflow collections on the node are summed and exported as the base flow
on the downstream pipe
Conduits
The label of the exported conduit is based on the UK dendritic numbering mechanism of branch pipe
The diameter of the pipe is exported
The Manning's n is exported to the Manning's n property
The active length of the pipe (User Defined or Scaled) is exported to the length property of the conduit
The Upstream and Downstream invert levels are exported based on the active invert levels of the conduit
Upon export all conduits will be oriented from upstream to downstream towards the outfall
Unsupported Elements
Links - these types of link are excluded from the export: Channels, Gutters, and Pressure Pipes
Nodes and Polygons - these types of nodes and polygons cannot be present in the network: Cross Sections, Pond
Outlet Structures, Pumps, Wet Wells, Ponds, and Pressure Junctions
Long Term Continuous Simulations in SewerGEMS V8i Using the SWMM Engine
SewerGEMS and CivilStorm can now more easily leverage SWMM's ability to run simulations over very long
durations (years vs. days). Here are few notes to keep in mind when attempting to work through the process.
Rainfall
115
DSI-3240
DSI-3260
HLY03, HLY21
FIF21
And a generic SWMM specific format which works as follows where each line of the file contains the station ID,
year, month, day, hour, minute, and non-zero precipitation reading, all separated by one or more spaces
116
Using Modelbuilder
ModelBuilder lets you use your existing GIS asset to construct a new model or update an existing model. ModelBuilder
supports a wide variety of data formats, from simple databases (such as Access and DBase), spreadsheets (such as
Excel or Lotus), GIS data (such as shapefiles, coverages, Esri ArcGIS Geodatabases, and ArcGIS Geometric
Networks), to high end data stores (such as Oracle, and SQL Server), Bentley dgn and dgndb files, and more.
Using ModelBuilder, you map the tables and fields contained within your data source to element types and attributes in
your model. The result is that a model is created, either in stand-alone mode or in an existing ArcMap project.
117
Determine the purpose of your model--Once you establish the purpose of your model, you can start to make
decisions about how detailed the model should be.
Get familiar with your data--If you obtained your GIS data from an outside source, you should take the time to get
acquainted with it. Review spatial and attribute data directly in your GIS environment. Do the nodes have
coordinate information, and do the pipes have start and stop nodes specified? If not, the best method of specifying
network connectivity must be determined.
Contact those involved in the development of the GIS to learn more about the GIS tables and associated attributes.
Find out the purpose of any fields that may be of interest, ensure that data is of an acceptable accuracy, and
determine units associated with fields containing numeric data.
Ideally, there will be one GIS source data table for each Bentley StormCAD V8i element type. This isnt always the
case, and there are two other possible scenarios:
Many GIS tables for one element type--In this case, there may be several tables in the GIS/database corresponding
to a single GEMS modeling element . In this case each data source table must be individually mapped to the Bentley
StormCAD V8i element, or the tables must be combined into a single table in the GIS/database before running
ModelBuilder.
One GIS table containing many element types--In this case, there may be entries that correspond to several Bentley
StormCAD V8i modeling elements in one GIS/database table. You should separate these into individual tables
before running ModelBuilder. The one case where a single table can work is when the features in the table are
ArcGIS subtypes. ModelBuilder handles these subtypes by treating them as separate tables when setting up
mappings. See Subtypes (on page 133) for more information. If you are working with an ArcGIS data source, see
Esri ArcGIS Geodatabase Support for additional information.
Preparing your data--When using ModelBuilder to get data from your GIS into your model, you will be associating
rows in your GIS to elements in Bentley StormCAD V8i. Your data source needs to contain a Key/Label field that
can be used to uniquely identify every element in your model. The data source tables should have identifying
column labels, or ModelBuilder will interpret the first row of data in the table as the column labels. Be sure data is
in a format suited for use in ModelBuilder. Use powerful GIS and Database tools to perform Database Joins, Spatial
Joins, and Update Joins to get data into the appropriate table, and in the desired format.
Note: When working with ID fields, the expected model input is the Bentley StormCAD V8i ID. After creating
these items in your Bentley StormCAD V8i model, you can obtain the assigned ID values directly from your
Bentley StormCAD V8i modeling file. Before synchronizing your model, get these Bentley StormCAD V8i IDs into
your data source table (e.g., by performing a database join).
One area of difficulty in building a model from GIS data is the fact that unless the GIS was created solely to support
modeling, it most likely contains much more detailed information than is needed for modeling. This is especially true
with regard to the number of piping elements. It is not uncommon for the GIS to include every service line and hydrant
lateral. Such information is not needed for most modeling applications and should be removed to improve model run
time, reduce file size, and save costs.
118
In Stand-Alone: Click the Tools menu and select the ModelBuilder command.
In ArcMap: Click the Bentley StormCAD V8i menu, click the Tools menu, then select the ModelBuilder command.
The ModelBuilder Connections manager allows you to create, edit, and manage ModelBuilder connections to be used
in the model-building/model-synchronizing process.
At the center of this window is the Connections List which displays the list of connections that you have defined.
There is a toolbar located along the top of the Connections list.
The set of buttons on the left of the toolbar allow you to manage your connections:
New
Edit
Rename
Duplicate
Delete
The button on the right of the toolbar allows you to either build or synchronize a model. Click the menu arrow
associated with this button to access the following options:
Build New Model--Starts the ModelBuilder build process using the selected connection. You will be prompted to
interactively specify a new filename.
Synchronize Existing Model--Starts the ModelBuilder synchronize process using the selected connection. You will
be prompted to interactively specify an existing Bentley StormCAD V8i model filename.
Note: If you set up a ModelBuilder mapping to an Access mdb, it requires a primary key for that table.
After specifying your target, ModelBuilder will perform the selected operation. During the process, a progress-bar will
be displayed indicating the step that ModelBuilder is currently working on.
119
ModelBuilder Wizard
The ModelBuilder Wizard assists in the creation of ModelBuilder connections. The Wizard will guide you through the
process of selecting your data source and mapping that data to the desired input of your model.
The ModelBuilder Wizard can be resized, making it easier to preview tables in your data source. In addition, Step 1 and
Step 3 of the wizard offer a vertical split bar, letting you adjust the size of the list located on the left side of these pages.
There are 6 steps involved; click the links below for more information.
120
Data Source type (drop-down list)This field allows you to specify the type of data you would like to work with. If
your specific data source type is not listed in the Data Source type field, try using the OLE DB data source type.
OLE DB can be used to access many database systems (including ORACLE, and SQL Server, to name a few).
Data Source (text field)This read-only field displays the path to your data source.
Browse (button)This button opens a browse dialog box that allows you to interactively select your data source.
Some Data Source types expect you to choose more than one item in the Browse dialog box. For more information,
see Multi-select Data Source Types-190.
Table/Feature Class (list)This pane is located along the left side of the form and lists the tables/feature classes
that are contained within the data source. Use the check boxes (along the left side of the list) to specify the tables
you would like to include.
The list can be resized using the split bar (located on the right side of the list). Right-click to Select All or Clear the
current selection in the list.
Duplicate Table (button)
The duplicate table button is located along the top of the Table/Feature Class list. This button allows you to make
copies of a table, which can each be mapped to a different element type in your model. Use this in conjunction with
the WHERE clause.
Remove Table (button)
121
The remove table button can be used to remove a table from the list.
WHERE Clause (field)Allows you to create a SQL query to filter the tables. When the box is checked, only tables
that meet the criteria specified by the WHERE clause will be displayed. Click the
Note: If both nodes and pipes are imported in the same ModelBuilder connection, nodes will be imported first
regardless of the order they are listed here.
Note: When running within Bentley Map, a new entry will appear in the ModelBuilder Datasource combobox
called "Bentley Map". Select that to import and export any available data sets that live in the currently open
Bentley Map file.
122
Specify the Coordinate Unit of your data source (drop-down list)This field allows you to specify the coordinate
unit of the spatial data in your data source. The default unit is the unit used for coordinates.
Create nodes if none found at pipe endpoint (check box)When this box is checked, ModelBuilder will create a
pressure junction at any pipe endpoint that: a) doesnt have a connected node, and b) is not within the specified
tolerance of an existing node. This field is only active when the Establish connectivity using spatial data box is
checked. (This option is not available if the connection is bringing in only point type geometric data.)
ModelBuilder will not create pipes unless a valid start/stop node exists. Choose this option if you know that there
are nodes missing from your source data. If you expect your data to be complete, then leave this option off and if
this situation is detected ModelBuilder will report errors for your review. For more information see Specifying
Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder (on page 134).
Establish connectivity using spatial data (check box)When this box is checked, ModelBuilder will connect pipes
to nodes that fall within a specified tolerance of a pipe endpoint. (This option is available if the connection is
bringing in only polyline type geometric data.) Use this option, when the data source does not explicitly name the
nodes at the end of each pipe. For more information, see Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder (on
page 134).
Tolerance (numeric field)This field dictates how close a node must be to a pipe endpoint in order for connectivity
to be established. The Tolerance field is only available when the Establish connectivity using spatial data box is
checked. (This option is available if the connection is bringing in only polyline type geometric data.) Tolerances
should be set as low as possible so that unintended connections are not made. If you are not sure what tolerance to
use, try doing some test runs. Use the Network Review queries to evaluate the success of each trial import. Pipes
will be connected to the closest node within the specified tolerance.
The unit associated with the tolerance is dictated by the Specify the Coordinate Unit of your data source field. For
more information, see Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder (on page 134).
123
How would you like to handle synchronization between source and destination?:
Add objects to destination if present in source (check box)-When this box is checked, ModelBuilder will
automatically add new elements to the model for "new" records in the data source when synching in (or vice-versa
when synching out).
This is checked by default since a user generally wants to add elements to the model (especially if this is the initial
run of ModelBuilder). This should be unchecked if new elements have been added to the source file since the model
was created but the user does not want them in the model (e.g. proposed piping).
Remove objects from destination if missing from source (check box)-When this box is checked, ModelBuilder will
delete elements from the model if they do not exist in the data source when synching in (or vice-versa when
synching out). This option can be useful if you are importing a subset of elements.
This is used if abandoned pipes have been deleted from the source file and the user wants them to automatically be
removed from the model by ModelBuilder.
Update existing objects in destination if present in source (check box) - If checked, this option allows you to control
whether or not properties and geometry of existing model elements will be updated when synching in (or vice-versa
when synching out). Turning this option off can be useful if you want to synchronize newly added or removed
elements, while leaving existing elements untouched.
If an imported object refers to another object that does not yet exist in the model, should ModelBuilder:
Create referenced element automatically? (check box)-When this box is checked, ModelBuilder will create any
domain and/or support elements that are referenced during the import process.
Note: These options listed above apply to domain elements (pipes and nodes) as well as support elements (such
as Zones or Controls).
124
How would you like to import incoming data? (drop-down list) - This refers to the scenario (and associated
alternatives) into which the data will be imported. The user can import the data into the Current Scenario or a new
child scenario. If the latter is selected, a new child scenario (and child alternatives) will be created for any data
difference between the source and the active scenario. If there is no data change for a particular alternative, no child
alternative will be created in that case.
New scenario and alternatives will be automatically labeled "Created by ModelBuilder" followed by the date and
time when they were created.
Specify key field used during object mapping (drop-down list) - The key field represents the field in the model and
data source that contains the unique identifier for associating domain elements in your model to records in your data
source. Refer to the "Key Field (Model)" topic in the next section for additional guidance on how this setting applies
to ModelBuilder. ModelBuilder provides three choices for Key Field:
The following options only apply when using the advanced GIS-IDs key field option.
If several elements share the same GIS-IDs, then apply updates to all of them? (check box) - When using the GISIDs option, ModelBuilder allows you to maintain one-to-many, and many-to-one relationships between records in
your GIS and elements in your Model.
For example, you may have a single pipe in your GIS that you want to maintain as multiple elements in your Model
because you have split that pipe into two pipes elements in the model. You may accomplish this using the native
Bentley SewerCAD layout tools to split the pipe with a node; the newly created pipe segment will be assigned the
same GIS-IDs as the original pipe (establishing a one-to-many relationship). By using this option, when you later
synchronize from the GIS into your model, any data changes to the single pipe record in your GIS can be cascaded
to both pipes elements in your model (e.g. so a diameter change to a single record in the GIS would be reflected in
both elements in the model).
125
How would you like to handle add/removes of elements with GIS-IDs mappings on subsequent imports? - These
options are useful for keeping your GIS and Model synchronized, while maintaining established differences.
Note: This setting only applies if the "Remove objects from destination if missing from source" option is checked.
When you do make connectivity changes to your model, it is often beneficial to make those same changes to the GIS.
However, this is not always possible; and in some cases is not desirable -- given the fact that Modeling often has highly
specialized needs that may not be met by a general purpose GIS.
Tables (list)-This pane, located along the left side of the dialog box, lists the data source Tables/Feature Classes to
be used in the ModelBuilder process. Select an item in the list to specify the settings for that item. The tables list
can be resized using the splitter bar.
There are two toolbar buttons located directly above Tables list (these buttons can be a great time saver when setting
up multiple mappings with similar settings).
Settings Tab-The Settings tab allows you to specify mappings for the selected item in the Tables list.
The top section of the Settings tab allows you to specify the common data mappings:
Element Types-This category of Table Type includes geometric elements represented in the drawing view such as
conduits, catch basins, manholes, etc.
Components-This category of Table Type includes the supporting data items in your model that are potentially
shared among elements such as patterns, pump definitions, and controls.
126
Collections-This category of Table Type includes table types that are typically lists of 2-columned data. For
instance, if one table in your connection consists of a list of (Time From Start, Multiplier) pairs, use a Pattern
collection table type selection.
Key Field (Data Source) (drop-down list)-Choose the field in your data source that contains the unique identifier for
each record. If you plan to maintain synchronizations between your model and GIS, it is best to define a unique
identifier in your data source for this purpose. Using an identifier that is unique across all tables is critical if you
wish to maintain explicit pipe start/stop connectivity identifiers in your GIS.
When working with ArcGIS data sources, OBJECTID is not a good choice for Key field (because OBJECTID is
only unique for a particular Feature Class). For one-time model builds -- if you do not have a field that can be used
to uniquely identify each element -- you may use the <label> field (which is automatically generated by
ModelBuilder for this purpose).
Key Field (Model) (drop-down-list) - This field is only enabled if you specified <custom> in the "Specify key field
to be used in object mapping?" option in the previous step. If you specified "GIS-IDs' or "Label" the field will be
disabled.
If you specified <custom>, then you will be presented with a list of the available text fields for that element type.
Choose a field that represents the unique alphanumeric identifier for each element in your model. You can define a
text User Data Extensions property for use as your <custom> model key field.
The <custom> key field list is limited to read-write text fields. This is because during import, the value of this field
will be assigned as new elements in your model are created. Therefore, the models internal (read-only) element ID
field cannot be used for this purpose.
Start/Stop - Select the fields in a pipe table that contain the identifier of the start and stop nodes. Specify <none> if
you are using the spatial connectivity support in ModelBuilder (or if you want to keep connectivity unchanged on
update). For more information, see Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder. When working with an
ArcGIS Geometric Network data source, these fields will be set to <auto> (indicating that ModelBuilder will
automatically determine connectivity from the geometric network).
X/Y Field - These fields are used to specify the node X and Y coordinate data. This field only applies to point table
types. The Coordinate Unit setting in Step 2 of the wizard allows you to specify the units associated with these
fields.
When working with ArcGIS Geodatabase, shape file and CAD data sources, these fields will be set to <auto>
(indicating that ModelBuilder will automatically determine node geometry from the data source).
Suction Element (drop-down list)-For tables that define pump data, select a pipe label or other unique identifier to
set the suction element of the Pump.
Downstream Edge (drop-down list)-For tables that define pump or valve data, select a pipe label or other unique
identifier to set the direction of the pump or valve.
Field - Field refers to a field in the selected data source. The Field list displays the associations between fields in the
database to properties in the model.
Property (drop-down list)-Property refers to a Bentley Bentley SewerCAD property. Use the Property drop-down
list to map the highlighted field to the desired property.
Unit (drop-down list)-This field allows you to specify the units of the values in the database (no conversion on your
part is required). This field only applies if the selected model property is unitized.
Preview Tab-The Preview tab displays a tabular preview of the currently highlighted source data table when the
Show Preview check box is checked.
127
To build a new model, click the Yes radio button under Would you like to build the model now?.
If you choose No, you will be returned to the ModelBuilder Manager dialog. The connection you defined will appear in
the list pane. To build the model from the ModelBuilder Manager, highlight the connection and click the Build Model
button.
Create Selection Set options: Often a user wants to view the elements that have been affected by a ModelBuilder
operation. To do this, ModelBuilder can create selection sets which the user can view and use within the application.
To create a selection set containing the elements added during the ModelBuilder, check the box next to "Create
selection set with elements added".
To create a selection set containing the elements for which the properties or geometry were modified during the
ModelBuilder, check the box next to "Create selection set with elements modified."
Note: Selection sets created as a result of these options will include the word "ModelBuilder" in their name,
along with the date and time (e.g. "Elements added via ModelBuilder - mm/dd/yyyy hh:mm:ss am/pm").
128
GIS-IDs
All domain elements in StormCAD V8i have an editable GIS-IDs property which can be used for maintaining
associations between records in your source file and elements in your model. These associations can be one-to-one,
one-to-many, or many-to-one.
ModelBuilder can take advantage of this GIS-IDs property, and has advanced logic for keeping your model and GIS
source file synchronized across the various model to GIS associations.
The GIS-IDs is a unique field in the source file which the user selects when ModelBuilder is being set up. In contrast to
using Label (which is adequate if model building is a one time operation) as the key field between the model and the
source file, a GIS-IDs has some special properties which are very helpful in maintaining long term updating of the
model as the data source evolves over time.
In addition, StormCAD V8i will intelligently maintain GIS-IDs as you use the various tools to manipulate elements
(Delete, Morph, Split, Merge Nodes in Close Proximity).
When an element with one or more GIS-IDss is deleted, ModelBuilder will not recreate it the next time a
synchronization from your GIS occurs if the "Recreate elements associated with a GIS-IDs that was previously
deleted from the model" option is left unchecked.
When an element with one or more GIS-IDss is morphed, the new element will preserve those GIS-IDss. The
original element will be considered as "deleted with GIS-IDss", which means that it will not be recreated by default
(see above).
When a link is split, the two links will preserve the same GIS-IDss the original pipe had. On subsequent
ModelBuilder synchronizations, any data-change occurring for the associated record in the GIS can be cascaded
into all the split link segments (see Step 4--Additional Options (on page 125)).
When nodes in close proximity are merged, the resulting node will preserve the GIS-IDss of all the nodes that were
removed. On subsequent ModelBuilder synchronizations into the model, if there are data-update conflicts between
the records in the GIS associated with the merged node in the model, updates from the first GIS-IDs listed for the
merged node will be preserved in the model. Note that in this case, the geometry of the merged node can't be
updated in the model. For synchronizations going from the model to the GIS, data-updates affecting merged-nodes
can be cascaded into all the associated records in the GIS (see Step 4--Additional Options (on page 125)).
To support these relationship (specifically one to many), GIS-IDs are managed as a collection property (capable of
holding any number of GIS identifiers).
A variety of model element(s) to GIS record(s) associations can be specified:
If the GIS-IDs collection is empty, there is no association between the GIS and this element.
If there is a single entry, this element is associated with one record in the GIS.
If there are multiple entries, this element is associated with multiple records in the GIS.
More than one element in the model can have the same GIS-IDs, meaning multiple records on the model are
associated with a single record in the GIS.
Note: You can also manually edit the GIS-IDs property to review or modify the element to GIS association(s).
129
This dialog box allows you to assign one or more GIS-IDs to the currently selected element.
130
Warnings
Warning messages include:
1. Some rows were ignored due to missing key-field values. - ModelBuilder encountered missing data (e.g., null or
blank) in the specified Key/Label field for rows in your data source table. Without a key, ModelBuilder is unable to
associate this source row with a target element, and must skip these items. This can commonly occur when using a
spreadsheet data source. To determine where and how often this error occurred, check the Statistics page for the
message <x> row(s) ignored due to missing key-field values.
2. Unable to create pipe <element>; start and/or stop node could not be found. - Pipes can only be created if its start
and stop nodes can be established. If you are using Explicit connectivity, a node element with the referenced start or
stop label could not be found. If you are using implicit connectivity, a node element could not be located within the
specified tolerance. For more information, see Specifying Network Connectivity in ModelBuilder-195.
3. Unable to update pipe <element> topology; (start or stop) node could not be found. - This error occurs when
synchronizing an existing model, and indicates that the pipe connectivity could not be updated. For more
information, see warning message #2 (above).
4. The downstream edge for <element> could not be found. - ModelBuilder was unable to set a Pump direction
because a pipe with the referenced label could not be found.
5. Directed Node <element> direction is ambiguous.
6. ModelBuilder was unable to set the direction of the referenced pump or valve because direction could not be
implied based on the adjacent pipes (e.g. there should be one incoming and one outgoing pipe).
Error Messages
ModelBuilder was built using ArcObjects, and supports the following Esri ArcGIS Geodatabase functionality. See your
ArcGIS documentation for more information about ArcObjects. For more information, see:
131
Geodatabase Features
ModelBuilder provides direct support for working with Geodatabase features. A feature class is much like a shapefile,
but with added functionality (such as subtypes).
The geodatabase stores objects. These objects may represent nonspatial real-world entities, such as manufacturers, or
they may represent spatial objects, such as pipes in a network. Objects in the geodatabase are stored in feature classes
(spatial) and tables (nonspatial).
The objects stored in a feature class or table can be organized into subtypes and may have a set of validation rules
associated with them. The ArcInfo system uses these validation rules to help you maintain a geodatabase that
contains valid objects.
Tables and feature classes store objects of the same typethat is, objects that have the same behavior and attributes.
For example, a feature class called WaterMains may store pressurized water mains. All water mains have the same
behavior and have the attributes ReferenceID, Depth, Material, GroundSurfaceType, Size, and PressureRating.
Geometric Networks
ModelBuilder has support for Geometric Networks, and a new network element type known as Complex Edge. When
you specify a Geometric Network data source, ModelBuilder automatically determines the feature classes that make up
the network. In addition, ModelBuilder can automatically establish model connectivity based on information in the
Geometric Network.
132
Subtypes
Shapefiles can be converted into Geodatabase Feature Classes if you would like to make use of Subtypes. See your
ArcGIS documentation for more information.
If multiple types of Bentley SewerCAD elements have their data stored in a single geodatabase table, then each element
must be a separate ArcGIS subtype. For example, in a valve table PRVs may be subtype 1, PSVs may be subtype 2,
FCVs may be subtype 3, and so on. With subtypes, it is not necessary to follow the rule that each GIS/database feature
type must be associated with a single type of GEMS model element. Note that the subtype field must be of the integer
type (e.g., 1, 2) and not an alphanumeric field (e.g., PRV). For more information about subtypes, see ArcGIS Help.
ModelBuilder has built in support for subtypes. After selecting your data source, feature classes will automatically be
categorized by subtype. This gives you the ability to assign mappings at the subtype level. For example, ModelBuilder
allows you to exclude a particular subtype within a feature class, or associate each subtype with a different element
type.
Explicit connectivitybased on pipe Start node and Stop node (see Step 4Additional Options (on page 125)).
Implicit connectivitybased on spatial data. When using implicit connectivity, ModelBuilder allows you to specify
a Tolerance, and provides a second option allowing you to Create nodes if none found (see Step 2Specify Spatial
Options (on page 122)).
The method that you use will vary depending on the quality of your data. The possible situations include (in order from
best case to worst case):
You have pipe start and stop informationExplicit connectivity is definitely the preferred option.
You have some start and stop informationUse a combination of explicit and implicit connectivity (use the Spatial
Data option, and specify pipe Start/Stop fields). If the start or stop data is missing (blank) for a particular pipe,
ModelBuilder will then attempt to use spatial data to establish connectivity.
You do not have start and stop informationImplicit connectivity is your only option. If your spatial data is good,
then you should reduce your Tolerance accordingly.
You do not have start and stop information, and you do not have any node data (e.g., you have GIS data that defines
your pipes, but you do not have data for nodes)Use implicit connectivity and specify the Create nodes if none
found option; otherwise, the pipes cannot be created.
Note: If pipes do not have explicit Start/Stop nodes and Establish connectivity using spatial data is not
checked, the pipes will not be connected to the nodes and a valid model will not be produced.
Other considerations include what happens when the coordinates of the pipe ends do not match up with the node
coordinates. This problem can be one of a few different varieties:
1. Both nodes and pipe ends have coordinates, and pipes have explicit Start/Stop nodes. In this case, the node
coordinates are used, and the pipe ends are moved to connect with the nodes.
2. Nodes have coordinates but pipes do not have explicit Start/Stop nodesThe nodes will be created, and the
specified tolerance will be used to connect pipe ends within this tolerance to the appropriate nodes. If a pipe end
133
Explicit connectivity--based on pipe Start node and Stop node (see Step 4--Additional Options (on page 125)).
Implicit connectivity--based on spatial data. When using implicit connectivity, ModelBuilder allows you to specify
a Tolerance, and provides a second option allowing you to Create nodes if none found (see Step 2--Specify Spatial
Options (on page 122)).
The method that you use will vary depending on the quality of your data. The possible situations include (in order from
best case to worst case):
You have pipe start and stop information--Explicit connectivity is definitely the preferred option.
You have some start and stop information--Use a combination of explicit and implicit connectivity (use the Spatial
Data option, and specify pipe Start/Stop fields). If the start or stop data is missing (blank) for a particular pipe,
ModelBuilder will then attempt to use spatial data to establish connectivity.
You do not have start and stop information--Implicit connectivity is your only option. If your spatial data is good,
then you should reduce your Tolerance accordingly.
You do not have start and stop information, and you do not have any node data (e.g., you have GIS data that defines
your pipes, but you do not have data for nodes)--Use implicit connectivity and specify the Create nodes if none
found option; otherwise, the pipes cannot be created.
Note: If pipes do not have explicit Start/Stop nodes and Establish connectivity using spatial data is not
checked, the pipes will not be connected to the nodes and a valid model will not be produced.
Other considerations include what happens when the coordinates of the pipe ends do not match up with the node
coordinates. This problem can be one of a few different varieties:
1. Both nodes and pipe ends have coordinates, and pipes have explicit Start/Stop nodes--In this case, the node
coordinates are used, and the pipe ends are moved to connect with the nodes.
2. Nodes have coordinates but pipes do not have explicit Start/Stop nodes--The nodes will be created, and the
specified tolerance will be used to connect pipe ends within this tolerance to the appropriate nodes. If a pipe end
does not fall within any nodes specified tolerance, a new node can be created using the Create nodes if none found
option.
3. Pipe ends have coordinates but there are no junctions--New nodes must be created using the Create nodes if none
found option. Pipe ends are then connected using the tolerance that is specified.
Another situation of interest occurs when two pipes cross but arent connected. If, at the point where the pipes cross,
there are no pipe ends or nodes within the specified tolerance, then the pipes will not be connected in the model. If you
intend for the pipes to connect, then pipe ends or junctions must exist within the specified tolerance.
134
Roughness_C
Diam_in
Length_ft
Material_ID
Subtype
P-1
120
120
P-2
110
75
P-3
130
356
P-4
100
10
729
The table above is superior to the table below in that it clearly identifies the units that are used for unitized attribute
values, such as length and diameter. Unless you are very familiar with your data source, unspecified units can lead to
errors and confusion.
P-1
120
120
PVC
Phase2
P-2
110
66
75
DuctIron
Lateral
P-3
130
356
PVC
Phase1
P-4
100
83
729
DuctIron
Main
P-5
100
1029
DuctIron
Main
In the table above, no column labels have been specified. ModelBuilder will interpret the first row of data in the table
as the column labels, which can make the attribute mapping step of the ModelBuilder Wizard more difficult unless you
are very familiar with your data source setup.
The table above is also storing the Material and Subtype attributes as alphanumeric values, while ModelBuilder uses
integer ID values to access this input. This data is unusable by ModelBuilder in alphanumeric format, and must be
translated to an integer ID system in order to read this data
135
Multiplier
Order
Normal
1.2
.8
Normal
1.7
.7
Normal
12
.2
Normal
17
.5
High
1.0
High
19
.85
High
12
.65
This would assign 4 entries to the 'Normal' pattern, and 3 entries to the 'High' pattern. The Order field is optional, and is
discussed below. The same approach applies to nodes, for such things as a variable area tank curve, or junction
demands. In these cases, the label field would contain the name of the node that collection entries are being added into.
ModelBuilder also includes an advanced feature to allow precise ordering of the collection records. For some
collections, the order of the records does not matter and this feature isn't needed. For other cases, order of the records is
meaningful. For these types of collections, there is a Sort By Field in the ModelBuilder mapping form. By default, it
uses the record order as the records exist in the external data source. If the records are not ordered correctly in the data
source, then the external table must have an additional field that contains numeric values. These values will represent
the order that the records should be imported. So for the above example data, normally the records would be imported
in the order entered (5, 19, then 12 for the High pattern). However the user can set the Sort By Field in the
ModelBuilder form to use the 'Order' external field, and this will import the records based on either Ascending 'Order'
values (5, 12, 19) or Descending 'Order' values (19, 12, 5).
136
On the mapping form in ModelBuilder, there is a Generator (Sync out) combo-box. The user only needs to select a
sequence generator in this box if they plan to sync out to Oracle and have ModelBuilder create new records in Oracle.
The Oracle sequence generator is an object that is created in Oracle by the administrator. It allows Oracle to create
records with unique Oracle identifiers, which is may be required when creating new records. ModelBuilder will display
the available sequence generators that are available for use.
137
138
139
140
141
Link Elements
Link elements connect the other elements to form the sewer network. The link elements are the conveyance elements
that carry flow through the network to its eventual discharge point at an outlet. You can add any of the following link
elements to your model, depending on the link elements location within the network:
Pressure pipes
Conduits
Laterals
Channels
Gutters
When you click the Layout tool on the Layout toolbar, you select the type of link element to add (pressure pipe,
conduit, channel, lateral, or gutter), then select an element. You can place multiple elements with different kinds of
connections using the Layout tool.
Related Topics
142
143
New
Delete
Rename
Duplicate
Expand All
Collapse All
Report
Depending on the type of control structure you select, the Conduit Control Structure dialog box contains the following
controls:
Functional
Has Flap Gate?
Crest Elevation
Depth or Head?
Coefficient
Exponent
Orifice
Crest Elevation
144
Orifice Coefficient
Time to Open/Close
Orifice Type
Orifice Shape
Orifice Diameter
Orifice Height
Orifice Width
Depth-Flow Curve
Has Flap Gate?
Depth or Head?
Depth-Flow Curve
Set the depth and flow values that define the depth-flow
curve. The depth-flow curve consists of a table of the
depth and pairs that define the depth-flow curve. Depth in
this case refers to the water depth above the invert on the
upstream side of the control structure and flow is the flow
through/over the control structure.
New
Delete
Click this button to remove selected rows from the depthflow table. You can only remove one row at a time, if you
have selected more than one row, only the last row you
selected is removed
Graph
Weir
145
Side Slope
Weir Coefficient
Weir Type
Number of Contractions
Weir Length
Weir Angle
SWMM Label
146
Note: The implicit solver may not be able to handle a structure when its crest elevation is higher than the pipes'
crown elevation.
A note on the V-Notch weir coefficient with SWMM:
In Bentley SewerCAD the weir coefficient (Cv) is Unitless and has a typical value around 0.58. However, in SWMM
the v-notch weir coefficient (C) is unitized. In order to account for this the unitless value is converted to the unitized
value upon export using the following equation.
C = (8/15)*Sqrt(2*g) * Cv
Alternativly, on import from SWMM C is converted to Cv:
Cv = (15/8) * C/(Sqrt(2*g))
Delete
Report
Help
147
Description
Depth
Flow
Delete
148
Report
Description
Quantity
Minor Loss
Headloss Coefficient
Delete
149
Define the cross-sectional shape of a conduit section by entering data in the Physical section of the elements
Property Editor.
Define the cross-sectional shape of an irregular conduit section by entering Station vs. Depth data in the StationDepth Curve dialog box.
Define the cross-sectional shape of an irregular channel or gutter section by entering Station vs. Elevation data in
the Station-Elevation Curve dialog box.
Define the cross-sectional shape of a trapezoidal channel or gutter section by entering data in the Physical section of
the elements Property Editor.
Define the circular shape of a pressure pipe by entering data in the Physical section of the elements Property
Editor.
You access the curve dialog boxes in the selected link elements Property Editor.
Note: Although you can have complex channels, the algorithm does not support split flows or bridges. If you split
the channel within the cross section, a constant water surface across the cross section is assumed.
When the elevation of the water surface exceeds the highest elevation in the table, the last two unsubmerged points are
linearly extrapolated to create a new, wider channel.
To define the cross-sectional shape of a link element:
1. Display the Property Editor for the link element:
2. For a conduit, gutter, or pressure pipe, click the link element in your model, or right-click the link element and
select Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. For a conduit or a gutter, click the link element in your model, or right-click the link element and select Properties
from the shortcut menu.
4. For a channel, click the connecting cross-section node in your model, or right-click the channel and select Properties
from the shortcut menu.
5. In the Physical section of the Property Editor for the selected link element, define the cross-section of the selected
link element as follows:
6. For a cross-section (channel link element) or a gutter, select either Trapezoidal Channel or Irregular Channel as the
Section Type. For trapezoidal channels, enter data in the appropriate fields. If you select Irregular Channel, the
Station-Elevation Curve field becomes available. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the Station-Elevation Curve
field to display the Station-Elevation Curve dialog box, then type values for station and elevation in the table.
7. For a conduit, select a section type, then enter data in the appropriate fields. If you select Irregular Channel as the
Section Type, the Station-Depth Curve field becomes available. Click the Ellipses (...) button next to the StationDepth Curve field to display the Station-Depth Curve dialog box, then type values for station and depth in the table.
8. For a pressure pipe, which always has a circular section shape, enter data in the appropriate fields.
Station-Elevation Curve/Depth Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to enter Station vs. Elevation data for the cross-sectional shape of a cross-section or a gutter
element, or Station vs. Depth data for the cross-sectional shape of a conduit.
The dialog box contains the station vs. elevation table along with the following controls:
New
150
Delete
Report
Graph
Description
Station
Elevation/Depth
Delete
Report
151
Graph
Description
Depth
This field allows you to define the C value for the current
curve point.
Delete
Report
Graph
Description
Elevation (Relative)
Width
152
Delete
Report
Help
Description
Station
Elevation (Relative)
Delete
Description
153
Description
Depth
Mannings n
Interpolate
154
Section Distance
Section Velocity
Section Flow
Section Hydraulic Grade
Section Depth
Section Flow-Width
Section Flow-Area
Section Is Overflowing?
Section Froude Number
To open this dialog box, go to the Results section of the Property Editor for a pipe, conduit, or a channel after the model
has been calculated. Then click the Ellipsis (...) button in the Section Results field.
To find flow results for more than 3 points in a conduit, under Analysis -> Calculation Options, choose an appropriate
computational distance (that divides the conduit in more than 2 sections).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
155
What Happens When the Water Level Exceeds the Top Elevation of an Open Channel?
When the hydraulic grade line (HGL) exceeds the channel top elevation, the last width defined for the channel (or the
cross section node) is extended vertically to no limit. So there is no overflow for these. When the channel is bounded by
a manhole, overflow occurs at the manhole.
Laterals
Laterals are pipes which are connected to a catchbasin at their upstream end, and either a node or another conduit at
their downstream end. When connected to a conduit (which is done through a Tap node) the crucial aspect is that
they do not break that conduit into two separate pieces.
There could be a number of lateral connections to a single trunk conduit. The flows from each lateral are assumed to
enter the network at the upstream end of the trunk conduit in the GVF Rational and GVF Convex solvers, and at the
Tap node in the SWMM solver. They are not supported in the DW solver.
The converted conduit has the same diameter as the pressure pipe.
Pressure pipe roughness is converted to an equivalent conduit roughness value based on the pressure friction
method and gravity friction method as follows:
Manning's n = 1.3/C, where C is Hazen Williams C
Manning's n = 0.0952/(|ln(e/7.4 + 0.000182)|), where e is Darcy Weisbach e
Manning's n = Kutter's n
Virtual pipes are treated as physical pipes, using the original data.
Number of Barrels is set to 1.
Design Conduit is set to False.
Pressure junctions are treated as manholes with the following rules applied to the converted manhole:
156
Roughness Type: If the Roughness Type is a value of Manning's n - Depth Curve or Manning's n -Flow Curve.
Transition Type: If the Transition Type is Gradual and the Transition Length is greater than zero.
157
Click New to create a new Hydrograph Time vs. Flow point for the hydrograph.
Click Delete to remove the currentlty selected row.
Click Report to open a print preview window containing a report that details the input data for this dialog box.
Click Graph to generate a graph of the hydrograph.
Catch Basins
158
Catch basins convey surface water into a storm sewer pipe system. A catch basin (a.k.a., storm drain inlet, curb inlet) is
an inlet to the storm drain system that typically includes a grate or curb inlet where stormwater enters the catch basin
and a sump to capture sediment, debris and associated pollutants. They are also used in combined sewer watersheds to
capture floatables and settle some solids.
When you click the catch basin element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes into a catch basin element
symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active causes a catch basin element to be placed at the location
of the mouse cursor.
CivilStorm V8i now supports HEC-22 inlet capacity calculations. You can set up inlets (grate, combination, curb
opening, etc.) and CivilStorm V8i will compute inlet capacity based on flow to the inlet, as well as inlet and gutter
geometry.
Related Topics
Adding Inflow vs. Capture Data to a Catch Basin (on page 160)
Inlet Type (on page 159)
Adding Surface Depth vs. Area Data to a Catch Basin or a Manhole (on page 163)
Catch Basin Attributes (on page 1063)
Inlet Type
The inflow to a catch basin does not all enter the basin. The flow that actually enters the basin is referred to as its
capture.
A catch basin may:
Capture all the flow that comes to it, which is referred to as full capture.
Capture all of the flow up to a maximum capacity, and you specify the maximum flow.
Capture flow in accordance with some curve called an inflow vs. capture curve. For more information on inflow vs.
capture curves, see Adding Inflow vs. Capture Data to a Catch Basin (on page 160).
When Inlet Type is set to Catalog Inlet, with the Inlet attribute you can select a Catalog Inlet reference. By
referencing a catalog inlet, the capture is computed instead of defined by the user. For more information on Catalog
Inlets see Inlet Catalog Dialog Box (on page 293).
Capture a percentage of flow that comes to it, which is referred to as "percent capture.
Any inflow that is not captured goes to a gutter. If there is no gutter, the inflow that is not captured is lost from the
system.
159
Delete
Report
Graph
Description
160
Description
Inlet Capture
Lets you define the total captured flow for the current
curve point. Inlet capture is the portion of the total inlet
flow that actually enters the catch basin and is passed
downstream.
161
For example, in the following system with two catch basins. CB-1 has an applied sanitary load, whereas CB-2 does
are applied.
Dynamic Wave (Implicit) Solver
The Dynamic Wave (Implicit) solver treats the dry weather flow (sanitary load) the same for all type of sanitary loads;
it creates a separate inflow for the load and the solver knows that the inflow is a dry weather flow (a new inflow type is
added in the input file).
For the calculation, the solver will not include the dry weather flow when calculating the inlet capture/bypass flows, so
the dry weather flow is always added to the pipe system and there is no bypass flow for them.
All other calculations are unaffected.
Manholes
Manholes are placed in a sewer system to provide access for inspection, maintenance, and emergency service.
Manholes should be placed at sewer junctions (i.e., tees, wyes, and crosses), upstream terminal ends of sewers, and
162
Manhole Attributes-276
What is the Difference Between a Drop Manhole and a Regular Manhole?-575
Delete
Report
Graph
163
Description
Depth
Area
Flow: This field allows you to define the flow at the current curve point.
Headloss: This field allows you to define the headloss for the current curve point.
The tab section is used to define the settings for the flow-headloss curve that is currently highlighted in the flowheadloss curve list pane. The following controls are available:
Data Tab
Flow
Headloss
164
Library Tab
Notes Tab
Taps
A Tap node is used to connect a lateral pipe to another conduit. It controls the location of the connection, and the stop
invert elevation of the lateral pipe. Unlike most other types of node, when it is placed it does not break the conduit into
two separate pieces, so it is the same as a bend in that respect. A tap can either be inserted into the conduit, and will
therefore be along its path, or associated to the trunk conduit, and therefore be at an offset from it.
165
Cross Sections
When you click the cross section element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes into a cross section
element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active causes a cross section element to be placed at the
location of the mouse cursor.
You can model an open channel with the combination of a channel link and a cross section network element. The
transect of the channel is defined by the upstream cross section node attributes. You have the option to define the
channel shape as User Defined or using a Conduit Catalog reference. The user defined 'Section Types' are Trapezoidal
Cross Section and Irregular Channel. If the Cross Section Type is Catalog Cross Section, you may select a Conduit
Catalog reference that is a trapezoidal or irregular channel shape. The other catalog conduit shapes are not applicable to
cross section nodes.
Related Topics
Transitions
Transitions are locations where upstream flows in a gravity system combine. No loads enter the sewer at these points.
When you click the transition element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes into a transition element
symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active causes a transition element to be placed at the location of
the mouse cursor.
Pressure Junctions
166
Pressure junctions are connections between two or more pressure pipes of varying characteristics. Loads may enter a
pressure portion of a network through a pressure junction.
When you click the pressure junction on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes into a pressure junction
element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active causes a pressure junction element to be placed
at the location of the mouse cursor.
Related Topics
When you click the outlet structure element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes into a outlet structure
element symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active causes a outlet structure element to be placed at
the location of the mouse cursor.
Note: If there are multiple discharges locations serving a pond then they must all be modeled in the same
manner; that is, they must either all be modeled with outlet control structures, or all modeled without outlet
control structures.
The outlet control structure hydraulics normally result in relationships (as we expressed and internally used in the form
of E-Q-T), however in some unusual conditions, characterized by an extremely undersized downstream conduit from
the control, the use of EQT can result in instabilities for extreme flows (as compared with the downstream conduit
capacity). In order to prevent such instability from happening, the model adds a flow filter to limit the flow from the
control if the flow exceeds overflow level. The overflow level is:
Q(over) = 1.5 * Q(capacity) +0.5 (cfs)
If the Q given by EQT, Q(eqt), exceeds the overflow level, the model uses the following filtered new flow:
167
168
The dialog consists of a tree view pane and property editor on the left and a tabbed section on the right. The tree view
displays all of the outlet structure definitions associated with the project. The property editor allows you to define the
attributes of the element currently highlighted in the tree view. Above the tree view are the following buttons:
Delete: Removes the entry that is currently highlighted in the list pane
Rename: Allows you to enter a new label for the entry that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
Duplicate: Creates a copy of the entry that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
169
Expand All: Expands each of the nodes in the tree view, so that all entries are displayed.
Collapse All: Collapses each of the nodes so that only the top-level nodes are visible.
Report: Generates a preformatted report that details the data associated with the entry that is currently highlighted in
the list pane.
Compute: When you click this button a submenu opens. The submenu contains the following commands:
Validate: Click this button to perform a validation on the entry that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
Compute: Click this button to compute the entry that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
ComputeAll: Click this button to compute all of the entries in the list pane.
Composite Structure Node (Top Level Node): When a top level node is highlighted in the tree view, the following
properties are available:
ID: Unique identifier assigned to this element.
Label: Descriptive label for this element.
Notes: Additional informkation about this element.
Headwater Type: The type of headwater range to use.
Pond: The pond to use for headwater range.
Note: The <Automatic> headwater/tailwater calculation only works if you access this dialog through the
Properties grid. If you access it from the components menu (where topology is not known and the range has
already been set by a previous calculation) the standard validation is executed.
The headwater and tailwater elements do not need to be user-defined to determine the ranges. If edited from the
Properties grid of the pond outlet structure node the ranges will automatically be determined ( in the same way as if you
computed the entire hydraulic model).
Minimum (Headwater): The minimum pond surface elevation to use in the headwater range.
170
Increment (Headwater): The step value represents the step increment for the rating table. As a general rule,
interpolation precision between table points increases as the step increment is decreased.
Maximum (Headwater): The maximum pond surface elevation to use in the headwater range.
Spot Elevations (Headwater): The spot elevations for the headwater range.
Tailwater Range Type: Select the type of tailwater range to specify. You can specify a user defined range or
automatically determine the range by selecting a pond or outfall.
Downstream Element ID: Specify the domain element in which to determine the tailwater range or leave it set to
Automatic and let the application figure it out automatically.
Minimum (Tailwater): The minimum tailwater elevation to use in the range.
Increment (Tailwater): Set the step used to compute the rating curve for the elevation beginning at the minimum
tailwater and increment by this tailwater step elevation until the maximum tailwater is reached. In general, smaller
tailwater step increments yield more precise routing interpolation.
Maximum (Tailwater): The maximum tailwater elevation to use in the range.
Spot Elevations (Tailwater): The spot elevations for the tailwater range.
Store Elevation-Flow-Tailwater Table: Determines if the elevation-flow-tailwater curves are stored. This option can
be used in conjunction with the Store Elevation-Flow-Tailwater Table? Calculation Option. See Store ElevationFlow-Tailwater Table (on page 176) for more details.
Elevation-Flow-Tailwater Table: The E-Q-TW table to save results to.
Maximum Iterations: During iterative tailwater convergence procedures, computations will stop after exceeding the
specified maximum iterations.
Headwater Tolerance (Minimum): If Bentley SewerCAD is checking computed headwater (HW) elevations during
the iterative HW convergence computations, minimum headwater tolerance and maximum headwater tolerance
values specify the minimum target convergence and the maximum allowable difference between the computed
value and the known headwater value.
Headwater Tolerance (Maximum): If Bentley SewerCAD is checking computed headwater (HW) elevations during
the iterative HW convergence computations, minimum headwater tolerance and maximum headwater tolerance
values specify the minimum target convergence and the maximum allowable difference between the computed
value and the known headwater value.
Tailwater Tolerance (Minimum): If Bentley SewerCAD is checking computed tailwater (TW) elevations during the
iterative TW convergence computations, minimum tailwater tolerance and maximum tailwater tolerance values
specify the minimum target convergence and the maximum allowable difference between the computed value and
the known tailwater value.
Tailwater Tolerance (Maximum): If Bentley SewerCAD is checking computed tailwater (TW) elevations during the
iterative TW convergence computations, minimum tailwater tolerance and maximum tailwater tolerance values
specify the minimum target convergence and the maximum allowable difference between the computed value and
the known tailwater value.
Flow Tolerance (Minimum): If Bentley SewerCAD is checking computed flow during the iterative TW
convergence computations, these tolerance values specify the minimum target convergence and the maximum
allowable difference between the computed value and the known flow value. Iterative computations on flow are
ended when either the solution converges within the minimum flow tolerance, or when more than the specified
maximum iterations are performed. In general, smaller flow tolerances yield more precise convergence.
Flow Tolerance (Maximum): If Bentley SewerCAD is checking computed flow during the iterative TW
convergence computations, these tolerance values specify the minimum target convergence and the maximum
allowable difference between the computed value and the known flow value. Iterative computations on flow are
ended when either the solution converges within the minimum flow tolerance, or when more than the specified
maximum iterations are performed. In general, smaller flow tolerances yield more precise convergence.
Orifice Attributes: When an Orifice is selected in the tree view the following attributes are available:
Elevation: Structures invert elevation.
Outlet ID: Upstream structure ID.
171
Where:
172
.
A typical value for the Weir Coefficient is 3.3 (ft0.5/s) or 1.8 (m0.5/s).
Orifice Coefficient: The orifice coefficient for this structure.
Orifice Area: The orifice area of this riser structure.
Transition Elevation: The transition elevation for this structure.
Transition Height: The transition height for this structure.
K Reverse: The K reverse coefficient for this structure.
Weir Length: The weir length of this riser structure.
Use Orifice Depth to Crest?: There are two methods available to calculate the headwater depth of a fully charged
riser orifice. The default method measures the headwater depth from the riser crest to the headwater elevation. The
other method measures the headwater depth from the tailwater elevation to the headwater elevation. To use the first
method, this value should be set to True (the default). To use the second method, set this property to False.
If the Use Orifice Depth to Crest property is set to True, then Head Across Orifice = Pond Elevation - Riser Crest
Elevation.
If the Use Orifice Depth to Crest property is set to False, then Head Across Orifice = Pond Elevation - Tailwater
Elevation.
Use Submerged Weir Equation?: There are two methods available to calculate a fully-charged riser weir flow: nonsubmerged weir and submerged weir. The non-submerged weir method is used when this property is set to False
(the default method). When this property is set to True, the submerged weir method is used.
If the Use Submerged Weir Equation? property is set to False, then:
Qw = Kwc * Lw * (Pond Elevation - riser crest)1.5
Where:
Qw = weir flow through the riser
Kwc = riser weir flow coefficient
Lw = riser weir length
If the Use Submerged Weir Equation? property is set to True, then
Qws = Qw * (1 - (H2/H1)1.5)0.385
Where:
Qw = weir flow through the riser
Qws = weir flow through riser (weir is submerged)
H1 = Pond Elevation - Riser Crest Elevation
H2 = Tailwater Elevation - Riser Crest Elevation
Culvert Attributes: When a Culvert is selected in the tree view the following attributes are available:
Culvert Type: The type of culvert.
Outlet ID: Upstream structure ID.
Flow Direction: Defines the direction in which flow is considered.
Downstream ID: Downstream Structure ID.
Notes: Additional information about this element.
Convergence Tolerance: Performance can be greatly increased by increasing the convergence tolerance. However,
since this parameter affects the calculation precision, the results should be checked to see if this assumption
produces results within an acceptable precision.
Specify Number of Backwater Sections: Specify to use a user defined number of backwater sections.
173
Number of Backwater Sections: Calculation performance can usually be greatly increased by setting the number of
backwater sections to three. Results should be checked to see if this assumption produces results with an acceptable
precision.
Inlet Description: The description of the culvert coefficients.
Chart: The inlet chart that this set of coefficients appears on.
Nomograph: The culvert nomograph this set of coefficients belongs to.
Equation Form: The type of equation form to use for this culvert.
K: K and M are equation coefficients used in both forms of the unsubmerged inlet control equation.
M: K and M are equation coefficients used in both forms of the unsubmerged inlet control equation.
C: C and Y are equation coefficients used in the submerged inlet control equation.
Y: C and Y are equation coefficients used in the submerged inlet control equation.
Mannings n: The Mannings n coefficient for this culvert.
Ke: The Ke coefficient.
Kr: The Kr coefficient.
Slope Correction Factor: The slope correction factor to use for this culvert.
Number of Barrels: The number of barrels for this culvert.
Length: The length of this culvert.
Upstream Invert: The upstream invert of the culvert.
Downstream Invert: The downstream invert of the culvert.
Diameter: The culvert diameter.
Width: The culvert width.
Height: The culvert height.
Elevation (On): Elevation (On) is the lower elevation of range over which to use this structure. No flows will be
computed for elevations less than this value. If 0.0 then this value is ignored.
Elevation (Off): Elevation (Off) is the upper elevation of range over which to use this structure. No flows will be
computed for elevations equal to or greater than this number. If 0.0 then this value is ignored.
Specify Transitions: Defines whether user defined transitions are used.
HW/D End Unsubmerged: The user defined HW end unsubmerged value.
HW/D Begin Submerged: The user defined HW begin submerged value.
Compute Outlet Control Only: Determines if inlet control only is considered during calculations.
Weir Attributes: When a Weir is selected in the tree view the following attributes are available:
Elevation: Structures invert elevation.
Outlet ID: Upstream structure ID.
Flow Direction: Defines the direction in which flow is considered.
Downstream ID: Downstream Structure ID.
Notes: Additional information about this element.
Weir: The type of weir for this structure.
Vary Coefficient with Depth: Determines if a depth-coefficient table is considered.
Weir Coefficient: The coefficient of discharge multiplied by other constants in the weir flow equation. For example,
flow over a rectangular weir with no end contractions can be determined using the following equation:
Where:
Q = discharge (cfs, m3/s)
174
Cd = coefficient of discharge
g = gravitational constant (32.2 ft/s2, 9.81 m/s2)
L = length of the weir crest (ft, m)
H = height of the energy grade above weir crest (ft, m)
In this case the Weir Coeffcient,
.
A typical value for the Weir Coefficient is 3.3 (ft0.5/s) or 1.8 (m0.5/s).
Weir-Depth Coefficient Table: The weir depth coefficient table to use for this weir structure.
Coefficient of Discharge: The ratio of actual discharge to theoretical discharge across a weir (the differences
between actual and theoretical values are generally due to contractions and energy losses). Note that the coefficient
of discharge is unitless and is different from a weir coefficient, and is typically on the order of 0.6. This property
is only available for V-Notch Weirs.
V-Notch Angle: The angle for this v-notch weir structure.
Elevation (On): Elevation (On) is the lower elevation of range over which to use this structure. No flows will be
computed for elevations less than this value. If 0.0 then this value is ignored.
Elevation (Off): Elevation (Off) is the upper elevation of range over which to use this structure. No flows will be
computed for elevations equal to or greater than this number. If 0.0 then this value is ignored.
User Defined Table: Determines if a weir submergence table is considered for this weir structure.
Weir Submergence Table: The weir submergence table to use with this weir structure.
Irregular Weir: The station-depth curve for this irregular weir section.
Rectangular Weir: The type of rectangular weir for this structure.
Weir Length: The weir length for this weir structure.
Rating Table Attributes: When a Rating Table is selected in the tree view the following attributes are available:
Elevation: Structures invert elevation.
Outlet ID: Upstream structure ID.
Flow Direction: Defines the direction in which flow is considered.
Downstream ID: Downstream Structure ID.
Notes: Additional information about this element.
Elevation (On): Elevation (On) is the lower elevation of range over which to use this structure. No flows will be
computed for elevations less than this value. If 0.0 then this value is ignored.
Elevation (Off): Elevation (Off) is the upper elevation of range over which to use this structure. No flows will be
computed for elevations equal to or greater than this number. If 0.0 then this value is ignored.
Elevation-Flow Curve: The user defined depth-elevation curve for this structure.
Vortex Valve Attributes: When a Vortex Valve is selected in the tree view the following attributes are available:
Elevation: Structures invert elevation.
Outlet ID: Upstream structure ID.
Flow Direction: Defines the direction in which flow is considered.
Downstream ID: Downstream Structure ID.
175
Results Tab: This tab consists of a graph displaying the calculated results for the element that is currently
highlighted in the tree view pane.
Rating Table Tab: This tab displays a rating table of the calculated results for the element that is currently
highlighted in the tree view pane.
176
EQT curves are an intermediate step in the hydraulic calculations for pond outlets (composite outlet structure), and (box
and circular) conduits that are culverts.
To view the EQT curve for a structure (after an implicit or explicit solver run),,
1. Go to Components > Composite Outlet Structures.
2. Right clicking in a pond outlet structure and picking "Outlet Structure EQT" graph.
3. Right clicking a conduit with a culvert and picking "Culvert EQT Graph".
When the GVF solver is used, the tailwater effect is ignored so there is only a single EQ line. It usually corresponds to
the lowest of the EQT curves.
177
Click the New button to add a row. Click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted row. Click the Report
button to generate a preformatted report containing all of the curve data.
Enter the X vs. Y points to define the cross-sectional shape of the weir.
The graph pane dynamically plots the irregular weir.
Click the New button to add a row. Click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted row. Click the Report
button to generate a preformatted report containing all of the curve data.
Enter the Elevation vs. Flow points to define the curve.
178
Click the New button to add a row. Click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted row.
For each spot elevation enter the elevation.
Click the New button to add a row. Click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted row.
For each spot elevation enter the elevation.
179
Click the New button to add a row. Click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted row. Click the Report
button to generate a preformatted report containing all of the curve data. Click the Graph button to generate a plot of the
elevation-flow-area curve.
Enter the Elevation vs Flow vs Area points to define the curve.
Delete
Description
180
Description
The dialog consists of a list pane on the left and a tabbed section on the right. The list pane displays all of the weir
depth coefficient definitions associated with the project. Above the list pane are the following buttons:
Duplicate: Creates a copy of the entry that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
181
Rename: Allows you to enter a new label for the entry that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
Report: Generates a preformatted report that details the data associated with the entry that is currently highlighted in
the list pane.
Synchronization Options: Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the following commands:
Weir Depth Table: Enter the Weir Depth vs Weir Coefficient points to define the weir depth coefficient curve. Click
the New button above the table to add a new row; click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted row.
Notes Tab: This text field that allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be associated with the currently
highlighted list pane entry.
Library Tab: This tab displays information about the template that is currently highlighted in the list pane. If the
template is derived from an engineering library, the synchronization details can be found here. If the template was
created manually for this project, the synchronization details will display the message Orphan (local), indicating that
the template was not derived from a library entry.
Delete
182
Description
Weir Depth
Lets you define the weir depth for the corresponding weir
coefficient.
Weir Coefficient
The dialog consists of a list pane on the left and a tabbed section on the right. The list pane displays all of the weir
submergence definitions associated with the project. Above the list pane are the following buttons:
183
Duplicate: Creates a copy of the entry that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
Delete: Removes the entry that is currently highlighted in the list pane
Rename: Allows you to enter a new label for the entry that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
Report: Generates a preformatted report that details the data associated with the entry that is currently highlighted in
the list pane.
Synchronization Options: Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the following commands:
Weir Submergence Table: Enter the Hw/Tw Ratio vs Q Multiplier points to define the weir submergence correction
table. Click the New button above the table to add a new row; click the Delete button to remove the currently
highlighted row.
Notes Tab: This text field that allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be associated with the currently
highlighted list pane entry.
Library Tab: This tab displays information about the template that is currently highlighted in the list pane. If the
template is derived from an engineering library, the synchronization details can be found here. If the template was
created manually for this project, the synchronization details will display the message Orphan (local), indicating that
the template was not derived from a library entry.
184
Outfalls
185
Delete
Report
Graph
Description
Time
This field allows you to define the hour of the tidal curve
point.
Elevation
This field allows you to define the elevation for the tidal
curve point.
186
Delete
Report
Graph
Description
Outlet Elevation
This field allows you to define the elevation of the E-QTW curve point.
Outlet Flow
This field allows you to define the flow for the E-Q-TW
curve point.
187
Delete
Report
Graph
Description
Time
This field allows you to define the hour of the tidal curve
point.
Elevation
This field allows you to define the elevation for the tidal
curve point.
Wet Wells
188
Wet wells are required at a pumping station to store wastewater before it is pumped. Wet wells represent boundary
conditions between pressure and gravity portions of a sewer network. They serve as collection points for gravity
systems, and as an HGL boundary node for the pressure system. Dry loads can also enter the sewer network at these
locations.
Wet wells serve as collection points in gravity systems.
When you click the wet well element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes into a wet well element
symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active causes a wet well element to be placed at the location of
the mouse cursor.
Related Topics
Adding Depth vs. Area Data to a Wet Well-176 (on page 189)
Wet Well Attributes-314
189
Delete
Report
Graph
Description
Depth
Area
190
Cross-Section Curve
This dialog allows you to define the Cross-Section Curve for a Wet Well with a Variable Volume Cross Section.
Define the cross section by entering the Depth Ratio vs Volume Ratio points in the table.
Pumps
191
In a wastewater collection system, pumps are placed where the hydraulic grade line must be raised. Since sewage
primarily flows by gravity, a pump transports sewage from a low elevation to a higher elevation. The sewage then
flows again by gravity to the next pumping station or until it reaches its destination.
When you click the pump element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes into a manhole pump symbol.
Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active causes a manhole pump to be placed at the location of the mouse
cursor.
Note: Since parallel pumps are a special case of looped network, they are not supported in the StormCAD engine.
Related Topics
192
Duplicate
Delete
Rename
Report
193
Synchronization Options
194
195
196
Pump Efficiency
Motor Tab
Motor Efficiency
197
Transient Tab
Speed (Full)
Specific Speed
Library Tab
Notes Tab
198
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
The following illustration shows the four different pump curve types.
Bentley SewerCAD pump types correspond to the above pump types as follows:
199
Some pump types only work with certain solvers as described below:
Available Pump Types by Solver
Pump Type
Implicit
Explicit
Gradually Varied
Standard 3 Point
Design 1 Point
Multipoint
Standard Extended
Custom Extended
Depth Flow
In the GVF solver, the user can specify (in the Calculation Options) whether linear or smooth interpolation is used with
the multipoint pump curve. The implicit and explicit solvers use linear interpolation between points.
You define pump curves in the Pump Definitions dialog box. You can also define pump curves in the Engineering
Library.
To create a pump definition:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
200
Pump Controls
There are several ways of controlling pump on/off status depending on the active solver. There are three types of
controls: on/off, SWMM control statements and GVF pressure control statements and are summarized below and
described in more detail in the following paragraphs.
Available Controls by Solver
Solver
On/Off
Implicit
Explicit
GVF-Convex
SWMM
GVF Pressure
X
X
GVF-Rational
The GVF-rational solver and steady runs in the GVF-convex solver do not have pump controls because these solvers
only perform a steady run only and the initial pump status is all that is needed.
On/Off controls are a property of a given pump based on the hydraulic grade line elevation at the node (usually a wet
well) immediately upstream of the pump. These controls will not be used if "Ignore On and Off Elevations" is set to
True. If it is set to false, these settings must be specified and the on elevation must be higher than the off elevation.
This type of control setting is the simplest and works with all three solvers than use controls which makes it easy to
switch between solvers. However, it cannot consider complicated control actions such as those based on time or flow
rates.
On/off controls are stored in the operational alternative.
SWMM control statements can be established for any element when the explicit solver is used. These can handle
complex conditions and actions. They are set up under Components > SWMM extensions > Control sets. See the help
for [Control Sets Tab and Control Sets Dialog Box] for details on setting up these controls.
GVF pressure control statements apply to pressure elements in a pressure subnetwork and are generally used for
controlling pumps. These controls are set in Components > Controls. Like SWMM control statements, they can contain
complex conditions and actions. See the help for [Controls and Controls Tab] for details on setting up these controls.
When both GVF pressure controls and on/off controls are provided for a pump, the GVF pressure controls have priority
in case the two types of controls try to set different pump status.
201
202
Once the pump station has been selected, the dialog displays the possible pump combinations in the top left pane and
the head curves in the bottom pane.
203
The column marked "Active" is checked if the user wants that combination displayed in the graph.
The column "ID" displays the index on the curve in the graph (e.g. Head[1] is the curve corresponding to the head of
the pump combination with ID = 1).
There is one column in the table for each pump definition referenced in that pump station. The number in the cell
indicates the number of pumps of that definition that are running for the combination corresponding to that row. If there
is a zero in a cell, the pump is off for that combination.
The top middle pane determines which type of pump or system curve is displayed. By default, only the Head
characteristic curve is displayed. The user can also turn on the (pump) efficiency or wire-to-water (overall) efficiency
curves.
The system head curves are a property of the system calculated from the perspective of a pump. When the System Head
Curve box is checked, the user must specify which pump is the Representative Pump which means which path through
the station is head loss calculated. Usually the results don't vary significantly depending on which pump is selected.
204
If the user wants to change the look of the graph such as the range of head values, use the second button in the bottom
pane. That opens the graphing manager. To change the axis range, pick Chart > Axes > Left Axis > Maximum >
Change and enter a new value. See Graphing for more details.
205
206
207
208
Submersible Pumps
Wastewater collection systems frequently use submersible pumps. However, the model needs a link to connect the
suction side of the pump to a node (usually a wet well). The pressure solver in the GVF-convex solver needs a suction
pipe (pressure pipe) connecting the pump to a suction node (a wet well for submersible pumps). To simulate a
submersible pump, the user should connect the wet well to the pump with a short pipe to move the water into the pump
with negligible head loss. It can even be a virtual conduit. In the GVF-convex solver, this pipe must be a pressure pipe
while in the other solvers it can be a pressure pipe or conduit. If the user plans to switch between solvers, it is bet to
make it a pressure pipe.
The Elevation (Invert) for the submersible pump should be the low point of the pump inlet.
A Variable Speed Pump Battery element represents multiple variable speed pumps that meet the following criteria:
209
Parallel variable speed pumps (VSPs) are operated as one group and led by a single VSP, the so-called lead VSP, while
the other VSPs at the same battery are referred as to as lag VSPs. A lag VSP turns on and operates at the same speed as
the lead VSP when the lead VSP is not able to meet the target head and turns off when the lead VSP is able to deliver
the target head or flow.
From the standpoint of input data, Variable Speed Pump Batteries are treated exactly the same as single pump elements
that are defined as variable speed pumps of the Fixed Head Type with one exception; number of Lag Pumps must be
defined in the Lag Pump Count field.
When simulating a Pump Battery in a transient analysis, the pump battery is converted to an equivalent pump using the
following conversion rules:
1. The Flow (Initial) of the equivalent pump is the total flow of all the running pumps in the pump battery.
2. The Inertia of the Pump and Motor of the equivalent pump is the sum of all the inertia values for all the running
pumps.
3. The Specific Speed of the equivalent pump is the Specific Speed value that is closest to the result of the following
equation: sqrt(number of running pumps) * Specific Speed of pump battery
Depth (in.)
28
0.3
29
0.5
30
32
34
2.2
60
210
If there is an active VSPB element in a solver other than GVF-convex a fatal error message is issue and the run does
not proceed.
Pump Stations
A pump station element provides a way for a user to indicate which pumps are in the same structure, serving the same
pressure zone. It provides a graphical way to display the pumps associated with the station. A pump station is not a
hydraulic element in that it is not directly used in a hydraulic analysis but rather it is a collection of pumps which are
the hydraulic elements.
A pump station is a polygon element which displays which pumps are in the station by dashed lines connecting the
pumps with the station polygon centroid. A pump does not need to be inside the polygon to be a pump assigned to the
station and pumps inside the polygon still need to be assigned to the station. The only information saved with a pump
station is the geometry of the station and the list of pumps assigned to the station.
211
A pump station element is useful in calculating and displaying an analysis of pump combinations (see Pump Curve
Combinations).
Usually the pumps and associated piping are laid out before the station is drawn. However, the station polygon can be
drawn first. The station element is created by picking the pump station element icon
from the layout menu and drawing a polygon around the extents of the station. When the polygon is complete, the user
right clicks and selects "Done".
Individual pump elements are assigned to a station by selecting the pump element and in the Pump Station property,
picking the pump station which the pump is associated. A dashed line is drawn from the pump to the station. This also
can be done in the physical alternative for pumps. To assign several pumps at once, a global edit can be used provided
that at least one pump has already been assigned to that station.
212
Delete
Rename
Report
Delete Button
Pump
Label
Status (Initial)
Pump Definition
This field allows you to select the pump definition for the
corresponding pump. Click the ellipsis button to open the
Pump Definitions manager.
Elevation (On)
213
Notes Tab
Click the Report button to generate a report containing the list of pumps included in the pump station as well as their
associated pump definitions. Click the Zoom To button to focus the drawing view on the pump that is highlighted in the
list.
214
In the GVF-convex solver, it is possible to right click on a pump station polygon and analyze combination pump curves
which can overlay pump head and efficiency curves and when the station is part of a runable model, can overlay the
system head curve. See [combination pump curve help] for details.
Variable speed pump batteries can also be assigned to pump station but they are only used in the GVF-convex solver.
In the explicit and implicit solver, the pump station element is used only for drawing purposes and generally there is
one pump element for each pump. (The ability to lump multiple pumps into a single station using Components > Pump
station only exists in SELECTseries 1 and earlier. When importing an earlier model into a newer version, the pump
station properties (initial level and on/off settings) are assigned to the individual pumps not a pump station.)
In special cases in explicit and implicit solvers, a Volume vs. Flow or Depth vs. Flow curve can be used to approximate
multiple pumps turning on with a curve as shown below.
215
Catchments
When you click the catchment element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes into a catchment element
symbol. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active causes a catchment element to be placed at the location of
the mouse cursor.
Related Topics
216
Hydrograph Methods
With the exception of purely sanitary flow systems with no wet weather effects, Bentley SewerCAD starts its hydraulic
calculations from a hydrograph for each catchment. There are numerous ways of generating those hydrographs. Most
involve starting with Storm Data (Adding Storm Data-461) then calculating a runoff hydrograph using one of the
following methods:
SCS
Unit Hydrograph
EPA SWMM
Modified Rational Method
RTK Unit Hydrograph Method
Virtually any hydrograph and loss method can be used with any numerical engine with the following exceptions:
1. Modified rational method only works with Implicit engine and only with peak intensity (IDF) rainfall (Local rainfall
is not supported).
2. If you choose the SWMM engine and specify EPA-SWMM runoff method, then all catchments must use that runoff
method and the loss method specified on the calculation options manager (only Green -Amt, Horton, or SCS).
However, it is also possible to directly enter a hydrograph by specifying a user-defined hydrograph (Adding User
Defined Hydrographs-413) for any catchment.
217
The fluxes shown in the figure, expressed as volume per unit area per unit time, consist of the following:
After computing the water fluxes that exist during a given time step, a mass balance is written for the change in water
volume stored in each zone so that a new water table depth and unsaturated zone moisture content can be computed for
the next time step.
See also:
218
Delete
Report
Bentley SewerCAD supports the following 13 methods, which are listed along with the required input data for each:
User Defined TcThe user-defined time of concentration (Tc) is a method that allows the direct input of the Tc
rather than using an equation to calculate it. This method would be used when the Tc needs to be calculated using a
methodology that is not supported by Bentley SewerCAD , or when a quick estimate of Tc is sufficient for the
analysis.
User Defined TcLets you explicitly define the Tc, rather than have it calculated for you using one of the other
methods.
CarterThis method requires the following input data:
Hydraulic LengthLets you define the flow length of the catchment section.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section.
EaglesonThis method requires the following input data:
Hydraulic LengthLets you define the flow length of the catchment section.
Mannings nThe Mannings roughness value of the catchment section.
Hydraulic RadiusLets you define the hydraulic radius of the catchment section.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section.
Espey/WinslowThis method requires the following input data:
219
Channel FactorLets you define the Espey channelization factor of the catchment section.
Hydraulic LengthLets you define the flow length of the catchment section.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section.
ImperviousLets you define the percentage of impervious area of the catchment section.
FAAThis method requires the following input data:
Overland Flow LengthLets you define the length of the overland pipe flow of the catchment section.
Rational Method CLets you define the rational C coefficient of the catchment section.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section.
Kerby/HathawayThis method requires the following input data:
Mannings nThe Mannings roughness value of the catchment section.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section.
Hydraulic LengthLets you define the flow length of the catchment section.
Kirpich PAThis method requires the following input data:
Tc MultiplierLets you define the time-of-concentration adjustment multiplier.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section.
Hydraulic LengthLets you define the flow length of the catchment section.
Kirpich TNThis method requires the following input data:
Hydraulic LengthLets you define the flow length of the catchment section.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section.
Tc MultiplierLets you define the time-of-concentration adjustment multiplier.
Length and VelocityThis method requires the following input data:
Hydraulic LengthLets you define the flow length of the catchment section.
VelocityLets you define the velocity of flow in the catchment section.
SCS LagThis method requires the following input data:
Hydraulic LengthLets you define the flow length of the catchment section.
CNLets you define the SCS runoff curve number of the catchment section.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section of the catchment section.
TR-55 Sheet FlowThis number represents the sheet flow time computed for each column of sheet flow data. This
method requires the following input data:
Hydraulic LengthLets you define the flow length of the catchment section.
Mannings nThe Mannings roughness value of the catchment section.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section.
2 yr. 24 hr. DepthDepth of 2 year 24 hour storm.
TR-55 Shallow ConcentrationThis number represents the sheet flow time computed for each column of shallow
concentrated flow data. This method requires the following input data:
Hydraulic LengthLets you define the flow length of the catchment section.
Is PavedLets you specify whether the catchment section is paved or unpaved.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section.
TR-55 Channel FlowThis number represents the channel flow time computed for each column of channel flow
data. This method requires the following input data:
Flow AreaLets you define the flow area of the catchment section.
Hydraulic LengthLets you define the flow length of the catchment section.
Mannings nThe Mannings roughness value of the catchment section.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section.
Wetted PerimeterLets you define the wetted perimeter of the catchment section.
Friend's EquationThis method requires the following input data:
220
Overland Flow LengthLets you define the overland flow length of the catchment section.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section.
Horton's RoughnessThe Hortons roughness value of the catchment section.
Kinematic WaveThis method requires the following input data:
Overland Flow LengthLets you define the overland flow length of the catchment section.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section.
Manning's nThe Mannings roughness value of the catchment section.
Bransby-Williams EquationThis method requires the following input data:
Hydraulic LengthLets you define the flow length of the catchment section.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section.
Wallingford (UK)This method requires the following input data:
Hydraulic LengthLets you define the flow length of the catchment section.
SlopeLets you define the slope of the catchment section.
Delete
221
Loss Methods
Supported hydrology runoff and loss methods include:
Constant Rate: This method is also called as "fLoss", the model uses the user specified loss rate (unit being depth/time)
to deduct it from the rainfall intensity curve to get the excess rainfall curve for runoff calculation.
Initial Loss and Constant Rate: User specifies an initial loss value and a constant loss rate, the model first applies the
initial loss to the rainfall intensity curve and after the initial loss taken the model applies a constant loss rate to get the
excess rainfall intensity curve for runoff calculation. If one of the two data is zero then it means that only one of the
loss types (either initial loss or the constant rate loss) is applied. Therefore basically this loss method covers 3 types of
losses:
Initial Loss
Constant Rate Loss
Initial Loss and Constant Rate Loss combined
Initial Loss and Constant Fraction: User specifies an initial loss value and a constant fraction, the model first applies the
initial loss to the rainfall intensity curve and after the initial loss taken the model applies a constant fraction loss to get
the excess rainfall intensity curve for runoff calculation. If one of the two data is zero then it means that only one of the
loss types (either initial loss or the constant fraction loss) is applied. Therefore basically this loss method covers 3 types
of losses:
Initial Loss
Constant Rate Loss
Initial Loss and Constant Rate Loss combined
Subareas Collection
Most catchments are comprised of more than one type of ground cover. For example, a roadside drainage inlet may
accept flow from the paved roadway, the curbside grass, and a nearby wooded area. This dialog allows you to model
222
Depending on the Tc Method you choose, the dialog will contain different attribute fields that are associated with that
method.
In the network layout, a Low Impact Development Control element represents the area of a catchment that is associated
with a Low Impact Development (LID) control. A LID control can be deployed throughout a study area to store,
infiltrate, and evaporate subcatchment runoff.
When you click the LID control element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes into a LID control element
symbol. LID control elements are polygons. Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active causes one point of
the LID control polygon to be placed at the location of the mouse cursor. Continue clicking to define the other points
that make up the polygon to define the shape of the LID control. To finish placing the LID control, right-click and
select Done.
If the shape of the LID control is not important, such as in a schematic drawing, you can place a generic LID control by
holding down the Ctrl button after clicking once, then moving the mouse cursor to define the size of the LID control,
then clicking again to place it.
223
Multiple LIDs can be placed in series, if desired (i.e., upstream LID's parent catchment and have downstream LID's
parent catchment as its outflow node)
Explicit definition of a LID's contributing area (as opposed to defining as a percentage of impervious area, which is
in turn a percentage of total catchment area)
Ability to direct upstream pervious area to the LID control. (With a parent catchment, only impervious non-LID
area can be directed to the LID control.)
Avoids possible mistakes with parent catchment impervious area percentage and characteristic width resulting from
the addition of a LID control (see Option 2)
Enables more explicit hydrograph reporting to show LID control effects
A possible disadvantage of this option is a greater number of network elements in the model.
Option 2: LID displaces an equal amount of non-LID catchment area
With this option, the Parent catchment Area includes the total area occupied by the LID Control(s), as well as adjacent
non-LID area. The LID Control attribute "Occupies Full Catchment?" is set to False, and the attributes "Area of Each
Unit" and "Number of "Replicate Units" define the area that a LID control displaces from the Parent catchment.
This approach allows multiple LID controls to be associated with a single catchment. If multiple LID controls are
present, they act in parallel to each treat a different portion of the runoff generated from the non-LID catchment area.
The advantage of this option is that it minimizes the number of network elements that must be placed in the model,
enabling a more uncluttered appearance and reducing data entry in some cases.
The disadvantages of this approach are:
224
The catchment's LID controls cannot be considered in series (i.e., the outflow from one LID control cannot be
inflow for another downstream).
Only runoff from the impervious portion of the parent catchment can be directed to the LID control(s).
Caution must be exercised with regard to parent catchment attributes for Percent Impervious and Width. These
values must reflect the non-LID portion of the catchment only. For example, if the original Parent catchment is 40%
impervious, and in the course of design, 75% of this impervious area is changed to porous pavement, then the
percent impervious must be adjusted to (1 - 0.75)*40/(100 - 0.75*40) = 14.3%. Similarly, the catchment's
"Characteristic Width" can be affected. If estimating this value as area divided by overland flow length, the area
used would typically be the non-LID area only.
Ponds
When you click the pond element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes into a pond element symbol.
Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active causes a pond element to be placed at the location of the mouse
cursor.
Note: If there are multiple discharges locations serving a pond then they must all be modeled in the same
manner; that is, they must either all be modeled with outlet control structures, or all modeled without outlet
control structures.
Related Topics
225
Not all of the physical properties are needed for each method of describing pond (storage element) dimensions.
The type of attribute needed for each type of data entry is summarized in the table below:
Required Pond Attributes
Attribute
Elevation-Volume
Curve
Elevation-Area Curve
Volume Function
Pipe Volume
Volume Type
Required
Required
Required
Required
Elevation (Invert)
Required
Required
Required
Required
Depth (Maximum)
Required
Required
Required
Elevation-Area Curve
Required
Elevation-Volume
Curve
Required
Percent VoidSpace
(%)
Required
Required
Number of Barrels
Required
Length
Required
Invert (Start)
Required
Invert (Stop)
Required
Pipe Diameter
Pond Coefficient A
Required
Pond Exponent B
Required
Pond Constant C
Required
For more information on the physical characteristics of ponds, see the following help topics:
226
Outdoor Ponds
The physical size of outdoor graded ponds is usually described using a depth vs. area or depth vs. volume curve. A
typical set of curves is shown below:
Related Topics
227
Area (ac)
100
0.003
100
0.008
100
0.016
100
0.024
100
0.034
100
0.044
100
0.056
100
0.068
100
0.081
100
10
0.095
100
Related Topics
Volume (ac-ft)
0.000
100
0.001
100
0.007
100
0.019
100
228
Volume (ac-ft)
0.038
100
0.067
100
0.106
100
0.156
100
0.217
100
0.292
100
10
0.379
100
Related Topics
Pipe Volumes
Another storage option models large, buried, sloped pipes. These are described to the model using the diameter, length
and number of pipe barrels (assuming parallel buried pipes are of the same dimension). The stop invert elevation of the
incoming pipe and the start invert elevation of the outgoing pipe must also be specified in order to determine the slope
of the pipe, which will affect the volume calculation at each water surface elevation.
Related Topics
229
Functional (Equation)
Another approach for calculating pond volume is to enter the coefficients of the following polynomial equation:
Area = Coeff * DepthExp + Constant
Where:
Note: The function parameters are based on depths in feet and areas in square feet.
Related Topics
230
Delete
Report
Graph
Description
Elevation
Area
The void space volume data for the pond. Void space is
used on any volumes option to adjust the effective storage
volume for rock-filled or other porous media filled basins
or vaults. Set this to 100% if there are no rocks or fill to
reduce the available volume.
231
Delete
Report
Graph
Description
Elevation
Volume
Void Space
The void space volume data for the pond. Void space is
used on any volumes option to adjust the effective storage
volume for rock-filled or other porous media filled basins
or vaults. Set this to 100% if there are no rocks or fill to
reduce the available volume.
Ponds in StormCAD
Ponds in StormCAD are treated similarly to a manhole node, however there are calculation differences based on how
the pond is set up as follows:
1. If the pond outlet has no control structure(s):
232
Ponds in SewerCAD
If there is no control structure, a pond in SewerCAD is treated just like a manhole node; the steady flow routing is
passing through the pond the same as passing through a manhole. All flow elements are passed through the pond and
the steady routing calculation is continued downstream.
The outlet control structures are ignored (no control hydraulics are performed). Flow(in) = Flow(out).
If there is no control structure, the HGL is the value calculated by the gradually varied flow profiler and the input pond
initial elevation is ignored.
If there is a control structure and the initial elevation is larger than the one given by the outlet pipe profile calculation
then the initial elevation is set as the pond HGL.
The existing Inflow(Wet Collection) in the pond is kept and you caninput a Fixed load for steady state simulations.
Results are the same as a manhole node in SewerCAD.
There is no head loss or infiltration for a pond.
During Extended Period Simulation:
The engine performs storage routing for a pond when the convex routing comes to the pond node.
The pond initial elevation is the start pond HGL for the storage routing and the inflow hydrograph is determined from
the upstream convex routing.
AE-Q curve is loaded for the pond outlet (the first curve of the EQT curves based on the fundamental GVF assumption
that there are no backwater effects).
Then the Gradually Varied Flow (GVF) engine performs the storage routing to determine the pond outflow hydrograph
and the pond elevations for each hydrologic time step.
This pond outflow hydrograph continues the downstream convex routing.
For the profile, the pond elevation time series determined from the storage routing will be compared with the HGL
calculated by GVF profiler and the larger value will be used as the pond HGL for the time.
In the case where the outlet has no control structures, the outlet conduit data is used to generate an E-Q curve for the
outlet.
233
Air Valves
Air valves are placed at high points in piping systems, to bleed air during filling, release air that accumulates over time
and allow inflow of air to prevent negative pressure and possible pipe collapse.
In typical wastewater collection system piping, pressures are positive between the pump station and a high point along
the force main when the pumps are running. When the pump turns off, the force main that was pressurized remains full
while any downward sloping pipes drain. The behavior of air valves becomes very important in force mains with
multiple high points.
No loads can be assigned to air valves. Air valve elements can only be attached to pressure pipes, not on gravity
conduits. They should be attached to two pipes. If they are attached to more than two, an error will be issued. If they are
placed at the end of a dead end pipe, they will not do anything.
In the Bentley storm and sanitary sewer products, the behavior of air valve elements depends on the active solver.
GVF-Convex Solver
The GVF-convex solver uses a true pressure solver where the pipes are generally treated as full. When the hydraulic
grade is above the valve elevation, the valve will remain closed. When the hydraulic grade line drops to the valve
elevation, the air valve prevents the hydraulic grade from dropping below the valve and the pipe acting as a siphon. The
GVF solver enables the user the ability to see which pipes flow partly full as those pipes will have a hydraulic grade
line below the pipe on the downhill side of a high point.
A user can force an air valve to be closed in a model run by setting the "Treat Air Valves as Junction" property to True.
The default setting in sewer models is False. However, only those air valves than may reasonably open during a
simulation need to have that property set to False. This will make the simulations run faster as fewer checks will need
to be made on valve status.
234
235
In most cases, when the pump is operating, the hydraulic grade line will remain above the pipe and the air valve will be
closed.
When the pump or other source on the upstream side of the high point is shut off or closed, the pipe generally remains
full. The display when the pump is off will look like this. In this example, the fact that the pipe downstream of the high
point is still draining at this time is reflected in the hydraulic grade above the pipe in some places.
236
237
With an air valve in place, the valve would prevent the negative pressure by opening to atmosphere. There may be
partially full flow downstream of the high point (where the hydraulic grade line coincides with the pipe). The location
where the hydraulic grade line rises over the pipe is the location where full pipe flow is restored.
238
When the pump or other source on the upstream side of the high point is shut off or closed, the pipe generally remains
full. Therefore, the profile will be flat between the pump and the high point. The GVF solver does not account for the
time it takes to fill the downstream section of pipe beyond the air valve once the pump is turned back on based on the
assumption that the time to fill the pipe is small compared with the model time step. If analysis of the filling of a pipe is
critical, the implicit or explicit solver should be used (available in SewerGEMS or CivilStorm).
239
SCADA Elements
Define the SCADA element using the following properties:
Target Element: The domain element that the ASCADA Signal targets.
Real-Time Signal: The signal returning realtime values for the selected attribute.
Historical Signal: The signal returning historical value(s) for the selected attributes.
Target Element (Storage Unit): Displays the storage unit used by the target element.
Field: The attribute of the target element that the SCADA signal relates to.
Headwalls
When you click the headwall element on the Layout toolbar, your mouse cursor changes into a headwall symbol.
Clicking in the drawing pane while this tool is active causes a headwall element to be placed at the location of the
mouse cursor.
Headwall Layout
Only a Conduit link can be used to model a Culvert.
A conduit that is declared to be a culvert link may have a Headwall node at either end. The user may model projected or
mitered end treatments on a culvert link with a connection to a cross section or outfall node.
240
Inlet Description: Lets you type or select a description for the inlet. Click the ellipsis button (...) to display the
Culvert Inlet Coefficient Engineering Library, where you can select an existing culvert.
Chart: The inlet chart that this set of coefficients appears on.
Nomograph: The culvert nomograph this set of coefficients belongs to.
Culvert Equation Form: If the conduit is a culvert, define the nomograph form to use in culvert calculations.
Slope Correction Factor: Lets you define the slope correction factor to be used in inlet control calculations.
Normally this factor is -0.5, but for mitered inlets HDS No. 5 suggests +0.7.
C: Lets you define the C equation coefficient that is used in the submerged inlet control equation.
M: Lets you define the M equation coefficient that is used in both forms of the unsubmerged inlet control equation.
K: Lets you define the K equation coefficient that is used in both forms of the unsubmerged inlet control equation.
Y: Lets you define the Y equation coefficient that is used in the submerged inlet control equation.
Ke: Lets you define the entrance loss value for the associated conduit.
Kr: Lets you define the reverse flow loss value for the associated conduit.
241
In most cases, the user will prefer to select a culvert definition from the default library. The user can pick Browse or
Import from library to see the list of existing definitions as shown below:
242
The values for Chart, Nomograph and Forms can be found in HDS-5. When importing a culvert definition from the
library, it is best to use the values from the library. The manipulation of these referenced values is not advised, without
justification.
Culvert entrance/exit
Network outfall
Pond Entrance
Pond Outlet
Open channel cross section to closed channel transition
243
Property Connections
Property connection elements are used to load sewer models based on data at the level of individual properties. This is
useful when a user has loading data provided for customers/properties based on metering, number of occupants/fixture
units, or simply flow per property.
Property connections can be connected to a downstream gravity network using lateral links. Laterals connect to tap
elements and most gravity nodes such manholes, transitions, and catch basins. Property connections cannot be
connected to pressure elements. Laterals can only make a single connection to a tap or other hydraulic element.
Property connections are used for loading in the Explicit and GVF Convex solvers, but not the Implicit solver. Property
connections support hydrograph inflows, pattern loads, or directly accept runoff as the outlet of a catchment. For the
GVF Rational Solver, flow through a Property Connection must come from a Catchment. (Property Connection
designated as the Outflow Element.)
A Property Connection can be placed manually in a model by selecting Layout, then either Property Connection or
Lateral. There cannot be any hydraulic elements on the upstream side of a Property Connection. (However, a Property
Connection can be the Outflow Element for a catchment.)
A few options exist for assigning loads to Property Connection elements:
1. Manually enter load data on each Property Connection.
2. Create Property Connection elements via ModelBuilder, with the loading data attached to the data source.
244
Click the New button to add a row to the Time vs. Flow table. Click Delete to remove the currently highlighted row.
Click Report to generate a report containing the hydrograph data.
Other Tools
Bentley SewerCAD provides several ways to add elements to your model. They include:
245
Click an element symbol on the Layout toolbar. The mouse cursor changes to the element symbol you selected.
Click in the drawing pane to add the element to your model.
Click again to add another element of the same type to your model.
To add a different element, click on the desired element symbol in the Layout toolbar, then click in the drawing
pane.
5. To stop adding an element, right-click in the drawing pane to display a shortcut menu, then click Done.
To add elements using the layout tool:
The layout tool lets you quickly add new elements to your model without having to select a new element button on the
Layout toolbar. When the layout tool is active, you can right-click in the drawing pane to select different elements and
pipes to add to the model.
1. Click the Layout tool on the Layout toolbar. A shortcut menu appears.
2. Click the type of pipe you want to use to connect your elements in the model.
3. Right-click in the drawing pane, then select the type of element you want to add from the shortcut menu. The
shortcut menu displays only those element types that are compatible with your pipe selection.
4. Click in the drawing pane to add the element.
5. Click again to add another of the same element type. The elements you add will automatically be connected by the
type of pipe you selected earlier.
6. To change the type of pipe, right-click and select a different type from the shortcut menu.
7. To change the element, right-click and select a different element from the shortcut menu.
8. To stop adding elements using the Layout tool, right-click anywhere in the drawing pane and click Done.
Note: In AutoCAD, you must hold down the mouse button to keep the submenu open while selecting an element
from the layout toolbar. Alternate layout methods include using the right-click menu to select elements or using
the command line.
Related Topic
246
Click an element symbol on the Layout toolbar. The mouse cursor changes to the element symbol you selected.
Click in the drawing pane to add the element to your model.
Click again to add another element of the same type to your model.
To add a different element, click on the desired element symbol in the Layout toolbar, then click in the drawing
pane.
5. To stop adding an element, right-click in the drawing pane to display a shortcut menu, then click Done.
1. Click the Layout tool on the Layout toolbar. A shortcut menu appears.
2. Click the type of pipe you want to use to connect your elements in the model.
3. Right-click in the drawing pane, then select the type of element you want to add from the shortcut menu. The
shortcut menu displays only those element types that are compatible with your pipe selection.
4. Click in the drawing pane to add the element.
5. Click again to add another of the same element type. The elements you add will automatically be connected by the
type of pipe you selected earlier.
6. To change the type of pipe, right-click and select a different type from the shortcut menu.
7. To change the element, right-click and select a different element from the shortcut menu.
8. To stop adding elements using the Layout tool, right-click anywhere in the drawing pane and click Done.
Note: In AutoCAD, you must hold down the mouse button to keep the submenu open while selecting an element
from the layout toolbar. Alternate layout methods include using the right-click menu to select elements or using
the command line.
Related Topic
247
Select the desired link element using the Layout button on the Layout toolbar.
Place the first segment of the curved pipe in your model, then right click and select Bend from the shortcut menu.
Repeat Step 2 for each segment in the curved pipe. Be sure to insert bends to clearly show the curved alignment.
When the curved pipe is complete, right click and select the next downstream element (for a conduit, this is usually
a manhole).
Connecting Elements
When building your model, you must consider these rules of connectivity:The table below and the help
topic Connectivity Rules for Storm and Sanitary Models (on page 253) describe which elements can be connected to
one another. However, there are cases where even if the layout tool allows elements to be connected, they may not be
able to be calculated depending on the solver. Some of those special cases are listed below. At run time or during
validation, illegal connections for a set of elements in a solver will show up as User Notifications.
A network needs at least one outfall or a pond to end the network. A lone outfall cannot be a boundary element
type unless its draining into a pond.
Cross section nodes need at least one channel connected to it and a channel needs at least one cross section.
Gutters cannot be the only link exiting a catch basin, or the catch basin is considered hydraulically disconnected.
In the GVF-convex solver, a pressure pipe cannot be downstream of a node that is fed from a gravity conduit.
A pump can only be connected to a pressure pipe in the GVF-convex solver.
Air valves and variable speed pump batteries can only be used with the GVF-convex solver.
Low impact development control elements can only be used with SWMM hydrology and have special rules for
connectivity which can be found in
Element Connectivity
Element
Catchment
Catchment
Manhole
Catch basin
248
Cross section
Junction chamber
Pressure junction
Wet well
Pump
249
Outfall
Pond
Outfall, catchment
Tap
Lateral
Default: Pressure
Junction
Default: Manhole
Default: Cross
Section
Pressure Junction
Catch Basin
Cross Section
Catch Basin
Catch Basin
Pump
Manhole
Catch Basin
Cross Section
Tap
Manhole
Outfall
Manhole
Air Valve
Cross Section
Junction Chamber
Transition
Wet Well
Cross Section
250
Manhole
Pump (Only
recommended for
SewerCAD)
Wet Well
Headwall
Junction Chamber
Wet Well
Outfall
Outfall
Outfall
Conduit
Channel
Gutter
Lateral
Manhole
Catch Basin
Catch Basin
Catch Basin
Tap
Junction Chamber
Manhole
Manhole
Cross Section
Pump
Junction Chamber
Cross Section
Outfall
Wet Well
Cross Section
Outfall
Pressure Junction
Outfall
Outlet Structure
Wet Well
Wet Well
Note: If you do not want to split a conduit with an access hole type node (i.e. Manhole), then use a tap node
instead. Placing a tap node on a conduit does not split the pipe into two separate hydraulic links.
If you attempt to split a link with an invalid element type you may receive a prompt (similar to the one pictured below)
if the split is going to result in invalid connectivity.
251
Answer "Yes" if you would like to continue with the split. You can correct the connectivity at a later time by selecting
Analysis > Validate.
Link Morphing
You can morph a conduit into a pressure pipe and vice versa. Any applicable data associated with the link will be
carried over to the new link after the morph.
When the node to be morphed is connected to a link you may receive a prompt (similar to the one pictured below) if the
morph is going to result in invalid connectivity.
To morph a conduit into a pressure pipe, right-click it and select the Morph Conduit to Pressure Pipe command.
252
Conduits
Pressure pipes
Channels
Gutters
Laterals
Not all node elements can be connected to all link types. For example, a pump cannot be expected to take suction from
a gutter.
In the layout tool, in order to protect the user from building model that can't solve, the user is limited in the elements
that can be selected as the next node type. The downstream nodes that are allowed for each link type are listed below:
Conduit
Catch basin
Manhole
Transition
Cross section
Pond outlet entrance
Pump
Wet well
Outfall
Pressure pipe
Pressure junction
Pump
Variable speed pump battery
Air valve
Wet well
Catch basin
Manhole
Transition
Outfall
Channel
Cross section
Catch basin
Manhole
Pond outlet entrance
Wet well
Outfall
Gutter
Catch basin
253
Cross section
Outfall
Lateral
Catch Basin
Tap
Manhole
Transition
Cross Section
Headwall
In addition, even if the model allows a user to connect elements, their behavior may depend on the active solver. For
example, while a pump can be hooked to a conduit, it will work in the implicit and explicit solvers but not in the GVF
solvers which expect the pump to be connected to a pressure pipe. For another example, air valve and variable speed
pump battery elements were created for pressure pipes in the GVF-convex solvers and require some considerations
when used with the other solvers.
Polygon elements like catchments and pond outlets must be connected in special ways. Inflows to a pond are modeled
as outfalls where the Boundary Condition Type for the outfall is a Boundary Element and the boundary element is the
pond. Outflow from a pond is modeled as a Pond Outlet Structure. Ponds cannot be connected to one another pond.
Unlike ponds, catchments can be connected in series by making one catchment the Outflow element of an upstream
catchment. Catchments can also have LID (low impact development) elements within them. The LID would then have
the catchment as its Parent Catchment.
Outfall elements cannot be connected downstream to links but must either be the terminal node or associated with a
pond. When using the explicit solver, only one conduit can be connected to an outfall. An outfall cannot be connected
to other elements through a gutter.
Pumps can only have one link on the suction side and one on the discharge side. In the GVF-rational solver, there can
only be a single pump element representing a station, with no pumps in parallel or in loops.
254
Virtual Links
A user can specify that a user defined conduit or pressure pipe has a section type of "Virtual" by setting the section type
to "Virtual" in the property grid for conduits or the "Is virtual" property to True in the property grid for pressure
pipes. The behavior of a virtual link depends on the active solver and whether the link is a conduit or pressure pipe.
Gutters and channels cannot be virtual.
Virtual links pass the flow from the upstream node to the downstream nodes but do not always calculate hydraulic
properties such as velocity and head loss. Virtual links usually have length but this is only to assist in plotting the link
in a profile drawing. Depending on the solver, the rise of the virtual link may not be shown in the profile. In some
solvers (e.g. GVF-convex), the "Is virtual = True" setting is ignored and hydraulic properties are calculated. The
behavior of different virtual links is summarized in the table below.
Virtual Link Behavior
Case
Implicit
Explicit
GVF-Convex
GVF-Rational
No head loss or
velocity calculation
Pump Suction
No head loss or
velocity calculation
No head loss or
velocity calculation
No head loss or
velocity calculation
Pump Discharge
No head loss or
velocity calculation
No head loss or
velocity calculation
No head loss or
velocity calculation
Conduit Not
Diversion
No head loss or
velocity calculation
No head loss or
velocity calculation
Virtual links enable the same model file to be used with different solvers even though the solvers have very different
ways of representing different physical facilities. The explicit solver internally represents pumps as links with
essentially no length while the GVF solver represents pumps as points which must be connected to non-virtual pipes at
each end. To make these two solvers compatible, in a model (e.g. SewerGEMS, SewerCAD, CivilStorm or StormCAD)
which represents pumps as points, virtual links must be inserted on the suction and discharge side of pump nodes.
These virtual pipes and the pump node are combined into a single effective link when the model is run in the explicit
solver and the results are later applied to model elements.
Similarly, control structures (e.g. weirs, orifices) are represented as links in the explicit solvers but are properties of
links in the implicit and GVF solvers. The control structures need to be associated with virtual links to work with the
explicit solver.
For details on using virtual links as conduits or pressure pipes, see help topics Virtual Conduits and Virtual Pressure
Pipes
255
If the Property Editor is not open, click View > Properties (F4) to open it.
Click the catchment for which you want to set an outflow node.
In the Catchment section of the Property Editor, click the Outflow Node field to enable the selection drop-down.
Click Select if you want to select the outflow node from the model, or select the outflow node from the drop-down
list.
For information on how to direct flow from a catchment to a LID control, see LID Control and Parent Catchment
Network Representation (on page 224).
Manipulating Elements
You can manipulate elements in your model in any one of the following ways:
256
Select elements--manually select individual elements, manually select multiple elements, select all elements, or
select all elements of a single element type
Move elements
Delete elements
Split pipes
or
Click Edit > Clear Selection.
or
Press the Esc key.
You can also clear a selected element by clicking a different element.
To move an element in the model:
1. Click the Select tool on the Layout toolbar.
2. Select the element(s) you want to move, then drag it to its new location. Pipe connections move with the element.
To delete an element:
Select the element, then press Delete.
or
Select Edit > Delete.
Related Topics
257
Splitting Pipes
You may encounter a situation in which you need to add a new element in the middle of an existing pipe. For example,
you may want to insert a new manhole to maintain maximum access hole spacing.
To split an existing pipe:
1.
2.
3.
4.
258
If you reconnect the stop end of a link to an invalid element type you get the following message:
Answer "Yes" if you would like to continue with the reconnect. You can correct the connectivity at a later time by
selecting Analysis > Validate.
259
To access the dialog, right-click one of the nodes to be merged and select the Merge nodes in close proximity
command.
The dialog consists of the following controls:
Node to keep: Displays the node that will be retained after the merge operation.
Tolerance: Allows you to define the tolerance for the merge operation. Nodes that fall within this distance from the
Node to keep will be available in the Nodes to merge pane.
Refresh: Refreshes the nodes displayed in the Nodes to merge pane. Click this button after making a change to the
tolerance value to update the list of nodes available for the merge operation.
Select nodes to merge: Toggle this button on to select the nodes that are selected in the Nodes to merge pane in the
drawing pane.
Nodes to merge: This pane lists the nodes that fall within the specified tolerance of the Node to keep. Nodes whose
associated boxes are checked will be merged with the Node to keep when the Merge operation is initiated.
Merge: Performs the merge operation using the nodes whose boxes are checked in the Nodes to merge list.
Close: Closes the dialog without performing the merge operation.
260
Tolerance
Pipes will be split by every junction that falls within the specified tolerance. To prevent unwanted pipe splits, first use
the Network Navigators Network Review > Pipe Split Candidates query to verify that the tolerance you intend to use
for the Batch Split operation will not include nodes that you do not want involved in the pipe split operation.
To use the Network Navigator to assist in Batch Pipe Split operations
1. Open the Network Navigator.
2. Click the [>] button and select the Network Review...Pipe Split Candidates query.
261
Batch Morph
This tool allows you to morph a selected node type into another type of node element as a batch operation.
262
All: All nodes in the model will be morphed to the specified Target Element Type.
Selection: Only the nodes that are currently selected in the drawing pane will be morphed to the specified Target
Element Type.
Selection Set: Only those nodes that are contained within the selection set specified in the drop down list will be
morphed to the specified Target Element Type.
Check the Allow Morphing of Inactive Nodes? box to include nodes set as Inactive in the batch operation.
Finally, select the Target Element Type that the selected nodes will be morphed into.
Note: Users can morph junction elements into Isolation Valves using two steps: First, morph the desired
junctions into TCV's, GPV's, or PBV's. Then use the Skelebrator "Inline Isolation Valve Replacement" operation.
263
You can use Network Navigator to find taps that are not assigned to a link using the Network Review > Taps Without
Reference Link query.
264
Property Editor
The Property Editor is a contextual dialog box that changes depending on the status of other dialog boxes. For example,
when a network element is highlighted in the drawing pane, the Property Editor displays the attributes and values
associated with that element. When one of the manager dialog boxes is active, the Property Editor displays the
properties pertaining to the currently highlighted manager element.
Attributes displayed in the Property Editor are grouped into categories by default. An expanded category can be
collapsed by clicking the plus (+) button next to the category heading. A collapsed category can be expanded by
clicking the minus (-) button next to the category heading.
Note: The available fields will also change depending on the currently active solver. The currently active solver is
determined by the Active Numerical Solver Calculation Option.
You can change the sorting to alphabetical by clicking the Search button and selecting Arrange Alphabetically.
For the most efficient data entry in Text Box style fields, instead of clicking on the Field, click on the label to the left of
the field you want to edit, and start typing. Press Enter to commit the value, then use the Up/Down keyboard arrows to
navigate to the next field you want to edit. You can then edit the field data without clicking the label first; when you are
finished editing the field data, press the Enter key, and proceed to the next field using the arrow keys, and so on.
Find Element
The top section of the Property Editor contains the Find Element tool. The Find Element tool lets you:
Quickly find a recently-created or added element in your model. The Element menu contains a list of the most
recently-created and added elements. Click an element in the Element menu to center the drawing pane around that
element and highlight it.
Find an element in your model by typing the element label or ID in the Element menu then clicking the Find button
or pressing Enter. The drawing pane centers around the highlighted element.
Find all elements of a certain type by using an asterisk (*) as a wild-card character. For example, if you want to find
all of the conduits in your model, you type co* (this is not case-sensitive) then click the Findbutton. The drawing
pane centers around and highlights the first instance of a conduit in your model, and lists all conduits in your model
in the Element menu. Once the Element menu is populated with a list of elements, you can use the Find Next and
Find Previous buttons to quickly navigate to the next or previous element in the list.
Note: See the Using the Like Operator (on page 357) topic for more information about wildcard symbols.
The following controls are included:
265
Element
Find Previous
Find
Find Next
Help
Zoom Level
Alphabetic
Categorized
Related Topics
Property Search
266
.
When you have entered one or more search terms, only those properties containing the search term will be displayed in
the property editor.
When the box contains search terms the Search button turns to a Clear button
. Click this button to clear the terms from the search box.
To match multiple items, enter the desired list of terms separated by semicolon without spaces in between.
A maximum of 12 search terms are stored in the search box. Click the down arrow to view the last 12 search terms that
were used; clicking an entry in this list will make that search term active.
Relabeling Elements
You can relabel elements from within the Property Editor.
To relabel an element:
1. Select the element in the Drawing Pane then, if the Property Editor is not already displayed, select View >
Properties.
2. In the General section of the Property Editor, click in the Label field, then type a new label for the element.
267
Value
Unit
Display Precision
268
Format
What Length is Used for Conduits, Channels, and Gutters When I Don't Enter a User-defined
Length?
If you do not enter a user-defined length in the attributes for conduits, channels, and gutters, the length used in Bentley
SewerCAD is the plan view distance between the coordinates at each end of the link element. This length is used as the
actual length in hydraulic calculations. However, as the slope increases, the difference between the plan length and the
actual length also increases as shown below.
The table below shows the difference between the actual and plan length as a function of slope. Note that for most
reasonable slopes, the difference between the actual and plan view length is less than one percent. (100% slope is 1:1
slope.) As the slope approaches vertical, you must enter the actual length.
Actual and Plan Length as a Function of Slope
Slope, % *
Actual/Plan Length
1.000
10
1.005
20
1.020
30
1.044
* The models generalized friction formulation is only valid for slopes less than 10%.
If you are not satisfied with the plan view length, you can enter a user-defined length, which you can determine using
the following equation:
269
What is the Difference Between a User Defined Unit Hydrograph and a Hydrograph Entered in
the Inflow Collection Editor?
You can enter a hydrograph (in flow units) at any node element (e.g. catch basin, manhole, catchment, cross section,
wet well). You can also enter a unit hydrograph, but only at a catchment node.
To enter a hydrograph (in flow units) using the Inflow Collection Editor:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Panning
You can change the position of your model in the drawing pane by using the Pan tool.
270
Zooming
You can enlarge or reduce your model in the drawing pane using one of the following zoom tools:
Zoom In and Out
The simple Zoom In and Zoom Out commands allow you to increase or decrease, respectively, the zoom level of the
current view by one step per mouse click.
To use Zoom In or Zoom Out, click the desired button on the Tools toolbar, or select View > Zoom > Zoom In or View
> Zoom > Zoom In.
If your mouse is equipped with a mousewheel, you zoom in or out by simply moving the mousewheel up or down
respectively.
Zoom Window
The Zoom Window command lets you zoom in on an area of your model defined by a window that you draw in the
drawing pane.
To use Zoom Window, select View > Zoom > Zoom Window button, then click and drag the mouse inside the drawing
pane to draw a rectangle. The area of your model inside the rectangle will appear enlarged.
Note: If you use the Zoom Window command frequently, you might find it more convenient to add them to the
Tools toolbar. See Customizing Bentley Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT Toolbar and Buttons for more information.
Zoom Extents
271
To use Zoom Extents, click the Zoom Extents button on the Tools toolbar. The entire model is displayed in the drawing
pane.
or
Select View > Zoom > Zoom Extents.
Zoom Realtime
The Zoom Realtime command lets you dynamically scale up and down the zoom level. The zoom level is defined by
the magnitude of mouse movement while the tool is active.
Zoom Previous returns the zoom level to the most recent previous setting. To use Zoom Previous, click the Zoom
Previous button on the Tools toolbar.
or
Select View > Zoom > Zoom Previous.
Zoom Next returns the zoom level to the setting that was active before a Zoom Previous command was executed. To
use Zoom Previous, click View > Zoom > Zoom Next.
Note: If you use the Zoom Next command frequently, you might find it more convenient to add them to the Tools
toolbar. See Customizing Bentley Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT Toolbar and Buttons for more information.
Related Topics
272
From a selection of elements--You create a new selection set in the Selection Sets Manager, then use your mouse to
select the desired elements in the drawing pane.
From a query--Create a query in the Queries Manager, then use the named query to find elements in your model and
place them in the selection set.
273
274
Edit
Rename
Select In Drawing
Help
You can view the properties of a selection in the Property Editor by right-clicking the selection set in the list pane and
selecting Properties from the shortcut menu.
To view elements in a Selection Set
275
276
277
Selected Queries
Related Topics:
278
279
280
Choose the element sets to use in the query. Once a query is selected, it
can be executed when you click the > icon.
If there is already a
Query listed in the list box, it can be run when the Execute icon is
clicked.
Click to run the selected query.
Execute
Previous
Zooms the drawing pane view to the element prior to the currently
selected one in the list.
Zooms the drawing pane view to the selected element in the list.
Zoom To
281
Next
Zooms the drawing pane view to the element below the currently selected
element in the list.
Copies the elements to the Windows clipboard.
Copy
Removes the selected element from the list.
Remove
Selects the elements in the drawing pane and performs a zoom extent
based on the selection.
Select In Drawing
When this toggle button is on, elements returned by a query will be
highlighted in the drawing pane to increase their visibility.
Highlight
Refreshes the current selection.
Refresh Drawing
Opens SewerGEMS V8 i Help.
Help
Predefined Queries
The Network Navigator provides access to a number of predefined queries grouped categorically, accessed by clicking
the [>] button. Categories and the queries contained therein include:
Element types - finds all elements of a specified type (e.g. all manholes).
Network review - finds potential problems in the model (e.g. finding disconnected elements). This is a very powerful
tool for model cleanup.
Input - finds elements in model with specified properties (e.g. find elliptical conduits)
Results - finds elements in model with results that meet the query criteria (e.g. manholes that are flooded in this time
step).
Note: The criteria to meet the Near Horizontally Sloped results query is that the slope is:
slope > -.005 AND slope < 0.005
User Defined Queries
In addition to predefined queries, you can create your own queries in the Queries Manager. These queries can be saved
with the project or in a shared file.
282
Using Prototypes
Prototypes allow you to enter default values for elements in your network. These values are used while laying out the
network. Prototypes can reduce data entry requirements dramatically if a group of network elements share common
data.
For example, if a section of the network contains all three foot-diameter manholes , use the manhole prototype to set the
Diameter field to 3.00 ft. When you create a new manhole in your model, its diameter attribute will default to 3.00 ft.
Note: Changes to the prototypes are not retroactive and will not affect any elements created prior to the change.
If a section of your system has distinctly different characteristics than the rest of the system, adjust your prototypes
before laying out that section. This will save time when you edit the properties later.
For instructions on how to create prototypes, see Creating Prototypes (on page 283).
Creating Prototypes
Prototypes contain default values for Bentley SewerGEMS V8i elements. You create prototypes in the Prototypes
Manager.
To create a prototype:
1. Open your project or start a new project.
2. Select View > Prototypes or press Ctrl+6. The Prototypes Manager opens. All element types are displayed in an
expanding and collapsing list.
3. Select the element type for which you want to create a prototype, then click the New button. The element type in the
list expands to display all the prototypes that exist for that element type. Each element type contains a default
prototype, which is not editable, and any prototypes that you have created. The current set of default values for each
element type is identified by the Make Current icon.
283
Engineering Libraries
Engineering Libraries are powerful and flexible tools that you use to manage specifications of common materials,
objects, or components that are shared across projects. Some examples of objects that are specified through engineering
libraries include pipe materials, Storm Data, and unit sanitary loads. You can modify engineering libraries and the items
they contain by using the Engineering Libraries command in the Components menu, or by clicking the ellipsis (...)
buttons available next to the fields in dialog boxes that make use of engineering libraries.
Note: The data for each engineering library is stored in an XML file in your Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT
program directory. We strongly recommend that you edit these files only using the built-in tools available by
selecting Components > Catalog > Engineering Libraries.
You work with engineering libraries and the items they contain in the Engineering Libraries dialog box, which contains
all of the projects engineering libraries. Individual libraries are compilations of library entries, along with their
attributes. For more information about working with engineering libraries, see Working with Engineering Libraries (on
page 285).
284
Library types are displayed in the Engineering Library manager in an expanding/collapsing tree view.
Library types can contain categories and subcategories, represented as folders in the tree view.
Individual library entries are contained within the categories, subcategories, and folders in the tree view.
Libraries, categories, folders, and library entries are displayed in the tree view with their own unique icons. You can
right-click these icons to display submenus with different commands.
Add Folder
Save As
Remove
285
Add Item
Add Folder
Rename
Delete
Delete
Save
Remove
Rename
286
The following management controls are located above the minor loss coefficient list pane:
Creates a new Minor Loss Coefficient.
New
Creates a copy of the currently highlighted minor loss
coefficient.
Duplicate
287
Delete
Rename
Report
Synchronization Options
The tab section is used to define the settings for the minor loss that is currently highlighted in the minor loss list pane.
The following controls are available:
Minor Loss Tab
Library Tab
Notes Tab
288
Delete
Rename
Edit
Refresh
Help
289
Combination
Curb
Ditch
Grate
Slot
Flow to Inlet vs. Flow Captured
Gutter Depth vs. Captured Flow
You can also import an inlet definition from the Inlet Libraries Engineering Library, and export inlet definitions to the
Engineering Library for later use.
The dialog box contains a list pane on the left and a tabbed input data area on the right, and includes the following
controls:
New: Creates a new inlet defintion in the list pane on the left.
290
Report: Lets you generate a preformatted report that contains the input data associated with the currently highlighted
inlet definition.
Synchronization Options: Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the following commands:
Browse Engineering LibraryOpens the Engineering Library manager dialog, allowing you to browse the Inlet
Libraries.
Synchronize From LibraryLets you update a set of inlet defintions previously imported from one of the Inlet
Libraries. The updates reflect changes that have been made to the library since it was imported.
Synchronize To LibraryLets you update one of the existing Inlet Libraries using current inlet definitions that were
initially imported but have since been modified.
Import From LibraryLets you import a inlet defintion from one of the existing Inlet Libraries.
Export To LibraryLets you export the current inlet defintions to one of the existing Inlet Libraries.
Connect to LibraryLets you create a connection between the inlet catalog and the specified engineering library.
The fields and controls that appear in the tabbed area depend on which inlet type is chosen. Not all fields will be
available for all inlet types.
Inlet Tab
Structure Width: Define the width of the inlet structure. This field is available for all inlet types.
Structure Length: Define the length of the inlet structure. This field is available for all inlet types.
Curb Opening Height: Define the height of the curb opening. This field is available for Curb and Combination inlet
types.
Default Curb Opening Length: Define the default length of the curb opening. This field is available for Curb and
Combination inlet types.
Local Depression: Define the depth of the gutter depression at the inlet, if any. This field is available for Curb and
Combination inlet types.
Depression Width: Define the width of the gutter depression at the inlet, if any. This field is available for Curb and
Combination inlet types.
Throat Type: Choose the throat type. The throat type defines the shape of curb opening. This field is available for
Curb and Combination inlet types.
Throat Angle: Define the angle of the inlet throat. This field is only available when the Inclined Throat Type is
chosen. This field is available for Curb and Combination inlet types.
Grate Type: Choose the grating type. This field is available for Combination, Ditch, and Grating inlet types.
Grate Width: Define the width of the grating. This field is available for Combination, Ditch, and Grating inlet types.
Default Grate Length: Define the default length of the grating. This field is available for Combination, Ditch, and
Grating inlet types.
Slot Width: Define the default width of the slot. This field is available for Slot inlet type.
Default Slot Length: Define the default length of the slot. This field is available for Slot inlet type.
Flow to Inlet vs. Flow Captured Table: This table is only available when the Flow to Inlet vs. Flow Captured Inlet
type is selected. It allows you to define the amount of Flow Captured at various Flow to Inlet points. Click the New
button to add a new row to the table. Click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted row from the table.
291
Gutter Depth vs. Captured Flow Table: This table is only available when the Gutter Depth vs. Captured Flow Inlet
type is selected. It allows you to define the amount of Captured Flow at various Gutter Depth values. Click the New
button to add a new row to the table. Click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted row from the table.
Default Curb Opening Length: Define the opening length.
Design Tab
This tab contains a list of allowable design lengths. When performing a design analysis, the program will only be able
to select inlets of one of lengths specified here. To add a new length to the list click the New button and type in the
length. To remove a length from the list, highlight it and click the Delete button.
Notes Tab
This tab contains a text field that allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be associated with the currently
highlighted inlet definition.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the inlet definition that is currently highlighted in the list pane. If the inlet
definition is derived from an engineering library, the synchronization details can be found here. If the inlet definition
was created manually for this project, the synchronization details will display the message Orphan (local), indicating
that the inlet definition was not derived from a library entry.
To create a new Inlet:
1.
2.
3.
4.
292
Combination
Curb
Ditch
Grate
Slot
Flow to Inlet vs. Flow Captured
Gutter Depth vs. Captured Flow
Kerb (United kingdom)
Grating (United Kingdom)
You can also import an inlet definition from the Inlet Libraries Engineering Library, and export inlet definitions to the
Engineering Library for later use.
The dialog box contains a list pane on the left and a tabbed input data area on the right, and includes the following
controls:
New: Creates a new inlet definition in the list pane on the left.
Report: Lets you generate a preformatted report that contains the input data associated with the currently
highlighted inlet definition.
Synchronization Options: Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the following commands:
Browse Engineering Library--Opens the Engineering Library manager dialog, allowing you to browse the Inlet
Libraries.
293
Synchronize From Library--Lets you update a set of inlet defintions previously imported from one of the Inlet
Libraries. The updates reflect changes that have been made to the library since it was imported.
Synchronize To Library--Lets you update one of the existing Inlet Libraries using current inlet definitions that were
initially imported but have since been modified.
Import From Library--Lets you import a inlet defintion from one of the existing Inlet Libraries.
Export To Library--Lets you export the current inlet defintions to one of the existing Inlet Libraries.
Connect to Library--Lets you create a connection between the inlet catalog and the specified engineering library.
The fields and controls that appear in the tabbed area depend on which inlet type is chosen. Not all fields will be
available for all inlet types.
Inlet Tab
Structure Width: Define the width of the inlet structure. This field is available for all inlet types.
Structure Length: Define the length of the inlet structure. This field is available for all inlet types.
Curb Opening Height: Define the height of the curb opening. This field is available for Curb and Combination inlet
types.
Default Curb Opening Length: Define the default length of the curb opening. This field is available for Curb and
Combination inlet types.
Local Depression: Define the depth of the gutter depression at the inlet, if any. This field is available for Curb and
Combination inlet types.
Depression Width: Define the width of the gutter depression at the inlet, if any. This field is available for Curb and
Combination inlet types.
Throat Type: Choose the throat type. The throat type defines the shape of curb opening. This field is available for
Curb and Combination inlet types.
Throat Angle: Define the angle of the inlet throat. This field is only available when the Inclined Throat Type is
chosen. This field is available for Curb and Combination inlet types.
Grate Type: Choose the grating type. This field is available for Combination, Ditch, and Grating inlet types.
Grate Width: Define the width of the grating. This field is available for Combination, Ditch, and Grating inlet types.
Default Grate Length: Define the default length of the grating. This field is available for Combination, Ditch, and
Grating inlet types.
Slot Width: Define the default width of the slot. This field is available for Slot inlet type.
Default Slot Length: Define the default length of the slot. This field is available for Slot inlet type.
Flow to Inlet vs. Flow Captured Table: This table is only available when the Flow to Inlet vs. Flow Captured Inlet
type is selected. It allows you to define the amount of Flow Captured at various Flow to Inlet points. Click the New
button to add a new row to the table. Click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted row from the table.
Gutter Depth vs. Captured Flow Table: This table is only available when the Gutter Depth vs. Captured Flow Inlet
type is selected. It allows you to define the amount of Captured Flow at various Gutter Depth values. Click the New
button to add a new row to the table. Click the Delete button to remove the currently highlighted row from the table.
Kerb Angle (Alpha): The angle of alpha as in the diagram below.
Kerb Angle (Beta): The angle of beta as in the diagram below.
294
Design Tab
This tab contains a list of allowable design lengths. When performing a design analysis, the program will only be able
to select inlets of one of lengths specified here. To add a new length to the list click the New button and type in the
length. To remove a length from the list, highlight it and click the Delete button.
Notes Tab
This tab contains a text field that allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be associated with the currently
highlighted inlet definition.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the inlet definition that is currently highlighted in the list pane. If the inlet
definition is derived from an engineering library, the synchronization details can be found here. If the inlet definition
was created manually for this project, the synchronization details will display the message Orphan (local), indicating
that the inlet definition was not derived from a library entry.
To create a new Inlet:
1. Click the New button above the list pane.
2. Type a name for the inlet.
295
296
297
298
New
Delete
Report
Description
Grating Type
Grating Parameter
Typical range of Grating Parameter values, by Grating Type, are given in the following table:
Grating Type
Range if G(s/m2)
< or = 30
30.1 - 45
45.1 - 60
60.1 - 80
80.1 - 110
Design value Gd
30
45
60
80
110
299
6. Now this relationship can be copied and pasted into the Kerb Channel Depth vs. Captured Flow area of the Inlet
editor. To do this, copy the data to the windows clipboard, then in Bentley SewerCAD , select the top right cell in
Kerb Channel Depth vs. Captured Flow grid and press Ctrl+V to paste.
Note: Make sure the units used in the Inlet editor match the units used in determining the Depth vs. Captured
Flow relationship.
This inlet is now set up and ready to use in the current Bentley SewerCAD project. To make it available for use in other
projects, click on the Synchronization Options button and select Export to Library.
To Model a Neenah Grate for In Sag Inlets
For rectangular grates in sag, it is generally possible to enter a Neenah grate as a standard Grate Inlet Type.
However, please note that the Bentley SewerCAD uses the HEC-22 methodology for computing capacity, which does
not always produce capacities that correspond to capacities given by Neenah Foundary (since some discharge
coefficients are slightly different).
The designer should verify that they are satisfied with the calculated capacity in these cases.
For non-rectangular grates, the designer should compute, or request from Neenah Foundry, a Kerb Channel Depth vs.
Captured Flow relationship for the grate and then enter that in Bentley SewerCAD using a procedure similar to the
procedure outlined for Inlets On Grade above.
Note that the capacities of grate inlets in sag are not a function of the transverse of longitudinal slopes, so one Kerb
Channel Depth vs. Captured Flow curve per grate is sufficient for all transverse and longitudinal slopes.
300
Conventional
Irregular
Parabolic
Trapezoidal
V-Shaped
You can also import a gutter definition from the Gutter Catalogs Engineering Library, and export gutter definitions to
the Engineering Library for later use.
The dialog box contains a list pane on the left and a tabbed input data area on the right, and includes the following
controls:
New: Creates a new gutter definition in the list pane on the left.
Report: Lets you generate a preformatted report that contains the input data associated with the currently highlighted
gutter definition.
Synchronization Options: Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the following commands:
301
Browse Engineering Library--Opens the Engineering Library manager dialog, allowing you to browse the Gutter
Catalogs.
Synchronize From Library--Lets you update a set of gutter defintions previously imported from one of the Gutter
Catalogs. The updates reflect changes that have been made to the library since it was imported.
Synchronize To Library--Lets you update one of the existing Gutter Catalogs using current gutter definitions that
were initially imported but have since been modified.
Import From Library--Lets you import a gutter defintion from one of the existing Gutter Catalogs.
Export To Library--Lets you export the current gutter defintions to one of the existing Gutter Catalogs.
Connect to Library--Lets you create a connection between the gutter catalog and the specified engineering library.
The fields and controls that appear in the tabbed area depend on which gutter shape is chosen. Not all fields will be
available for all gutter types.
Gutter Tab
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the gutter definition that is currently highlighted in the list pane. If the gutter
definition is derived from an engineering library, the synchronization details can be found here. If the gutter definition
302
Delete
Rename
303
Report
Synchronize
The following table describes the rest of the controls in the Conduit Catalog dialog box.
Conduit Catalog List Pane
304
Conduit Shape
Lets you define the type of cross section for the currently
highlighted catalog pipe.
Diameter
Lets you define the diameter of the pipe. This field is only
available for Circular catalog pipes.
Rise
Lets you define the rise (height) of the catalog pipe. This
field is available for all cross section types except
Circular.
Span
Power Exponent
Bottom Width
305
Availability
Roughness
Roughness Type
Material
Mannings n
Lets you define the roughness value for the catalog pipe.
This field is available only when the Roughness Type is
Single Mannings n.
Lets you define a flow vs. roughness curve for the catalog
pipe. This field is available only when the Roughness
Type is Mannings n-Flow.
306
Library Tab
Delete
307
Report
Description
Depth
Manning n
Related Topics
Roughness Models-315
308
Vortex Valves
This dialog allows you to define vortex valve elements.
The dialog box contains a toolbar, a list pane, and two tabs. The toolbar contains the following buttons:
New
Delete
Duplicate
Rename
Report
309
Synchronize
Help
To define a vortex valve, highlight it in the list pane, then enter points in the Head-Flow table of the Head-Flow Curve
tab. Click the New button to add a row to the table, or Delete to remove the currently highlighted row.
In addition to the Head-Flow Curve tab, the following tabs are also available:
Notes Tab
Library Tab
310
Water Quality
Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT can perform water quality modeling using the SWMM water quality solver. In order to
make a water quality run choose the SWMM5 Explicit Engine from the Analysis > Calculation Options > Engine Type
dialog.
You must then define the pollutant being modeled using the Component > SWMM Extensions > Pollutants dialog
(see Pollutants Dialog Box (on page 326)). In the Pollutants dialog, the enter a name for the pollutant and define the
properties.
If water quality data is present in a scenario, water quality calculations will be performed.
There are two methods for loading pollutants in a water quality simulation.
311
Note: When Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT is running calculations using the Implicit Engine Type (this setting is
found in the Calculation Options Manager), SWMM attributes and their associated values are not considered.
Only when the SWMM Engine Type is used will the data contained in these dialog boxes have any effect on the
calculated results.
See also:
312
SWMM Hydrology
You can use the Explicit (SWMM 5) engine in Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT to route flows through the system.
However, in order to use SWMM hydraulics, you must load the model through inflows at nodes, or you must select
EPA-SWMM Runoff as the runoff method for a catchment. If you are not familiar with SWMM hydrology, we strongly
recommend that you read SWMM 5 documentation for a detailed discussion of the topic.
The overall process through which precipitation is converted to flow in conduits and channels is summarized in the
following figure.
313
In addition to the standard flow equation, the solver allows user to define a custom equation whose results will be
added onto those of the standard equation. Finally, the dialog offers the option to override certain parameters that were
specified for the aquifer to which the subcatchment belongs. The properties listed in the editor are as follows:
Aquifer Name: Name of the aquifer object that describes the subsurface soil properties, thickness, and initial
conditions. Leave this field blank if you want the subcatchment not to generate any groundwater flow.
Receiving Node: Name of the node that receives groundwater from the subcatchment.
Surface Elevation: Elevation of the subcatchment's ground surface (ft or m).
Groundwater Flow Exponent: Value of A1 in the groundwater flow formula.
Surface Water Flow Coefficient: Value of A2 in the groundwater flow formula.
Surface Water Flow Exponent: Value of B2 in the groundwater flow formula.
Surface-GW Interaction Coefficient: Value of A3 in the groundwater flow formula.
314
Surface Water Height: Fixed height of surface water at the receiving node above the aquifer bottom (ft or m). Set to
zero if surface water depth will vary as computed by flow routing.
Channel Bottom Height: Water table height above the aquifer bottom that must be reached before any flow occurs
(feet or meters). Leave blank to use the receiving node's invert elevation.
Bottom Elevation: Elevation of the bottom of the aquifer (ft or m). Leave blank to use the value from the parent
aquifer.
Water Table Elevation: Elevation of the water table in the aquifer at the start of the simulation (ft or m). Leave
blank to use the value from the parent aquifer.
Unsaturated Zone Moisture: Moisture content of the unsaturated upper zone of the aquifer at the start of the
simulation (volumetric fraction). Leave blank to use the value from the parent aquifer.
Custom Groundwater Flow Equation: Click the ellipsis button (or press Enter) to launch the Custom Groundwater
Flow Equation editor. The equation supplied by this editor will be used in addition to the standard equation to
compute groundwater outflow from the subcatchment. The coefficients supplied to the groundwater flow equations
must be in units that are consistent with the groundwater flow units, which can either be cfs/acre for US units or
cms/ha for SI units.
The Plowable snow pack area consists of a user-defined fraction of the total impervious area. It is meant to
represent such areas as streets and parking lots where plowing and snow removal can be done.
The Impervious snow pack area covers the remaining impervious area of a catchment.
The Pervious snow pack area encompasses the entire pervious area of a catchment.
In addition, a set of snow removal parameters can be assigned to the Plowable area. These parameters consist of the
depth at which snow removal begins and the fractions of snow moved onto various other areas.
Catchments are assigned a snow pack object through their Snow Pack property. A single snow pack object can be
applied to any number of catchments. Assigning a snow pack to a catchment simply establishes the melt parameters and
initial snow conditions for that catchment. Internally, the SWMM solver creates a "physical" snow pack for each
catchment, which tracks snow accumulation and melting for that particular catchment based on its snow pack
parameters, its amount of pervious and impervious area, and the precipitation history it sees.
The Snow Pack Editor contains a list view for the snow pack's name and two tabbed pages, one for Snow Pack
Parameters and one for Snow Removal Parameters.
Access the Snow Pack Editor by selecting Components > SWMM Extensions > Snow Pack, or by selecting Edit in the
Snow Pack field in the Properties Editor when viewing the properties of a catchment (note: for the Snow Pack field to
be visible, Has Snow Pack? must be set to True).
315
Depth at which snow removal begins: Depth which must be reached before any snow removal begins.
Fraction transferred out of watershed: The fraction of snow depth that is removed from the system (and does not
become runoff).
Fraction transferred to the impervious area: The fraction of snow depth that is added to snow accumulation on the
pack's impervious area.
Fraction transferred to the pervious area: The fraction of snow depth that is added to snow accumulation on the
pack's pervious area.
Fraction converted to immediate melt: The fraction of snow depth that becomes liquid water which runs onto any
catchment associated with the snow pack.
Snow Transferred Outside Catchment: The fraction of snow depth which is added to the snow accumulation on
some other catchment.
Snow Catchment: The name of the catchment that receives the snow that is transferred outside of the snow pack.
The various removal fractions must add up to 1.0 or less. If less than 1.0, then some remaining fraction of snow depth
will be left on the surface after all of the redistribution options are satisfied.
316
Access this dialog box by selecting Components > SWMM Extensions > Climatology.
The data shown in this dialog box is linked to the active Rainfall-Runoff Alternative, so differently climatology data
can be used in different Scenarios.
Temperature Tab
The Temperature page of the Climatology Editor dialog is used to specify the source of temperature data used for snow
melt computations. There are three choices available:
Evaporation Tab
The Evaporation page of the Climatology Editor dialog is used to supply evaporation rates for a study area. There are
six choices for specifying these rates; for all but the No Evaporation option, check the Evaporate Only During Dry
Periods? box to allow evaporation only during periods with no precipitation. You may also define a Monthly Soil
Recovery Pattern to allow the infiltration recovery rate to be adjusted by a fixed amount on a monthly basis to account
for seasonal variation in evaporation rates. The Evaporation Types are as follows:
317
Climate File - Temperatures: Hargreaves method will be used to compute daily evaporation rates from the daily air
temperature record contained in the external climate file specified on the Temperature page of the dialog. This
method also uses the sites latitude, which can be entered on the Snowmelt page of the dialog even if snow melt is
not being simulated.
Monthly Evaporation: Use this choice to supply an average rate for each month of the year. Enter the value for each
month in the data grid provided. Note that rates remain constant within each month.
Note that these represent potential rates. The actual amount of water evaporated will depend on the amount available.
If rates are read directly from a climate file, then a set of monthly pan coefficients should also be supplied to convert
the pan evaporation data to free water-surface values.
An option is also available to allow evaporation only during periods with no precipitation.
Snowmelt Tab
Snowmelt parameters are climatic variables that apply across the entire study area when simulating snowfall and
snowmelt.
The Snowmelt page of the Climatology Editor dialog is used to supply values for the following parameters related to
snowmelt calculations:
Dividing Temperature Between Snow and Rain: Enter the temperature below which precipitation falls as snow
instead of rain.
Antecedent Temperature Index Weight: This parameter reflects to what degree heat transfer within a snow pack
during non-melt periods is affected by prior air temperatures. Smaller values reflect a thicker surface layer of snow
which result in reduced rates of heat transfer. Values must be between 0 and 1, and the default is 0.5.
318
Negative Melt Ratio: This is the ratio of the heat transfer coefficient of a snow pack during non-melt conditions to
the coefficient during melt conditions. It must be a number between 0 and 1. The default value is 0.6.
Elevation Above Mean Sea Level: Enter the average elevation above mean sea level for the study area, in feet or
meters. This value is used to provide a more accurate estimate of atmospheric pressure. The default is 0.0, which
results in a pressure of 29.9 inches Hg. The effect of wind on snow melt rates during rainfall periods is greater at
higher pressures, which occur at lower elevations.
Latitude: Enter the latitude, in degrees North, of the study area. This number is used when computing the hours of
sunrise and sunset, which in turn are used to extend min/max daily temperatures into continuous values. It is also
used to compute daily evaporation rates from daily temperatures. The default is 50 degrees North.
Longitude Correction: This is a correction, in minutes of time, between true solar time and the standard clock time.
It depends on a location's longitude (
) and the standard meridian of its time zone (SM) through the expression 4 (
-SM). This correction is used to adjust the hours of sunrise and sunset when extending daily min/max temperatures
into continuous values. The default value is 0.
319
Adjustments Tab
This tab allows you to define climate adjustments.
Checking the Apply Climate Adjustments box enables the Monthly Adjustments table, where you can define
Temperature Constant, Evaporation Constant, Rainfall Multiplier, and Soil Conductivity Multiplier adjustments by
month.
320
Climate Files
CivilStorm can use an external Climate File that contains daily air temperature, evaporation, and wind speed data. The
program currently recognizes the following formats:
A DSI-3200 or DSI-3210 file available from the National Climatic Data Center at www.ncdc.noaa.gov/oa/ncdc.html.
Canadian climate files available from Environment Canada at www.climate.weatheroffice.ec.gc.ca.
A user-prepared climate file where each line contains a recording station name, the year, month, day, maximum
temperature, minimum temperature, and optionally, evaporation rate, and wind speed. If no data are available for any of
these items on a given date, then an asterisk should be entered as its value.
When a climate file has days with missing values, SWMM will use the value from the most recent previous day with a
recorded value.
For a user-prepared climate file, the data must be in the same units as the project being analyzed. For US units,
temperature is in degrees F, evaporation is in inches/day, and wind speed is in miles/hour. For metric units, temperature
is in degrees C, evaporation is in mm/day, and wind speed is in km/hour.
Delete
Rename
Report
The attribute fields along the right side of the dialog box include:
321
Porosity
Lets you define the volume of voids / total soil volume for
the currently highlighted aquifer.
Wilting Point
Field Capacity
Lets you define soil moisture content after all free water
has drained off for the currently highlighted aquifer.
Aquifer Conductivity
Conductivity Slope
Tension Slope
Lets you define the slope of soil tension vs. soil moisture
content curve for the currently highlighted aquifer.
Elevation (Bottom)
322
Delete
Rename
Report
The Control Editor Pane allows you to define SWMM controls. Each control rule is a series of statements of the form:
RULE ruleID IF condition_1 AND condition_2 OR condition_3 AND condition_4 Etc. THEN action_1 AND action_2
Etc. ELSE action_3 AND action_4 Etc. PRIORITY value
where keywords are shown in boldface and ruleID is an ID label assigned to the rule, condition_n is a Condition
Clause, action_n is an Action Clause, and value is a priority value (e.g., a number from 1 to 5).
Only the RULE, IF and THEN portions of a rule are required; the other portions are optional.
Blank lines between clauses are permitted and any text to the right of a semicolon is considered a comment.
When mixing AND and OR clauses, the OR operator has higher precedence than AND, i.e.,
IF A or B and C
is equivalent to
IF (A or B) and C
If the interpretation was meant to be
IF A or (B and C)
then this can be expressed using two rules as in
IF A THEN IF B and C THEN
The PRIORITY value is used to determine which rule applies when two or more rules require that conflicting actions
be taken on a link. A rule without a priority value always has a lower priority than one with a value. For two rules with
the same priority value, the rule that appears first is given the higher priority.
323
Attribute
Value
NODE
DEPTHHEADINFLOW
numerical valuenumerical
valuenumerical value
LINK
FLOWDEPTH
PUMP
STATUSFLOW
ON or OFFnumerical value
ORIFICEWEIR
SETTING
fraction open
324
Attribute
Value
SIMULATION
TIMEDATECLOCKTIME
Action Clauses
An Action Clause of a Control Rule can have one of the following formats:
PUMP id STATUS = ON/OFF ORIFICE id SETTING = value WEIR id SETTING = value
Where SETTING is the fractional amount that an orifice is fully open or to the fractional amount of the original height
between the crest and the top of a weir that remains (i.e., weir control is accomplished by moving the crest height up
and down).
Some examples of action clauses are:
PUMP P67 STATUS = OFF ORIFICE O212 SETTING = 0.5
Only the RULE, IF and THEN portions of a rule are required; the other portions are optional.
Blank lines between clauses are allowed, and any text to the right of a semicolon is considered a comment.
When mixing AND and OR clauses, the OR operator has higher precedence than AND, i.e.,
IF A or B and C
is equivalent to
IF (A or B) and C.
If the interpretation was meant to be
IF A or (B and C)
then this can be expressed using two rules as in
IF A THEN ...IF B and C THEN ...
The PRIORITY value is used to determine which rule applies when two or more rules require that conflicting actions
be taken on a link. A rule without a priority value always has a lower priority than one with a value. For two rules with
the same priority value, the rule that appears first is given the higher priority.
Examples
The following are examples of control rules.
Simple time-based pump control
RULE R1 IF SIMULATION TIME > 8 THEN PUMP 12 STATUS = ON ELSE PUMP 12 STATUS = OFF ;
Multi-condition orifice gate control
RULE R2A IF NODE 23 DEPTH > 12 AND LINK 165 FLOW > 100 THEN ORIFICE R55 SETTING = 0.5 RULE
R2B IF NODE 23 DEPTH > 12 AND LINK 165 FLOW > 200 THEN ORIFICE R55 SETTING = 1.0 RULE R2C IF
NODE 23 DEPTH <= 12 OR LINK 165 FLOW <= 100 THEN ORIFICE R55 SETTING = 0 ;
Pump station operation (as in a SWMM4 Type5 pump)
RULE R3A IF NODE N1 DEPTH > 5 THEN PUMP N1A STATUS = ON RULE R3B IF NODE N1 DEPTH > 7
THEN PUMP N1B STATUS = ON RULE R3C IF NODE N1 DEPTH <= 3 THEN PUMP N1A STATUS = OFF AND
PUMP N1B STATUS = OFF
325
Delete
Rename
Report
The attribute fields along the right side of the dialog box include:
Rain Concentration
Groundwater Concentration
Decay Coefficient
Co-Pollutant
326
Co-Fraction
I & I Concentration
327
Delete
Rename
Report
The attribute fields along the right side of the dialog box include:
328
Pollutant
New
Delete
Report
Graph
Pollutograph Table
There is also a status bar located at the bottom of the dialog box that displays any errors and warnings that may occur
when you enter data.
New: Adds a new row to the Pollutograph table. Click in the row to select a pollutograph from the drop-down
menu, or click the Ellipses (...) button to create new pollutographs.
Delete: Deletes the current row from the table.
Report: Lets you view a report of the collection.
329
Data Tab
Delete
Rename
Report
330
Availability
Last Cleaned
331
Power Function: Pollutant Buildup (B) accumulates proportional to time (t) raised to some power, until a maximum
limit is achieved.
buildup, mass(count/
area(length)
C1
C2
build-up rate
C3
time exponent
Exponential Function: Buildup follows an exponential growth curve that approaches a maximum limit
asymptotically.
332
buildup, mass(count)/
area(length)
C1
C2
equation_SWMMLandUses_002.eps
Saturation Function: Buildup begins at a linear rate which proceeds to decline constantly over time until a saturation
value is reached.
buildup, mass(count)/
area(length)
C1
333
buildup, mass(count)/
area(length)
C2
equation_SWMMLandUses_003.eps
The effect of each coefficient is shown in the figure below.
Description
Pollutant
Max. Buildup
Rate Constant
Buildup Function
334
Description
Power Constant
Normalizer
Scaling Factor
Exponential Washoff: The washoff load (W) in units of mass per hour is proportional to the product of runoff raised
to some power and to the amount of buildup remaining.
C1
washoff coefficient
C2
washoff exponent
equation_SWMMLandUses_004.eps
335
Rating Curve Washoff: The rate of washoff W in mass per second is proportional to the runoff rate raised to some
power.
C1
washoff coefficient
C2
washoff exponent
equation_SWMMLandUses_005.eps
Event Mean Concentration (EMC): This is a special case of Rating Curve Washoff where the exponent (C2) is 1.0
and the coefficient C1 represents the concentration of any and all runoff in mass per liter.
336
Description
Pollutant
Washoff Function
Washoff Coefficient
Washoff Exponent
Cleaning Efficiency
337
Description
Removal Efficiency
Delete
The Land Uses Collection dialog box also contains a table with the following columns:
Column
Description
338
FLOW for flow rate into node (in user-defined flow units)
DEPTH for water depth above node invert (ft or m)
AREA for node surface area (ft2 or m2)
DT for routing time step (sec)
HRT for hydraulic residence time (hours)
The result of the treatment function can be either a concentration (denoted by the letter C) or a fractional removal
(denoted by R). For example, a first-order decay expression for BOD exiting from a storage node might be expressed
as:
C = BOD * exp(-0.05*HRT)
or the removal of some trace pollutant that is proportional to the removal of total suspended solids (TSS) could be
expressed as:
R = 0.75 * R_TSS
To add a treatment collection to a node:
Note: Make sure you set the Engine Type to Explicit (SWMM 5) in the Calculation Options for your project before
computing results.
1. Add a node to your model or select an existing node, then display the Property Editor for the node (double-click the
node or press F4).
2. In the SWMM Extended Data section of the Property Editor, set Apply Treatment? to True. The Treatment field
becomes available.
3. Click the Ellipses (...) button in the Treatment field (where <Collection: 0 items> is displayed) to display the
Treatment Collection dialog box.
4. The Treatment Collection dialog box displays each pollutant and its associated treatment expression as a row in a
table. Click the New button to add a row to the table.
5. Click in the Pollutant field, then select an existing pollutant from the drop-down menu, or click the Ellipses (...)
button to display the Pollutants dialog box, where you define pollutants in your model.
6. Type a treatment expression in the Treatment column.
7. Repeat Steps 4 - 6 for each pollutant you wish to add to the treatment collection.
8. Click OK to close the dialog box and add the collection to the node.
Treatment Collection Dialog Box
The Treatment Collection dialog box lets you add multiple pollutants and their associated treatment expressions to a
node for the purpose of removing pollutants in your model. You access this dialog box from the SWMM Extended Data
section of the Property Editor for the selected node.
The dialog box contains the following toolbar buttons:
339
New
Delete
Report
Description
Pollutant
Lets you add a pollutant to the collection. Click the downarrow to select an existing pollutant from the drop-down
menu, or click the Ellipses (...) button to define new
pollutants.
Treatment
A number of government agencies, universities, and other groups publish educational information, research and design
guidance for implementing LID and LID controls. Places to start include:
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's Low Impact Development website and fact sheet on Low Impact
Development (LID) and Other Green Design Strategies
340
341
A number of government agencies, universities, and other groups publish educational information, research and design
guidance for implementing LID and LID controls. Places to start include:
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency's Low Impact Development website and fact sheet on Low Impact
Development (LID) and Other Green Design Strategies
Low Impact Development Center
Low Impact Development (LID) Urban Design Tools Website
Low-Impact Development (LID) controls as implemented in the software are based on the calculation methods used
in EPA SWMM Version 5.0.
LID controls can only be used in conjunction with the EPA-SWMM Runoff Method.
Only the hydrologic performance is modeled-pollutant removal impacts are not considered.
A LID control element must be associated with a Parent Catchment. The Parent Catchment is the source of
stormwater input to the LID control, and also receives discharge from the LID.
The effect of a LID control on runoff is seen in the computed hydrograph for the LID control's Parent Catchment.
Bioretention cells include facilities such as rain gardens, planters, and green roofs. They typically consist of surface
storage and vegetation, and an engineered soil layer with a gravel drainage layer beneath it. The gravel layer may
include an underdrain system.
Infiltration trenches are trenches filled with gravel that can store stormwater in void spaces while it infiltrates into
surrounding soils. There may also be an underdrain system.
Porous pavement consists of a surface pavement layer (may be continuous porous pavement or block pavers) over a
layer of gravel. The porous surface allows stormwater to enter and be stored in the gravel layer while it infiltrates
into surrounding soils. The gravel layer may include an underdrain system.
Rain barrels are containers that collect runoff from roofs. The captured stormwater can be released at a controlled
rate later, or used for irrigation. (Cisterns are also modeled using the "rain barrel" LID control type.)
342
Vegetative swales are channels or depressions covered with vegetation. They allow time for a portion of intercepted
stormwater to infiltrate the soil.
See Also
Hydrologic Model Representation of LID Controls (on page 343)
Low Impact Development Controls Manager (on page 344)
The model performs a moisture balance that tracks how much water moves between the layers and how much is stored
within each layer. The figure below illustrates the processes considered for a bioretention cell or porous block
pavement system.
The physical and performance characteristics of LID controls are defined in the Low Impact Development Controls
Manager (on page 344) on a per-unit-area basis. Thus, the same LID control design can easily be used in multiple
locations in the network, over differently sized areas.
343
The design of the control is made on a per-unit-area basis so that it can be placed in any number of subcatchments at
different sizes or number of replicates. The editor consists of a list pane on the left that displays all of the LID controls
that have been defined for the project and a tabbed input data area on the right that displays attributes for the selected
LID control.
The buttons in the upper left are as follows:
New: Creates a new inlet definition in the list pane on the left.
344
Report: Lets you generate a preformatted report that contains the input data associated with the currently highlighted
LID control.
Synchronization Options: Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the following commands:
Browse Engineering LibraryOpens the Engineering Library manager dialog, allowing you to browse the LID
control libraries.
Synchronize From LibraryLets you update a set of LID control definitions previously imported from one of the
LID control libraries. The updates reflect changes that have been made to the library since it was imported.
Synchronize To LibraryLets you update one of the existing LID control libraries using current data that was
initially imported but have since been modified.
Import From LibraryLets you import a LID control definition from one of the existing LID control libraries.
Export To LibraryLets you export the current LID control definition to one of the existing LID control libraries.
Connect to LibraryLets you create a connection between the LID control definition and the specified engineering
library.
Layer
Surface
Bioretention
Cell
Porous
Pavement
Pavement
Soil
Storage
Underdrain
345
Drainage Mat
Layer
Infiltration
Trench
Rain Barrel
Vegetative
Swale
Green Roof
Rain Garden
Low Impact Development Control Type: Allows you to select the type of LID Control.
Soil Layer Attributes
The pavement layer attributes are only available when the "Porous Pavement" LID Control Type is selected.
Pavement Thickness: The thickness of the pavement layer (inches or mm). Typical values are 4 to 6 inches (100 to
150 mm).
Pavement Void Ratio: The volume of void space relative to the volume of solids in the pavement for continuous
systems or for the fill material used in modular systems. Typical values for pavements are 0.12 to 0.21. Note that
porosity = void ratio / (1 + void ratio).
Impervious Surface Fraction: Ratio of impervious paver material to total area for modular systems; 0 for continuous
porous pavement systems.
Permeability: Permeability of the concrete or asphalt used in continuous systems or hydraulic conductivity of the fill
material (gravel or sand) used in modular systems (in/hr or mm/hr). The permeability of new porous concrete or
asphalt is very high (e.g., hundreds of in/hr) but can drop off over time due to clogging by fine particulates in the
runoff.
Pavement Clogging Factor: Number of pavement layer void volumes of runoff treated it takes to completely clog
the pavement. Use a value of 0 to ignore clogging. Clogging progressively reduces the pavement's permeability in
direct proportion to the cumulative volume of runoff treated.
If one has an estimate of the number of years it takes to fully clog the system (Yclog), the Clogging Factor can be
computed as: Yclog * Pa * CR * (1 + VR) * (1 - ISF) / (T * VR) where Pa is the annual rainfall amount over the
346
site, CR is the pavement's capture ratio (area that contributes runoff to the pavement divided by area of the
pavement itself), VR is the system's Void Ratio, ISF is the Impervious Surface Fraction, and T is the pavement layer
Thickness.
As an example, suppose it takes 5 years to clog a continuous porous pavement system that serves an area where the
annual rainfall is 36 inches/year. If the pavement is 6 inches thick, has a void ratio of 0.2 and captures runoff only
from its own surface, then the Clogging Factor is 5 x 36 x (1 + 0.2) / 6 / 0.2 = 180.
Storage Layer Attributes
The storage layer attributes are available for all LID Control Types except Vegetative Swale.
Height: This is the height of a rain barrel or thickness of a gravel layer (inches or mm). Crushed stone and gravel
layers are typically 6 to 18 inches (150 to 450 mm) thick while single family home rain barrels range in height from
24 to 36 inches (600 to 900 mm).
Storage Void Ratio: The volume of void space relative to the volume of solids in the layer. Typical values range
from 0.5 to 0.75 for gravel beds. Note that porosity = void ratio / (1 + void ratio).
Storage Conductivity: Hydraulic conductivity for the fully saturated soil (in/hr or mm/hr).
Storage Clogging Factor: Total volume of treated runoff it takes to completely clog the bottom of the layer divided
by the void volume of the layer. Use a value of 0 to ignore clogging. Clogging progressively reduces the Filtration
Rate in direct proportion to the cumulative volume of runoff treated and may only be of concern for infiltration
trenches with permeable bottoms and no under drains.
Surface Layer Attributes
The surface layer attributes are available for all LID Control Types except Rain Barrel.
Surface Storage Depth: When confining walls or berms are present this is the maximum depth to which water can
pond above the surface of the unit before overflow occurs (in inches or mm). For LID controls that experience
overland flow it is the height of any surface depression storage. For swales, it is the height of its trapezoidal cross
section.
Vegetative Cover Fraction: The fraction of the storage area above the surface that is filled with vegetation (i.e.,
volume occupied by leaves, stems, etc.).
Surface Mannings n: Manning's n for overland flow over the surface of porous pavement or a vegetative swale. Use
0 for other types of LID controls.
Surface Slope: Slope of porous pavement surface or vegetative swale (percent). Use 0 for other types of LID
controls.
Swale Side Slope: Slope (run over rise) of the side walls of a vegetative swale's cross section. This attribute is not
presentfor other types of LID controls. If either Surface Roughness or Surface Slope values are 0 then any ponded
water that exceeds the storage depth is assumed to completely overflow the LID control within a single time step.
Underdrain Attributes
An underdrain is available for all LID control types except Vegetative Swale. It is required for Rain Barrels, and
optional for other LID controls.
Drain Coefficient and Drain Exponent: C and exponent n that determines the rate of flow through the underdrain as
a function of height of stored water above the drain height. The following equation is used to compute this flow rate
(per unit area of the LID unit):
where q is outflow (in/hr or mm/hr), h height of stored water (inches or mm), and Hd is the drain height. If the layer
does not have an underdrain then set C to 0. A typical value for n would be 0.5 (making the drain act like an
orifice). A rough estimate for C can be based on the time T required to drain a depth D of stored water. For n = 0.5,
C = 2D1/2/T.
347
Drain Offset Height: Height Hd of any underdrain piping above the bottom of a storage layer or rain barrel.
Drain Delay: The number of dry weather hours that must elapse before the drain line in a rain barrel is opened (the
line is assumed to be closed once rainfall begins). This parameter is only available with Rain Barrels.
Notes Tab
This tab contains a text field that allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be associated with the currently
highlighted LID control.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the LID control that is currently highlighted in the list pane. If the LID control is
derived from an engineering library, the synchronization details can be found here. If the LID control was created
manually for this project, the synchronization details will display the message Orphan (local), indicating that the LID
control was not derived from a library entry.
LID Validations
If the values set for the following attributes fall outside the specified valid range, an error or user notification will be
generated.
348
To use hyperlinks, select Tools > Hyperlink. The Hyperlink dialog box opens.
The hyperlink tool enables the user to associate a photo, word processing document, spreadsheet or other file with a
given model element. Opening the hyperlink opens the file using its associated program (Picture Manager, Word,
Excel, etc.).
The hyperlink can also be opened from the Property grid by picking the Hyperlink property from the grid and clicking
the ellipse button which will open the hyperlink tool.
If a model file is moved to a different computer, the hyperlink will no longer work unless the associated file is moved
to a comparable path on the same computer.
Hyperlinks Dialog Box
The Hyperlinks dialog contains a toolbar and a tabular view of all your existing hyperlinks.
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
349
New
Delete
Edit
Launch
Description
Element Type
Element
Link
Description
Adding a Hyperlink
To add a hyperlink:
Note: You can add more than one associated file to an element using the hyperlink feature, but you must add the
associations one at a time.
1.
2.
3.
4.
350
Element
Link
Description
Editing a Hyperlink
You can edit existing hyperlinks using the Edit Hyperlink dialog box.
To edit a hyperlink:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Description
Deleting a Hyperlink
To delete a hyperlink:
1. Select Tools > Hyperlink. The Hyperlink dialog box opens.
2. Select the hyperlink you want to edit.
351
Queries Manager
The Queries Manager is a docking manager that displays all queries in the current project, including predefined, shared,
and project queries. You can create, edit, or delete shared and project queries from within the Queries Manager, as well
as use it to select all elements in your model that are part of the selected query.
Note that element types that are not used in the current model are marked with an icon
The Queries Manager consists of a toolbar and a tree view, which displays all of the queries that are associated with the
current project. The toolbar contains the following buttons:
352
New
Delete
Rename
Edit
Select in Drawing
Help
353
Creating Queries
A query is a valid SQL expression that you construct in the Query Builder dialog box. You create and manage queries
in the Queries Manager. You also use queries to filter FlexTables and as the basis for a selection set.
To create a query from the Queries Manager:
1. Open the Queries Manager by selecting View > Queries, clicking the Queries button on the View toolbar, or by
pressing CTRL+5.
2. Perform one of the following steps:
3. To create a new project query, highlight Queries - Project in the list pane, then click the New button and select
Query.
4. To create a new shared query, highlight Queries - Shared in the list pane, then click the New button and select
Query. You can also right-click an existing item or folder in the list pane and select New > Query from the shortcut
menu.
5. In the Select Element Type dialog box, select the desired element type from the drop-down menu. The Query
Builder dialog box appears.
6. All input and results fields for the selected element type appear in the Fields list pane, available SQL operators and
keywords are represented by buttons, and available values for the selected field are listed in the Unique Values list
pane. Perform the following steps to construct your query:
7. Double-click the field you wish to include in your query. The database column name of the selected field appears in
the preview pane.
8. Click the desired operator or keyword button. The SQL operator or keyword is added to the SQL expression in the
preview pane.
9. Click the Refresh button above the Unique Values list pane to see a list of unique values available for the selected
field. Note that the Refresh button is disabled after you use it for a particular field (because the unique values do not
change in a single query-building session).
10. Double-click the unique value you want to add to the query. The value is added to the SQL expression in the
preview pane. You can also manually edit the expression in the preview pane.
11. Check the Validate box above the preview pane to validate your SQL expression when the query is applied.
12. Click the Apply button above the preview pane to execute the query. If the expression is valid, the word
VALIDATED is displayed in the lower right corner of the dialog box.
13. Click OK.
354
355
SQL Controls
356
Unique Values
Refresh
Copy
Paste
Validate
Apply
Preview Pane
357
Description
expression
pattern
You can use the Like operator to find values in a field that match the pattern you specify. For pattern, you can specify
the complete value (for example, Like Smith), or you can use wildcard characters to find a range of values (for
example, Like Sm*).
In an expression, you can use the Like operator to compare a field value to a string expression. For example, if you
enter Like C* in an SQL query, the query returns all field values beginning with the letter C. In a parameter query ,
you can prompt the user for a pattern to search for.
The following example returns data that begins with the letter P followed by any letter between A and F and three
digits:
Like P[A-F]###
To search for a string that contains a symbol that is normally a wildcard (*or #) enclose it in brackets like this: [#].
To search using a user defined date field, enclose the date in # symbols like this:
Conduit_Field_1 > #1/1/2009#
The following table shows how you can use Like to test expressions for different patterns.
Kind of match
Pattern
Match(returns True)
No match(returns False)
Multiple characters
a*a
aBC
*ab*
aZb, bac
Special character
a[*]a
a*a
aaa
Multiple characters
ab*
abcdefg, abc
cab, aab
Single character
a?a
aBBBa
Single digit
a#a
aaa, a10a
Range of characters
[a-z]
f, p, j
2, &
Outside a range
[!a-z]
9, &, %
b, a
Not a digit
[!0-9]
A, a, &, ~
0, 1, 9
Combined
a[!b-m]#
abc, aj0
358
Create a query to isolate the group of objects. (Go to View->Query->Create a New Query under Query- Project)
Query for All Conduits with Diameter>12 inches.
Now go to the Conduit Flex Tables.
Right Click on any Column and Choose Filter By Query.
Choose the Newly Created Query.
The Flex Table will now display only the Group of Conduits with Diameter >12 inches.
Controls
Controls in the GVF Solver give the user a way to specify an action for virtually any element in a pressure subnetwork
based on almost any property of the system. Controls are included in a scenario when the control set they are included
in is specified in the Operational Alternative. The controls become part of an Operational Alternative when you specify
the name of a Control Set to use in a given Operational Alternative. The default control set is All control statements.
The Control Manager is the main work center for controls. The Control Manager manages all controls, conditions,
actions, and control sets in the system. The Control manager allows the user to define controls using advanced IF,
AND, and OR condition logic, which can trigger any number of THEN or optional ELSE actions.
Choose Components > Controls to open the Control Manager.
359
Controls--Manage all controls defined in the system. See Controls Tab (on page 360).
Conditions--Define the condition that must be met prior to taking an action. See Conditions Tab (on page 362).
Actions--Define what should be done to an element in the system in response to an associated control condition. See
Actions Tab (on page 367).
Controls Tab
The Controls tab allows you to manage all controls defined in the system. Controls can be one of two types: simple or
logical. Simple controls are made up of an IF condition and a THEN action statement. Logical controls are made up of
an IF condition, a THEN action, and an optional ELSE action, and can be assigned a priority for resolving potential
conflicts between logical controls.
Controls, Conditions, and Actions are assigned a non-editable application-provided ID (e.g., LC01).
The Controls tab is divided into sections:
The pane in the center of the dialog box is the Controls List. This list displays a list of all Logical Controls defined
in the system.
Located above the Controls List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
NewCreates a new control.
DeleteDeletes the highlighted control.
DuplicateOpens a submenu with the following options:
360
Action ElementWhen an Action filter other than <All> is specified, only controls containing the selected Action
element will be displayed in the Controls list. You can filter the available actions to include only actions that are
applicable to the element or elements that are currently selected in the drawing pane by selecting the <Current
Selection> option.
Note: You can selected one or more controls in the list, and then right-click to Edit Control Sets for Selected
Controls.
You can edit or create controls consisting of an IF condition, a THEN action, and an optional ELSE action. The lower
pane is split into sections:
Note: At calculation time, the priority is used to determine the logical control to apply when multiple controls
require that conflicting actions be taken. Logical controls with identical priorities will be prioritized based on the
order they appear in the Logical Control Set alternative. A rule without a priority value always has a lower
priority than one with a value. For two rules with the same priority value, the rule that appears first is given the
higher priority.
Relative speed pump patterns take precedence over any controls (simple or logical) that are associated with the
pump.Hovering the mouse cursor over a control in the list will open a tooltip which displays the conditions and actions
that make up that control.When creating a new condition or action for a new control, the condition and action input
fields will be initialized with the data used in the last condition or action that was created. Once created, the Logical
Control will be assigned an application generated ID (e.g., LC04).
DescriptionThis area is preset with a default description. There is an option to change the default description. To
do so, turn on to activate the description field, and enter your description in the text box.
SummaryThis area of the dialog box displays a description of the control.
Status PaneWhen one or more filters are active, the lower left corner of the dialog will show the number of
controls currently displayed out of the number of total controls. Additionally, a FILTERED flag is displayed in the
lower right corner.
Note: Logical Controls are not executed during Steady State analyses.
Logical controls consist of any combination of simple conditions and simple actions. Controls are defined as:
IFCondition 1 AND condition 2 OR condition 3 AND condition 4, etc., where condition X is a a condition
clause.THENAction 1 AND action 2, etc. where action X is an action clause.ELSE (Optional)Action 3 AND action 4,
etc. where action X is an action clause.Priority (Optional)Priority where priority is a priority value (1 to 5, 5 being the
highest priority).
In addition to the high level of flexibility provided by allowing multiple conditions and actions, the functionality of
Logical controls is also enhanced by the range of Condition types that are available. You can activate the stated actions
361
Conditions Tab
362
363
364
365
366
Actions Tab
Actions allow you to define what should be done to an element in the system in response to an associated control
condition. The Actions tab provides a list of all actions defined in the system. There are two types of actions: simple
actions and composite actions. Actions have an application-provided non-editable ID (e.g., A01 for simple, AA01 for
composite).
The Actions tab is divided into sections:
The Actions List displays a list of all logical actions defined in the system. The list contains four columns: ID (the
application defined ID, e.g., A01 for simple, AA01 for composite), Type (simple or composite), description, and
references (logical control references).
Located above the Conditions List is a toolbar with the following buttons:
NewOpens the New Logical Action dialog box, where you can create a new logical action.
EditDepending on whether a simple or composite action is highlighted, this button opens the Simple Logical
Action or Composite Logical Action dialog box, which allows you to edit the highlighted action.
DeleteDeletes the highlighted action. You will be prompted to confirm this action.
FindOpens the Find Logical Action dialog box, which allows you to find a particular action based on a variety of
criteria.
ReportGenerates a summary of the highlighted action.
Below the toolbar is a set of filters that allow you to only display controls that meet criteria defined by the filter
settings. The following filters are available:
Control SetWhen a control set is specifed, only actions that are a component of that control set are displayed in
the Actions list.
367
TypeWhen a Type filter other than <All> is specified, only actions of that type will be displayed in the Actions
list.
Action ElementWhen an Action Element filter other than <All> is specified, only actions containing the selected
Element will be displayed in the Actions list. You can filter the available actions to include only actions that are
applicable to the element or elements that are currently selected in the drawing pane by selecting the <Current
Selection> option.
The controls used to create or edit an action vary depending on whether the action is simple or composite:
Simple Actions
The following controls are used to define or edit Simple Actions:
ElementThe Element field allows you to specify which element the action will be based upon and provides three
methods of choosing this element. The drop-down list displays elements that have been used in other logical
controls, the Ellipsis () button, which opens the Single Element Selection box, and the Select From Drawing
button, which allows you to select the element using the graphical Drawing view.
AttributeThis field displays the available attributes for the element type specified in the Element field. Not all
attributes are available for all element types. The available attributes include:
Status This attribute is used to change the status of a pipe, pump, or valve when the related conditions are met.
The available choices are dependant on the element type.
SettingThis attribute is used to change the settings of a pump or valve when the related conditions are met. The
setting type varies depending on the type of element.
Pump Head (Target) This attribute is available for variable speed pumps or batteries to modify the target head of
a parallel VSP group (the change can apply to one of the pumps belonging to a parallel VSP group) or of a VSPB.
Pump Pressure (Target) This attribute is available for variable speed pumps or batteries to modify the target
pressure of a parallel VSP group (the change can apply to one of the pumps belonging to a parallel VSP group) or of
a VSPB.
Note: Pipes can only utilize the Status Attribute, Pumps and all Valves except for the GPV can utilize either the
Status or Setting Attribute. GPVs can only use the Status Attribute.
For all valves except for the GPV, there is no explicit Active status with which to base a control uponthe status
choices are Inactive or Closed. After a control sets a valve to Inactive or Closed, to reactivate the valve another control
must be created with a Setting attribute. This is because a valve cannot be set to Active, but must have specific input
data to work with. For GPVs, there is no Inactive setting. GPVs can only be set to Active or Closed. If the GPV is not
closed, the valve will always produce the headlosses associated with it through the Head-Discharge Points table.
Note: Pipes can be set to Open or Closed, Pumps can be set to On, Off, or have their relative speed factors
increase or decrease. GPVs can be set to Active or Closed. All other valves can be set to Inactive, Closed, or have
their respective settings changed, depending on the Valve type.
DescriptionThis area of the dialog box is preset with a default description. There is an option to change the default
description. To do so, click the check box to activate the description field, and enter your description in the text box.
Additionally, the description field supports the following expandable masks:
368
ID
%e
Element
%a
Attribute
%o
Operator
%v
Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the additional benefit of automatically
updating the corresponding information when changes are made to the various control components.
Note: Click the description list box to select one of the predefined masks.
SummaryThis area of the dialog displays an automatically updated preview of the expanded description.
Composite Actions
When a Composite Action is being defined or edited, the lower section of the dialog box is comprised of a single
column table and two buttons. The Table contains a list of the Actions to be used. Each row is a drop-down list that
allows you to choose an action that was already created beforehand.
InsertAdds a new row to the Action list
DeleteDeletes the highlighted row from the Action list.
DescriptionThis area of the dialog box is preset with a default description. There is an option to change the default
description. To do so, click the check box to activate the description field, and enter your description in the text box.
Additionally, the description field supports the following expandable masks:
%#
ID
%v
Value
Aside from reducing the amount of data input, using these masks provides the additional benefit of automatically
updating the corresponding information when changes are made to the various control components.
Note: Click the description list box to select one of the predefined masks.
Composite logical actions consist of multiple simple logical actions. These actions are linked with an AND statement.
SummaryThis area of the dialog box displays an automatically updated preview of the expanded description.
369
NewOpens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box. From this window, you can add previously created logical
controls to the new control set.
EditOpens the Logical Control Set editor dialog box, which allows you to edit the highlighted control set.
DuplicatePrompts for a name, then opens the Logical Control Set editor to allow you to add or remove controls
from the control set.
DeleteDeletes the highlighted control set. You will be prompted to confirm this action.
RenameAllows you to rename the highlighted control set.
ReportGenerates a summary of the highlighted control set, listing the ID, conditions, actions, and elements for all
of the logical controls contained within the control set.
370
The left pane, labeled Available Items, contains a list of all of the logical controls that have been created in the current
project. To add controls to the Selected Items pane on the right, highlight the desired controls and click the [>] button
under Add. To add all of the controls to your Logical Control set, click the [>>] button under Add. To remove a control
from the Selected Items pane, highlight it and click the [<] button under Remove. To remove all controls from the
Selected Items pane, click the [<<] button under Remove.
Note: Priority is based upon the order that the controls appear in this dialog box. The first control in the control
set has the highest priority, and so on. Any control with a set priority will overrule any control with no set
priority.
371
372
Note that element types that are not used in the current model are marked with an icon:
373
Import
Export to XML
New
Sharing
Delete
Rename
Expand All
Collapse All
374
Alphabetized
Categorized
and the following fields, which define your new user data extension:
Attribute
Description
General
Name
The unique identifier for the field. The name field in the
Property Editor is the name of the column in the data
source.
Label
The label that will appear next to the field for the user
data extension in the Property Editor for the selected
element type. This is also the column heading if the data
extension is selected to appear in a FlexTable.
Category
Field Description
Alternative
Referenced By
Displays all the element types that are using the field. For
example, if you create a field called "Installation Date"
and you set it up to be shared, this field will show the
element types that share this field. So for example, if you
set up a field to be shared by manholes and catch basins,
the Referenced By field would show "Manhole, Catch
Basin".
375
Description
Units
Data Type
Lets you specify the data type for the user data extension.
Click the down arrow in the field then select one of the
following data types from the drop-down menu: Integer
Any positive or negative whole number. Real Any
fractional decimal number (for example, 3.14). It can also
be unitized with the provided options. Text Any string
(text) value up to 255 characters long. Long Text Any
string (text) up to 65,526 characters long. Date/Time
The current date. The current date appears by default in
the format month/day/year. Click the down arrow to
change the default date. Boolean True or False.
Enumerated When you select this data type, an Ellipses
button appears in the Default Value field. Click the
Ellipses (...) button to display the Enumeration Editor
dialog box, where you can add enumerated members and
their associated values. For more information, see
Enumeration Editor Dialog Box (on page 380). Real
(Formula) Allows you to define a formula to populate
the data value.
Default Value
The default value for the user data extension. The default
value must consistent with the selected data type. If you
chose Enumerated as the data type, click the Ellipses (...)
button to display the Enumeration Editor.
Dimension
Lets you specify the unit type. Click the drop-down arrow
in the field to see a list of all available dimensions. This
field is available only when you select Real as the Data
Type.
Storage Unit
Lets you specify the storage units for the field. Click the
drop-down arrow in the field to see a list of all available
units; the units listed change depending on the Dimension
you select. This field is available only when you select
Real as the Data Type.
Numeric Formatter
Lets you select a number format for the field. Click the
drop-down arrow in the field to see a list of all available
number formats; the number formats listed change
depending on the Dimension you select. For example, if
you select Flow as the Dimension, you can select Flow,
Flow - Pressurized Condition, Flow Tolerance, or Unit
Load as the Numeric Formatter. This field is available
only when you select Real as the Data Type.
376
377
Fields
Operators
Copy
Paste
378
Indicates a user data extension that has been saved to the data source.
Indicates a user data extension that is shared among multiple element types but has not been applied to the data
source.
Indicates a user data extension that is shared among multiple element types and that has been applied to the data
source. Fields with this icon appear in the Property Editor for any elements of the associated element types that
appear in your model.
Observe the following rules when sharing user data extensions:
You can select any number of element types with which to share the field. The list is limited to element types that
support the Alternative defined for the Field. For example, the Physical Alternative may only apply to five of the
element types. In this case, you will only see these five items listed in the Alternative drop-down menu.
You cannot use the sharing feature to move a field from one element type to another. Validation is in place to
ensure that only one item is selected and if it is the same as the original, default selection. If it is not, a message
appears telling you that when sharing a field, you must select at least two element types, or select the original
element type.
To unshare a field that is shared among multiple element types, right-click the user data extension you want to keep
in the list pane, then select Sharing. Clear all the element types that do not want to share the field with and click
OK. If you leave only one element type checked in the Shared Field Specification dialog box, it must be the original
element type for which you created the user data extension.
The fields that were located under the catch basin and conduit element type root nodes will be removed completely.
You can also unshare a field by using the Delete button or right-clicking and selecting Delete. This will unshare and
delete the field.
379
New: Lets you add a new row to the table. Each row in the table represents a unique enumerated member of the
current user data extension.
Delete: Deletes the current row from the table. The enumerated member defined in that row is deleted from the user
data extension.
You define enumerated members in the table, which contains the following columns:
Enumeration Member Display Label: The label of the member. This is the label you will see in where ever the user
data extension appears (Property Editor, FlexTables, etc.).
Enumeration Value: A unique integer index associated with the member label. The software uses this number when
it performs operations such as queries.
External Tools
Use the External Tool Manager to manage custom menu commands, which are then located in the Tools menu for
quick accessibility.
Click Tools>External Tools to create a custom menu command from any executable file. Executable file types include:
.exe
.com
.pif
.bat
.cmd
External Tool List Pane--This pane lists the external tools that have been created. All of the tools listed in this pane
will be displayed in the Tools > External Tools menu.
New--Creates a new external tool in the list pane.
Delete--Deletes the currently highlighted tool.
Rename--Allows you to rename the currently highlighted tool.
380
Command--This field allows you to enter the full path to the executable file that the tool will initiate. Click the
ellipsis button to open a Windows Open dialog to allow you to browse to the executable.
Arguments--This optional field allows you to enter command line variables that are passed to the tool or command
when it is activated. Click the > button to open a submenu containing predefined arguments. Arguments containing
spaces must be enclosed in quotes. The available arguments are:
Project Directory--This argument passes the current project directory to the executable upon activation of the tool.
The argument string is %(ProjDir).
Project File Name--This argument passes the current project file name to the executable upon activation of the tool.
The argument string is %(ProjFileName).
Project Store File Name--This argument passes the current project datastore file name to the executable upon
activation of the tool. The argument string is %(ProjStoreFileName).
Working Directory--This argument passes the current working directory to the executable upon activation of the
tool. The argument string is %(ProjWorkDir).
Initial Directory--Specifies the initial or working directory of the tool or command. Click the > button to open a
submenu containing predefined directory variables. The available variables are:
Project Directory--This variable specifies the current project directory as the Initial Directory. The variable string is
%(ProjDir).
Working Directory--This variable specifies the current working directory as the Initial Directory. The variable string
is %(ProjWorkDir).
Test--This button executes the external tool using the specified settings.
The user first selects the name of the scenario for which the hydraulic reviewer will be performed using a drop down
list of scenarios. The calculation of the scenario must already have been run and the output file should not have been
deleted.
381
Wet Wells
Catch basins
Manholes
Ponds
The user can also use a drop down list of any previously created selection set of node elements on which to perform the
review. The default is All Active Nodes.
Picking the green Go arrow starts the calculation which for each node determines the inflow, outflow and overflow
volumes over the course of the runs and the percent deviation from perfect flow balance as
Flow Deviation (node) = 100% (In - out - over - change in storage)/Duration
Deviation (node) = 100% (In - out - over - change in storage)/In
Deviation (system) = 100% (In - out - over - change in storage)/Total System Inflow
The results are presented in decreasing order based on Error. Any column can be sorted, filtered or have the display
format changed as with any other flex table.
On some occasions the Deviation (node) may appear large but this is primarily due to the inflow volume being very
small. Users may want to discount the importance of any errors at nodes where the inflow rates (and deviations) are on
the order of 0.1 cfs or less.
Pipe Flow Statistics
The Pipe flow statistics tab provides an indication of the change of flow rates from one time step to the next.
To use this tab, the user can chose All Pipes (the default) or any selection set of pipes. The calculation is run by picking
the green Go arrow. It will display a table like the one below, sorted in order of decreasing Maximum Deviation.
382
High values for Maximum Deviation do not necessarily indicate that the model contains errors or is unstable. Some
pipe links have very large changes in flow from one time step to another such as in the case of a pump cycling on an
off. In some cases, numerical models can overshoot the calculated flow when the flow rate changes abruptly. This
effect usually dies out after one or two time steps. Nevertheless, the Maximum Deviation can serve as an indicator of
locations with possible stability issues.
Once the calculations have been performed, the user can export the values to a previously created User Defined
Property so that the values can be used in color coding, flex tables, etc. Click on Export to Model to reach the dialog
below and select Export to actually export the numerical values.
If the user defined property doesn't exist, the user can create one by picking the ellipse button and following the
instructions for user data extensions. Note that the user defined property the data will be exported to must use the
following settings
Data Type: Real
Dimension: Percent
Storage Unit: Percent
383
Delete
Rename
Go to View
Help
384
TRex Wizard
The TRex Wizard steps you through the process of automatically assigning elevations to specified nodes based on data
from a Digital Elevation Model or a Digital Terrain Model.
Step 1: File Selection
The data source file, the Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT model, and the features to which elevations will be assigned
are specified.
Data Source Type--This menu allows you to choose the type of file that contains the input data you will use.
Supported data source types include: Bentley .tin, Bentley .dtm, Bentley .fil, .dwg point, .dxf point, .dwg
contour, .dxf contour,LandXML .xml, and Esri .shp.
File--This field displays the path where the data source file is located. Use the browse button to find and select the
desired file.
Spatial Reference (ArcGIS Mode Only)--Click the Ellipsis (...) next to this field to open the Spatial Reference
Properties dialog box, allowing you to specify the spatial reference being used by the elevation data file.
Select Elevation Field--Select the elevation unit.
X-Y Units--This menu allows the selection of the measurement unit type associated with the X and Y coordinates of
the elevation data file.
Z Units--This menu allows the selection of the measurement unit type associated with the Z coordinates of the
elevation data file.
Clip Dataset to Model--In some cases, the data source contains elevation data for an area that exceeds the
dimensions of the area being modeled. When this box is checked, TRex will calculate the models bounding box,
find the larger dimension (width or height), calculate the Buffering Percentage of that dimension, and increase both
the width and height of the model bounding box by that amount. Then any data point that falls outside of the new
bounding box will not be used to generate the elevation mesh. If this box isnt checked, all the source data points are
used to generate the elevation mesh. Checking this box should result in faster calculation speed and use less
memory.
Buffering Percentage--This field is only active when the Clip Dataset to Model box is checked. The percentage
entered here is the percentage of the larger dimension (width or height) of the models bounding box that will be
added to both the bounding box width and height to find the area within which the source data points will be used to
build the elevation mesh.
Spatial Reference (ArcGIS Mode Only)--Click the Ellipsis (...) next to this field to open the Spatial Reference
Properties dialog box, allowing you to specify the spatial reference being used by the Bentley SewerCAD
CONNECT model file.
Also update inactive elements--Check this box to include inactive elements in the elevation assignment operation.
When this box is unchecked, elements that are marked Inactive will be ignored by TRex.
All--When this button is selected, TRex will attempt to assign elevations to all nodes within the Bentley SewerCAD
CONNECT model.
Selection--When this button is selected, TRex will attempt to assign elevations to all currently highlighted nodes.
Selection Set--When this is selected, the Selection Set menu is activated. When the Selection Set button is selected,
TRex will assign elevations to all nodes within the selection set that is specified in this menu.
Note: If the Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT model (which may or may not have a spatial reference explicitly
associated with it) is in a different spatial reference than the DEM/DTM (which does have a spatial reference
explicitly associated with it), then the features of the model will be projected from the models spatial reference
to the spatial reference used by the DEM/DTM.
Step 2: Completing the TRex Wizard
385
Results Preview Pane--This tabular pane displays the elevations that were calculated by TRex. The table can be
sorted by label by clicking the Label column heading and by elevation by clicking the Elevation column heading.
You can filter the table by right-clicking a column in the table and selecting the Filter...Custom command. You can
also right-click any of the values in the elevation column to change the display options.
Use Existing Alternative--When this is selected, the results will be applied to the physical alternative that is selected
in the Use Existing Alternative menu. This menu allows the selection of the physical alternative to which the results
will be applied.
New Alternative --When this is selected, the results will be applied to a new physical alternative. First, the currently
active physical alternative will be duplicated, then the results generated by TRex will be applied to the newly
created alternative. The name of this new alternative must be supplied in the New Alternative text field.
Parent Alternative--Select an alternative to duplicate from the menu, or select <None> to create a new Base
alternative.
Export Results--This exports the results generated by TRex to a tab or comma-delimited text file (.TXT). These files
can then be re-used by Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT or imported into other programs.
Click Finish when complete, or Cancel to close without making any changes.
Customization Profiles can be created for a single project or shared across projects. There are also a number of
predefined profiles.
386
Delete
Rename
Duplicate
Edit
Help
387
Where:
Gu = upstream ground
Gd = downstream ground
Zu = upstream invert
Zd = downstream invert
N = number of additional manholes
D = diameter (rise) of downstream pipe
In SewerGEMS V8i, element property inferencing is only available for gravity elements.
388
389
Layout Type: Identify whether the inferencing tool should Layout New Elements or Follow Existing path.
Upstream Node and Downstream node: Pick the upstream and downstream nodes between which element properties
are to be inferred. Click on the Ellipse () button to select the element from the drawing. Picking the element
automatically returns control to this dialog. It is important that all data for the upstream and downstream elements
already be entered when opening this dialog. If for example ground elevations are missing from a node, then the
user should close this dialog and enter that data before opening this dialog.
Downstream pipe: Field is automatically filled in when the user picks the Downstream Node. If the user has
attached more than a single downstream conduit to the downstream node, an error is generated.
Interpolate ground elevations, Interpolate invert elevations and Overwrite pipe properties: If checked, the inference
tool will overwrite default values in the nodes and pipes between the upstream and downstream nodes. However, if
the user has manually assigned properties to these elements, those properties will be retained. These check boxes are
only available when Follow Existing Path has been selected because for new elements (Layout New Elements), the
user has no choice but to accept inferred values. The default elevation is 0 and default pipe size is 12 in. (300 mm).
If the ground elevation has been set to 512 ft (156 m) and the pipe size set to 18 in. (450 mm), then the inference
tool will only interpolate invert elevations for those elements.
Number of New Nodes: This field is only available when the user has selected "Layout New Elements." If the user
sets this value to N, the inference tool will place N nodes and N+1 conduits (of equal length) in a straight line
between the upstream and downstream nodes. For example, if the distance is 1376 ft (419 m) and the user wants 2
new elements, then the inferencing tool will add two manholes and three pipes each 459 ft (140 m) long.
Create new scenario: If the user checks this box, the tool will prompt for the name and the parent scenario for the
scenario being created. If the user does not check this box, then the new elements and properties will be placed in
the current scenario.
When a new scenario is created and the Parent Scenario is set to None, the alternatives that make up the scenario are
selected based on the first scenario listed in the Scenario Manager, usually the Base scenario. After the Element
Property Inferencing tool creates a scenario, ensure that the other alternatives in the new scenario are set up properly
(double-check active topology, inflows, initial setting, etc.).
Parent scenario: Name of parent scenario if new scenario is being created.
New scenario label: Name of new scenario if new scenario is being created.
Override alternative label: When a new scenario is being created, the user can check this box if the user wants to
control the name of the new physical alternative being created. If not, then the default new name is used.
New alternative label: if the "Override alternative label" box is checked, then the user provides the new name here.
Interpolate: Starts the inferencing calculations.
Close: Closes this dialog. Inferencing settings are saved for the project session. Once the project is closed, all
settings are lost. However, the user can open the dialog, setup the reach and close this dialog if additional input
information is required. When the user reopens the dialog (as long as the project was not closed), the settings will be
restored.
Help: Opens this Help.
Note: Note that no new Active Topology alternative is created by this tool. This is not an issue for the Follow
Existing Path option since no new elements are created, but can be for the Layout New Elements options. In the
latter case, the user should consider whether it is more desirable to create a new active topology alternative
before running the inferencing tool.
It is advisable to have all elements created and property data entered before opening this tool. New data cannot be
entered when this dialog is open.
Example
390
391
392
If on the other hand, the system was already laid out with no elevation data for MH-7 and MH-8 and only default pipe
sizes (12 in., 300 mm) for CO-6, CO-7 and CO-8, the profile would initially look like this.
393
After running, Follow Existing Path, the profile looks like this with correct elevations and pipe size set to 20 in. based
on the downstream conduit properties.
394
i-Models
The term i-models is used to describe a type of Bentley file (container) which can be used to share data between
applications. The formal definition of an i-model is:
395
Publishing an i-model
To create an i-model, select File > Export > Publish i-model once the desired scenario and time-steps have been
selected.
The following dialog opens with the defaults set so that all elements and properties are included in the i-model.
396
.
The Properties box on the right side of the dialog shows the properties that are imported for that element type.
If the box for "Publish project elements in 3D" is selected, the elements will be published in 3D.
The main motivation behind allowing publishing geometries in 3D is to enable clash-detection. That feature is expected
to be more important for gravity hydraulic products, but it is included with pressure-based applications as well. The
basic functionality regarding this topic can be summarized as:
Node cells' z-coordinates are assigned according to their elevation values, at their cell's insertion point.
When all settings are established for all element types, the user picks OK.
Upon starting the publishing, the user is asked for the file name for the .dgn file that will contain the i-model. The user
names the file and path as with any other Windows application.
Cell Libraries
Two cell libraries are used during i-model publishing, one for 2D and one for 3D.Default cell libraries are installed with
the product and these can be customized by the user. The files are Sewer2D.cel and Sewer3D.cel, and can be found in
the Bentley\SewerGEMS8 directory.
If no cell library is found, default cells are used (e.g. a circle in 2D and a sphere in 3D).
397
Seed Files
Users may want to customize the seed-file that will be used for the publishing of an i-model. In that case, one or more
of the following files need to be created in the Bentley\SewerGEMS8 directory:
Seed Files
File Name
Description
hmimodelseed2dsi.dgn
2D / SI Units
hmimodelseed3dsi.dgn
3D / SI Units
hmimodelseed2dus.dgn
2D / US Units
hmimodelseed3dus.dgn
3D / US Units
If the appropriate user-customized seed file is not found, a default one will be used.
Viewing an i-model
It is anticipated that numerous applications will be able to view and use i-models. Initially, i-models can be view using:
Bentley View
ProjectWise Navigator
Microstation
In all of these applications, it is possible to open an i-model by browsing to the i-model when the ap starts and opening
the file.
If the model is not visible, pick the "Fit View" button. This should make the model visible. From this view, it is
possible to use other commands such as zooming and panning to navigate around the drawing.
To view the properties of individual elements, pick the Element Information button or pick Edit > Information in
Bentley View or Review > Information in ProjectWise Navigator. The user can then select and element and its
properties will be displayed.
The user can collapse or expand any category in the window.
In Microstation and Navigator, it is also possible to view tabular element data for each element type by selecting File >
Item browser. This opens the Items browser for element types as shown below:
Double clicking on one of the element types or picking the "Show Details" button from the top of the dialog, opens a
table for that element type.
If the tree is expanded before selecting Show Details and an individual element is selected, the user will see properties
for the selected element.
Automatic Design
StormCAD allows you to design many parts of the sewer network, including gravity piping and structures. The design
is flexible enough to allow you to specify the elements to be designed, from a single pipe size to the entire system.
398
399
Gravity Pipe
Node
Inlet
Default Constraints
Extended Design
400
Part Full Design Tab: The Part Full Design tab consists of the following controls:
Is Part Full Design?When checked, allows you to specify the Percent Full target to be used by the design
algorithm.
Percent Full Constraint TypeAllows you to specify how the Percent Full constraints are defined. When Simple is
chosen, a single Percentage Full value is selected. When Table is chosen, you can specify multiple Rise vs Percent
Full points in tabular format.
Percentage FullSpecify the Percent Full value to be used when the Is Part Full Design? box is checked. This
control is only availble when the Percent Full Constraint Type is set to Simple.
Number of Barrels Tab: The Number of Barrels tab consists of the following controls:
Allow Multiple Barrels?When checked, allows the design algorithm to use more than one identical section in
parallel, up to the specified Maximum Number of Barrels.
Maximum Number of BarrelsThe maximum number of identical sections allowed to be used in parallel when the
Allow Multiple Barrels? box is checked.
401
Section Size Tab: The Section Size tab consists of the following controls:
Limit Section Size?When checked, limits the pipe section height to the specified Maximum Rise value during the
design process.
Maximum RiseThe maximum rise a section height is allowed to be used in the design when the Limit Section
Size? box is checked.
Node Tab
This tab lets you specify the design constraints to be used by default for all gravity structures when performing
calculations in design mode. During an automatic design, the program will adjust the elevations of the pipes adjacent to
the structure according to the structure's matching constraints. The two choices for matching are Inverts and Crowns.
Additionally, the downstream pipe can be offset from the upstream pipe(s) by a specified amount. This value is called
the Matchline Offset. Optionally, the program supports the design of drop structures. In some situations, drop structures
can minimize pipe cover depths while maintaining adequate hydraulic performance.
Inlet Tab
This tab lets you specify the design constraints to be used for all inlets when performing a calculation run in design
mode. During an automatic design, the program will adjust the length of the inlet in order to meet the design
constraints.
For an inlet in sag, the Default In Sag Design Constraints consist of maintaining the gutter spread and water depth
under a given value.
For an inlet on a grade, the Default on Grade Design Constraints consist of ensuring that at least a given percentage
of the gutter flow is intercepted.
Maximum Spread in SagThe maximum allowed spread of water at the inlet, measured from the curb.
Maximum Gutter Depth in SagThe maximum depth of water allowed at the inlet.
402
Design Priorities
Unfortunately, it is not always possible to automate a design that meets all desired constraints. With this in mind, there
are certain priorities that are considered when the automated design is performed. These priorities are in place to try to
minimize the effect on existing portions of the system while providing appropriate capacity in the designed pipes.
While this sequence does not go into complete detail regarding the design process, it does indicate the general priorities
for the automated design. The priorities, of course, only deal with elements that are being designed. If a pipe has fixed
inverts or is not to be designed at all, some or all of these criteria obviously do not apply.
A Designed Pipe Should Fit within Adjacent Existing Structures
If a pipe connects to an existing structure, the pipe rise should be completely within the existing structure. The only
time this may be violated is if there are no available section sizes that would not violate that condition (i.e., the existing
structure height is so small that all available pipes have rises too big). In this very unlikely condition, the smallest
available section size will be selected, with the invert elevation placed at the bottom of the structure.
A Designed Pipe Should Not Have a Crown Above an Adjacent Designed Structure
Where pipe inverts are fixed, it is possible that the required section size would cause the pipe crown to be higher than
the top elevation of an adjacent designed structure. If all available pipe section rises are greater than the depth of the
pipe invert, the smallest pipe size will be chosen.
Note: This situation will only be encountered in situations where the structure's top elevation is set equal to the
ground elevation - otherwise, the structure will be designed with a higher top elevation.
403
404
Calculate flow travel time of non-design pipe if including flow travel time is selected
Conduit discharge calculation (Include flow travel time in system Tc calculation)
Get conduit minimum size
Get conduit maximum size
Adjust upstream invert to match upstream minimum cover
Adjust upstream invert to match upstream structure (to match matchline offset)
Adjust downstream invert to match downstream minimum cover
Adjust downstream invert to match minimum slope
Adjust downstream invert to match downstream fixed structure
Adjust upstream invert to match maximum slope
Adjust upstream invert to match fixed structure
Adjust downstream invert to match minimum slope
Adjust downstream invert to match fixed structure
Adjust conduit size for Capacity to match discharge (Calculate conduit flow travel time if including flow travel time
is selected)
405
After designing all pipes from upstream to downstream, we design all pipes from downstream to upstream. For each
conduit, we run the following main steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Design Considerations
As with any automated design, the program's design is intended only as a preliminary step. It will select pipe sizes and
pipe invert elevations based on the input provided, but no computer program can match the skills that an experienced
engineer has. The modeler should always review any automated design, and should make any changes required to
adjust, improve, and otherwise polish the system.
Using PondMaker
PondMaker is a feature that streamlines detention pond design by guiding you step-by-step through this process.
PondMaker also assists by keeping track of information such as target outflows, pond volume estimates, outlet structure
design trials, peak pond outflows, and maximum water surface elevations for multiple storm events and/or multiple
ponds. With the click of a button, the numbers in this spreadsheet update automatically.
Note: A PondMaker worksheet contains the design data for multiple design trials of a single pond. If you have
more than one pond in your system and wish to use PondMaker, you will need to set up a separate worksheet for
each.
The PondMaker dialog box helps organize and reduce pond design iterations by systematically guiding you through the
following iterative pond design sequence:
1. Set up predevelopment and postdevelopment scenarios and alternatives. This step should be completed before you
open PondMaker.
2. Create PondMaker worksheet and enter design scenario configuration to establish target outflow rates.
3. Estimate Pond Storage Requirements.
4. Create Pond Dimensions.
5. Outlet Design and Analysis.
6. Routing Analysis.
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
SCADAConnect Overview
SCADAConnect is the name given to several types of features aimed at better integrating hydraulic models with
operational data. This is sometimes referred to as "Live Modeling" or "Real Time Modeling" but since it often involves
a SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) system, the name SCADAConnect is used in Bentley products.
Several different groups of features are covered by the SCADAConnect name including:
1. Ability to import field data from SCADA systems, data loggers and other external data sources for use in modeling.
2. Ability to run hydraulic analyses from a simplified user interface developed for operations personnel who are not
full-time modelers.
3. Ability to display model results in a SCADA Human Machine Interface (HMI).
4. Ability to establish alarms and alerts to help review model runs.
Each of these groups of features is described further below.
Importing Data to Hydraulic Models
The users can connect the model to external data using a SCADA element which the user places in the model and
connects between a model element and a value in an external data source (see SCADA Element) to enable the model to
import data from an external source. Each of these SCADA elements represents an individual signal (tag). In the
SCADA element, the user defines the model element (e.g. J-22) and property (field) (e.g. Pressure) associated with the
SCADA signal. At the same time, the user identifies the external signal under Components > SCADA signals (see
428
429
SCADAConnect Toolbar
When the user selects Tools > SCADAConnect, the following toolbar becomes available:
The first button opens the SCADA signals dialog which can also be reached from Components > SCADA Signals. This
is where connections and signal mappings are created (see SCADA Signals Dialog-618 (on page 430)).
The second button opens the SCADA flex tables which can also be opened from View > Flex Tables. It enables the
user to view SCADA and model values in the same table.
The third button opens the initial setting dialog which enables the user to select a time and import values of certain
properties into the initial conditions alternative such as wet well and pump status (seeInitial Setting Import
Dialog-626 (on page 436)).
The fourth button creates a SCADAConnect log which enables the user to view what SCADAConnect did and is
helpful in debugging problems.
The fifth button opens this Help topic.
430
If a signal has been selected, the right pane will display a preview of the data for that signal. To ensure that the data are
current, the user can pick Refresh button or Auto Refresh check box.
431
432
Once the Connection to the file has been established, the user can further refine the connection. For example in an
Excel file or an Access database, the user can specify which table is to be used for the connection. If multiple tables are
used, each one must have its own connection.
The user must pick from one of two data source formats: One value per row or Multiple values per row.
In the "One value per row" format, each row/record must contain the signal name field (e.g. Pressure Main St.), the
value field (e.g. 60) and a time stamp filed (e.g. 2/4/2015 14:30). Optionally, the user may also specify if there is a field
indicating the quality of the data, Questionable Field (e.g. Missing). There may be other fields on each record but these
are ignored. The order of the fields doesn't matter. The Time Stamp Field must include a recognized Windows data/
time value. A typical row might include:
3:40 am 3/5/2016 Flow Pump 3 34 Good
In Multiple values per row, there must be a field/column header with the signal name and there may be multiple fields
in a single row. A typical first row and subsequent row may include:
Date/time Pressure Main St Flow Main St. Temperature Tank Level South
2 Oct 14 13:08.15 48.34 834.2 35 12
Within a Database source, there are two ways that time is used. The user selects these under Options. In "Historical",
the values can be read for any time for which data are available. For "real time", only the most recent value is read and
then, only if it is within the time tolerance specified by the user. This is used for importing initial conditions for starting
a run or viewing the latest value that has been placed in the datasource file. The time is based on the clock in the
computer running the model.
433
434
Once the Data Source type has been selected, the user can pick the ellipse button in the Database Connection dialot to
navigate to the data source file. Once the file has been selected, the user should pick Test Connection to check that the
file matches the Data Source Type and is in a valid format.
If the Advance button is selected, the user can set up the prefix and suffix for SQL type queries of the data source.
435
To select signals, pick the signal from the available signals in the left pane and pick the Add button (>) to move it to the
right pane. Alternatively, a user can Add all the signals (>>) and Remove (<) the few that are not needed.
436
The user selects whether to use a Historical or Real Time datasource. The mapping between the SCADA system and
the hydraulic model must be created before the initial condition can be imported. If a Historical data set is selected, the
user must pick a time for which values are imported. If a real time datasource is selected, the most recent values are
used.
If "Ignore inactive elements" is checked, only values for active elements are imported. This can help speed up imports.
The Host field is used to identify the computer hosting the OPC server on the network. The refresh button to the right
of the field searches the network for the server. If unchecked, it is assumed that the server is on the computer running
the hydraulic model.
The OPC Server is the name of the server since there can be several servers on a computer.
The Select SCADA Signals button opens the dialog to select signals as described in the Select Signal (OPC) help topic.
[xref Select Signals (OPC)]
The real time OPC signal values can be viewed in the SCADA Signals dialog as shown below:
437
The Host field is used to identify the computer hosting the OPC server on the network. The refresh button to the right
of the field searches the network for the server.
The OPC Server is the name of the server since there can be several servers on a computer.
The Select SCADA Signals button opens the dialog to select signals as described in the Select Signal (OPC) help topic
(see OPC Select Signals Dialog-628 (on page 438)).
438
Connection Manager
The Connection Manager is used to create a new SCADA connection and to edit the existing SCADA connection.
SCADA connection is basically an item of the Connection Manager in which information like, the data source, type of
connection used, method of connection are provided. You can also specify the server location, user name, password etc.
depending upon the selected connection method. Two generic types of connections can be established.
Database Connection (on page 439)
Citect Connection
Database Connection
SCADAConnect can read data from a variety of sources. Upon creating a new connection, the user will need to select
whether the connection is to a database or a Citect server. The Database Connection method helps to establish a
communication to a SCADA file. A file can be accessed (or opened) using different methods (or drivers) such as
ODBC, OLEDB or SQL. To simplify this to a general hydraulic modeler, SCADAConnect offers two additional
methods where modeler can simply specify a file such as Excel or These direct file methods also uses OLEDB method.
Following are the methods you can select to provide information about your SCADA data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Access File
Access 2.0
Access 2003/2002/2000 (4.0)
Access 2007 (12.0)
Access 97/7.0(3.0)
Excel File
Excel 2003/ XP /2000/97 (8.0)
Excel 2007 (12.0)
Excel 3.0
Excel 4.0
Excel 95/5.0 (5.0)
ODBC Source
More options are available under Connection Properties
OLEDB Source
More options are available under Connection Properties
SQL Connection
439
3. Click the New button to create a new connection. You can select databse or Citect connection. Go to Database
Connection for creating a connection using database option. Or, go to Citect Connection for creating a connection
using Citect option (see Citect Connection help).
4. Rename the newly created Database Connection to a suitable name such as Access DB Connection. It's always a
good idea to name the Database Connection similar to the data source as this Database Connection will be used at
other location such as Data Source Manager.
5. Select a data source type from Database: Connection Details group.
6. For Example: Select Access 2003/2002/2000 (4.0) from the drop down.
7. Click on the Browse button and provide your Access file or Excel file. Connection String box will automatically be
filled in with the appropriate connection string.
8. Connection String is a special string which contains the information that the provider needs to know to be able to
establish a connection to the database or the data file. It is a passed in code to an underlying driver or provider in
order to initiate the connection.
9. Click on Test Connection button. This button normally validates the path, file format, and existence of the file. You
should see a "Connection Succeeded" message box.
10. The Advanced button allows changing the prefixes and suffixes for the Name and Date/Time field. Under advanced
circumstances only, these delimiters need changes; otherwise default should work.
440
Database Source
The Database Source option will allow defining the Table Name and related fields for SCADA connection created on
Connection Manager. If there are more than one table where the SCADA information are stored then multiple database
sources need to be created.
For example: If SCADA stores instantaneous data on a table called "LiveData" and the historical data are stored or
backed up on a table called "HistoricalData" then two database source connections are required to communicate with
each table.
It's always a good idea to label the database source connection with the Table Name as this database source connection
will be referred at other locations.
There isn't any restriction on the order of any column or any limitation on number of rows in any data table. There are
two formats for database files:
1. Each row contains one value and a column should store one type of information, such as Date should only store date
vales. Each row must contain the Data/Time, tag (label) and value for the signal. It may also contain information as
to whether the values are questionable. The following screen is just an example where the highlighted columns can
be mapped to SCADAConnect. For more details about signal mapping go to Signal Mapping.
2. Each row can contain multiple values. Each row must contain a data/time identified and multiple signal values
associated with that time. The tags associated with each column must be placed in the first row of the table.
441
442
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
computer, it must contain the network location in the form //computer name. Because a computer may have several
OPC servers on it, once the computer is selected, the user must indicate which OPC server is to be used.
From the Table Name drop down, select the table which contains the SCADA data. In other words, you need to
select the table where the SCADA is storing the data. It could be historical data table or a real-time data table.
If Table Name drop down is not listing any items then make sure you have right connection is selected in
connection drop down.
The Table Name Ellipsis Button will allow advanced user to provide custom queries. This is often used when the
table provided in Table Name needs filtering or additional manipulation. Custom queries can be applied to any
database sources. For more details visit custom queries.
Example of a custom Table Name query: SELECT [ElementName], [ScadaDataValue], [FullDate] FROM
ScadaDataTable;
Source format. The user must select from the two formats:
- One value per row
- Multiple values per row.
If the user selects One value per row the following steps apply:
From the Name drop down, select the field (or column) where the SCADA signal name that corresponds to
hydraulic element are stored.
For example: The column which stores the "LakewoodTank" or "MainStreetBooster". These "LakewoodTank" or
"MainStreetBooster" are like a tag name used by SCADA to store the data. These "Lakewood Tank",
"MainStreetBooster" tags will later be mapped to the Lakewood Tank and Main Street Pump element of the
hydraulic model. The name of the SCADA tag does not need to be the same as the name of the hydraulic model
element. For example, Lakewood Tank may be mapped to T-7.
If the Name drop down is not listing any items then make sure you have right Table Name and/or right connection is
selected in connection drop down.
From the Value drop down, select the field (or column) where the data read by SCADA are stored. These values (or
numbers) will be imported to the hydraulic model. These valves could be imported to different location in hydraulic
model, such as Initial Settings, Darwin Calibrator etc.
If the Value drop down is not listing any items then make sure you have right Table Name and/or right connection is
selected in connection drop down.
Check the Time Stamp Supported. If you SCADA data contains a field that stores date then check box. Without
checking this box, the Time Stamp drop down will not be editable and you will not be able to provide the date or
time field and if Time Stamp is not provided, later, when importing the data from SCADA to the hydraulic model,
SCADAConnect will not be able to filter your SCADA data based on any 'From Date Time' and 'To Date Time' In
other words, you must provide this to take full advantage of SCADAConnect.
From the Time Stamp drop down, select the field (or column) where the time is stored. This Time Stamp field in
SCADA data must have the full time such as 4/28/80 12:15:00 AM. If time and date are stored in separate field (or
column), use custom queries or edit the SCADA time and date field.
If SCADA stores any attribute and flags the validity of the recorded data then it's a good idea to check the
Questionable Supported box. If you SCADA does not flag a read yet you want to create some logic and filter those
reads then that is doable in SCADAConnect. For example, any flow value below 30 units can be disregarded. For
more details see Custom Queries (on page 444).
From the Questionable drop down, select the field (or column) where the data are stored. This field must be a
Boolean type . If the Questionable data equals True, we can ignore such data when viewing or importing any data to
the hydraulic model. In other words you need to select a field (or column) where SCADAConnect stores the flagged
information.
If your SCADA does not flag a read yet you want to create some logic and filter those reads then that is doable in
SCADAConnect. For example, any flow value below 30 units can be disregarded. For more details go to custom
query.
Click the OK button in Data Source Manager.
443
Custom Queries
Use Custom Queries to create a customized, intermediate data table that SCADAConnect can read. The query can add
new fields based on available field values in the data source, allowing data to be translated from a specific user format
to the SCADAConnect format. It can also be used to add validation of the SCADA data.
For example, if the signal data supports a timestamp field, SCADAConnect expects the data to be presented in a single
Date/Time field. However, if the timestamp in the data source is stored in two separate fields, a custom query can be
written to present the two fields to SCADAConnect as a single DateTime field.
This will generate an intermediate data table with all the fields from the table plus a new calculated field called
TimeStamp that contains the Date/Time values. This TimeStamp field is the field name that should be entered in the
Time Stamp of Data Source Manager dialog.
Another example would be to use a query that will add extra data validation to remove errors. If signal values are
known to always be within a certain range, the following query could be written to mark those signals as Questionable
and then allow SCADAConnect to skip those values.
444
This will generate a field called Questionable that can be used in the Questionable of Data Source Manager dialog.
When the data is read by SCADAConnect, data records with values outside this range will have the Questionable field
set to TRUE, and SCADAConnect will discard the value.
Note: When custom queries are entered, they should have valid SQL syntax for the data source being used.
Custom queries are sent to the database provider and therefore the Advanced Options of the Connection
Manager do not apply to these queries.
Signal Mapping
Signal mapping is a process of particularizing assigning a SCADA signal (or SCADA tag or name) to a hydraulic
element. Options like selecting a Data source, specifying the target of imported data such as Calibration field datasets,
Element Initial Settings, Element User Data Extensions, etc. are available in Signal Mapping Editor.
To start mapping a signal or creating a new mapping signal:
Within SCADAConnect, right click on any element type and select Add Signal. For example, right click on Junction - 0
signal(s) and select Add Signal.
If a signal already exists then right clicking on that signal will provide options to Delete Signal or Edit Signal. Clicking
on Edit Signal will launch the SCADA Signal Editor.
445
446
447
448
Options under Load Initial Settings are categorized under following groups:
Import Option: Specify whether data from Historical database source or Real-time database source should be used
while fetching the SCADA data.
Target Scenario: When an existing scenario is provided in the Existing Scenario drop down, initial settings data of
the hydraulic model will be overwritten by the fetched SCADA data.
A new scenario can also be created by selecting New Scenario option. Specify the name of the newly created
scenario and the Parent Scenario of this new scenario. If <None> is selected, a new base scenario will be created.
Target Alternative: Similar to Target Scenario, specify whether the imported SCADA data should overwrite the
existing data or create a new alternative. To overwrite the existing hydraulic data, select Existing Alternative and
select the desired alternative from the drop down. Accordingly, to create a new alternative, select New Alternative,
provide a name and then select the Parent Alternative. If <None> is selected, a new base alternative will be created.
Selection Set: A selection set, containing elements whose data were imported will be created when Create a
selection-set of elements having SCADA signals is checked. This method is particularly helpful to double check the
updated elements attribute.
449
3. There are four major options group available under Load Extended Data.
4. Import Option: Specify whether data from Historical database source or Real-time database source should be used
while fetching the SCADA data.
5. Target Scenario: When an existing scenario is provided in the Existing Scenario drop down, initial settings data of
the hydraulic model will be overwritten by the fetched SCADA data.
450
Graph
Graph with Questionable Values
Create Time Series
Create Time Series with Questionable Values
To view the SCADA data, signal mapping, providing database source and providing the connection gateway are
necessary. During the entire process of viewing SCADA data, data are temporarily loaded to the SCADAConnect
directly from the SCADA data source, none of the data displayed here are loaded or imported to the hydraulic model
element.
Note: Only SCADA signals that are associated with elements that are active in the current scenario are updated.
To view SCADA Data:
1. Within SCADAConnect, go to Tools > View SCADA Data.
2. The View SCADA Data dialog opens, where from and to date time can be provided. The value of From Time Date
inserted here is used as the starting time (time from start = 0) when the SCADA Data are listed or plotted regardless
451
Graph
To view a graph of any mapped signal follow the steps described below. However, to learn more about graphing,
see Graphs.
452
Since the graph is displayed on Standard User Interface of the hydraulic model, native command of graph window can
be utilized.
453
Graph with Questionable Values: When this option is selected, the SCADAConnect will not filter any data on
Questionable field (or column) and will display all the attributes in the graph.
Create Time Series: To create Time Series Field Data (on page 825) using the SCADA Data, right click on any
mapped signal in the SCADA Data window and select Create Time Series.
A message box confirming the creation of the Time Series Field Data will be displayed. To check the newly
exported data go to Components > Time Series Field Data.
Create Time Series with Questionable Values: When this option is selected, the SCADAConnect will not filter any
data on Questionable field (or column) and will export all the attributes in the Time Series Field Data.
Demand Inversing
Demand inversing is a method to adjust the assigned pressure junction demands in the water model to accurately match
the real world demands. To calculate the real demands, Demand inversing requires the user to identify the boundaries
of each zone, the inflow and outflow points, the tanks signals, and the SCADA tag associated with each value needed.
With this information, and SCADA data for a full day, the real world total daily demands of each zone can be
calculated. The application can then find a multiplication factor that can be applied to each pressure junction's demand
field in the model to make the simulated zone demand equal to the real world demand for that day.
Note: To run this tool, you must have one or more Zones defined in your model.
454
Calculations: In calculation tab, you can provide the destination alternative of the calculated demand. Demand can
either be overwritten or a new demand alternative can be created.
To overwrite an existing demand alternative, select the desired alternative from the drop down. And, to create a new
alternative, select the Create New Alternative and provide a name. If you want this alternative to be a child of an
existing alternative, select the alternative from Parent Alternative.
Reference Consumption: In this section, information about the demand (or consumption), the zone and the scenario
needs to be populated and therefore the hydraulic model must have zone(s) specified otherwise Demand inversing
tool will not run. The Reference Consumption tab looks like this:
455
456
Zone Name: Select and configure each zone that was selected to calculate in Reference Consumption tab.
Zone Name: Select and configure each zone that was selected to calculate in Reference Consumption tab.
Menu Items:
457
Options
SCADAConnect includes customization Options, divided into the following tabs:
Units from SCADAConnect (on page 458)
Advanced (on page 459)
458
Note: Units must be set to the units of the SCADA data. Units that are set in the hydraulic model do not matter.
Advanced
Time tolerance: SCADA data may not be available at the time that the user requests it depending on the polling interval
of the SCADA system. In order not to miss a valid data point because it does not fall exactly at the requested time, the
user can specify a Tolerance. Specify the time tolerance for retrieval of historical data from the SCADA database. Time
tolerance refers to the intervals centered about the specified time for the historical data query. The time tolerance
should be large enough to cover the full range of signals to be retrieved. This is defined by the SCADA polling interval.
For example, if the time of a field data set for a historical data import is 12:00:00, then a time tolerance of three (3)
minutes specifies a time span of six (6) minutes, from 11:57:00 to 12:03:00. This time span defines the query made
against the SCADA system historical data by SCADAConnect and thus defines the range of valid time stamps for data
loaded from the SCADA system into the model field data set.
Note: The time tolerance should be set to the smallest value possible that captures a full snapshot of SCADA data.
Avoid unnecessarily large settings. Only whole numbers can be entered.
Note: The time tolerance only applies for a historical import in which historical data from the SCADA system are
returned for the specified time span.
459
Enable Advanced Logging: When this check box is checked, the hydraulic model maintains a text log file. This log file
will specially be helpful when you are not able to import the data and want to figure out what is occurring. Sometime
this file may content technical terms which are beyond the normal hydraulic modeler. After looking at this log file, if
you could not resolve the issue, contact Bentley Technical Support.
Generally the default location to this log file is at the following location:
Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\<User>\local Settings\Application Data\Bentley\SewerGEMS
\8\SCADAConnect.log
Vista or higher: C:\Users\<User>\AppData\Local\Bentley\SewerGEMS\8\SCADAConnect.log
Color-coding
In order to color-code the elements in the drawing, the SCADA data must be imported to User Data Extension (UDX).
To import the SCADA data into a UDX field follow the steps provided in Load Extended Data.
Steps to color-code:
1. Load data to User Data Extension or go to Load Extended Data.
460
Annotating
In order to annotate the elements in the drawing, the SCADA data must be imported to User Data Extension (UDX). To
import the SCADA data into a UDX field follow the steps provided in Load Extended Data.
Steps for Annotation:
1. Load data to User Data Extension or go to Load Extended Data.
2. Go to View > Element Symbology.
3. Right click on the desired element and select New > Annotation. (Desired element must have at least one signal
mapped.
4. Annotation Properties opens.
5. Click on > button, next to the Field Name drop down and select SCADA Data.
6. Provide X Offset, Y Offset, and Height Multiplier values.
7. Click Apply and OK.
461
462
The user then picks the Import Historical Overrides button from the ribbon CONFIGURE.
This opens the Import Historical Overrides Dialog: In the example below, the pump is turned on at 3:45 and off at 9:45
regardless of control statements in the scenario.
463
The filter section on the top of the dialog allows the user to choose the time period for the import of historical overrides
for settings type import (e.g. pump speed), to specify a tolerance for excluding small value changes from the overrides
import and to select if signal values marked as "Questionable" should be use for the import.
Below the filter section on the left side a list of SCADA elements suitable for creating control overrides from historical
SCADA data is shown. Right of this list a preview data table and graph of the selected SCADA element in the list is
shown. Only SCADA elements with a status or settings field and an assigned historical signal with available SCADA
values for the selected time period are shown.
The Refresh button enables the user to preview the changes in the filter section and cause an update of the preview data
table and graph. The preview table and graph are also updated on selecting a SCADA element in the SCADA element
list, using the current input data in the filter section.
After reviewing the SCADA elements the user can press the Import button to start the import of new control overrides
for the current scenario. The import time stamp is stored in the Notes attribute of the control overrides and the complete
import is undoable.
Loading
The word "loading" is used in Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT to describe flow entering the sewer system. Depending
on the type of system, available data and level of detail, there are numerous ways of loading Bentley SewerCAD
CONNECT models. Some of the distinctions relate to whether the system is a combined or sanitary system, whether the
loads are existing with flow data or proposed loads with only land use descriptions, whether the flow refers to dry
weather sanitary flows or wet weather flow.
464
In general, the hydrograph input is used for wet weather events while pattern loads are used for sanitary flows
which repeat from one day to the next. For more information, see Inflows-437.
Sanitary loading consists of data which may be
Sanitary loads are generally used to describe dry weather contribution to flow from domestic, commercial and
industrial customers. For more information, see Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collections-456.
Load Builder consists of using the LoadBuilder model to place loads on nodes using ArcGIS functions. Unlike the
methods above which are applicable when the loads are already known for each node, LoadBuilder is used when the
loading data is not yet associated with individual nodes. For example, the data can be in the form of:
For more information, see LoadBuilder-459.
Rainfall Derived Infiltration and Inflow in Sanitary Systems (RDII) lets you load sanitary systems with I/I flow
based on flow monitoring data. This usually involves entering a precipitation event and comparing the predicted
catchment outflow with the model results. You can adjust the catchment parameters to match the observed outflow
using generic unit hydrographs or RTK method. For more information, see Rainfall Derived Infiltration and Inflow
(RDII)-460.
Stormwater flow can be used to model inflow into a collection system based on rainfall events and any number of
hydrologic models including:
Losses (i.e. precipitation not entering runoff) can be modeled using several methods including:
These methods can be used for modeling stormwater collection systems and combined sewer systems but not
sanitary systems because they do not account for the defects which allow wet weather flow to enter sanitary
systems. These methods can only be applied to catchment elements, not other node elements. For more information,
see Stormwater Flow-460.
Conduit infiltration can be used to model infiltration into pipes along the length of the pipe. This can be specified
as:
For more information, see Pipeline Infiltration-518.
Summary
In general:
Dry weather load can be entered using Inflow, Sanitary Loading and LoadBuilder.
Wet weather flow in sanitary systems can be entered using inflow, RDII or conduit infiltration.
Wet weather flow in stormwater and combined systems can be entered using Inflow, Stormwater flow or Conduit
infiltration.
465
Inflow
Sanitary
Load
LoadBuil
der *
RDII
Inflow
Stormwat
er
Conduit
infiltratio
n*
Types of Loads
466
X
X
Inflow
LoadBuild
er *
RDII
Inflow
Stormwater
Conduit
infiltration
*
X
X
Types of Loads
Within each of the loading methods available in Bentley SewerGEMS V8i, there are several ways to enter (add) data.
For example, under the method Inflow for loading the model, there are three types of inflow - fixed, hydrograph and
pattern load. These loading types may be used by several methods. For example, pattern loading is used by the Inflow,
Sanitary and Pipeline Infiltration methods. The dialogs for each of these types are the same regardless of the method
being used.
The following table illustrates which types of loads are available in each method.
Types of Loads
Method
Fixed
Hydrograph
Pattern
Load
Inflow
Sanitary
Load
LoadBuil
der *
467
RTK
Method
Modified
Rational
SWMM
SCS
Fixed
Hydrograph
Pattern
Load
RDII
Inflow
Stormwat
er
Conduit
infiltratio
n*
RTK
Method
Modified
Rational
SWMM
SCS
468
469
New
Delete
Report
Graph
Description
Time
Flow
Pattern Loads
A pattern load consists of a base flow and a pattern, which is a set of multipliers used to adjust base flow over the
course of a day (or some other period). Patterns can also be used with unit loads by assigning a pattern setup for a
particular scenario.
For more information on building patterns, see Defining Patterns-417 (on page 471). For more information on
pattern setups, see Defining Pattern Setups-421 (on page 474).
470
Note: This curve is conceptual and should not be construed as representative of any particular network.
There are two basic forms for representing a pattern: stepwise and continuous. A stepwise pattern is one that assumes a
constant level of usage over a period of time, and then jumps instantaneously to another level where it remains steady
until the next jump. A continuous pattern is one for which several points in the pattern are known and sections in
between are transitional, resulting in a smoother pattern. For the continuous pattern in the figure above, the
multiplication factor and slope at the start time and end times are the same. This is a continuity that is recommended for
patterns that repeat.
Because of the finite time steps used for calculations, this software converts continuous patterns into stepwise patterns
for use by the algorithms. In other words for a time step a multiplier is interpolated from the pattern curve. That
multiplier is then used for the duration of the time step, until a new multiplier is selected for the next time step.
Patterns provide a convenient way to define the time variable aspects of system loads.
Note: For steady state runs using the GVF-Convex solver, patterns are ignored and the base flow is loaded as a
constant inflow.
Click one of the following links to learn more about working with patterns:
Defining Patterns
A pattern is a series of time step values, each having an associated multiplier value. During a dynamic analysis each
time step of the simulation uses the multiplier from the pattern corresponding to that time. If the duration of the
simulation is longer than the pattern, the pattern is repeated. The selected multiplier is applied to any baseline load that
is associated with the pattern.
471
Select Analysis > Patterns or click the Patterns button on the Analysis toolbar.
In the Patterns dialog box, click the New button to create a new pattern.
On the right side of the dialog box, enter values for Start Time and Starting Multiplier.
Select Stepwise or Continuous in the Pattern Type field.
In the time step points table, enter values for Time from Start and Multiplier. Bentley SewerCAD validates your
data as you enter it and displays errors and warnings in the status bar at the bottom of the Patterns dialog box. Be
sure to check this status bar for any errors or warnings as you enter data.
6. Perform the following optional steps:
7. Click Close.
Patterns Dialog Box
You create, edit, and delete patterns in the Patterns dialog box. The dialog box contains a list pane on the left and
several input fields and a table on the right:
The dialog box contains the following controls above the list pane:
New
Delete
Rename
Report
The following fields and controls appear on the right side of the dialog box:
Start Time
472
Starting Multiplier
Pattern Type
The following controls are located above the time step points table on the right:
New
Delete
Graph
Description
Lets you specify the amount of time from the Start Time
of the pattern to the time step point being defined.
Multiplier
There is also a status bar located at the bottom of the dialog box that displays any errors and warnings that may occur
when you enter data.
473
New
Delete
Description
Lets you specify the amount of time from the Start Time
of the pattern to the time step point being defined.
Multiplier
474
Delete
Rename
Report
The right side of the dialog contains a table with the following fields:
Column
Description
Unit Load
Set Pattern
Delete
Description
Lets you specify the amount of time from the Start Time
of the pattern to the time step point being defined.
Relative Closure
475
Delete
Description
Lets you specify the amount of time from the Start Time
of the pattern to the time step point being defined.
Delete
Description
Lets you specify the amount of time from the Start Time
of the pattern to the time step point being defined.
476
New
Delete
Description
Lets you specify the amount of time from the Start Time
of the pattern to the time step point being defined.
Relative Closure
477
Specify 1.0 discharge unit (e.g. l/day, gpd, cfs, etc.) as the unit load. Then, when using the load, specify the total
desired load for the loading unit count. For example, you can create a load called Liter per Day whose loading unit
type is Discharge, loading unit is l/day, and unit load is 1.0. When you use this load at a manhole, a wet well, or a
pressure junction, you specify 50.0 as the loading unit count. This yields a base load of 50 l/day.
Specify total desired load as the unit load. Then, when using the load, only specify 1.0 as the loading unit count. For
example, you can create a load called Industry XYZ whose loading unit type is Discharge, loading unit is l/day, and
unit load is 2000.0. When you use this load at the manhole, wet well, or pressure junction, you would specify 1.0 as
the loading unit count. This yields a base load of 2000 l/day.
In other words, you can specify a unit load of 1.0 in the Unit Sanitary Load Library and determine the total load at each
node through the loading unit count, or you can specify the total load in the Unit Sanitary Load Library and then have a
loading unit count of 1.0.
Count-based
Count-based unit sanitary loads should be used for any load that is not area, population, nor discharge-based. These
loads allow you to specify any loading unit such as loading per vehicle, machine, or anything else.
Loading units in user-defined counts are treated only as labels. Conversion between these units is always 1 to 1.
478
New: Creates a new unit sanitary load that uses an automatically created label. AreaAdds a new area-based unit
sanitary load to the list pane. An area-based unit sanitary load is a function of contributing service area. Count
Adds a new count-based unit sanitary load. A count-based unit sanitary load is a function of a user-defined count.
Count-based unit sanitary loads should be used for any load that is not area-, discharge-, or population-based.
DischargeAdds a new discharge-based unit sanitary load. A discharge-based unit sanitary load is a function of
direct discharge. PopulationAdds a new population-based unit sanitary load. A population-based unit sanitary
load is a function of adjusted contributing population.
Delete: Deletes the currently highlighted unit sanitary load.
Rename: Lets you rename the currently highlighted unit sanitary load.
479
Report: Lets you generate a preformatted report that contains the input data associated with the currently
highlighted unit sanitary load.
Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the following commands: Browse Engineering LibraryOpens
the Engineering Library manager dialog, allowing you to browse the Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load Engineering
Libraries. Synchronize From LibraryLets you update a set of unit sanitary loads previously imported from a Unit
Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load Engineering Library. The updates reflect changes that have been made to the library
since it was imported. Synchronize To LibraryLets you update an existing Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load
Engineering Library using current unit sanitary loads that were initially imported but have since been modified.
Import From LibraryLets you import a unit sanitary load from an existing Unit Sanitary (Dry Weather) Load
Engineering Library. Export To LibraryLets you export the current unit sanitary load to an existing Unit Sanitary
(Dry Weather) Load Engineering Library. Connect to LibraryOpens the Engineering Library, allowing you to
select a library to synchronize with the current entry.
Area Unit: Lets you specify the base unit used to define the area-based load.
Unit Load: Lets you specify the amount of flow contributed per loading unit.
Population Equivalent: Lets you specify the count of adjusted population per loading unit. For area based loads, this
is essentially a population density, or population per unit area. The Population equivalent field is optional and
simply converts area or count into equivalent popultion, based on the Population equivalent value.
Report Adjusted population: If this option is toggled ON, the adjusted population will be reported with other
populations. If the option is OFF, adjusted population will be not be reported as part of the total population.
Count Load unit: Lets you specify the base unit used to define the count-based load. You can specify any unit you
want, such as loading per vehicle, machine, or anything else.
Discharge Units: Lets you specify the base unit used to define the discharge-based load.
Population Units: Lets you specify the base unit used to define the unit load.
Library Tab: This tab displays information about the unit sanitary load that is currently highlighted in the list pane.
If the load is derived from an engineering library, the synchronization details can be found here. If the load was
created manually for this project, the synchronization details will display the message Orphan (local), indicating that
the pump was not derived from a library entry.
Notes Tab: This tab contains a text field that allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be associated with the
currently highlighted definition.
Composite Hydrographs
A composite hydrograph graphs the total flow over time from multiple defined fixed/unit loads, hydrographs, and
pattern loads.
You can access the composite hydrograph and its corresponding data table from the Inflow Collection dialog boxand
the Sanitary (Dry Weather) Flow Collection Editor dialog box, both of which are available from the Property Editor for
selected elements. For example, a manhole has properties for Inflow Collection and Sanitary Loading.
This graph is dynamic and is generated automatically each time it is requested.
The time step in a composite hydrograph is determined by going from time 0 to the Duration divided by Calculation
Time Step. You can define the Duration and Calculation Time Step values in the Calculation Options Manager.
Note: If the times in the input hydrograph (inflow) do not cover the all-calculation duration, i.e, the start time is
larger than 0 and/or the end time is less than the duration, the dynamic solvers (implicit and explicit) will use a
0.0 inflow for those times that are not covered by the input hydrograph.
480
Inflows
The word "inflow" is used in two ways in sewer modeling. It is used first to describe wet weather flows to sewer
systems that do not infiltrate through the ground and it is used in Bentley SewerCAD CONNECTto describe any flow
which enters a node element whether it is a fixed inflow, hydrograph or pattern load. The type of load available
depends on the element type. The descriptions below, refer to the Bentley SewerGEMS V8i definition of inflow.
Inflows can be specified at any node element except a pond outlet and an outfall. Inflows are not a single value but are
a collection (i.e. a table of flow vs. time) and as such must be specified from Property Editor for an element. For more
information, see Defining Inflow Collections (on page 485).
Inflow hydrographs are hydrographs with flow units and are not unit hydrographs. For more information, see What is
the Difference Between a User Defined Unit Hydrograph and a Hydrograph Entered in the Inflow Collection Editor (on
page 270).
Manhole
Catch Basin
Pond
Wet Well
Junction Chamber
Cross Section
481
Note: When using the SewerCAD GVF-Convex solver, the nodes' Flow (Total In) is only the sum of the upstream
pipes' flow, and does not include the local Inflow and Sanitary Inflow.
Flow (Total Out)
Flow (Total Out) is the sum of all flows:
Manhole
Catch Basin
Pond
Wet Well
Junction Chamber
Outfall
Cross Section
Catchment
Manhole
Catch Basin
Pond
Wet Well
Cross Section
Pressure Junction
Outfall
482
Note: The Implicit (SewerGEMS Dynamic Wave) and Explicit (SWMM) solvers support dry weather (sanitary)
inflows; it is treated as additional flow and shown as additional flow in the results.
The GVF-Rational (StormCAD) solver does not support dry weather (sanitary) inflows; a warning is given that sanitary
inflows are ignored by the solver.
Flow Diagrams
The following diagram defines various flows.
483
The values that appear in the property grid for the illustration are
Another common use case is that of a catch basin where less that all of the flow is captured by the inlet. Given the flow
in the illustration below and the assumption that the downstream conduit is not backing up and overflowing the catch
basin, the following flows are defined:
484
The values that appear in the property grid for the catch basin are
For a more detailed description of flows at catch basins, see Location of Flows-1139.
485
Delete
Report
Composite Graph
Composite Hydrograph
Fixed Load
486
Base Inflow
Inflow Pattern
Lets you select the pattern for the selected pattern inflow.
Patterns are selected, edited, and created in the Pattern
Manager, which you access by clicking the ellipsis (...)
button next to this field.
487
488
The Inflow Control Center consists of a pane consisting of tabs for each element type that list all of the inflows for all
of the elements in the model and a pane that displays Hydrograph Load collections for the currently highlighted
element.
It also contains the following controls:
489
New
490
Report
Zoom To
Find
491
Options
Help
The Sanitary Load Control Center consists of a pane consisting of tabs for each element type that list all of the loads for
all of the elements in the model and a pane that displays Hydrograph Load collections for the currently highlighted
element, along with the following controls:
492
New
493
Report
Zoom To
Find
494
Options
Help
Storm Data
Catchment characteristics
Flow calculated from stormwater runoff can only be placed on catchment elements. The methods described in this
section are primarily intended for stormwater runoff or the wet weather contribution to combined sewer systems. For
sanitary systems, Rainfall Derived Infiltration and Inflow (RDII)-460.
Snowmelt must be converted into equivalent precipitation to use the methods in this section.
The steps in using loss methods and hydrograph methods to generate a hydrograph from precipitation data are
summarized in the following diagram.
495
Related Topics
496
Delete
Report
Composite Hydrograph
Depending on the type of sanitary load you select in the list pane, the following controls appear:
497
Hydrograph Table
Pattern Load
Lets you select the pattern for the selected pattern load.
Pattern loads are selected, edited, and created in the
Pattern Manager, which you access by clicking the
ellipsis (...) button next to this field.
Related Topics
LoadBuilder
LoadBuilder is a tool used to assign flows to elements in Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT. If you already know what
flows to assign to an element, then you should use the other methods such as inflow, sanitary loads, or stormwater
loading. The power of LoadBuilder is that it can take loading information from a variety of GIS based sources such as
customer meter data, system flow meter or polygons with known population or land use and assign those flows to
elements. LoadBuilder is oriented to the types of data available to describe dry weather flows and other methods in
Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT are more amenable to wet weather flows.
For more information about using LoadBuilder, see Using LoadBuilder to Assign Loading Data (on page 498).
498
LoadBuilder Manager
The LoadBuilder manager provides a central location for the creation, storage, and management of LoadBuilder
templates. The following buttons are available from this dialog box:
New
Delete
Rename
Edit
Help
LoadBuilder Wizard
The LoadBuilder wizard assists you in the creation of a new load build template by stepping you through the procedure
of creating a new load build template. Depending on the load build method you choose, the specific steps presented in
the wizard will vary.
Note: The loading output data generated by LoadBuilder is a Base Flow, i.e., a single value that remains constant
over time.
After running LoadBuilder and exporting the results, you may need to modify your data to reflect changes over time by
applying patterns to the base flow values.
LoadBuilder wizard includes:
499
Billing Meter AggregationThis loading method assigns all meters within a service polygon to the specified
loading node for that service polygon.
Nearest NodeThis loading method assigns customer meter loads to the closest loading junction.
Nearest PipeThis loading method assigns customer meter loads to the closest pipe, then distributes loads using
user-defined criteria.
Flow Monitoring DistributionThis loading method asigns loading data from a point load monitoring layer to
upstream loading nodes. This method automatically identifies all the upstream manholes up to its adjacent next
upstream load monitor, works out the sub-total load contribution of the manhole between the load monitors (the
load difference between the monitors) and then equally distributes the effective load to all the contributing
manholes.
500
Distribution
Equal Flow DistributionThis loading method equally divides the total flow contained in a flow boundary polygon
and assigns it to the nodes that fall within the flow boundary polygon.
Proportional Distribution by AreaThis load method proportionally distributes a lump-sum load among a number
of loading nodes based upon the ratio of total service area to the area of the nodes corresponding service polygon.
Proportional Distribution by PopulationThis load method proportionally distributes a lump-sum load among a
number of loading nodes based upon the ratio of total population contained within the nodes corresponding service
polygon.
Projection
Projection by Land UseThis method allocates loads based upon the density per land use type of each service
polygon.
501
Load Estimation by PopulationThis method allocates loads based upon user-defined relationships between load
per capita and population data.
In addition to the controls described above, there is also a check box and a menu near the bottom of the dialog box,
entitled Initialize From Previous Run. If a previously created LoadBuilder template exists in the LoadBuilder Manager
display, the settings for this template can be applied to a new LoadBuild of the same type.
502
Use Previous RunLoadBuilders most time-consuming calculation when using the Nearest Node strategy is the
spatial calculations that are performed to determine proximity between the meter elements and the node elements.
When this box is checked, the proximity calculations that were generated from a previous run are used, thereby
increasing the overall calculation performance.
Nearest PipeInput DataThe following fields require data to be specified:
Pipe LayerThis field allows you to specify the line feature class or shapefile that contains the pipes that will be
used to determine meter-to-pipe proximity. Note that the pipes in this layer must connect to the nodes contained in
the Node Layer.
Pipe ID FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains the unique identifying label
data. ElementID is the preferred Pipe ID value because it is always unique to any given element.
Load AssignmentThis field allows you to specify the method that will be used to distribute the metered loads that
are assigned to the nearest pipe to the end nodes of said pipe. Options include:
Distance WeightedThis method assigns a portion of the total load assigned to a pipe based on the distance
between the meter(s) and the nodes at the pipe ends. The closer a meter is to the node at the end of the pipe, the
more load will be assigned to it.
Closest NodeThis method assigns the entire total load assigned to the pipe end node that is closest to the meter.
Farthest NodeThis method assigns the entire total load assigned to the pipe end node that is farthest from the
meter.
Equal DistributionThis method assigns an equal portion of the total load assigned to a pipe to each of the pipes
end nodes.
Node LayerThis field allows you to specify the point feature class or shapefile that contains the nodes that will be
used to determine node-to-pipe proximity. Note that the nodes in this layer must connect to the pipes contained in
the Pipes Layer.
Node ID FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains the unique identifying label
data. ElementID is the preferred Junction ID value because it is always unique to any given element.
Use Previous RunLoadBuilders most time-consuming calculation when using the Nearest Pipe strategy is the
spatial calculations that are performed to determine proximity between the meter elements, the pipe elements, and
the node elements. When this box is checked, the proximity calculations that were calculated from a previous runs
are used, thereby increasing the overall calculation performance.
Billing Meter LayerThis field allows you to specify the point or polyline feature class or shapefile that contains
the geocoded billing meter data.
Meter Assignment TypeWhen a polyline meter layer is selected, this field will be activated. When multiple pipes
are associated with (overlapped by) a polyline meter, the option chosen in this field determines the method that will
be used to divide the polyline meter load among them. The available options are:
Equal DistributionThis option will distribute the load equally among the pipes associated with (overlapping) the
meter.
Proportional DistributionThis option will divide the load proportionally according to the ratio of the length of
pipe that is associated with (overlapping) the meter to the total length of the meter.
Billing Meter ID FieldBilling Meter ID is used to identify the unique meter. When polylines are used to represent
water consumption meters, multiple polylines (multiple records) may designate one actual meter, but each (record in
the attribute Table) of the polylines contains the same consumption data with the same billing meter ID.
Load Type FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains load type data. Load Type
is an optional classification that can be used to assign composite loads to nodes, which enables different behaviors,
multipliers, and patterns to be applied in various situations. For example, possible load types may include
Residential, Commercial, Industrial, etc. To make use of the Load Type classification, your source database must
include a column that contains this data.
Usage FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains usage data.
Usage Field UnitsThis drop-down list allows you to select the unit associated with the usage field value.
Flow Monitoring DistributionInput DataThe following fields require data to be specified:
503
Node LayerThis field allows you to specify the point feature class or shapefile that contains the nodes that the
flow will be assigned to.
Node ID FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains identifying label data.
ElementID is the preferred Node ID value because it is always unique to any given element.
Flow Monitoring LayerThis field allows you to specify the point feature class that contains the flow monitoring
meter data.
Usage FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains usage data. The usage field in
the source database must contain flow data.
Usage Field UnitsThis drop-down list allows you to select the unit associated with the usage field value.
Equal Flow DistributionInput DataThe following fields require data to be specified:
Manhole LayerThis field allows you to specify the point feature class or shapefile that contains the manhole data.
Manhole ID FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains identifying label data.
ElementID is the preferred Junction ID value because it is always unique to any given element.
Flow Boundary LayerThis field allows you to specify the polygon feature class or shapefile that contains the flow
boundary data.
Load Type FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains the Load Type data.
Load Type Field UnitsThis drop-down list allows you to select the unit associated with the flow field value.
Proportional Distribution by AreaInput DataThe following fields require data to be specified:
Service Area LayerThis field allows you to specify the polygon feature class or shapefile that defines the service
area for each node.
Manhole ID FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains the unique identifying
label data. ElementID is the preferred Junction ID value because it is always unique to any given element.
Flow Boundary LayerThis field allows you to specify the polygon feature class or shapefile that contains the flow
boundary data.
Boundary FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains the boundary label.
Flow FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains the load type data.
Flow Field UnitsThis drop-down list allows you to select the unit associated with the Load Type Field value.
Proportional Distribution by PopulationInput DataThe following fields require data to be specified:
Service Area LayerThis field allows you to specify the polygon feature class or shapefile that defines the service
area for each node.
Manhole ID FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains the unique identifying
label data. ElementID is the preferred Junction ID value because it is always unique to any given element.
Flow Boundary LayerThis field allows you to specify the polygon feature class or shapefile that contains the flow
boundary data.
Boundary FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains the boundary label.
Load Type FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains the load data.
Load Type Field UnitsThis drop-down list allows you to select the unit associated with the load type field value.
Population LayerThis field allows you to specify the polygon feature class or shapefile that contains population
data.
Population ID FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains population data.
Land Type FieldThis field is optional. It allows you to specify the source database field that contains land use
type.
Projection by Land UseInput DataThe following fields require data to be specified:
Service Area LayerThis field allows you to specify the polygon feature class or shapefile that defines the service
area for each node.
Manhole ID FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains the unique identifying
label data. ElementID is the preferred Junction ID value because it is always unique to any given element.
504
Land Use LayerThis field allows you to specify the polygon feature class or shapefile that contains the land use
data.
Land Type FieldThis field is optional. It allows you to specify the source database field that contains land use
type.
Load Densities Per AreaThis table allows you to assign load density values to the various load types contained
within your land use layer.
Load Estimation by PopulationInput DataThe following fields require data to be specified:
Service Area LayerThis field allows you to specify the polygon feature class or shapefile that defines the service
area for each node.
Manhole ID FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains identifying label data.
ElementID is the preferred Junction ID value because it is always unique to any given element.
Population LayerThis field allows you to specify the polygon feature class or shapefile that contains the
population data.
Population Density Type FieldThis field is optional. It allows you to specify the source database field that
contains the population density type data.
Population Density FieldThis field allows you to specify the source database field that contains population
density data.
Load Densities Per CapitaThis table allows you to assign load density values to the various load types contained
within your population density layer.
Load TypeThis column contains an entry for each load type contained within the database column specified in
step one. (Examples include residential, commercial, industrial, etc.)
ConsumptionThis column displays the total load associated with each load type entry.
MultiplierThis column displays the multiplier that is applied to each load type entry. Multipliers can be used to
account for peak loads, expected future loads, or to reflect unaccounted-for-loads. This field is editable.
PatternThis column displays the hydraulic pattern associated with each demand type entry. A different pattern
can be specified using the menu contained within each cell of this column. New patterns cannot be created from this
dialog box; see the Pattern manager help topic for more information regarding the creation of new patterns.
In addition to the functionality provided by the tabular summary pane, the following controls are also available in this
step:
Global MultiplierThis field allows you to apply a multiplier to all of the entries contained within the Results
Summary Pane. Any changes are automatically reflected in the Total Load text field. Multipliers can be used to
account for peak loads, expected future loads, or to reflect unaccounted-for-loads. The Global Multiplier should be
used when the conditions relating to these considerations are identical for all usage types and elements.
Total LoadThis field displays an updated total of all of the entries contained within the Results Summary Pane, as
modified by the local and global multipliers that are in effect.
ElementIDElementID is the unique identifying label assigned to all geodatabase elements by the GIS.
LabelLabel is the unique identifying label assigned by Bentley SewerCAD Modeler.
505
Load TypeLoad Type is an optional classification that can be used to assign different behaviors, multipliers, and
patterns in various situations. For example, possible load types may include Residential, Commercial, Industrial,
etc. To make use of the Load Type classification, your source database must include a column that contains this
data.
PatternAllows you to assign a previously created pattern to each load type in the table.
LabelThis field allows a unique label to be assigned to the load build template.
Override an Existing AlternativeChoosing this option will cause the calculated loads to overwrite the loads
contained within the existing load alternative that is selected.
Append to an Existing AlternativeChoosing this option will cause the calculated loads to be appended to the loads
contained within the existing load alternative that is selected. Loads within the existing alternative that are assigned
to a specific node will not be overwritten by newly generated loads assigned to the same node; the new loads will
simply be added to them.
New AlternativeChoosing this option will cause the calculated loads to be applied to a new load alternative. The
text field next to this button lets you enter a label for the new load alternative. The Parent Alternative field will only
be active when this option is selected.
506
In the second diagram, the circles are drawn around each junction.
In the third diagram, bisector lines are added by drawing a line where the circles interjoin.
507
In the final diagram, the network is overlaid with the polygons that are created by connecting the bisector lines.
508
The Thiessen Polygon Creator dialog box consists of the following steps:
Step 1: Node Data Source
Buffering PercentageThis percentage value is used for calculating the boundary for a collection of points. In order
to make the buffer boundary big enough to cover all the points, the boundary is enlarged based upon the value
entered in this field as it relates to the percentage of the area enclosed by drawing a polygon that connects the
outermost nodes of the model.
509
Polygon Boundary LayerSelect the boundary polygon feature class or shapefile, if one has already been created.
A boundary is specified so that the outermost polygons do not extend to infinity. For more information about
boundary layers, see Creating Boundary Polygon Feature Classes (on page 510).
Note: The Thiessen Polygon Creator is flexible enough to generate Thiessen polygons for unusual boundary
shapes, such as borders with cutouts or holes that Thiessen polygons should not be created inside. To
accomplish this, the boundary polygon must be created as one complex (multi-part) polygon. For more
information about creating boundary polygon feature classes, see your ArcGIS documentation.
510
Stormwater Flow
While it is possible to directly specify an inflow hydrograph at virtually any node element, users may wish to load
models during wet weather with flow that are derived from precipitation. For this approach to be workable, you must
specify:
Storm Data
Catchment characteristics
Catchment size
Loss method
Hydrograph method
Flow calculated from stormwater runoff can only be placed on catchment elements. The methods described in this
section are primarily intended for stormwater runoff or the wet weather contribution to combined sewer systems. For
sanitary systems, Rainfall Derived Infiltration and Inflow (RDII) (on page 510).
Snowmelt must be converted into equivalent precipitation to use the methods in this section.
The steps in using loss methods and hydrograph methods to generate a hydrograph from precipitation data are
summarized in the following diagram.
511
Related Topics
Intensity
Incremental
Cumulative
Once the storm data is created it can either be used locally at a catchment, or it can be used globally by selecting
Components > Global Storm Data. This will apply the storm data to the current scenario. This storm data will then be
512
You can manually create a storm data by selecting Cumulative, Incremental, Intensity, or IDF Storm Data when
selecting New to create a new curve in the Storm Data dialog.
You can construct a storm data from a dimensionless rainfall curve stored in the associated Dimensionless Rainfall
Curve engineering library. To do so select From Dimensionless Curve when selecting New to create a new storm
data in the Storm Data dialog box.
513
514
Each storm data group has a list of storm data. These are the storms available in the drop-down list in the global storm
data dialog and local storm data setting on catchments.
You can create any number of storm data and these events can be used globally for all catchments (Components >
Global Storm Data); or, some catchments can override the global event by selecting "Use Local Rainfall = True" and
selecting an event other than the global event in the Property Grid for that catchment. The global and local storm data
for each catchment can also be set in the Rainfall-Runoff Alternative.
In almost all cases, the storm data is assigned to a catchment (or globally to all catchments). The one exception is the
SWMM RTK method where the rainfall and RTK coefficients are assigned to a manhole.
Time-Depth data can be either Incremental or Cumulative.
If modified rational method is selected for the runoff method, then modified rational hydrology must be used for all
catchments.
IDF curves can be converted into Time-Depth tables.
515
A storm data definition can be created in any of the following ways, both from within the Storm Data dialog box:
You can manually create a storm data definition by clicking the New button and selecting one of the five methods in
the Storm Data dialog.
You can import storm data definitions from a text file.
You can import a storm data definition from the associated Storm Data Group engineering library. To do so Click
the Engineering Libraries button and select Import From Library in the Storm Data dialog.
The dialog box contains a list pane on the left, a tabbed input data area on the upper right, and a graph pane on the
lower right, and includes the following controls:
New: Creates a new storm data definition that uses an automatically created label.
516
Report: Lets you generate a preformatted report that contains the input data associated with the currently highlighted
storm data definition.
Import: Opens a browse dialog, allowing you to select a text file from which to import storm definition data.
Engineering Libraries: Clicking this button opens a submenu containing the following commands:
The fields and controls that appear in the tabbed area depend on which definition type is currently highlighted in the list
pane on the left.
Time-Depth
When editing a definition of the Time-Depth definition type, the tabbed area of the dialog contains the following
controls:
Storm Data Input Tab
New Return Event: Opens the New Storm Data Settings dialog, allowing you to define the parameters for the return
event.
Add Return Event from Storm Data: Opens the Storm Data Engineering Library, allowing you to select a predefined
storm data to use.
Add Return Event from Dimensionless Curve: Opens the Dimensionless Rainfall Curve Engineering Library,
allowing you to select a predefined dimensionless curve to use.
Add Return Event from IDF: Opens the Build Rainfall from IDF Storm Group dialog, allowing you to set the
parameters for the IDF storm data.
517
New Return Event: Opens the New Storm Data Settings dialog, allowing you to define the parameters for the return
event.
Add Return Event from Storm Data: Opens the Storm Data Engineering Library, allowing you to select a predefined
storm data to use.
Add Return Event from Dimensionless Curve: Opens the Dimensionless Rainfall Curve Engineering Library,
allowing you to select a predefined dimensionless curve to use.
518
Delete Return PeriodUse the Delete command to remove the currently highlighted column from the table.
Delete DurationUse the Delete command to remove the currently highlighted row from the table.
Notes Tab
This tab contains a text field that allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be associated with the currently
highlighted storm data definition.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the storm data definition that is currently highlighted in the list pane. If the storm
data definition is derived from an engineering library, the synchronization details can be found here. If the storm data
definition was created manually for this project, the synchronization details will display the message Orphan (local),
indicating that the storm data definition was not derived from a library entry.
Hydro-35
When editing a definition of the Hydro-35 definition type, the tabbed area of the dialog contains the following controls:
Storm Data Input Tab
519
Where
i = rainfall intensity
D = rainfall duration
Rp = return period
a, b, m, n = rainfall equation coefficients
When editing a definition of the IDF Table Equation type, the tabbed area of the dialog contains the following controls:
Storm Data Input Tab
Equation Duration Unit: Specify the unit to be used for duration (D) value in the equation.
Equation Intensity Unit: Specify the unit to be used for intensity (i) value in the equation.
a: Specify the value to be used for the a coefficient in the equation.
m: Specify the value to be used for the m coefficient in the equation.
b: Specify the value to be used for the b coefficient in the equation.
n: Specify the value to be used for the n coefficient in the equation.
Results Table: This table displays the calculated rainfall intensity values for the 2, 3, 5, 10, 25, 50, 100, 200, and 500
year return periods at durations of 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100, and 120 minutes.
Notes Tab
This tab contains a text field that allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be associated with the currently
highlighted storm data definition.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the storm data definition that is currently highlighted in the list pane. If the storm
data definition is derived from an engineering library, the synchronization details can be found here. If the storm data
520
Where
i = rainfall intensity
D = rainfall duration
a, b, n = rainfall equation coefficients
When editing a definition of the IDF Table Equation type, the tabbed area of the dialog contains the following controls:
Storm Data Input Tab
Equation Duration Unit: Specify the unit to be used for duration (D) value in the equation.
Equation Intensity Unit: Specify the unit to be used for intensity (i) value in the equation.
Add Return Event Button: Adds another Return Period row to the table. When you click this button an Add Return
Period dialog appears, allowing you to specify the return period for the new row.
Remove Return Event Button: Removes the currently highlighted Return Period row from the table.
a (log): Specify the value to be used for the a coefficient in the equation for the associated return period.
b: Specify the value to be used for the b coefficient in the equation for the associated return period.
n: Specify the value to be used for the n coefficient in the equation for the associated return period.
Results Table: This table displays the calculated rainfall intensity values for the each of the return periods in the table at
durations of 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100, and 120 minutes.
Notes Tab
This tab contains a text field that allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be associated with the currently
highlighted storm data definition.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the storm data definition that is currently highlighted in the list pane. If the storm
data definition is derived from an engineering library, the synchronization details can be found here. If the storm data
definition was created manually for this project, the synchronization details will display the message Orphan (local),
indicating that the storm data definition was not derived from a library entry.
IDF Polynomial Log Equation
The IDF Polynomial Log Equation definition type calculates the storm data using the following equation:
521
Where
i = rainfall intensity
D= rainfall duration
a, b, c, d = rainfall equation coefficients
When editing a definition of the IDF Polynomial Log Equation type, the tabbed area of the dialog contains the
following controls:
Storm Data Input Tab
Equation Duration Unit: Specify the unit to be used for duration (D) value in the equation.
Equation Intensity Unit: Specify the unit to be used for intensity (i) value in the equation.
Add Return Event Button: Adds another Return Period row to the table. When you click this button an Add Return
Period dialog appears, allowing you to specify the return period for the new row.
Remove Return Event Button: Removes the currently highlighted Return Period row from the table.
a (log): Specify the value to be used for the a coefficient in the equation for the associated return period.
b (log): Specify the value to be used for the b coefficient in the equation for the associated return period.
c (log): Specify the value to be used for the c coefficient in the equation for the associated return period.
d (log): Specify the value to be used for the d coefficient in the equation for the associated return period.
Results Table: This table displays the calculated rainfall intensity values for the each of the return periods in the table at
durations of 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, 100, and 120 minutes.
Notes Tab
This tab contains a text field that allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be associated with the currently
highlighted storm data definition.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the storm data definition that is currently highlighted in the list pane. If the storm
data definition is derived from an engineering library, the synchronization details can be found here. If the storm data
definition was created manually for this project, the synchronization details will display the message Orphan (local),
indicating that the storm data definition was not derived from a library entry.
To Import a comma or space delimited ASCII text file:
1. Click Import in the Storm Data dialog, and select the location and name of the file containing the rainfall table in
ASCII format to import. You may see a prompt warning you that any existing storm data will be overwritten - if
you do not want this, click Cancel.
2. Select Open to import the ASCII text file, or Cancel to exit without saving the changes. When importing an ASCII
text file, the following format is assumed: The first line of the imported text file contains the return periods. The
first entry in each succeeding line of the file contains the storm duration. All other entries represent rainfall
intensities, which are assumed to be in the current display unit (i.e. in/hr, mm/hr, etc.).
An example in comma separated format is given below for return periods of 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50 and 100 years, and
durations of 5, 15, 30 and 60 minutes):
1 , 2 , 5 , 10 , 20 , 50 , 100 5 , 47.0 , 63 , 87 , 103 , 125 , 157 , 183 15 , 29.7 , 39.5 , 54 , 63 , 76 , 95 , 110 30 , 20.8 ,
27.5 , 37.1 , 43.5 , 52 , 64 , 75 60 , 14.0 , 18.4 , 24.5 , 28.6 , 34.0 , 41.8 , 48.1
522
Notes Tab
This tab contains a text field that allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be associated with the currently
highlighted storm data definition.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the storm data definition that is currently highlighted in the list pane. If the storm
data definition is derived from an engineering library, the synchronization details can be found here. If the storm data
definition was created manually for this project, the synchronization details will display the message Orphan (local),
indicating that the storm data definition was not derived from a library entry.
UK Standard
When editing a definition of the UK Standard definition type, the tabbed area of the dialog contains the following
controls:
UK Standard Location: Select England and Wales or Scotland and Northern Ireland.
R: The rainfall depth value.
M5-60: This is the expected depth of rainfall in millimetres (mm) from a storm lasting 60 minutes (1 hour) with a
return period of 5 years
Notes Tab
This tab contains a text field that allows you to enter descriptive notes that will be associated with the currently
highlighted storm data definition.
Library Tab
This tab displays information about the storm data definition that is currently highlighted in the list pane. If the storm
data definition is derived from an engineering library, the synchronization details can be found here. If the storm data
definition was created manually for this project, the synchronization details will display the message Orphan (local),
indicating that the storm data definition was not derived from a library entry.
523
524
IDF Storm Data Group: Select the storm data group, or click the ellipsis button to browse the Storm Data Groups
engineering library.
Minimum Td: Enter the minimum Td.
Number of Steps: Enter the number of time steps. You need at least 10 steps to build the rainfall curve.
Duration: Enter the duration of the event.
525
Lets you define the time for the first ordinate in a storm
data.
Increment
End Time
Lets you define the time for the last ordinate in a storm
data.
Graph
The Storm Data dialog box also includes the following controls:
526
Return Event
Related Topics
Depth
Start Time
Duration
Related Topics
527
Edit: Opens the Time Settings dialog box, allowing you to define the start time, stop time, and increment for the
current rainfall curve.
Graph: Graphs a plot of the current rainfall curve.
The Rainfall Curve Dictionary dialog box also contains the following table:
Time vs. Depth Table: lets you define time vs. depth points that describe the current rainfall curve. The time column
will be either Synthetic Time or Time, depending on whether the Dimensionless Time Type specified in the library
entry is Dimensionless Time or Time, respectively.
Related Topics
528
529
Where
i = rainfall intensity
D = rainfall duration
a, b, n = rainfall equation coefficients
530
Enter the Return Event and the values for the a, b, and n coefficients. Click the New button to add a row to the table,
and Delete to remove the currently highlighted row.
Where
i = rainfall intensity
D= rainfall duration
a, b, c, d = rainfall equation coefficients
531
Enter the Return Event and the values for the a (log), b (log), and c (log), and d (log) coefficients. Click the New button
to add a row to the table, and Delete to remove the currently highlighted row.
The New and Delete buttons allow you to add and remove rows to/from the table.
532
Lists all of the rainfall curves that have been defined for
the current project in the Storm Data dialog box, which is
accessible by clicking the ellipsis button.
Source
Displays the location of the library file for storm data that
are derived from an engineering library entry.
Return Event
Depth
Duration
Catchment Characteristics
The precipitation that falls on a catchment can only be converted into a flow to a sewer if the user specifies the
following:
Area to determine magnitude of available flow(For more information, see Entering Area (on page 534).)
Runoff method which consists of:
533
Loss method to determine the amount of available flow that actually runs off
The modified rational method does not explicitly have a loss method associated with it.
Entering Area
There are two ways to specify area in a catchment.
The first involves directly entering the area in the Property Editor or FlexTable for the catchment.
The second is based on the scaled area from the drawing. This can only be used if the drawing is scaled and the units
have been correctly identified. Bentley SewerCAD displays the scaled area in the Property Editor for the catchment and
you must copy that value in the Area attribute. For more information, see Catchment-Geometry (on page 1093).
It is possible to have an area that is not uniform in terms of runoff. For more information, see Defining CN Area
Collections for Catchments (on page 495).
For more information, see Catchment-Catchment (on page 1093).
Related Topics
534
Delete
Report
Description
Description
CN
Area
535
Description
Runoff Method
Bentley SewerCAD supports the following runoff methods which can be selected by the user in the Property Editor or
FlexTable under the attribute Runoff Method. They include:
None - no runoff
Modified rational method
Unit hydrograph
EPA SWMM
User defined hydrograph
The data required varies for each method. The data requirements are summarized in CatchmentRunoff (on page
1094). The data needs for each method are described in their individual sections.
The input parameters for each method are listed below. Each of these methods is described in standard hydrology and
stormwater references such as Stormwater Modeling Conveyance and Design, published Haestad Press.
Input Parameters for Unit Hydrograph Runoff Methods
Loss method
Capillary suction
Ks
Moisture deficit
fc
fo
Initial abstraction
K
Recovery constant
Maximum volume
Time of Concentration (For more information, see Specifying a Time of Concentration (Tc) Method for a
Catchment (on page 218) .)
Unit hydrograph method (For more information, see Unit Hydrograph Methodology (on page 991) .)
Generic unit hydrograph (For more information, see Generic Unit Hydrographs (on page 992) .)
536
RTK Method(For more information, see Adding Hydrographs Based On the RTK Method (on page 539).)
SCS (For more information, see Using the SCS Unit Hydrograph Runoff Method (on page 544).)
For more information on unit hydrograph runoff methods, see Unit Hydrograph Runoff Methods-443.
Related Topics
537
New
Delete
Report
Graph
Description
Time
Flow
EPA SWMM
The input parameters for each method are listed below.
Loss method
Capillary suction
Ks
Moisture deficit
fc
fo
Initial abstraction
K
Recovery constant
Maximum volume
Storage (Impervious Depression)
Storage (Pervious Depression)
Manning's n (Impervious)
Manning's n (Pervious)
Percent impervious
Slope
Subarea routing
Percent routed
If you are using the EPA SWMM runoff method with the SWMM engine, you must:
538
Horton
Green and Ampt
SCS CN
The validation checks all active catchments for the scenario being computed and then filters the list further for those
that are EPA-SWMM Runoff Method with a loss method not equal to the setting in the calculation options.
The reason for this validation is simple. SWMM only supports the calculation of a model using a single infiltration
method. All catchments will use that one global infiltration method with no local overrides.
If a model has a condition where an EPA-SWMM Runoff Method catchment uses a loss method that is NOT the same
as the calculation option, the following user notification is generated:
-1 Base "Scenario 1 Base (N/A) One or more EPA-SWMM catchments are using an infiltration method not the
same as the default infiltration method in the calculation options. Precalculation
This user notification is only generated when the engine type in the calculation options is set to "Implicit" (which is the
Bentley DynamicWave calculation engine).
Rapid inflow
Moderate infiltration
Slow infiltration
A typical RTK hydrograph is shown below. Q1, Q2 and Q3 refer to the three components of flow which must be
summed to determine the flow.
539
540
R - fraction of precipitation that enters the collection system for that component
T - the time from the precipitation pulse to the peak of that component of the hydrograph
K- the ratio of the time to peak to time to end of hydrograph for that component.
There is no theoretical method to determine R, T and K. They must be determined empirically for each system based on
a comparison of a measured rainfall hyetograph with measured wet weather sewer flow.
In general, R will be higher for systems that have significant infiltration and inflow problems than tight systems. T will
be larger for larger catchments and will be larger for slow infiltration than rapid inflow. K is usually on the order of 1.5
to 2.5. The sum of the R values for all components should be positive but less than 1. The default units for T is hours
while R and K are dimensionless.
Determining R, T and K for a particular catchment (or group of catchments) and event involve constructing a model,
then trying different values of R, T and K that, when combined with sanitary dry weather flow, match the measured
system hydrograph.
In some cases, the RTK parameters may have been determined for a large area, say several square kilometers (square
miles) but the model is being loaded based on catchments on the order of a few hectares (acres). In this case, the R and
K values are likely to be valid but the T values may need to be decreased to reflect the shorter time of concentration of
these smaller catchments.
It is best to calibrate the RTK method using several storm data.
Note: The word "infiltration" is used in two different ways in wet weather flow monitoring:1. It is the
precipitation that seeps into the ground.2. It is the precipitation that seeps through the groundwater into
collection systems. In Bentley SewerCAD , generally the first definition is used. In the RTK method, the second
definition is typically used.
Related Topics:
Rapid Inflow
0.08
1.5
Moderate Infiltration
0.04
3.5
1.75
Slow Infiltration
0.06
1.67
541
To assign an RTK table to a catchment using the Property Editor, perform these steps:
Double-click a catchment in your model.
In the Property Editor, select Unit Hydrograph as the Runoff Method.
Select RTK Unit Hydrograph as the Unit Hydrograph Method.
In the RTK Table field, select the desired RTK table from the drop-down menu, or select New to create a new RTK
table.
To assign an RTK table to a catchment using a FlexTable, perform these steps:
Open or create a catchment FlexTable.
For information on creating FlexTables, see Creating a New FlexTable-151. For information on adding columns
to an existing FlexTable, see Editing FlexTables-153.
Add the following columns to the FlexTable:
Runoff Method
Unit Hydrograph Method
RTK Table
In the Runoff Method cell in the FlexTable, select Unit Hydrograph.
In the Unit Hydrograph Method cell, select RTK Unit Hydrograph.
In the RTK Table cell for the catchment, select the appropriate RTK table or click the Ellipses (...) button to create a
new table.
542
Delete
Rename
Report
Duplicate
The RTK Tables dialog box also contains the following controls:
Rapid Inflow
Moderate Infiltration
Slow Infiltration
There is also a status bar located at the bottom of the dialog box that displays any errors and warnings that may occur
when you enter data.
543
New
Delete
Rename
Report
Help
The table on the top right allows you to define the default RTK and initial abstraction depth for all months. The first
row is used to specify parameters for a short-term response hydrograph, the second for a medium-term response
hydrograph, and the last for a long-term response hydrograph. It contains the following columns:
R
Dmax
Drec
Do
The table at the bottom allows you to override the default RTK and/or abstraction depth for specified months. To
override the default value, check the box for the corresponding row to enable the values in that row to be edited.
544
Default CurvilinearThis method uses the standard dimensionless curvilinear unit hydrograph ordinates, as defined
in Chapter 4 of the National Engineering Handbook, Section 4.
Triangular Unit HydrographThis method uses a triangular unit hydrograph shape to define the coordinates for the
unit hydrograph. The default shape factor is 484 (37.5% of the volume on the rising limb of the unit hydrograph).
Dimensionless Unit HydrographThis method allows you to customize the Q/Qp-T/Tp unit hydrograph that is
used with the SCS Unit Hydrograph method. See Adjusting the Q/Qp-T/Tp Unit Hydrograph (on page 545) for
more information.
Related Topics:
Delete
545
Duplicate
Rename
Report
Synchronization Options
New
Delete
Duplicate
546
Rename
Report
Synchronization Options
547
Delete
Notes Tab
Library Tab
Q/Qp Column
Notes Tab
Library Tab
548
Delete
Rename
Report
Graph
Modified Rational
The modified rational methods used in Bentley SewerCAD are listed below.
Rational C
Time of concentration (For more information, see Specifying a Time of Concentration (Tc) Method for a Catchment
(on page 218).)
Receding limb multiplier (For more information, see Calculation Option Attributes (on page 639).)
Time of Concentration
To model infiltration along a pipeline, it is possible to specify infiltration as:
Pipe length
Pipe area
Pipe diameter-length
Count
Hydrograph
Pattern load
The first four types of infiltration are constant rates while the last two are time varying inflows. For more information
on entering data for each type of infiltration, see Conduit-Infiltration (on page 1030).
549
Pipeline Infiltration
Infiltration-Inflow is the water that enters the system from the ground through defective pipes, pipe joints, connections.
The SWMM solver supports a user-defined infiltration flow (Flow /Additional Infiltration) and other solvers have
additional support to allow a few different load types, see "Conduit-Infiltration/Inflow and Seepage" for details.
Seepage is the flow loss from the system; it is the seepage of the conduit (or channel) from its bottom and side walls
into conduit's surrounding soil. Only SWMM solver supports the conduit seepage loss calculation among the four
solvers. User can specify a seepage loss rate and the solver calculates the seepage loss at each time step using the loss
rate and conduit flow area (based on the length and wetted-perimeter).
To model infiltration along a pipeline, it is possible to specify infiltration as:
Pipe length
Pipe area
Pipe diameter-length
Count
Hydrograph
Pattern load
The first four types of infiltration are constant rates while the last two are time varying inflows.
Note: Infiltration loading will be ignored by the calculation engine if it is assigned to a conduit whose upstream
element is a Pond Outlet Structure.
Conduit infiltration flow is added after the upstream section of the conduit by the calculation engine. Therefore, when
viewing flow results, you will see the infiltration flow in the middle section and the downstream section of the conduit.
550
In applying either method, the models also has a stability filter when the pond water depth is below 0.5 ft so that the
seepage loss rate will linearly reduce to zero as the depth decreases to zero.
Explicit (SWMM) solver:
Green-Ampt: The Green- Ampt infiltration method is used to compute the pond seepage loss, in which suction head,
conductivity and initial deficit data are required.
Evaporation loss is supported, a few evaporation types can be defined in the climatology data (under Components SWMM Extensions) and a user specified evaporation factor for the pond.
Extreme Flows
Extreme flow factors are generally used for computing peak discharges, and therefore are typically referred to as
peaking factors or peaking equations. However, since they can also be used to compute minimum discharges, the term
extreme flow factor is more accurate and will be used throughout the program and documentation.
SewerGEMS V8i defines tabular and equation extreme flow factor methods in the editable Engineering Libraries, thus
allowing you to edit predefined methods and insert new ones. The extreme flow factor can be user-defined with either
of the following:
Equation extreme flow factor method
Table extreme flow factor method
In both cases, the extreme flow factor method can be a function of either of the following:
Contributing population
Base Load
551
Duplicate
Delete
Rename
Report
552
Synchronize
The following table describes the rest of the controls in the Extreme Flows dialog box.
Extreme Flows List Pane
Table Section
New button
Delete button
553
Equation Section
Flow Unit
Cutoff Value
c1
Equation coefficient.
c2
Equation coefficient.
c3
Equation coefficient.
e1
Equation coefficient.
e2
Equation coefficient.
m1
Equation coefficient.
m2
Equation coefficient.
Library Tab
Bentley SewerCAD uses a generic exponential equation to define any extreme flow factor method. For population
based extreme flow factor methods, the generic equation is:
554
where P is population and c1, c2, c3, m1, m2, e1, and e2, are constants.
For discharge-based extreme flow factor methods the generic equation is:
where Q is total sanitary (base) load and c1, c2, c3, m1, m2, e1, and e2, are constants.
Duplicate
Delete
Rename
555
Report
Unit Load
Constant
Adjustment Multiplier
Base Load: Enter the base load value for the corresponding extreme flow factor.
Extreme Flow factor: Enter the extreme flow factor for the corresponding base load value.
556
A single project file makes it possible to generate an unlimited number of "What If?" conditions without becoming
overwhelmed with numerous modeling files and separate results.
Because the software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project, it can provide you with powerful
automated tools for directly comparing scenario results. Any set of results is immediately available at any time.
The Scenario / Alternative relationship empowers you to mix and match groups of data from existing scenarios
without having to re-declare any data.
With inheritance, you do not have to re-enter data if it remains unchanged in a new alternative or scenario, avoiding
redundant copies of the same data. Inheritance also enables you to correct a data input error in a parent scenario and
automatically update the corrected attribute in all child scenarios.
These advantages, while obvious, may not seem compelling for small projects. It is as projects grow to hundreds or
thousands of network elements that the advantages of true scenario inheritance become clear. On a large project, being
able to maintain a collection of base and modified alternatives accurately and efficiently can be the difference between
evaluating optional improvements and being forced to ignore them.
557
Create a copy of the model, edit that copy, calculate, and review the results
Although either of these methods may be adequate for a relatively small system, the data duplication, editing, and reediting becomes very time-consuming and error-prone as the size of the system and the number of possible conditions
increase. Also, comparing conditions requires manual data manipulation, because all output must be stored in
physically separate data files.
Before Haestad Methods: Manual Scenarios
Minimize the number of project files the modeler needs to maintain (one, ideally).
Maximize the usefulness of scenarios through easy access to things such as input and output data, and direct
comparisons.
Maximize the number of scenarios you can simulate by mixing and matching data from existing scenarios (data
reuse)
558
Minimize the amount of data that needs to be duplicated to consider conditions that have a lot in common
The scenario management feature in Bentley SewerCAD successfully meets all of these objectives. A single project file
enables you to generate an unlimited number of What If? conditions, edit only the data that needs to be changed, and
quickly generate direct comparisons of input and results for desired scenarios.
Scenario Cycle
The process of working with scenarios is similar to the process of manually copying and editing data, but without the
disadvantages of data duplication and troublesome file management. This process lets you cycle through any number of
changes to the model, without fear of overwriting critical data or duplicating important information. Of course, it is
possible to directly change data for any scenario, but an audit trail of scenarios can be useful for retracing the steps of a
calibration series or for understanding a group of master plan updates.
Before Haestad Methods: Manual Scenarios
559
PropertyA property is a fundamental characteristic of a model element, and is often a single numeric quantity. For
example, the properties of a pipe include diameter, length, and roughness.
AlternativeAn alternative holds a family of related proprties so pieces of data that you are most likely to change
together are grouped for easy referencing and editing. For example, a physical properties alternative groups physical
data for the network's elements, such as elevations, sizes, and roughness coefficients.
ScenarioA scenario has a list of referenced alternatives (which hold the attributes), and combines these
alternatives to form an overall set of system conditions that can be analyzed. A scenario essentially points to the
alternative which contain the propertiy.This referencing of alternatives enables you to easily generate system
conditions that mix and match groups of data that have been previously created. Note that scenarios do not actually
hold any attribute datathe referenced alternatives do.
A Familiar Parallel
Although the structure of scenarios may seem a bit difficult at first, anyone who has eaten at a restaurant should be able
to relate fairly easily. A meal (scenario) is comprised of several courses (alternatives), which might include a salad, an
entre, and a dessert. Each course has its own attributes. For example, the entre may have a meat, a vegetable, and a
starch. Examining the choices, we could present a menu as in the following figure:
A Restaurant Meal Scenario
The restaurant does not have to create a new recipe for every possible meal (combination of courses) that could be
ordered. They can just assemble any meal based on what the customer orders for each alternative course. Salad 1,
Entre 1, and Dessert 2 might then be combined to define a complete meal.
Generalizing this concept, we see that any scenario references one alternative from each category to create a big picture
that can be analyzed. Note that different types of alternatives may have different numbers and types of attributes, and
any category can have an unlimited number of alternatives to choose from.
Generic Scenario Anatomy
560
Inheritance
The separation of scenarios into distinct alternatives (groups of data) meets one of the basic goals of scenario
management: maximizing the number of scenarios you can develop by mixing and matching existing alternatives. Two
other primary goals have also been addressed: a single project file is used, and easy access to input data and calculated
results is provided in numerous formats through the intuitive graphical interface.
But what about the other objective: minimizing the amount of data that needs to be duplicated to consider conditions
that have a lot of common input? Surely an entire set of pipe diameters should not be re-specified if only one or two
change?
The solution is a familiar concept to most people: inheritance.
In the natural world, a child inherits characteristics from a parent. This may include such traits as eye-color, hair color,
and bone structure. There are two significant differences between the genetic inheritance that most of us know and the
way inheritance is implemented in software:
Overriding Inheritance
Overriding inheritance is the software equivalent of cosmetics. A child can override inherited characteristics at any time
by specifying a new value for that characteristic. These overriding values do not affect the parent, and are therefore
considered local to the child. Local values can also be removed at any time, reverting the characteristic to its inherited
state. The child has no choice in the value of his inherited attributes, only in local attributes.
For example, suppose a child has inherited the attribute of blue eyes from his parent. Now the child puts on a pair of
green- tinted contact lenses to hide his natural eye color. When the contact lenses are on, we say his natural eye color is
overridden locally, and his eye color is green. When the child removes the tinted lenses, his eye color instantly reverts
to blue, as inherited from his parent.
Dynamic Inheritance
Dynamic inheritance does not have a parallel in the genetic world. When a parent's characteristic is changed, existing
children also reflect the change. Using the eye-color example, this would be the equivalent of the parent changing eye
561
See help topic Overriding Inheritance (on page 561) for an example of how inheritance works.
A Mid-level Hierarchy Alternative Change
562
"Entre 2 is just like Entre 1, except for the meat and the starch."
"Meal 2 is just like Meal 1, except for the dessert." The salad and entre alternatives are inherited from Meal 1.
"Meal 3 is nothing like Meal 1 or Meal 2." A totally new base or root is created.
"Meal 4 is just like Meal 3, except for the salad." The entre and dessert alternatives are inherited from Meal 3.
563
Although true water distribution scenarios include such alternative categories as initial settings, operational controls,
water quality, and fire flow, we are going to focus on the two most commonly changed sets of alternatives: demands
and physical properties. Within these alternatives, we are going to concentrate on junction baseline demands and pipe
diameters.
564
Now we can create a child scenario from Average Day that inherits the physical alternative, but overrides the selected
demand alternative. As a result, we get the following scenario hierarchy:
Since no physical data (pipe diameters) have been changed, the physical alternative hierarchy remains the same as
before.
Another scenario is also created to reference these new demands, as shown below:
565
Correcting an Error
This analysis results in acceptable pressures, until it is discovered that the industrial demand is not actually 500 gpm
it is 1,500 gpm. Because of the inheritance within the demand alternatives, however, only the Average Day demand for
J-2 needs to be updated. The changes ripple through to the children. After the single change is made, the demand
hierarchy is as follows:
Notice that no changes need to be made to the scenarios to reflect these corrections. The three scenarios can now be
calculated as a batch to update the results.
When these results are reviewed, it is determined that the system does not have the ability to adequately supply the
system as it was originally thought. The pressure at J-2 is too low under peak hour demand conditions.
A much larger diameter is proposed for P-1 (the pipe from the reservoir). This physical alternative is created as a
child of the Preliminary Pipes alternative, inheriting all the diameters except P-1s, which is overridden.
Slightly larger diameters are proposed for all pipes. Since there are no commonalities between this recommendation
and either of the other physical alternatives, this can be created as a base (root) alternative.
This time, the demand alternative hierarchy remains the same since no demands were changed. The two new scenarios
(Peak, Big P-1, Peak, All Big Pipes) can be batch run to provide results for these proposed improvements.
566
Also note that it would be equally effective in this case to inherit the Avg. Day, Big P-1 scenario from Avg. Day
(changing the physical alternative) or to inherit from Peak, Big P-1 (changing the demand alternative). Likewise, Max.
Day, Big P-1 could inherit from either Max. Day or Peak, Big P-1.
Neither the demand nor physical alternative hierarchies were changed in order to run the last set of scenarios, so they
remain as they were.
Summary
In contrast to the old methods of scenario management (editing or copying data), automated scenario management
using inheritance gives you significant advantages:
A single project file makes it possible to generate an unlimited number of What If? conditions without becoming
overwhelmed with numerous modeling files and separate results.
Because the software maintains the data for all the scenarios in a single project, it can provide you with powerful
automated tools for directly comparing scenario results. Any set of results is immediately available at any time.
567
The Scenario / Alternative relationship empowers you to mix and match groups of data from existing scenarios
without having to re-declare any data.
With inheritance, you do not have to re-enter data if it remains unchanged in a new alternative or scenario, avoiding
redundant copies of the same data. Inheritance also enables you to correct a data input error in a parent scenario and
automatically update the corrected attribute in all child scenarios.
These advantages, while obvious, may not seem compelling for small projects. It is as projects grow to hundreds or
thousands of network elements that the advantages of true scenario inheritance become clear. On a large project, being
able to maintain a collection of base and modified alternatives accurately and efficiently can be the difference between
evaluating optional improvements and being forced to ignore them.
To learn more about actually using scenario management in our software, start by running the scenario management
tutorial from the Help menu or from within the scenario manager itself. Then load one of the SAMPLE projects and
explore the scenarios defined there. For context-sensitive help, press F1 or the Help button any time there is a screen or
field that puzzles you.
Scenarios
A Scenario contains all the input data (in the form of Alternatives), calculation options, results, and notes associated
with a set of calculations. Scenarios let you set up an unlimited number of What If? situations for your model, and
then modify, compute, and review your system under those conditions.
You can create scenarios that reuse or share data in existing alternatives, submit multiple scenarios for calculation in a
batch run, switch between scenarios, and compare scenario results--all with a few mouse clicks. There is no limit to the
number of scenarios that you can create.
Base ScenariosContain all of your working data. When you start a new project, you begin with a default base
scenario. As you enter data and calculate your model, you are working with this default base scenario and the
alternatives it references.
Child ScenariosInherit data from a base scenario, or other child scenarios. Child scenarios allow you to freely
change data for one or more elements in your system. Child scenarios can reflect some or all of the values contained
in their parent. This is a very powerful concept, giving you the ability to make changes in a parent scenario that will
trickle down through child scenarios, while also giving you the ability to override values for some or all of the
elements in child scenarios.
Related Topics
568
Creating Scenarios
You create new scenarios in the Scenario Manager. A new scenario can be a Base scenario or a Child scenario. For
information about the differences between the two types of scenarios, see Base and Child Scenarios (on page 568).
To create a new scenario:
1. Select Analysis > Scenarios to open the Scenario Manager, or click the Scenario Manager tab.
2. Click the New button and select whether you want to create a Base scenario or a Child Scenario. When creating a
Child scenario, you must first highlight the scenario from which the child is derived in the Scenario Manager tree
view. By default, a new scenario comprises the Base Alternatives associated with each alternative type.
3. Double-click the new scenario to edit its properties in the Property Editor.
Related Topics
Editing Scenarios
You edit scenarios in two places in Bentley SewerCAD :
The Scenario Manager lists all of the projects scenarios in a hierarchical tree format, and displays the Base/Child
relationship between them.
The Property Editor displays the alternatives that make up the scenario that is currently highlighted in the Scenario
Manager, along with the scenario label, any notes associated with the scenario, and the calculation options profile
that is used when the scenario is calculated.
To edit a scenario:
1. Select Analysis > Scenarios to open the Scenario Manager, or click the Scenario Manager tab.
2. Double-click the scenario you want to edit to display its properties in the Property Editor.
3. Edit any of the following properties as desired:
Related Topics
569
Batch
Select
Close
Help
Related Topics
Scenario Manager
The Scenario Manager lets you create, edit, and manage scenarios. There is one built-in default scenario-the Base
scenario. If you wish, you only have to use this one scenario. However, you can save yourself time by creating
additional scenarios that reference the alternatives needed to perform and recall the results of each of your calculations.
There is no limit to the number of scenarios that you can create.
Note: When you delete a scenario, you are not losing data records because scenarios never actually hold
calculation data records (alternatives do). The alternatives and data records referenced by that scenario exist
until you explicitly delete them. By accessing the Alternatives Manager, you can delete the referenced
alternatives and data records.
The Scenario Manager consists of a hierarchical tree view and a toolbar.
The tree view displays all of the scenarios in the project. If the Property Editor is open, highlighting a scenario in the
list causes the alternatives that make up the scenario appear there. If the Property Editor is not open, you can display the
alternatives and scenario information by highlighting the desired scenario and clicking the Properties button in the
Scenario Manager.
The toolbar contains the following controls:
New Scenario: Opens a submenu containing the following commands: Child ScenarioLets you create a new Child
scenario from the currently highlighted Base scenario. Base ScenarioLets you create a new Base scenario.
570
Alternatives
Alternatives are the building blocks behind scenarios (for more information, see Scenarios (on page 568)). They are
categorized data sets that create scenarios when placed together. Alternatives hold the input data in the form of records.
A record holds the data for a particular element in your system.
Scenarios are composed of alternatives, as well as other calculation options (see Calculation Options (on page
621)), allowing you to compute and compare the results of various changes to your system. Alternatives can vary
independently within scenarios, and can be shared between scenarios.
Scenarios allow you to specify the alternatives you wish to analyze. In combination with scenarios, you can perform
calculations on your system to see what effect each alternative has. Once you have determined an alternative that works
best for your system, you can permanently merge changes from the preferred alternative to the base alternative if you
wish.
When you first set up your system, the data that you enter is stored in the various base alternative types. If you wish to
see how your system behaves, for example, by increasing the diameter of a few select pipes, you can create a child
alternative to accomplish that. You can make another child alternative with even larger diameters, and another with
smaller diameters. There is no limit to the number of alternatives that you can create.
Types of Alternatives
The exact properties of each alternative are discussed in their respective sections. By breaking up alternatives into these
different types, we give you the ability to mix different alternatives any way that you want within any given scenario.
Bentley SewerCAD includes these types of alternatives:
571
Creating Alternatives
New alternatives are created in the Alternatives Manager dialog box. A new alternative can be a Base scenario or a
Child scenario. Each alternative type contains a Base alternative in the Alternatives Manager tree view.
Note: For information regarding the differences between the two types of alternatives, see Base and Child
Alternatives (on page 572).
To create a new Alternative:
1. Select View > Alternatives to open the Alternatives Manager, or click the Alternatives Manager tab.
2. To create a new Base alternative, highlight the type of alternative you want to create, then click the New button.
3. To create a new Child alternative, right-click the Base alternative from which the child will be derived, then select
New > Child Alternative from the submenu.
4. Double-click the new alternative to edit its properties in the Alternative Editor.
Related Topics
Editing Alternatives
You edit the properties of an alternative in its own alternative editor. The first column in an alternative editor contains
check boxes, which indicate the records that have been changed in this alternative.
If the box is checked, the record on that line has been modified and the data is local, or specific, to this alternative.
If the box is not checked, it means that the record on that line is inherited from its higher-level parent alternative.
Inherited records are dynamic. If the record is changed in the parent, the change is reflected in the child. The records
on these rows reflect the corresponding values in the alternatives parent.
or
572
Highlight the alternative to be edited in the Alternatives Manager and click the Properties button.
In either case, the Alternative Editor dialog box for the specified alternative appears, allowing you to view and define
settings as desired.
Related Topics
Alternatives Manager
The Alternatives Manager lets you create, view, and edit the alternatives that make up the project scenarios. The dialog
box consists of a pane that displays folders for each of the alternative types which can be expanded to display all of the
alternatives for that type, and a toolbar.
The toolbar consists of the following buttons:
New
Delete
Duplicate
Open
Merge Alternative
Rename
Report
573
Expand All
Collapse All
Help
574
Pump
Manhole
Catch basin
Outfall
Pond outlet structure
Cross section node
Wet well
Pressure junction
Junction chamber
Conduit
Channel
Gutter
Pressure Pipe
Catchment
Pond
For each tab, the same setup appliesthe tables are divided into three columns. The first column displays whether the
data is Base or Inherited, the second column is the element Label, and the third column allows you to choose whether
or not the corresponding element is Active in the current alternative.
To make an element Inactive in the current alternative, clear the check box in the Is Active? field that corresponds to
that elements Label.
Related Topic
1. In the Scenario Manager, click the New button and select Child Scenario from the submenu.
2. In the Property Editor, which should now display the properties for the newly created scenario, select <New...> in
the Active Topology field.
3. In the Create New Alternative dialog box, type the name of the new child active topology alternative name then
click OK.
4. In the Scenario Manager, select the new child scenario then click the Make Current button to make the child
scenario the current (active) scenario.
5. Add new elements to your model. These elements will be active only in the new child alternative.
6. To verify that this worked as expected:
575
Done: Select Done when you are finished selecting elements. This brings the user back to the drawing pane.
Add: When this button is selected, clicking elements highlights the elements and makes them Inactive. Clicking on
an element that is already inactive causes the tool to give a beep and the element remains inactive.
Remove: While in this mode, clicking on elements that are inactive deselects them, making them Active. Clicking
on active elements has no effect.
Clear: Clicking on this button causes all elements to become active in the current scenario.
Right clicking while the Selection tool is open (i.e. opening the right click context menu) brings up a list which enables
the user to switch between Add, Remove or Done.
Note: Selecting a node element to become Inactive will also select all adjacent pipes to become Inactive. This is
because all pipes must end at a node.
In AutoCAD mode, you cannot use the right-click context menu command Repeat to re-open the Active Topology
Selection dialog box.
Physical Alternatives
Each type of network element has a specific set of physical properties that are stored in a physical properties
alternative, as listed below:
576
Description
ID
Label
Pump Definition
Elevation
Description
ID
Label
Bolted Cover
Width
577
Description
Length
Diameter
Elevation (Rim)
Elevation (Invert)
Elevation (Ground)
Headloss Coefficient
578
Description
Absolute Headloss
Headloss Method
ID
Label
Description
ID
Label
Inlet Type
Width
Length
Diameter
579
Description
Elevation (Rim)
Description
ID
Label
Elevation (Ground)
580
Description
ID
Label
Control Structure
Upstream Pond
Description
ID
Label
Mannings n
Channel Mannings n
Roughness Type
581
Description
Transition Length
Transition Type
Elevations Modifier
Stations Modifier
Material
Bottom Width
582
Description
Elevation (Invert)
Lets you define the invert elevation for all cross section
nodes in the alternative. This column is only available for
Trapezoidal cross section types.
Lets you define the left side slope for all cross section
nodes in the alternative. This column is only available for
Trapezoidal cross section types.
Lets you define the right side slope for all cross section
nodes in the alternative. This column is only available for
Trapezoidal cross section types.
Height
Lets you define the height, or channel depth for all cross
section nodes in the alternative. This column is only
available for Trapezoidal cross section types.
Section Type
Lets you specify the cross section type for all cross
section nodes in the alternative. The choices include
Trapezoidal and Generic cross section types.
Description
ID
Label
Exponent
Coefficient
Area
583
Description
Lets you specify the volume type of each wet well in the
alternative. The type chosen here will affect the
availability of other fields in the alternative.
Ponded Area
Max. Level
Elevation (Invert)
Description
ID
Label
Elevation
Description
ID
Label
Diameter
Elevation (Bottom)
Elevation (Top)
Elevation (Ground)
584
Description
Headloss Coefficient
Absolute Headloss
Headloss Method
Description
ID
Label
Egg Rise
Number of Barrels
Horseshoe Span
Horseshoe Rise
585
Description
Ellipse Span
Ellipse Rise
Basket Span
Basket Rise
Box Kr
Lets you define the reverse flow loss value for the
associated conduit. This column is only available for box
conduits that do Apply Culvert Data.
Box Ke
Lets you define the entrance loss value for the associated
conduit. This column is only available for box conduits
that do Apply Culvert Data.
Box Y
Box M
Box C
586
Description
Box K
Box Span
Box Rise
Circle Kr
Lets you define the reverse flow loss value for the
associated conduit. This column is only available for
circle conduits that do Apply Culvert Data.
Circle Ke
Lets you define the entrance loss value for the associated
conduit. This column is only available for box conduits
that do Apply Culvert Data.
Circle Y
Circle M
587
Description
Circle C
Circle K
Diameter
Base Width
Section Type
Lets you specify the section type for each conduit in the
alternative. The value that is chosen affects the available
input data for other columns.
Outlet Structure
588
Description
Channel Mannings n
Elevations Modifier
Stations Modifier
Material
Invert (Stop)
Invert (Start)
589
Description
Lets you define the exit loss coefficient for the associated
conduits.
590
Description
Flap Gate?
Mannings n
Roughness Type
Arch Span
Arch Rise
Catalog Pipe Kr
Lets you define the reverse flow loss value for the
associated conduit. This column is only available for
catalog pipe conduits that do Apply Culvert Data.
Catalog Pipe Ke
Lets you define the entrance loss value for the associated
conduit. This column is only available for box conduits
that do Apply Culvert Data.
591
Description
Catalog Pipe Y
Catalog Pipe M
Catalog Pipe C
Catalog Pipe K
Catalog Pipe
Semi-Ellipse Span
Semi-Ellipse Rise
592
Description
Egg Span
Description
ID
Label
Scaled Length
Invert (Start)
593
Description
Flap Gate?
Invert (Stop)
Material
Description
ID
Label
Mannings n (Gutter)
Gutter Material
594
Description
Depth
Bottom Width
Irregular Channel
Description
ID
Label
Infiltration (Average)
Constant Flow
The flow that exits the pond via infiltration during each
time step. This value only applies when the Pond
Ifiltration Method is set to Constant Flow.
595
Description
Invert (Stop)
Invert (Start)
Volume Type
Specifies which of the four volume methods (ElevationArea, Elevation-Volume, Pipe, or Functional) is used for
each pond in the alternative. Clicking a field in this
column allows you to switch between them.
Pond Constant
Pond Exponent
Pond Coefficient
Depth (Maximum)
Elevation (Invert)
Number of Barrels
596
Description
Length
Pipe Diameter
Elevation-Volume Curve
Elevation-Area Curve
Description
ID
Label
Mannings n
Hazen-Williams C
Diameter
597
Description
Material
Invert (Stop)
Lets you choose whether to set the invert to the stop node.
When the check box checked, the invert is set to the stop
node.
Invert (Start)
Lets you choose whether to set the invert to the start node.
When the check box checked, the invert is set to the stop
node.
Description
ID
Label
598
Description
Tidal Gate
Boundary Element
Contains list boxes that display all of the elements that are
available to be used as boundary ponds. This column is
available only when the Boundary Pond Boundary
Condition is specified.
Time-Elevation Curve
599
Description
ID
Label
Depth (Initial)
Lets you define the initial depth for each of the manholes
in the alternative.
Description
ID
Label
Depth (Initial)
Lets you define the initial depth for each of the catch
basins in the alternative.
600
Description
ID
Label
Elevation (Initial)
Lets you define the initial water surface elevation for each
wet well in the alternative that uses the User Defined
Initial Elevation Initial Elevation Type.
Description
ID
Label
Elevation (Initial)
Lets you define the initial water surface elevation for each
of the ponds in the alternative.
Description
ID
Label
Status (Initial)
601
Hydrology Alternatives
The hydrology alternative allows you to define hydrologic settings for catchments. The following columns are
available:
Column
Description
ID
Label
Surface Elevation
Receiving Node
Aquifer
Area
Initial Abstraction
Lets you define the initial abstraction (Ia) for each of the
catchments in the alternative. The initial abstraction is a
parameter that accounts for all losses prior to runoff and
consists mainly of interception, infiltration, evaporation,
and surface depression storage. This column is only
available for catchments that use the Unit Hydrograph
Runoff Method and the Generic Horton Loss Method.
Recovery Constant
Maximum Volume
602
Description
Moisture Deficit
SCS CN
fo
Lets you define the initial infiltration rate at the time that
infiltration begins for each of the catchments in the
alternative. This column is only available for catchments
that use the Unit Hydrograph Runoff Method and the
Generic Horton Loss Method.
fc
CN Area Collection
Slope
Ks
603
Description
Capillary Suction
Lets you define the capillary suction value for the soil
type associated with each of the catchments in the
alternative that use the Green and Ampt Runoff Loss
Method. This column is only available for catchments that
use the Unit Hydrograph Runoff Method and the Green
and Ampt Loss Method.
fLoss
Lets you define the fLoss absorption value for each of the
catchments in the alternative. This column is only
available for catchments that use the Unit Hydrograph
Runoff Method and the fLoss Loss Method.
Loss Method
Subarea Routing
Percent Routed
Mannings n (Pervious)
Mannings n (Impervious)
Percent Impervious
604
Description
Characteristic Width
Runoff Method
Tc Data Collection
Tc
Runoff Method
Outflow Node
Apply Groundwater
605
Description
If set to True then the LID will occupy the full area of the
LID's owning catchment.
Output Alternatives
The output alternative lets you define output options for network elements, as listed below:
606
Description
ID
Label
Output Options
Description
ID
Label
607
Description
Output Options
Description
ID
Label
Inflow Collection
608
Description
ID
Label
Inflow Collection
Description
ID
Label
Inflow Collection
Description
ID
Label
Inflow Collection
609
Description
ID
Label
Inflow Collection
Description
ID
Label
Inflow Collection
Description
ID
Label
Inflow Collection
610
Description
ID
Label
Inflow Collection
Description
Lists all of the rainfall curves that have been defined for
the current project in the Storm Data dialog box, which is
accessible by clicking the Ellipsis (...) button.
Source
Displays the location of the library file for storm data that
are derived from an engineering library entry.
Return Event
Depth
Duration
611
Description
ID
Label
Description
ID
Label
Runoff Hydrograph
Local Storm
Duration
Depth
Return Event
612
Description
Runoff Hydrograph
Description
ID
Label
Evaporation Factor
Description
ID
Label
Evaporation Factor
613
Description
ID
Label
Treatment
Apply Treatment
Description
ID
Label
Treatment
Apply Treatment
Description
ID
Label
614
Description
Treatment
Apply Treatment
Description
ID
Label
Treatment
Apply Treatment
Description
ID
Label
Treatment
Apply Treatment
615
Description
ID
Label
Treatment
Apply Treatment
Headloss Alternative
The headloss alternative editor allows you to define headloss properties for manhole, catch basin, and conduit elements.
The following columns are available, depending on element type:
ID: Displays the unique identifier for each element in the alternative.
Label: Displays the label for each element in the alternative.
Absolute Headloss: Enter the desired value for headloss at the structure. This method ensures that the headloss across
the structure will be equal to the value entered here regardless of the actual flows or geometry of the structure. This
field is only used when the Headloss Method is set to Absolute.
Headloss Method: Select the method to be used to calculate the headlosses through the associated structure. The option
chosen here determines which of the parameter fields will become available.
Flow-Headloss Curve: Specify the previously defined Flow-Headloss curve to be applied to the node, or create a new
one by choosing the <Select...> option to access the Flow-Headloss Curves dialog.
Headloss Coefficient (Standard): Enter the headloss coefficient for the structure. The headloss across the structure will
be equal to this number multiplied by the exit conduit velocity head. This field is only used when the Headloss Method
is set to Standard.
Headloss Coefficient (Upstream): This field is only used when the Headloss Method is set to Generic. The Generic
method computes the structure headloss by multiplying the velocity head of the exit pipe by the user-defined Headloss
(Downstream) value and then subtracting the velocity head of the governing upstream pipe multiplied by thevalue
entered in this field.
Headloss Coefficient (Downstream): This field is only used when the Headloss Method is set to Generic. The Generic
method computes the structure headloss by multiplying the velocity head of the exit pipe by the value entered in this
field and then subtracting the velocity head of the governing upstream pipe multiplied by the user-defined Headloss
Coefficient (Upstream) value.
Entrance Loss Coefficient: Specify the loss coefficient for the entrance of the conduit.
Exit Loss Coefficient: Specify the headloss coefficient for the conduit exit.
616
Operational Alternative
The operational alternative allows you to define the operational settings for pump elements.
ID: Displays the unique identifier for each element in the alternative.
Label: Displays the label for each element in the alternative.
Ignore On and Off Elevations in SWMM?: By setting this to True, you can ignore the on and off elevations when
runing the model with the SWMM engine.
Elevation (Off): Set the Water Surface Elevation at the immediate upstream node, above which the pump will turn on.
Elevation (On): Set the Water Surface Elevation at the immediate upstream node, below which the pump will shut off.
Description
ID
Label
Sanitary Loads
Known Flow
617
Description
ID
Label
Sanitary Loads
Known Flow
Description
ID
Label
Sanitary Loads
Known Flow
Description
ID
Label
Sanitary Loads
Known Flow
618
Design Alternative
The Design Alternative Editor allows you to edit the pipe, node and inlet constraints governing the design of the
system. It also allows you to specify which gravity elements you want designed, and the extent to which you want them
designed.
For example, you may want to design a particular pipe. However, you may also want to design the downstream invert
elevation to meet a particular velocity, cover, and slope constraint.
The tabbed dialog for each particular type of element follows the same general format. The top of the dialog box
contains several fields where the design constraints can be entered. The constraints entered in these fields are applied to
every element in the table on the bottom of the dialog, except the elements that are specified to contain local values.
This system allows you to rapidly enter the values that govern most of the elements in the table, and then manually
override the constraints for those elements that are exceptions to the majority. The following attributes are available in
this section:
Pipe diameters, invert elevations, node structures, and inlets can be all designed with the same set of design constraints.
You also have the option to adjust these values individually for each pipe or structure.
The Default Design Constraints dialog is divided into the three following tabs:
Gravity Pipe
Node
Inlet
Default Constraints
Extended Design
Part Full Design Tab: The Part Full Design tab consists of the following controls:
Number of Barrels Tab: The Number of Barrels tab consists of the following controls:
Section Size Tab: The Section Size tab consists of the following controls:
619
For an inlet in sag, the Default In Sag Design Constraints consist of maintaining the gutter spread and water depth
under a given value.
For an inlet on a grade, the Default on Grade Design Constraints consist of ensuring that at least a given percentage
of the gutter flow is intercepted.
Maximum Spread in SagThe maximum allowed spread of water at the inlet, measured from the curb.
Maximum Depth in SagThe maximum depth of water allowed at the inlet.
Design Conduit?: Check this box if you want the program to design the conduit based on the constraints you define.
Design Start Invert?: Check this box if you want the program to design the upstream invert based on the constraints
you define.
Design Stop Invert?: Specify if the program should design the downstream invert based on the constraints given in
the model.
Specify Local Pipe Constraint?: If this box is checked, you can enter local values to replace the default values. If it
is not checked, the program will automatically use the default constraints.
For Nodes
Design Structure Elevation?: Check this box if you want to allow the structure's sump elevation to be adjusted
during an automatic design. When this box is checked, the Desired Sump Depth field becomes editable.
620
Desired Sump Depth: This field becomes editable when the Design Structure Elevation? box is checked. The sump
depth is the distance below the lowest pipe invert.
Local Pipe Matching Constraints?: If this box is checked, you can enter local values to replace the default values. If
it is not checked, the program will automatically use the default constraints.
For Inlets
Design Inlet Opening?: Check this box if you want to allow the Inlet Opening to be adjusted during the automatic
design.
Specify Local Inlet Constraints?: If this box is checked, you can enter local values to replace the default values. If it
is not checked, the program will automatically use the default constraints.
Note: For inlets in sag, the inlet length selected in an automatic design will be the smallest length that will
generate a spread and a depth at the curb less than the maximums specified. For inlets on grade, the inlet length
selected is the smallest length that will generate an inlet efficiency larger than the minimum specified.
ID: Displays the unique identifier for each element in the alternative.
Label: Displays the label for each element in the alternative.
Flow (Known): Used to identify a known flow into the piped system.
Flow (Additional): Flow added directly to the piping system at the catch basin.
External Tc: The time of concentration for an external source not included in the model.
External CA: The rational contributing area of an external source not included in the model.
SCADA Alternatives
The SCADA alternative allows you to modify the settings of the SCADA elements in the model. The SCADA
alternative consists of the following attributes:
ID: Displays the unique identifier for each element in the alternative.
Label: Displays the label for each element in the alternative.
Target Element: The domain element that the ASCADA Singla targets.
Real-Time Signal: The signal returning realtime values for the selected attribute.
Historical Signal: The signal returning historical value(s) for the selected attributes.
Target Element (Storage Unit): Displays the storage unit used by the target element.
Field: The attribute of the target element that the SCADA signal relates to.
Calculation Options
Each scenario is associated with a set of calculation options. Calculation options are stored in a discrete Calculation
Options Profile.
Scenario Comparison
621
If the button is not visible, it can be added using the "Add or Remove Buttons" drop down from the Tools toolbar (see
Customizing the Toolbars).
On first opening the scenario comparison tool, the dialog below opens which gives an overview of the steps involved in
using the tool. Pick the New button (leftmost).
This opens a dialog which allows you to select which two scenarios will be compared.
622
The scenario manager button next to each selection gives you the ability to see the tree view of scenarios. Chose OK to
begin the scenario comparison tool. This initially displays a list of alternatives and calculation options, with the ones
with identical properties displayed with a yellow background and those with different properties displayed with a pink
background. The background color can be changed from pink to any other color by selecting the sixth button from the
left and then selecting the desired color.
The dialog below shows that the Inflow alternative is different between the scenarios. There is a second tab for
Calculation Options which shows if the calculation options are different between scenarios.
This display can also be copied to the clipboard using the Copy button.
The alternatives that have differences are also shown in the left pane with a red mark as opposed to the green check
indicating that there are no differences.
623
To obtain more detailed information on differences, highlight one of the alternatives and select the green and white
Compute arrow at the top of pane (fourth button).
This initially returns a summary of the comparison which indicates the time when the comparison was run, which
scenarios were involved and number of elements and attributes for which there were differences.
624
By picking "Differences" in the left pane for the alternative of interest, you can view the differences. In this display,
only the elements and properties that are different are shown with a pink background.There are separate tables for each
element type that had differences.
625
Using the buttons on top of the right pane, when Differences is selected, you can create a selection set of the elements
with differences or highlight those elements in the drawing. This is very useful for finding elements with differences in
a large model.
Scenario Comparison
The scenario comparison tool enables you to compare input values between any two scenarios to identify differences
quickly. While Bentley SewerGEMS V8i users have previously had the capability to open a child scenario or
alternative and compare it with its parent, this tool greatly extends that capability in that you can compare any two
scenarios or alternatives (not necessarily parent-child) and very easily detect differences.
The scenario comparison tool can be started by picking Tools > Scenario Comparison or by selecting the Scenario
Comparison button from the toolbar.
If the button is not visible, it can be added using the "Add or Remove Buttons" drop down from the Tools toolbar (see
Customizing the Toolbars).
On first opening the scenario comparison tool, the dialog below opens which gives an overview of the steps involved in
using the tool. Pick the New button (leftmost).
626
This opens a dialog which allows you to select which two scenarios will be compared.
The scenario manager button next to each selection gives you the ability to see the tree view of scenarios. Chose OK to
begin the scenario comparison tool. This initially displays a list of alternatives and calculation options, with the ones
with identical properties displayed with a yellow background and those with different properties displayed with a pink
background. The background color can be changed from pink to any other color by selecting the sixth button from the
left and then selecting the desired color.
The dialog below shows that the Inflow alternative is different between the scenarios. There is a second tab for
Calculation Options which shows if the calculation options are different between scenarios.
627
This display can also be copied to the clipboard using the Copy button.
The alternatives that have differences are also shown in the left pane with a red mark as opposed to the green check
indicating that there are no differences.
628
By picking "Differences" in the left pane for the alternative of interest, you can view the differences. In this display,
only the elements and properties that are different are shown with a pink background.There are separate tables for each
element type that had differences.
629
Using the buttons on top of the right pane, when Differences is selected, you can create a selection set of the elements
with differences or highlight those elements in the drawing. This is very useful for finding elements with differences in
a large model.
To choose another color, click the ellipsis button, select the new color from the palette, and click OK.
630
631
Reporting Time StepData will be presented at every reporting time step. The reporting time step should be a
multiple of the hydraulic time step.
Note: If you run an Extended Period Simulation, you can generate graphs of the domain elements in the results
by right-clicking an element and selecting Graph.
Note: Each of the parameters needed for an extended period analysis has a default value. You will most likely
want to change the values to suit your particular analysis.
Occasionally the numerical engine will not converge during an extended period analysis. This is usually due to controls
(typically based on tank elevations) or control valves (typically pressure regulating valves) toggling between two
operational modes (on/off for pump controls, open/closed for pipe controls, active/closed for valves). When this occurs,
try adjusting the hydraulic time step to a smaller value. This will minimize the differences in boundary conditions
between time steps, and may allow for convergence.
Time Browser
The dialog box contains the following controls:
Time Display
Time Slider
Go to Start
Play Backward
Step Backward
Pause/Stop
Step
Play
632
Go to End
Options
Help
Speed Slider
Increment
To record an animation, browse out to the Time Browser. The Record Animation button will launch the Record
Animation dialog. Clicking the Select Area button will grey out the primary screen and provide the user with a
selection tool similar to the Snipping Tool. The user can click and drag to select which portion of the screen is to be
selected. To get out of the selection screen, press the Escape key. After a selection is made the w: and h: fields will
show the width and height of the selected area. The Full Screen checkbox will toggle between the previously selected
area and the full screen. Once an area is selected, clicking the Record button will begin the capture.
Once recording has begun the Recording Dialog will appear. The animation is set back to the first time step prior to
recording. During the recording process, the time step increment is automated. To stop the recording, either click the
Stop Recording button, or wait until the entire animation has played out. At this point the recording will stop
automatically.
Video Player
633
The Video Player allows a user to view the video which was recorded. Play, Pause, and Stop allow the user to control
the playback of the video. The Playback Rate slider allows the user to set the speed at which the video is played back.
The Loop Animation checkbox toggles whether the video loops back to the beginning and continues playing when it
gets to the last frame. The user can use the time slider to navigate to individual frames.
The File menu has options to save the current video, or to open another video via the Save as.. and Open menu options
respectively. If the current video in the Video Player is the result of a recording, the user will be prompted to save the
video if they attempt to close the Player prior to saving the file via the Save as option.
634
Frame Options
Increment
Looping Options
No Loop
Loop Animation
Rocker Animation
Long Term Continuous Simulations (LTCS) in SewerGEMS /CivilStorm Using the SWMM
Engine
Calculation options contain attributes that define how your model is calculated in the software. You create calculation
options in the Calculation Options Manager. You can create several calculation options with different attributes
depending on the requirements of your project.
The software contains a default calculation option called Base Calculation Options. If you do not create additional
calculation options, the software will use this default option whenever you calculate your model.
Creating Calculation Options
To create a calculation option:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open the Calculation Options Manager by selecting Analysis > Calculation Options.
Click the New button. A new option appears in the list with a default name.
Type a new name for the option.
Double-click the new option to display its attributes in the Property Editor. Edit the attributes as required.
635
Open the Calculation Options Manager by selecting Analysis > Calculation Options.
Select the option you want to rename.
Click the Rename button or right-click and select Rename from the shortcut menu.
Type a new name for the option, then press Enter.
Compute Center
The compute center is a dialog box that enables the user to quickly and easily keep track of and modify high level
settings for the current scenario. At a glance, the user can determine what the current scenario is, what the active solver
is and what set of calculation options are being used. The user can also change these without getting into the detailed
scenario selection and calculation options dialogs. The Compute Center is shown below.
636
The scenario row displays the current scenario and enables the user to switch scenarios.
The Compute button
runs.
The Validate button
The Properties button
runs the current scenario and the drop down list next to it enables the user to make batch
Under Calculation Options, the calculation option for the current scenario is listed and can be changed.
In the General category, the solver associated with the current scenario is listed and can be changed. See help topic
Solvers (Numerical)-751 (on page 663) for details.
The remaining properties listed depend upon the solver and time analysis type. If the run is steady as in GVF-Rational
or GVF-convex with the steady option, time properties are not listed while for unsteady (dynamic or EPS runs), time
properties are listed. In general, the properties listed are the most important calculation options. If a calculation option
is not listed, the user can view them by selecting Calculation options in the Compute center or in the main menu.
Open the Calculation Options Manager by selecting Analysis > Calculation Options.
Click the New button. A new option appears in the list with a default name.
Type a new name for the option.
Double-click the new option to display its attributes in the Property Editor. Edit the attributes as required.
637
Open the Calculation Options Manager by selecting Analysis > Calculation Options.
Select the option you want to rename.
Click the Rename button or right-click and select Rename from the shortcut menu.
Type a new name for the option, then press Enter.
Delete
Rename
Help
638
Description
General
Label
Notes
Calculation Options
Calculation Type
639
Description
Duration Type
Duration
End Date
End Time
Minimum Tc
640
Description
Calculation Type
Output Increment
LPI Coefficient
NR Weighting Coefficient
NR Iterations
641
Description
Computation Distance
Start Type
Warm Up Time
642
Description
Routing Method
643
Description
644
Description
Start Sweeping On
End Sweeping On
Inlets
Active Components for Combination Inlets on Grade
Pattern Setup
645
Description
Inertial Terms
646
Description
Gravity Hydraulics
Minimum Time of Concentration
647
Description
Liquid Label
648
Description
Headloss - AASHTO
Bend Angle vs. Bend Loss Curve
Expansion, Ke
Contraction, Kc
649
Description
Shaping Adjustment, Cs
650
Description
Pressure Hydraulics
Liquid Specific Gravity
651
Description
Accuracy
Trials
Rational Method
Use Rational Method Frequency Factors
Frequency Factors
652
Description
653
Description
Rainfall files are binary files that can be saved and reused
from one analysis to the next. The rainfall interface file
collates a series of separate rain gage files into a single
rainfall data file. Normally a temporary file of this type is
created for every SWMM analysis that uses external
rainfall data files and is then deleted after the analysis is
completed. However, if the same rainfall data are being
used with many different analyses, requesting SWMM to
save the rainfall interface file after the first run and then
reusing this file in subsequent runs can save computation
time. The following file modes are available: None When this option is selected, no Rainfall File will be used
or saved. Use -When this option is selected, the Rainfall
File field will become available, allowing you to select
the rainfall file to use. Save -When this option is selected,
the Rainfall File field will become available, allowing you
to specify the name and location for the rainfall file to be
saved.
Rainfall File
Runoff File
654
Description
RDII File
This field is only available when the Save Hot Start File?
option is set to True, and allows you to specify the hot
start file to be saved.
655
Description
When this field is set to True you can specify a hot start
file to initialize the SWMM calculation run.
This field is only available when the Use Hot Start File?
option is set to True, and allows you to specify the hot
start file to be used.
Inlets
Active Components for Combination Inlets on Grade
656
The implicit engine uses a four-point implicit finite difference solver to find the numerical solutions for the
hydrodynamic Saint-Venant equations. The implicit engine tends to be more stable than an explicit solver. The
implicit engine in the software is based on the solver in the National Weather Service FLDWAV model.
The SWMM engine uses the solver from the EPA Stormwater Management Model version 5. This is an explicit
solver which, while more prone to stability problems, exactly matches the results from SWMM 5.
There is an initial elevation attribute for manholes using the SWMM engine so that the calculation can simulate a
filling process if the initial elevation is lower than the downstream start elevation. However in the Implicit engine
the manhole initial elevation is not considred, so the initial mahole elevation is assumed to be the same as the
downstream start elevation.
Inflow hydrographs are also handled differently by the two engines. The implicit engine interpolates flows between the
final flow in the hydrograph and the end time. The SWMM engine assumes that all flows after the final inflow point are
zero.
You select the engine you want to use in the Calculation Options manager.
Note: If a catchment is using the EPA SWMM runoff method and not using the default infiltration method
specified in the SWMM calculation options then neither hydrology or network will calculate.
If the user is not using the EPA SWMM runoff method, then any combination of other runof methods can be used.
SWMM Treats Pump and Their Discharge Lines Differently Than the Implicit Engine. How Do I Handle
the Differences, Especially If I Want to Use Both Engines?
SWMM can "model" a force main without accounting for the hydraulics of the force main from the pump. You simply
specify the discharge node for the force main and the water arrives there. In the software, the hydraulics of the
discharge conduit are explicitly considered.
If you want to get consistent results for a pump line in SWMM and the implicit engine, the force main should be
represented as a "Virtual conduit" in the software.
657
has its own way of dealing with time step size and different implications of time step size. In addition, if catchment
rainfall hydrology is being modeled there are additional different time steps for the hydrology calculations and rainfall
data.
There are numerous time steps that can be set in the models. They are generally set in the calculation options of the
scenario, although some are properties of the individual catchment or storm. In addition, there are some internal time
steps which are based on other parameters such as the time of concentration or the T in the RTK method. The time step
choices are described in the sections below.
Hydraulic solver time steps
The explicit (SWMM) solver needs the smallest time step because of potential instability in the explicit method. The
default of 0.00833 hr (30 sec) is set as its "Routing time step".
The implicit solver can use a somewhat larger time step and its "Calculation time step" has a default value of 0.025 hr
(1.5 min).
The GVF convex solver solves for flow and other hydraulic properties separately and therefore has two different time
steps sizes:
658
659
Implicit (SewerGEMS Dynamic Wave): Solves the full St. Venant equations using an implicit numerical method
developed by Bentley based on the US National Weather Service FLDWAV model. It simultaneously solves for
both flow and hydraulic grade and uses the same equations for gravity and pressure portions of the system. It only
solves dynamic flows (no steady state). It can be applied to storm, sanitary and combined sewers.
Explicit (SWMM solver): Solves the full St. Venant equations using an explicit numerical method based on the
EPA-SWMM model. In addition to solving the St. Venant equations using a dynamic solution, it can also route
flows using a kinematic wave solution and a uniform flow solution, which does not account for any backwater
effects. The Explicit dynamic solver simultaneously solves for both flow and hydraulic grade and uses the same
660
equations for gravity and pressure portions of the system. It can be applied to storm, sanitary and combined sewer,
especially systems without a great deal of force mains or pressure sewers.
GVF - Convex (SewerCAD): Separates the hydraulic problem first into a set of gravity subnetworks and pressure
subnetworks. For the gravity subnetworks, it divides the solution into a flow routing problem using convex routing
(a hydrologic routing method) and then solves for hydraulic grade (including depth and velocity) using gradually
varied flow (GVF) (backwater) equations. For the pressure subnetworks, it uses a true pressure solver as found in
Bentley's WaterGEMS. It can perform extended period simulations and steady state simulations and can base steady
simulations on an extreme flow factor method that reduces peaking factors as the flow increase moving
downstream. The solution method was developed for the SewerCAD model. It can be applied to sanitary and
combined sewers, especially those with a great deal of pumping or pressure sewers, and those which only require a
steady state analysis.
GVF - Rational (StormCAD): Uses flows developed by the rational method (plus other additional flows). The solver
outes values for CA downstream while decreasing peaking factors due to longer time of concentration moving
downstream. Once flows are determined, hydraulic grade (including depth and velocity) are determined using
gradually varied flow (GVF) methods for both gravity and pressure pipes. This solution method was originally
developed for the StormCAD model. It can be applied to stormwater system.
Note: For steady state runs using the GVF-Convex solver, patterns are ignored and the base flow is loaded as a
constant inflow.
While the solvers were developed with an orientation to storm and sanitary sewer design, to the extent to which they
capture the behavior of the systems, the solvers can also be applied to flood control systems, irrigation systems, natural
streams, treatment plants and any other hydraulic systems comprised of a mixture of gravity and/or pressure flow
elements.
SewerGEMS contains all of the numerical hydraulic solvers. The association of other products and solvers is shown
below.
Available Solvers by Product
Solver
SewerGEMS
CivilStorm
SewerCAD
StormCAD
Implicit
Yes
Yes
No
No
Explicit
Yes
Yes
No
No
GVF-Convex
Yes
No
Yes
No
GVF-Rational
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Frequency Factors
Typical application of Rational Method is within in the context of a peak flow or a design run simulation. To aid in the
pairing of larger storm events with the Rational Method or Modified Rational Method, one may option to utilize the
calculation options available for employing Frequency Factors.
With the use of a Frequency Factor term the Rational Method effectively becomes:
Q=C'iA
Q = Rational Flow
C' = Runoff Coefficient (Adjusted)
i = Intensity
661
A = Drainage Area
C'=CfC
For larger Return Events the adjusted Runoff Coefficient may become larger than 1. Additional Frequency Factor
calculation options include ability to declare this as an invalid condition. When the calculation option Allow Runoff
Coefficient to Exceed 1.0? is set to a state of False, a user notification will appear and simulation upon Compute will
not be successful when this condition is detected.
Within calculation options, user may specify a Frequency Factor to be paired with each potential Return Period (T). By
launching the Frequency Factors dialog from the Frequency Factors calculation option, a modeler may declare a
Multiplier (Cf) for each Average Recurrence Interval (T).
The Frequency Factors dialog box contains buttons and a return periods vs. frequency factors table. The dialog box
contains the following controls:
New
Delete
Report
Description
Multiplier
662
Solvers (Numerical)
The Bentley storm and sanitary products have a distinct advantage over other sewer models in that it is possible for a
user to choose different numerical hydraulic solvers for each scenario. This is important because there is not a single
"correct" way to solve the complex hydraulic equations for a mixed gravity and pressure hydraulic network. Each
problem has its own characteristics that can make one solver (sometimes referred to as an "engine") more advantageous
than another.
Each of the solvers is briefly described in the section below.
Implicit (SewerGEMS Dynamic Wave): Solves the full St. Venant equations using an implicit numerical method
developed by Bentley based on the US National Weather Service FLDWAV model. It simultaneously solves for
both flow and hydraulic grade and uses the same equations for gravity and pressure portions of the system. It only
solves dynamic flows (no steady state). It can be applied to storm, sanitary and combined sewers.
Explicit (SWMM solver): Solves the full St. Venant equations using an explicit numerical method based on the
EPA-SWMM model. In addition to solving the St. Venant equations using a dynamic solution, it can also route
flows using a kinematic wave solution and a uniform flow solution, which does not account for any backwater
effects. The Explicit dynamic solver simultaneously solves for both flow and hydraulic grade and uses the same
equations for gravity and pressure portions of the system. It can be applied to storm, sanitary and combined sewer,
especially systems without a great deal of force mains or pressure sewers.
663
GVF - Convex (SewerCAD): Separates the hydraulic problem first into a set of gravity subnetworks and pressure
subnetworks. For the gravity subnetworks, it divides the solution into a flow routing problem using convex routing
(a hydrologic routing method) and then solves for hydraulic grade (including depth and velocity) using gradually
varied flow (GVF) (backwater) equations. For the pressure subnetworks, it uses a true pressure solver as found in
Bentley's WaterGEMS. It can perform extended period simulations and steady state simulations and can base steady
simulations on an extreme flow factor method that reduces peaking factors as the flow increase moving
downstream. The solution method was developed for the SewerCAD model. It can be applied to sanitary and
combined sewers, especially those with a great deal of pumping or pressure sewers, and those which only require a
steady state analysis.
GVF - Rational (StormCAD): Uses flows developed by the rational method (plus other additional flows). The solver
outes values for CA downstream while decreasing peaking factors due to longer time of concentration moving
downstream. Once flows are determined, hydraulic grade (including depth and velocity) are determined using
gradually varied flow (GVF) methods for both gravity and pressure pipes. This solution method was originally
developed for the StormCAD model. It can be applied to stormwater system.
Note: For steady state runs using the GVF-Convex solver, patterns are ignored and the base flow is loaded as a
constant inflow.
While the solvers were developed with an orientation to storm and sanitary sewer design, to the extent to which they
capture the behavior of the systems, the solvers can also be applied to flood control systems, irrigation systems, natural
streams, treatment plants and any other hydraulic systems comprised of a mixture of gravity and/or pressure flow
elements.
SewerGEMS contains all of the numerical hydraulic solvers. The association of other products and solvers is shown
below.
Available Solvers by Product
Solver
SewerGEMS
CivilStorm
SewerCAD
StormCAD
Implicit
Yes
Yes
No
No
Explicit
Yes
Yes
No
No
GVF-Convex
Yes
No
Yes
No
GVF-Rational
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
664
Flow Splits
Flow splits are calculated differently in the various solvers. The implicit and explicit (dynamic wave) solvers determine
the flow split based on hydraulics and downstream boundary conditions. The GVF convex and rational solvers use a
rating curve to split flow between the primary downstream link and diversion links. The explicit (kinematic wave and
uniform) solvers use a 'splitter" node.
665
Pumping
The solvers share the same Pump Definition Library, but not all pump types and functionality are usable in both
products. In general, the multipoint pump curves is the safest to use if the user is switching between solvers.
Controls
There are three ways of controlling elements in time simulations in the storm sewer products;
1. On / off levels as a pump property. These are available in all solvers but are limited to pumps controlled by wet well
levels.
2. SWMM type control statements for any element type. These are available only in the explicit solver.
3. Pressure controls for pressure elements in GVF-convex solver. These are available for pressure elements and can be
more complex than the elementary on/off controls.
If a user plans to move models between solvers, it is best to keep the control statements as simple as possible or to
create different scenarios with control statements in operational alternatives suited to that solver only.
Conduits
Starting with the release of SELECTseries 3, essentially all of the conduit shape options are available in every solver. A
minor exception is Pipe Arch shapes, which are specified differently depending on the solver. See help topic "Pipe Arch
and Arch Behavior".
Ponds
While pond elements can be included in any model, they are supported differently depending on the solver. In the
Implicit and Explicit solver, they are hydraulically calculated based on the inflow, water level, tailwater and pond outlet
structure conditions.
In the GVF solver for extended period simulations, the routing does not account for backup of tailwater but uses the
pond inflow, level and outlet structure to determine flow. Then, the new level will be the higher of the value from the
storage routing or GVF backwater calculations. For GVF steady runs, flow continuity governs. Inflow and outflow to
the pond is balanced, and the pond's water surface water surface level is determined from the control structure. If the
pond does not have an outlet control, the user supplied initial elevation is utilized.
666
Open Channels
The Implicit solver has two types of gravity flow links, conduits and open channels. The other solvers have only
conduit elements, where open channels are simply a special type of conduit as described in the table above.
In the explicit solver, the open channel properties are set at channel cross sections and vary in size between cross
section nodes. In other solvers, the channels are prismatic with constant properties along the link element. When
importing from the implicit solver to other solvers, the shape of the upstream cross section is used as the cross section
for the entirety of prismatic channel.
Air Valves
Air valves at high points are unique to the pressure portion of the GVF Convex solver and are imported as pressure
junctions to other solvers. However, the downhill side of a high point that may or may not flow full may be modeled in
the solvers as gravity conduits that have bolted manholes.
Gutters
The flow properties of gutter elements are not calculated in the GVF-Convex solver which is intended more for sanitary
sewers.
667
Explicit
GVF-Rational
GVF-Convex
Manning's
Darcy-Weisbach
Hazen- Williams
Kutters
Manning's-Single X
Darcy-Weisbach
Hazen- Williams
Kutters
Pressure Pipes
Gravity Conduits
Manning's-Depth- X
Curve
Manning's-FlowCurve
Gravity Channel
(Prismatic)
Manning's-Single X
Manning's-Single X
Horizontal
Segment
Bank Channel
Gravity Channel
(Irregular)
668
Run Completed
Return Event
669
Continuity Error
Duration
Output Increment
Y Iteration Tolerance
670
LPI Coefficient
NR Weighting Coefficient
Computational Distance
671
Runoff Method
Loss Method
Area
Runoff Volume
Flow (Peak)
Time to Peak
Element Type
Branch
Flow (Maximum)
Velocity (Maximum)
Maximum HGL
672
Element Type
Branch
673
Description
General
Label
Notes
Calculation Type
Start Time
Base Date
Duration
674
Description
Convex Routing
Peak Flow Ratio
Gravity Hydraulics
Maximum Network Transversals
675
Description
Pattern Setup
Pressure Hydraulics
676
Description
Accuracy
Trials
677
Description
Expansion, Ke
Contraction, Kc
Shaping Adjustment, Cs
Flat Submerged
Flat Unsubmerged
Depressed Submerged
Depressed Unsubmerged
678
Description
The list of calculation options can be sorted by either of two methods. You can switch between the two sorting methods
by clicking the Categorized or Alphabetical buttons above the list pane.
Information tab: This tab displays any element messages for the currently selected time step.
Status Messages tab: This tab displays any status messages for the currently selected time step.
Trials tab: This tab displays the relative flow change for each of the trials for the currently selected time step.
The pipes listed in the column are categorized according to the subnetwork they are part of. To change the currently
displayed subnetwork, choose another subnetwork from the Subnetwork pulldown menu.
679
680
681
682
Run Metrics
683
Dry Weather Inflow: The total volume of dry weather flow entering the system over the course of simulation.
Wet Weather Inflow: The total volume of wet weather flow entering the system over the course of simulation.
Groundwater Inflow: The total volume of groundwater flow entering the system over the course of simulation.
RDII Inflow: The total volume of RDII flow entering the system over the course of simulation.
External Inflow: The total volume of flow that enters system via Inflows interface files.
External Outflow: The total volume of flow that exits the system to outflows interface file.
Overflow Losses: The total flow volume that exits the system as flooding or overflow.
Evaporation Losses: The total volume of flow that exits the system via evaporation.
Exfiltration Losses: The total flow volume that exits the system via exfiltration at storage units.
Stored Volume (Initial): The total volume of flow stored at the start of simulation.
Stored Volume (Final): The total volume flow stored at the end of simulation.
Flow Continuity Error: A metric that defines how well the computed inflows, outflows, and storage values
balance out. The closer the value is to zero the better.
System Statistics
Time Step (Minimum) - The minimum time step required to achieve convergence, when variable time steps are
allowed.
Time Step (Average) - The average time step required to achieve convergence, when variable time steps are
allowed.
Time Step (Maximum) - The maximum time step required to achieve convergence, when variable time steps are
allowed.
Steady State - Proportion of simulation time where steady state computations are performed.
Average Iterations Per Step - Average number of trial required to achieve convergence for each time step.
Not Converging - Proportion of simulation time where convergence is not achieved.
Process Models
Infiltration Method - The infiltration method used by the EPA SWMM runoff method during the simulation.
Flow Routing Method - The routing method used by the SWMM engine during the simulation.
Start Date - The date which the simulation began.
Start Time - The time on the Start Date which the simulation began.
Stop Date - The date which the simulation ended.
Stop Time - The time on the Stop Date which the simulation ended.
Duration - The length of time over which the simulation ran.
Start Dry Time - The number of days with no rainfall prior to the start of the simulation. This value is used to
compute an initial buildup of pollutant load on the surface of subcatchments.
Output Increment - The time step which results are reported for the simulation.
684
Hydrologic Increment - The time step length used to compute runoff from subcatchments during periods of
rainfall, or when ponded water still remains on the surface, or when LID controls are still infiltrating or
evaporating runoff.
Dry Step - The time step length used for runoff computations (consisting essentially of pollutant buildup) during
periods when there is no rainfall, no ponded water, and LID controls are dry. This must be greater or equal to the
Wet Weather time step.
Route Step - The time step length used for routing flows and water quality constituents through the conveyance
system.
Has Variable Time Step? - Is true if an internally computed variable time step was used at each routing time
period.
Allows Ponding? - Excess water was allowed to collect atop nodes and be re-introduced into the system as
conditions permit. In order for ponding to actually occur at a particular node.
Maximum Trials - The maximum allowable iterations for each time step to achieve convergence.
Head Tolerance - When the difference in computed head at each node between successive trials is below this
value the flow solution for the current time step is assumed to have converged.
Threads <Count> - The number of threads used in the simulation.
Nodes Tab
The Nodes tab displays statistic attributes for the following node types: Manhole, Catch Basin, Cross Section,
Headwall, Outfall, Transition, Wet Well, Pressure Junction and Pond.
Node Depths: When the Node Depths category is selected, the Nodes tab displays a table displaying the following:
Links Tab
The Links tab will display statistic attributes for all the conduits, channels and pressure pipes in the model.
Link Flows - When the Link Flows category is selected, the Links tab displays a table displaying the following:
685
Catchments Tab
The Catchments tab shows the following statistics for all catchments in the model:
686
Precipitation (Total) - The total calculated precipitation depth that falls on the catchment over the course of the
simulation.
Runon (Total) - The total depth that flows onto this catchment from other catchments or outfalls over the course of
the simulation.
Evaporation (Total) - The total volume of flow that evaporates off of the catchment over the course of the
simulation.
Infiltration (Total) - The total volume of flow that infiltrates into the catchment over the course of the simulation.
Volume (Total Runoff) - Total volume of the runoff hydrograph.
Flow (Maximum) - Maximum flow that occurs in element over the course of simulation.
Time (Maximum Flow) - Time (measured from the start of simulation) when the Flow (Maximum) occurs in this
link.
Runoff Coefficient (Calculated) - The ratio of the total runoff depth to the sum of the total precipitation and runon
depths.
Storage Tab
The Storage tab shows various statistics for all Wet Wells and Ponds in the model. The following attributes are
displayed:
Pumps Tab
The Pumps tab displays the following statistics for all Pumps (regular and variable speed) in the model:
Report Tab
687
2. If needed, open the User Notification manager by clicking Analysis > User Notifications.
3. Or, if the calculation fails to compute because of an input error, when your model is finished computing, the
software prompts you to view user notifications to validate the input data.
4. You must fix any errors identified by red circles before the software can compute a result.
5. Errors identified by orange circles are warnings that do not prevent the computation of the model.
6. In the User Notifications manager, if a notification pertains to a particular element, you can double-click the
notification to magnify and display the element in the center of the drawing pane.
7. As needed, use the element label to identify the element that generates the error and use the user notification
message to edit the elements properties to resolve the error.
User Notifications
User notifications are messages about your model. These messages can warn you about potential issues with your
model, such as slopes that might be too steep or elements that slope in the wrong direction. These messages also point
you to errors in your model that prevent the software from solving your model.
To see user notifications:
1. Compute your model.
2. If needed, open the User Notification manager by clicking Analysis > User Notifications.
3. Or, if the calculation fails to compute because of an input error, when your model is finished computing, the
software prompts you to view user notifications to validate the input data.
4. You must fix any errors identified by red circles before the software can compute a result.
5. Errors identified by orange circles are warnings that do not prevent the computation of the model.
688
Details: Displays the User Notification Details dialog box, which includes information about any warning or error
messages.
Save: Saves the user notifications as a comma-delimited .csv file. You can open the .csv file in Microsoft Excel or
Notepad.
Report: Displays a User Notification Report.
Copy: Copies the currently highlighted warning or error message to the Windows clipboard.
Zoom To: If the warning or error message is related to a specific element in your model, click this button to center
the element in question in the drawing pane.
Select In Drawing: Allows you to select the element(s) associated with the user notification in the drawing pane.
Help: Displays online help for the User Notification Manager.
The User Notification Manager displays warnings and error messages in a tabular view. The table includes the
following columns:
Message ID: This column displays the message ID associated with the corresponding message.
Scenario ID: This column displays the scenario associated with the corresponding message. This column will
display "Base" unless you ran a different scenario.
Element Type: This column displays the element type associated with the corresponding message.
Element ID: This column displays the element ID associated with the corresponding message.
Label: If the notification is caused by a specific element, this column displays the label of the element associated
with the corresponding message.
Message: This column displays the description associated with the corresponding message.
Time: If the user notification occurred during a specific time step, this column displays the time step. Otherwise,
this column is left blank.
Source: This column displays the validation routine that triggered the corresponding message.
689
Statistics
Two general types of statistics are available: Flex table and Long Term Continuous Simulation.
Flex table statistics are available by right clicking the top of any column with numerical data.
Modelers are often required to summarize the results of Long Term Continuous Simulations in terms of parameters
such as number of overflows, volume discharged or other similar properties. While these results can be prepared by
manually reviewing model runs, the software can calculate these statistics when the SWMM hydrology engine or
Implicit engine is used. After a simulation is completed, the software can perform statistical frequency analysis on any
of the variables of each element in model. The software can perform statistical frequency analysis on system results,
such as temperature, precipitation, snow depth, or runoff.
A statistical report can then be generated from the time series of simulation results by selecting Analysis > Statistics or
clicking the Statistics button.
Statistics Manager
In working with Long Term Continuous Simulations, the user reaches the statistics manager by clicking Analysis >
Statistics. The Statistics manager lets the user add, edit, and remove and manage the statistics settings that are
associated with the project. The dialog box contains a list pane that displays each of the statistics currently contained
within the project, along with a toolbar. The toolbar consists of the following buttons:
New
Delete
Rename
Edit
Statistics
Help
690
Statistics Results
The Statistics Results dialog is composed of the following tabs:
Summary: The Summary tab shows the Statistics selection input and statistics results. Input data include Object
Name, Variable, Event Period, Event Statistic, Event Threshold and Period of Record. Statistics results include
Number of Events, Event Frequency, Minimum Value, Maximum Value, Mean Value, Std. Deviation and
Skewness Coefficient. In the example below, there were 79 events during the model run given the precipitation
graph below.
691
Events: The Events tab shows a table of rank-ordered event periods, including their date, duration, and magnitude
ranked according to the mean precipitation intensity.
Histogram: The Histogram tab displays a plot of the occurrence frequency versus event magnitude.
692
Frequency Plot: The Frequency Plot tab displays the exceedance frequency of the event values. In the example,
below50% of the events had a mean precipitation intensity greater than roughly 0.045.
Statistics Editor
The Statistics editor allows the user to define the parameters for the statistical analysis.
693
694
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
Very low flows: If flows are less than 0.01 cfs (0.001 m3/s), depths may fall below accuracy tolerances.
Look for areas displaying common modeling difficulties to verify input data is correct:
Flow splits at weirs and orifices that are dry at certain points during an extended period simulation.
Hydrograph rapidly changes within a short time (minutes).
Very sharp flood wave.
Near-critical slopes.
Significant and abrupt changes in the conduit size, shape and/or slope.
Looped networks.
Backwater up to a control structure.
Significant backwater conditions.
Flow control structures on relatively small storage nodes (ponds, wet-wells).
System inflows vastly exceeding the system capacity resulting in mass flooding.
Unusually small ponds compared to their inflow.
Many pumping stations in the system.
Look for a mix of very long and very small pipes, especially when using the SWMM engine. Eliminate or combine
short pipes because their effect on routing is small. Break exceptionally long pipes into mutliple pipes that are each
roughly the same length as other pipes in the network.
Examine the User Notifications that are displayed after calculating.
Examine Graphs and water surface Profiles. Create Flow plots at splits and at pump discharge areas and look for
jagged peaks in the plot.
Default values for calculation options will work for the majority of cases, but some systems need small adjustments
to converge. When the calculation is moving very slowly (you can observe that the model is stuck at certain times)
or the results show apparent instabilities, it is an indication that the model is experiencing difficulties in converging
to a stable and robust result. Try adjusting calc options in this order:
Initial conditions: Options include warm start or transitional start. Try both and see if one gives better results for
your system.
Computational Distance, Calculation Time Step, and NR Weighting Coefficient: Loop through the following
process:
Try an NR Weighting Coefficient value of between 0.9 and 0.99 with the default Computational Distance and
Calculation Time Step.
Set NR back to default and try reducing the Computational Distance value.
Set Computational Distance back to default and try reducing the Calculation Time Step value.
Keep the Calculation Time Step the same and repeat the above steps.
Try increasing the the NR Iterations to 20.
Try increasing the LPI Coefficient to a value over 10.0. There is no absolute rule on whether the time step, LPI
Coefficient, or the NR weighting coefficient should be changed or to what specific value; normally you should
reduce the time step and increase the NR coefficient but sometimes the opposite can also help.
Isolate problems areas: Isolate the problem area by incrementally deleting small sections of your model and recomputing. This may help you narrow down the source data that the engine has trouble with. It may expose data
entry issues or areas that are exhibiting common modeling difficulties.
Determine at what time step the problem occurs. Look for what is happening at that time. Is a weir beginning to
overflow? Is it the first time a large pump comes on?
Switch to using the SWMM numerical engine. If there are problems when using the SWMM engine, try changing
the Routing Method from Dynamic Wave (default) to Kinematic Wave or Uniform Flow. These methods do not
handle backups as accurately as dynamic wave but they tend to be more stable.
695
Delete
Rename
Edit
Refresh
Help
696
697
698
bmp
jpg
jpeg
jpe
jfif
tif
tiff
png
gif
The associated world file can have two different extensions. You can use the extension of the image file plus "w". For
example, a file named example.jpeg would have a world file named example.jpegw. Or you can use a shorter extension
which uses the first letter of the original extension, the last letter of the original extension plus "w". For example,
example.jpeg could have a world file named example.jgw.
World files do not specify a coordinate system; this information is generally stored somewhere else in the raster file
itself or in another companion file.
The generic meanings of world file parameters are:
1. Line 1: A: x component of the pixel width (x-scale)
2. Line 2: D: y component of the pixel width (y-skew)
3. Line 3: B: x component of the pixel height (x-skew)
699
Delete
Rename
Edit
Shift Up
Shift Down
700
Expand All
Collapse All
Help
Click View > Background Layers to open the Background Layers Manager.
In the Background Layers Manager, click the New button, then click New Folder from the shortcut menu.
Or select the default Background Layers folder, then right-click and select New > Folder from the shortcut menu.
Right-click the new folder and select Rename from the shortcut menu.
Type the name of the folder, then press Enter.
701
Click View > Background Layers to open the Background Layers Manager.
In the Background Layers Managers, click the New button, then click New File from the shortcut menu.
Or right-click on the default Background Layers folder and select New > File from the shortcut menu.
Navigate to the file you want to add as a background layer and select it.
After you add the background layer, you might have to use the Pan button to move the layer within the drawing
area; Zoom Extents does not center a background image.
Related Topics
702
703
Image Filter
Transparency
Resolution
Lets you select the clarity for MrSID images that you
use as background images. Because using a higher level
of clarity or resolution increases the time it takes to
display a MrSID image, you can select the resolution that
best meets your needs. For formats other than MrSID, this
drop-down list contains only one selection.
Use Compression
704
Browse
Label
Unit
Lets you select the unit associated with the spatial data
within the shapefile. For example, if the X and Y
coordinates of the shapefile represent feet, choose ft. from
the drop-down list.
Transparency
Line Color
Sets the color of the layer elements. Click the Ellipsis (...)
button to open a Color palette containing more color
choices.
Line Thickness
Fill Color
Sets the fill color of the layer elements. Click the Ellipsis
(...) button to open a Color palette containing more color
choices.
Fill Figure
Lets you show or hide the selected fill color for the layer
elements. Select this check box to display the selected
background color; clear it to turn off the background color
and only the outline displays.
705
Symbology Definition: The menu lists all of the available element symbology definitions. Click the ellipsis (...)
button to open the Symbology Definitions Manager.
New: Opens a submenu containing the following commands:
New AnnotationOpens the Annotation Properties dialog box, allowing you to define annotation settings for
the highlighted element type.
New Color CodingOpens the Color Coding Properties dialog box, allowing you to define annotation settings
for the highlighted element type.
Add FolderCreates a folder under the currently highlighted element type, allowing you to manage the various
color coding and annotation settings that are associated with an element. You can turn off all of the symbology
settings contained within a folder by clearing the check box next to the folder. When a folder is deleted, all of
the symbology settings contained within it are also deleted.
Delete: Deletes the currently highlighted Color Coding or Annotation Definition or folder.
Rename: Renames the currently highlighted object.
Edit: Opens a Properties dialog box that corresponds with the selected background layer.
Refresh Element Symbology: Opens a shortcut menu containing the following options:
Refresh Element Symbology - This can be useful if your color-coding and/or annotations are applied to a subset
of elements using a query-based selection set. For performance reasons, query-based selection sets are treated as
static selection sets by default. Use this option to refresh the query based selection set while refreshing element
symbology.
Refresh Annotation - If you change an annotation's prefix or suffix in the Property Editor, or directly in the
database, selecting this command refreshes the annotation.
Update Annotation Offset - If you have adjusted the Initial X or Y offsets, selecting this command resets all
annotation X or Y offsets to the currently specified "initial offset" location.
Update Annotation Height - If you've adjusted the height multiplier, selecting this command resets all annotation
heights multipliers to the currently specified initial height multiplier.
Shift Up: Moves the currently highlighted object up in the list pane.
Shift Down: Moves the currently highlighted object down in the list pane.
Drawing Style: This button is only available in the Stand-Alone version (not in MicroStation, AutoCAD, or ArcGIS
versions. Opens a menu containing the following commands:
706
CAD Style-Displays currently highlighted element in CAD Style. Objects displayed in CAD style will appear
smaller when zoomed out and larger when zoomed in.
GIS Style-Displays currently highlighted element in GIS style. Objects displayed in GIS style will appear to
remain the same size regardless of zoom level.
Tree: Opens a menu containing the following commands:
The Element Symbology manager supports Copy/Paste functionality as well as Undo/Redo capability. You can copy/
paste annotations, color coding definitions, and folders by right-clicking them and selecting Copy/Paste. When a folder
is copied in this way all of the contents of that folder are also copied.
Note that element types that are not used in the current model are marked with an icon
707
Symbology Definition
New
Delete
Rename
Edit
708
Shift Up
Shift Down
Expand All
Collapse All
Help
709
Note: You can refresh the display of all color-codings/annotations within a folder by right-clicking the folder and
selecting the Refresh Group command.
In the MicroStation version, the Refresh Group command will override any local modifications made to color or weight
settings applied to individual elements using MicroStation commands. These elements will revert to the Bentley
SewerCAD symbology settings after a Refresh Group command is initiated.
Deleting Folders
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology Manager, right-click the theme folder you want to
delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the folder you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Renaming Folders
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology Manager, right-click the theme folder you want to
rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the folder you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Adding Annotations
To add an annotation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
710
Deleting Annotations
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology Manager, right-click an annotation you want to delete,
then select Delete.
Or, select the annotation you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Related Topics
Editing Annotations
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology Manager, right-click the annotation you want to edit,
then select Edit.
Or, select the annotation you want to edit, then click the Edit button.
Note: Changes to annotation settings may not be visible in the drawing pane immediately. To refresh the
drawing view to reflect any changes that have been made, you can right-click the annotation that was edited in
the Element Symbology Manager and select the Re-Apply Annotation command from the submenu that appears.
Related Topics
711
Renaming Annotations
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology Manager, right-click the annotation you want to rename,
then select Rename.
Or, select the annotation you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Related Topics
Delete
Rename
Initial X Offset
Initial Y Offset
Selected Annotation
712
Prefix
Suffix
Selection Set
Initial Offset
Initial Multiplier
Sets the initial size of the annotation text. Set this at the
time you create the annotation.
When this box is checked, the Field Name list will only
display those fields that are applicable to the currently
active solver. The active solver can be changed in the
Calculation Options (see Calculation Options Manager
(on page 638)).
713
To create an annotation, type the text as you want it to appear in the drawing. You can add element attributes to the text
string by clicking the Append button and selecting the attribute from the categorized list.
714
Note that element types that are not used in the current model are marked with an icon
Import
Export
Delete
Duplicate
715
Rename
Help
When you create a new definition, all of the annotation and color settings will be turned off. To change the settings for
a definition, change the current symbology definition to the one you want to edit in the Element Symbology Manager
(on page 707) and make the desired changes there (i.e. turn on/off the desired elements, create new annotations and
color coding and turn them on or off, etc.).
Enabled: Set to true to enable and set to false to disable Zoom Dependent Visibility.
Minimum Zoom (%): The lowest zoom level at which the element will appear in the drawing pane.
Maximum Zoom (%) : The highest zoom level at which the element will appear in the drawing pane.
Apply to Element: Set to true to apply the zoom minimums and maximums to the symbols in the drawing.
Apply to Decorations: Set to true to apply the zoom minimums and maximums to flow arrows, check valves, and
constituent sources in the drawing.
Apply to Annotations: Set to true to apply the zoom minimums and maximums to labels in the drawing.
Field Name: Select the attribute by which the color coding is applied.
Selection Set: Apply a color coding to a previously defined selection set.
Calculate Range: Automatically finds the minimum and maximum values for the selected attribute and enters them
in the appropriate Min. and Max fields.
Minimum: Define the minimum value of the attribute to be color coded.
Maximum: Define the maximum value of the attribute to be color coded.
Steps: Specify how many rows are created in the color maps table when you click Initialize. When you click
Initialize, a number of values equal to the number of Steps are created in the color maps table. The low and high
values are set by the Min and Max values you set.
Options: Select whether you want to use color coding, sizing, or both to code and display your elements. Map colors
to value ranges for the attribute being color coded. The following buttons are found along the top of the table.
716
Delete: Deletes the currently highlighted row from the Color Maps table.
Initialize: Finds the range of values for the specified attribute, divides it into equal ranges based on the number
of Steps you have set, and assigns a color to each range.
Ramp: Generates a gradient range between two colors that you specify. Pick the color for the first and last values
in the list, then Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT automatically sets intermediate colors for the other values. For
example, picking red as the first color and blue as the last color produces varying shades of purple for the other
values.
Invert: Reverse the order of the colors/sizes used in the Color Map table.
Above Range Color: Displays the color that is applied to elements whose value for the specified attribute fall
outside the range defined in the color maps table. This selection is available if you choose Color or Color and Size
from the Options list.
Above Range Size: Displays the size that is applied to elements whose value for the specified attribute fall outside
the range defined in the color maps table. This selection is available if you choose Size or Color and Size from the
Options list.
717
Adding Color-Coding
To add color coding, including element sizing:
1. Click View > Element Symbology.
2. In the Element Symbology Manager, right-click an element and select New > Color Coding.
3. Or, select the element to which you want to add the color coding, click the New button, and select New Color
Coding.
4. The Color Coding Properties dialog box opens. Select the properties for which you want to color code from the
Field and Selection Set drop-down lists.
5. In the Options drop-down list, select whether you want to apply color and/or size to the elements you are coding.
6. Click Calculate Range. This automatically sets the maximum and minimum values for your coding. If you want,
you can set these values manually.
7. Click Initialize. This automatically creates values and colors in the Color Map. If you want, you can set these values
manually.
8. After you finish defining your color coding, click OK to close the Color Coding Properties dialog box and create
your color coding, or Cancel to close the dialog box without creating a color coding.
9. Click Compute to compute your network.
10. To see the network color coding and/or sizing change over time:
11. Click Analysis > Time Browser, if needed, to open the Time Browser dialog box.
12. Click Play to use the Time Browser to review your color coding over time.
Related Topics
Deleting Color-Coding
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology Manager, right-click the color coding you want to
delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the color coding you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Related Topics
718
Editing Color-Coding
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology Manager, right-click the color coding you want to edit,
then select Edit.
Or, select the color coding you want to edit, then click the Edit button.
Note: Changes to color coding settings may not be visible in the drawing pane immediately. To refresh the
drawing view to reflect any changes that have been made, you can right-click the annotation that was edited in
the Element Symbology Manager and select the Refresh Color Coding command from the submenu that appears.
Related Topics
Renaming Color-Coding
Click View > Element Symbology. In the Element Symbology manager, right-click the color coding you want to
rename, then select Rename.
Or, select the color coding you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Related Topics
Color Coding Properties That Are Not In The List of Field Names
This topic explains how to color code elements by properties that arent in the pre-defined list of field names. For
example; creating a property (Max full flow)/Capacity and color coding by it.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open the Conduit Flex Table and copy the columns Max Flow and Full Capacity and paste into Excel.
Create a new column in Excel that calculates Max Flow/Full Capacity.
In Bentley SewerCAD , create a new User Data Extension e.g. Conduit Field- 1.
Open FlexTables again and bring the Conduit Field-1 column into the FlexTable.
Now Copy and Paste the Max Flow/Full Capacity column from the Excel spreadsheet into the Conduit Field-1
column.
6. Close FlexTables.
7. Now Color Code based on the Conduit Field-1 User Data Extension.
719
Field Name: Lets you select the attribute by which the color coding is applied.
Selection Set: Lets you apply a color coding to a previously defined selection set.
Only list fields that apply to the active solver: When this box is checked, the Field Name list will only display those
fields that are applicable to the currently active solver. The active solver can be changed in the Calculation Options.
Calculate Range: Automatically finds the minimum and maximum values for the selected attribute and enters them
in the appropriate Min. and Max fields.
Min: Lets you define the minimum value of the attribute to be color coded.
Max: Lets you define the maximum value of the attribute to be color coded.
Steps: Lets you specify how many rows are created in the color maps table when you click Initialize. When you
click Initialize, a number of values equal to the number of Steps are created in the color maps table. The low and
high values are set by the Min and Max values you set.
Color Map Options: Lets you select whether you want to use color coding, sizing, or both to code and display your
elements.
Color Map Table: Lets you map colors to value ranges for the attribute being color coded. The following buttons are
found along the top of the table: New: Creates a new row in the Color Maps table. Delete: Deletes the currently
highlighted row from the Color Maps table. Initialize: Finds the range of values for the specified attribute, divides it
into equal ranges based on the number of Steps you have set, and assigns a color to each range. Only values for the
elements in the chosen selection set are considered when the range is calculated. Ramp: Generates a gradient range
between two colors that you specify. Pick the color for the first and last values in the list, then the application
automatically sets intermediate colors for the other values. For example, picking red as the first color and blue as the
last color produces varying shades of purple for the other values. Invert: Reverse the order of the colors/sizes used
in the Color Map table.
Above Range Color: Displays the color that is applied to elements whose value for the specified attribute fall
outside the range defined in the color maps table. This selection is available if you choose Color or Color and Size
from the Options list.
Above Range Size: Displays the size that is applied to elements whose value for the specified attribute fall outside
the range defined in the color maps table. This selection is available if you choose Size or Color and Size from the
Options list.
Using Profiles
A profile is a graph that plots a particular attribute across a distance, such as ground elevation along a section of piping.
As well as these side or sectional views of the ground elevation, profiles can be used to show other characteristics, such
as hydraulic grade, pressure, and constituent concentration.
You define profiles by selecting a series of adjacent elements. Only conduits, channels, and gutters can be part of a
profile. The profile you create displays the structures you selected, plus the relative ground and water elevations.
Note: If there is an active Terrain Model the ground-line based on it will be displayed in the profile view.
To create or use a profile, you can:
Open the Profiles manager. The Profiles manager is a dockable window that lets you add, delete, rename, edit, and
view profiles.
720
Profiles Manager
The Profiles Manager allows you to create, view, and edit profile views of elements in the network. The dialog box
contains a list pane that displays all of the profiles currently contained within the project, along with a toolbar.
The toolbar contains the following buttons:
New
Delete
Rename
Edit
View
Select In Drawing
Highlight
Help
721
Viewing Profiles
To view a profile:
1. Click Compute to calculate flows.
2. Click View > Profiles to open the Profile manager.
3. In the Profile manager, select the profile you want to view, then click the View button (or double-click the profile
you want to view). You can edit your list of profile elements at any time and compute your network with the Profile
Viewer dialog box open, but you must click Refresh to update the display of that dialog box if you do make
changes.
4. The Profile Viewer dialog box opens. For more information, see Profile Viewer Dialog Box (on page 728).
5. If necessary, you can click Chart Settings to change the look of the profile, and use Print Preview and Print to print
the profile.
Related Topics
Animating Profiles
Animate a profile by:
1. Click Compute to calculate flows.
2. Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager.
3. In the Profiles manager, select the profile you want to see and click the Profile button to open the profile in Profile
Viewer.
4. If the Scenario Animation dialog box is not open, select View > Scenario Animation to open it.
5. If needed, click the Scenario Animation Option button to setup the animation.
6. In the Scenario Animation dialog box, move the Time slider or click one of the animation buttons and watch the
profile change over time in the Profile Viewer. As needed, click the Pause button in the Scenario Animation dialog
box, to study the profile at a given time.
Time Browser Dialog Box
The Time Browser dialog box allows you to change the currently displayed time step and to animate the main drawing
pane.
The dialog box contains the following controls:
Time Display
722
Time Slider
Go to Start
Play Backward
Sets the currently displayed time step from the end to the
beginning.
Step Backward
Pause/Stop
Step
Play
Got to End
Options
Help
Speed Slider
Increment
723
Looping Options
No Loop
Loop Animation
Rocker Animation
The following is a list of supported time and date formats, and a sample of what the format will look like for 1 year, 1
month, 1 day, 1 hour, 1 minute, and one second into the simulation.
724
Click View > Profiles or click the Profiles Manager button on the View toolbar to open the Profiles manager.
Right-click in the Profiles manager and select New, or click the New button.
The Profile Setup dialog box opens. For more information, see Profile Setup (on page 727).
Select the Elements you want to use. You cannot create a profile through gutter or lateral links.
Click Select from Drawing. The Select dialog box appears:
7. You must select one path of contiguous elements; you cannot select diverging paths. You can select upstream and
downstream elements, but if you begin at an upstream element, select downstream, and then make upstream
selections to finish, your profile will be V-shaped, with higher elevations at the beginning and end of the profile
than in the middle. Instead, what you might want to do is select elements beginning at a high elevation and selecting
elements at increasingly lower elevations towards an outfall.
8. To add elements to the profile, click elements in the drawing pane. (By default, the Add button is active in the
Select dialog box.) You can only add elements to either end of your selectionall selected elements must be
contiguous.
9. When there is a plus sign next to the cursor, you can select elements to add to the profile; elements that you
successfully select are highlighted red.
10. To remove elements from the profile, click the Remove button in the Select dialog box. Thereafter, elements you
select in the drawing pane are removed from the profile. You can only remove elements from either end of your
selectionall selected elements must be contiguous.
11. When there is a minus sign next to the cursor, you can remove elements from the profile; unselected elements are
not highlighted.
12. When you are finished adding elements to your profile, click the Done button in the Select dialog box.
13. The Profile Setup dialog box opens and displays a list of the elements you selected. If necessary, use the Reverse
button to reverse the order of these elements, and the Select from Drawing or Remove buttons to add or remove
elements from the list.
14. Click Close and Open Profile to close the Profile Setup dialog box and open the Profile Viewer dialog box.
Note: You can edit your list of profile elements at any time and compute your network with the Profile Viewer
dialog box open, but you must click Refresh to update the display of that dialog box if you do make changes.
Note: Although you cannot create a profile through lateral links, a profile view will plot any lateral connections
into a profiled conduit. The profile view will visualize the elevation of the tap connection, as well as the
dimensional size of the lateral link into profile conduit.
725
Click OK to create the profile using the specified name, or Cancel to cancel the operation.
Note: When links that are a part of an existing profile are reconnected such that the previously created profile
does not remain continuous, the profile may no longer show correct results. If you reconnect links that are part
of an existing profile, edit and redefine a valid path to ensure correct results.
Editing Profiles
You can edit a profile to change the elements that it uses or the order in which those elements are used. To edit a
profile:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Related Topics
Deleting Profiles
Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager. In the Profiles manager, right-click the profile you want to delete,
then select Delete.
Or, select the profile you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
Related Topics
726
Renaming Profiles
Click View > Profiles to open the Profiles manager. In the Profiles manager, right-click the profile you want to rename,
then select Rename.
Or, select the profile you want to rename, then click the Rename button.
Related Topics
Profile Setup
Setting up a profile is a matter of selecting the adjacent elements on which the profile is based. When you click on New
in the Profiles dialog box the following dialog box opens.
727
Label
Checking this box makes the Station field editable for the
associated element, allowing you to define the station.
Station
Reverse
Remove All
Open Profile
Closes the Profile Setup dialog box and opens the Profile
Series Options dialog box.
Related Topics
728
Zoom Window
Zoom Extents
Chart Settings
Opens the Chart Options dialog box, letting you view and
modify the display settings for the current profile plot.
For more information, see Chart Options Dialog
Box-179. Never delete or rename any of the series
entries on the Series Tab of the Chart Options dialog box.
These series were specifically designed to enable the
display of the Profile Plots.
Display Labels
Copy
Print Preview
Refresh
729
Time Browsers
Zoom Extents
730
Chart Settings
Print Preview
Copy
Zoom Extents
Zoom
731
Scale: Allows you to define the horizontal and vertical scale of the engineering profile view.
Direction: Allows you to choose the direction in which elements are displayed in the engineering profile view.
Axis Labeling: Allows you to choose where to place the labels along the axis of the engineering profile view.
Automatic Scaling: When this box is checked the scaling is handled automatically and the Minimum and Maximum
fields are not editable. When this box is not checked you can define the Minimum and Maximum fields.
Minimum: The left-most station. When Automatic Scaling is checked this field is not editable.
Maximum: The right-most station. When Automatic Scaling is checked this field is not editable.
Increment: The length between intermediate values.
Drawing Tab
This tab contains the following controls:
Text Height Multiplier: Increases or decreases the size of the text by the factor indicated.
Ground Elevation Line Width: This field allows you to define the width of the ground elevation line in the
engineering profile view.
Structure Line Width: This field allows you to define the width of structure lines in the engineering profile view.
HGL Line Width: This field allows you to define the width of the hydraulic grade line in the engineering profile
view.
EGL Line Width: This field allows you to define the width of the energy grade line in the engineering profile view.
Layers Tab
This tab allows you to select the color and/or change the visibility of the various elements of the profile view. Uncheck
the Is Visible box to turn the corresponding element off in the engineering profile view. Click the Layer Color to access
the color menu to change the color of the corresponding element in the engineering profile view.
Horizontal Justification: This control allows you to select the horizontal (left-to-right) placement of the annotation
over the annotated element.
Vertical Justification: This control allows you to select the vertical (up-and-down) placement of the annotation over
the annotated element.
Rotation: This control allows you to enter the angle of rotation of the annotation over an annotated element.
Show Leader Line: When this box is checked, a line is drawn between the annotation and the associated element.
732
Show Leader Arrow: When this box is checked, an arrow is drawn pointing to the associated element.
Align Text With Pipes: When this box is checked the annotation will align with the angle of the corresponding pipe.
Horizontal Justification: This control allows you to select the horizontal (left-to-right) placement of the annotation
over the annotated element.
Vertical Justification: This control allows you to select the vertical (up-and-down) placement of the annotation over
the annotated element.
Rotation: This control allows you to enter the angle of rotation of the annotation over an annotated element.
Show Leader Line: When this box is checked, a line is drawn between the annotation and the associated element.
Show Leader Arrow: When this box is checked, an arrow is drawn pointing to the associated element.
Text Properties
This dialog allows you to modify the settings of the profile annotation for the axis labels. The following controls are
available:
Text: This field displays the text of the label. This field is not editable.
Horizontal Justification: This control allows you to select the horizontal (left-to-right) placement of the label
annotation.
Vertical Justification: This control allows you to select the vertical (up-and-down) placement of the label
annotation.
Rotation: This control allows you to enter the angle of rotation of the label annotation .
Annotation Properties
Use the Annotation Properties dialog box to define annotation settings for your engineering profiles.
Field Name
Free Form
Selection Set
733
X Offset
Y Offset
Height Multiplier
Sets the initial size of the annotation text. Set this at the
time you create the annotation. Clicking OK will cause
the new value to be used for all subsequent elements that
you place. Clicking Apply will cause the new value to be
applied to all elements.
Delete
Rename
Shift Up
Shift Down
Label Checkboxes
The check box with the label indicates the visibility of the corresponding field in the
Annotation Table. If the check box is unchecked for a particular field, the field will not be
visible in the Annotation Table of the Engineering Profile.
Field Label
The Field Name menu allows the user to selected the particular field of Pipe or Node
element.
734
The Field label is used as the Row Label in the Annotation Table of the Engineering Profile.
You are free to assign any Label to the field element. The special unit formatter is supported
here (%u), allowing you to display the unit of the field in the label. For a Single Field (i.e
Pipe - Flow), %u can be used to display the unit of that particular field. For a Combined
Field (i.e Pipe - Invert (Start)\Invert (Stop)), %u1 is used for the first field and %u2 is used
for the second field.
The Row Height factor applied to the height of the field in the Annotation Table when
displaying it in the engineering profile.
Is Vertical
The Is Vertical check box defines where the annotation text should appear vertically (if
checked) or horizontally (if unchecked) in the Annotation Table.
735
The profile in the dynamic wave solvers near control structures can be made to look more accurate by placing the
control structures in a shorter conduit. For example, if the conduit is 400 ft, break it into a 40 ft and 360 ft conduit and
place the weir in the shorter conduit.
By using these shorter lengths, the profile near the control structure can be made to look more realistic.
For the Implicit solver:
736
The conduit with the control structure should not be made extremely short or it may affect the stability of the run. For
example, a 1 ft conduit can cause problems.
737
Filtered (see Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data (on page 745))
Globally edited (see Globally Editing Data-786)
Sorted (see Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data (on page 745))
If you need to edit a set of properties for all elements of a certain type in your network, you might consider creating a
FlexTable and making your changes there, rather than editing each element one at a time, in sequence.
FlexTables can also be used to create results reports that you can print, save as a file, or copy to the Windows clipboard
for copying into word processing or spreadsheet software.
To work with FlexTables, select the FlexTables manager or use View > FlexTables (Ctrl+7) to open the FlexTables
manager if it is closed.
Click one of the following links to learn more about using FlexTables:
FlexTables Manager
The FlexTables Manager allows you to create, manage, and delete custom tabular reports.
738
The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the custom FlexTables currently contained within the project,
along with a toolbar.
Note that element types that are not used in the current model are marked with an icon
739
New
Delete
Rename
Edit
Open
Help
740
Copy
Paste
Edit
Zoom To
741
Report
Options
Select In Drawing
The status bar at the bottom of the FlexTable dialog box contains the following items:
x of x elements displayedNumber of elements displayed in the FlexTable of the total possible number of that type
of element.
FILTEREDIf you have applied a filter to the FlexTable, this appears in the status bar. Hold the mouse cursor over
this panel to display a tool tip, which lists a summary of active filters.
SORTEDIf you have sorted the order of any items in the FlexTable, this appears in the status bar. Hold the mouse
cursor over this panel to display a tool tip, which lists a summary of active sorting.
Note: You can freeze columns such that they will remain stationary and visible even when scrolling by rightclicking the desired column(s) and selecting the Freeze Column command. To unfreeze columns, right click and
select the Unfreeze All Columns command.
742
Opening FlexTables
You open FlexTables from within the FlexTable Manager.
To open FlexTables:
1. Click View > FlexTables or click the FlexTables button on the View toolbar to open the FlexTables Manager.
2. Perform one of the following steps:
Project-level FlexTables are available only for the project in which you create them.
Shared tables are available in all Bentley SewerCAD projects.
743
In the FlexTables Manager, right-click Tables - Project or Tables - Shared, then select New > FlexTable.
Or, select Tables - Project or Tables - Shared, click the New button, then select FlexTable.
The Table Setup dialog box opens.
Select the Table Type you want to create. This lets you filter your table by element type.
Select the items you want in the FlexTable by moving them to the Selected Columns pane.
Click OK.
The table displays in the FlexTables Manager; you can type to rename the table or accept the default name.
Deleting FlexTables
Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables Manager. In the FlexTables manager, right-click the FlexTable you
want to delete, then select Delete.
Or, select the FlexTable you want to delete, then click the Delete button. You cannot delete predefined FlexTables.
Note: You cannot delete predefined FlexTables.
Editing FlexTables
You can edit a FlexTable to change the columns of data it contains or the values in some of those columns.
Editable columns
Columns that contain data you can edit are displayed with a white background. You can change these columns directly
in the FlexTable and your changes are applied to your model when you click OK.The content in the FlexTable columns
can be changed in other areas of Bentley SewerCAD , such as in a Property Editor or managers; but, it might be more
efficient to make changes to numerous elements in a FlexTable rather than the Property Editor or a manager.If you
make a change that affects a FlexTable outside the FlexTable, the FlexTable is updated automatically to reflect the
change.Non-editable columnsColumns that contain data you cannot edit are displayed with a yellow background, and
correspond to model results calculated by the program and composite values.The content in these columns can be
changed in other areas of Bentley SewerCAD , such as in a Property Editor and by running a computation.If you make
a change that affects a FlexTable outside the FlexTable, the FlexTable is updated automatically to reflect the change.
To edit a FlexTable:
1. Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables Manager, then you can:
2. The Table dialog box opens. .
3. Use the Table dialog box to include and exclude columns and change the order in which the columns appear in the
table.
4. Click OK after you finish making changes, to save your changes and close the dialog box; or, click Cancel to close
the dialog box without making changes.
744
Navigating in Tables
The arrow keys, Ctrl+Home, Ctrl+End, PgUp, PgDn, and Ctrl+arrow keys navigate to different cells in a table.
Globally Editing Data
Using FlexTables, you can globally edit all of the values in an entire editable column. Globally editing a FlexTable
column can be more efficient for editing properties of an element than using the Properties Editor or managers to edit
each element in your model individually.
To globally edit the values in a FlexTable column:
1. Click View > FlexTables to open the FlexTables Manager.
2. In the FlexTables manager, open the FlexTable you want to edit and find the column of data you want to change.
3. If necessary, you might need to first create a FlexTable or edit an existing one to make sure it contains the column
you want to change.
4. Right-click the column heading and select Global Edit.
5. In the Operation field, select what you want to do to data in the column: Add, Divide, Multiply, Set, or Subtract.The
Operation field is only available for numeric data.
6. In the Global Edit field, type or select the value you wantfor numeric data, you typically type a new value, for
other data you might select from a drop-down list or select a check box.
Edit the FlexTable (see Editing FlexTables (on page 744)), to open the Table dialog box and change the order of the
selected tables using the up and down arrow buttons.
The top-most item in the Selected Columns pane appears furthest to the left in the resulting FlexTable.
Open the FlexTable, click the heading of the column you want to move, then click again and drag the column to the
new position. You can only move one column at a time.
745
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
746
The FlexTable displays columns of data for all elements returned by the query and the word FILTERED is displayed
in the FlexTable status bar.
To reset a filter:
1. Right-click the column heading you want to filter.
2. Select Filter.
3. Click Reset.
The status pane at the bottom of the Table window always shows the number of rows displayed and the total number of
rows available (e.g., 10 of 20 elements displayed). When a filter is active, this message is highlighted.
Note: Table filtering lets you perform global editing (see Editing FlexTables (on page 744)) on any subset of
elements. Only the elements that appear in the filtered table can be edited.
747
Changing the Report TitleWhen you print a table, the table name is used as the title for the printed report. You
can change the title that appears on your printed report by renaming the table. For more information, see Naming
and Renaming FlexTables (on page 744).
Adding/Removing ColumnsYou can add, remove, and change the order of columns from the Table Setup dialog
box. For more information, see Editing FlexTables (on page 744) and Sorting and Filtering FlexTable Data (on
page 745).
Drag/Drop Column PlacementWith the Table window open, select the column heading of the column that you
would like to move and drag the column to its new location. For more information, see Sorting and Filtering
FlexTable Data (on page 745).
Resizing ColumnsWith the Table open, click the vertical separator line between column headings. Notice that the
cursor changes shape to indicate that you can resize the column. Drag the column separator to the left or right to
stretch the column to its new size.
Changing Column HeadingsWith the Table window open, right-click the column heading that you wish to change
and select Edit Column Label.
748
Table Type
Available Columns
Contains all the attributes that are available for your table
design. The Available Columns list is located on the left
side of the Table Setup dialog box. This list contains all
of the attributes that are available for the type of table you
are creating. The attributes displayed in yellow represent
non-editable attributes, while those displayed in white
represent editable attributes.
Selected Columns
749
The element relabeling tool allows you to perform three types of operations on a set of element labels: Replace,
Renumber, and Append. The active relabel operation is chosen from the list box in the Relabel Operations section of
the Relabel Elements dialog box. The entry fields for entering the information appropriate for the active relabel
operation appear below the Relabel Operations section. The following list presents a description of the available
element relabel operations.
ReplaceThis operation allows you to replace all instances of a character or series of characters in the selected
element labels with another piece of text. For instance, if you selected elements with labels CO-1, CO-2, CO-12,
and CO-5, you could replace all the COs with the word Conduit by entering CO in the Find field, Conduit in the
Replace With field, and clicking the Apply button. The resulting labels are Conduit-1, Conduit-2, Conduit-12, and
Conduit-5. You can also use this operation to delete portions of a label. Suppose you now want to go back to the
original labels. You can enter Conduit in the Find field and leave the Replace With field blank to reproduce the
labels CO-1, CO-2, CO-12, and CO-5. There is also the option to match the case of the characters when searching
for the characters to replace. This option can be activated by checking the box next to the Match Case field.
750
RenumberThis operation allows you to generate a new label, including suffix, prefix, and ID number for each
selected element. For example, if you had the labels CO-1, CO-4, CO-10, and Conduit-12, you could use this
feature to renumber the elements in increments of five, starting at five, with a minimum number of two digits for the
ID number field. You could specify a prefix CO- and a suffix -Z1 in the Prefix and Suffix fields, respectively. The
prefix and suffix are appended to the front and back of the automatically generated ID number. The value of the
new ID for the first element to be relabeled, 5, is entered in the Next field. The value by which the numeric base of
each consecutive element is in increments, 5, is entered in the Increment field. The minimum number of digits in the
ID number, 2, is entered in the Digits field. If the number of digits in the ID number is less then this value, zeros are
placed in front of it. Click the Apply button to produce the following labels: CO-05-Z1, CO-10-Z1, CO-15-Z1, and
CO-20-Z1.
AppendThis operation allows you to append a prefix, suffix, or both to the selected element labels. Suppose that
you have selected the labels 5, 10, 15, and 20, and you wish to signify that these elements are actually conduits in
Zone 1 of your system. You can use the append operation to add an appropriate prefix and suffix, such as CO- and Z1, by specifying these values in the Prefix and Suffix fields and clicking the Apply button. Performing this
operation yields the labels CO-5-Z1, CO-10-Z1, CO-15-Z1 and CO-20-Z1. You can append only a prefix or suffix
by leaving the other entry field empty. However, for the operation to be valid, one of the entry fields must be filled
in.
The Preview field displays an example of the new label using the currently defined settings.
751
Reporting
Use reporting to create printable content based on some aspect of your model, such as element properties or results.
752
Reporting includes:
Related Topics
753
Report Options
The Report Options dialog box offers control over how a report is displayed.
Load factory default settings to current view: Changes the display settings used by the current report to the factory
default.
Load global settings to current view: Changes the display settings used by the current report to the previously saved
global settings.
754
Custom Reports
Users are able to assemble a wide variety of model input, results, graphs, etc. in a customized report. This report can be
transmitted to recipients in a number of formats. The report generator woks best if any scenarios, selection sets, graphs,
etc. have already been created before entering the Custom Report manager.
To start a custom report, the user selects Reports > Custom Report or in the Reports tab in the Reports group of the
ribbon. The following dialog opens.
755
Top Row Buttons The top row of buttons in the Custom Report manager enables the user to manage the overall
report. If the user had previously exported a custom report, the report format can be retrieved by selecting the Import
button. The behavior of the buttons is as follows:
Import opens a dialog where the user can import a previously defined report.
Export opens a dialog where the user can save the current report as a .rptx file. The default location is C:\Users\
[username]\Documents\Bentley\WaterGEMS
Generate Report produces a Preview of the report for which the user can perform any number of steps including
viewing, printing, saving as described in help topic Print Preview Window. The report can be exported into a variety
of formats including pdf, html, mht, rtf, csv, excel, text and image. In the preview window, the user can also change
paper size, orientation and margins.
Second Row Buttons enable the user to set up the individual Report Sections in the report. Initially, all that is shown
is the Report element type and the only entry the user can specify is the Title of the report in the right pane.
New enables the user to select the next report section that can be added to the report. This can also be done by
right clicking Report and selecting Add.
Delete enables the user to delete the highlighted Report Section.
Duplicate enables the user to copy a Report Section. This can be a quick way to include a Flex Table at one time
step when it has already been set up for another time step.
756
Shift-up and Shift down enables the user to move a Report Section forward and backward in the report. This can
be especially helpful if a user wants to insert a page break to help improve the report. Adding a page break adds the
break to the end of the report and shirt-up can be used to move it to a preferred location.
Expand and Collapse enable the user to expand or collapse the tree view in the left pane.
OK button closes the Custom Report manager and saves the report.
Cancel button closes report manager but does not save the changes made since the report was last opened.
There are several types of sections that can be inserted into the report. The control that a user has over the sections
depends on whether the sections follow a Scenario divider. If a report section is listed before the first scenario, that
section can only display previously saved graphs and data tables. If they are listed after a scenario, the user has a great
deal of additional control over the report section and any sections will refer to that scenario.
Scenario is the usually the first type of report section that a user specifies. The user selects the scenario in the right
pane after picking Scenario under New in the left pane. The user selects the scenario from a drop down list populated
by the existing scenarios. If the user only wants to report on a selection set of model elements, these can be selected
from a drop down list labelled Default Selection Sets which contains predefined selection sets. After the scenario is
selected, all entries after that will refer to the selected scenario until a new scenario is selected. If the user does not
select a scenario and tries to generate a report, then an error message is produced. Selection sets are optional and the
default value is <None> which means that all elements are available, except for Flex Tables (see below
Graph When the user selects graph, it is possible to either display a pre-existing graph or create a new graph. If the
graph is not associated with a scenario, the manager can only select existing graphs as shown below.
If the graph is associated with a scenario, the user can create a graph at this time, by selecting the Graph Type. If the
user picks "Graph" then a pre-existing graph must be selected. If the user picks, Element Graph, the user can select an
Element and prepare a new graph after selecting the element from the Drawing.
Width of Page Factor - determines how much of the space between the margins (in percent) is to be used for the
graph or table. The default value is 100% and values must be less than or equal to 100%.
Aspect Ratio - defines the width:height ratio of the graph.
Alignment - determines the location of the graph within the margin for graphs less than 100% width. The acceptable
values are Left, Center and Right justified.
A graph with 50% width, 1:1 aspect ratio and center alignment, looks like this:
757
Data Tables are very similar to graphs in that they are simply the tabular view of the data displayed in a graph. The
commands for graphing also apply for data tables. Data Tables are always left justified and the aspect ratio is
determined by the size of the table.
FlexTables provide the user with a way to include FlexTable results in a report. When the user creates a FlexTable, it
is necessary to specify which of the existing FlexTables is selected and what Selection Set of elements is to be
displayed. The default value of <none> is not acceptable. If the user wants to show all of the elements of a given type, it
is necessary to create a Selection Set will all elements of that type. There must be at least one element in a Selection
Set. When the Override Selection Set property is set to False, the Selection Set specified in the Scenario Report Section
is used. When it is set to True, the user must specify the Selection Set to be used. Finally, the time step to be used to
populate the flex table must be selected.
The user is required to name specific selection sets and time steps because FlexTables can easily contain thousands of
rows and if multiple time steps are chosen, the report can be exceedingly large. Requiring the user to consider exactly
what values are important, makes that portion of the Report more focused.
FlexTables can contain a large number of columns which may unnecessarily take up space in the Report. Users may
want to create custom flex tables for the report showing only the columns that are of interest. They can do this by
creating Custom or Shared Flex Tables (see FlexTable help).
Map View enables the user to insert a map of the piping network in the report. Before creating a Report Section for a
map view, the user must have already created a Named View (see Named Views). If the user has specified a named
Symbology Definition, the user can specify it. The default value is the <default> element symbology. If the user wants
a map to have a background, it must be displayed when the report is generated.
The user has additional control over the appearance of the map by setting:
Width of Page Factor - determines how much of the space between the margins (in percent) is to be used for the
graph or table. The default value is 100% and values must be less than or equal to 100%.
758
Alignment - determines the location of the graph within the margin for graphs less than 100% width. The acceptable
values are Left, Center and Right justified.
Border - determines whether a border is placed around the map.
Time from start - indicates the time for which symbology values are calculated.
Section Titles enable the user to insert section titles into a report. Whatever is entered on the right pane will appear
below the report title on subsequent pages until the next section title is encountered. To stop showing section titles,
enter a new section title that is blank.
Page Break enables the user to insert a page break so that the next Report Section begins on a new page. The Shiftup and Shift down arrows can be used to move page breaks.
Blank Line enables the user to insert a blank line between report sections. This can be used to improve the
appearance of the report so that graphs and tables dont appear to run into one another. The user can specify the number
of blank lines in the right pane. The default number is one.
Summary Section provides the user with access to a number of predefined summary reports. The format of these
reports is already set. These include:
Scenario Summary provides a list of alternatives and calculation options associated with the scenario.
Hydraulic summary provides a list of hydraulic options used such as friction method, duration and time step size.
Water quality summary provides a list of water quality inputs. If the scenario is not a water quality scenario, then
this section is not included and a warning is written to the log file.
Network inventory provides a list of each element type and the number of active elements of that type.
Pressure Pipe inventory provides a list of the length of each size pipe sorted by material type.
Lateral inventory provides a list of the length of each size lateral sorted by material type.
Transient network inventory provides a list of the number of active transient specific elements by element type.
Report Options - The user can also control headers, footers, fonts, and margins in a separate dialog which can be
reached using Report > Report options or the Reports section of the ribbon. See the help for these setting.
759
Graphing
Use graphing to visualize some aspect of your model, such as element properties or results. You need to compute your
model before you can create graphs. To compute your model, after you set up your elements and their properties, click
the Compute button.
Click one of the following links to learn more about using graphs in Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT:
Graph Manager
The Graph Manager lets you recall a graph you have created and saved in the current session or in a previous session of
Bentley SewerCAD . Graphs listed in the Graph Manager retain any customizations you have applied.
To use the Graph Manager:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Compute your model and resolve any errors. (Press F9 or click Analysis > Compute.)
Open the Graph Manager, click View > Graphs.
Create your graph.
After you create a graph, it is available in the Graph Manager. You can select it by double-clicking it. Also, you can
right-click a graph listed in Graph Manager to:
Graphs are not saved in Graph Manager after you close Bentley SewerCAD .
The Graph Manager contains a toolbar with the following buttons:
New
Delete
Rename
View
Add to Graph
Select In Drawing
760
Note: If the current scenario is steady-state (or the base condition for fire flow), the default graph is a bar chart
for the selected elements where the graph displays pressure if the type has a single pressure (junction, hydrant),
HGL for tanks and reservoirs), and flow for those elements which change pressure (e.g. pipes, control valves).
Creating a Graph
You can graph computed values, such as flow and velocity. To create a graph:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Printing a Graph
To print a graph, click the Print button to open the print dialog box or click the Print Preview button to see what your
graph looks like before clicking Print.
761
Add to Graph
Select In Drawing
762
Copy
763
Zoom Window
Data Tab
764
850_GraphDialog_002.bmp
The Data tab displays the data that
comprise your graphs. If there is more
than one item plotted, the data for
each plot is provided. You can copy
and paste the data from this tab to the
clipboard for use in other
applications, such as Microsoft Excel.
To select an entire column or row,
click the column or row heading. To
select the entire contents of the Data
tab, click the heading cell in the topleft corner of the tab. Use Ctrl+C and
Ctrl+V to paste your data. The
column and row headings are not
copied.
765
Note: The chart tab of the graph will show all the detail possible, for all time step detail available, on each plotted
result line. For the data tab of graph the number of rows will correspond to the 'Increment' declared in the 'Time
Browser' toolbar window. If you set the 'Increment' choice to '<All>' the Data tab will show all possible reporting
points (all rows).
766
Note: In the Series Label Format field in the case of Scatter type graphs, $(Element) is the first element and $
(Scenario) is the first scenario selected. These are not applicable with this type of chart format. When you use
the $(Field) option, you get "<fieldXaxis> - <fieldYaxis>".
Any number of criteria can be added to a filter. Multiple filter criteria are implicitly joined with a logical AND
statement. When multiple filter criteria are defined, only rows that meet all of the specified criteria will be displayed. A
filter will remain active for the associated table until the filter is reset.
The status pane at the bottom of the Table window always shows the number of rows displayed and the total number of
rows available (e.g., 10 of 20 elements displayed). When a filter is active, this message will be highlighted.
767
Get familiar with your data - If you obtained your observed data from an outside source, you should take the time to
get acquainted with it. Be sure to identify units of time and measurement for the data. Be sure to identify what the
data points represent in the model; this helps in naming your line or bar series as it will appear in the graph.
Preparing your data - Typically, observed data can be organized as a collection of points in a table. In this case, the
time series data can simply be copied to the clipboard directly from the source and pasted right into the observed
data input table. Ensure that your collection of data points is complete. That is, every value must have an associated
time value. Oftentimes data points are stored in tab or comma delimited text files; these two import options are
available as well. See the Sample Observed Data Source (on page 768) topic for an example of the observed data
source file format.
Specifying the characteristics of your data - The following charecteristics must be defined:
Observed data can only be saved if the graph is saved.
Note: Go to Tools > Tools > More... >Options > Units for a complete list of formats.
To create Observed Data
1. Click New
.
2. Set hours, dimension, and formatter.
3. Add hours and Y information (or import a .txt or .csv file
).
4. Click Graph
768
Flow (gpm)
0.00
125
0.60
120
3.00
110
9.00
130
13.75
100
18.20
125
21.85
110
With data tabulated as in the table above, we could simply copy and paste these rows directly into the table in the
Observed Data dialog. However if we had too many points to manage, natively exporting our data to a comma
delimited text file may be a better import option. Text file import is also a better option when our time values are not
formatted in units of time such as hours, as in the table below.
Time (24-hr clock)
Flow (gpm)
00:00
125
00.36
120
03:00
110
09:00
130
13:45
100
18:12
125
21:51
110
769
Quick Graph
The quick graph feature allows you to quickly view a graph of a single element in the drawing. The available fields
correspond to the common fields available for the selected element's type.
The quick graph is a docking window that can be docked to any of the sides or with another floating or docked window.
You can select the attribute to graph by choosing it from the drop-down list of common attributes or click the arrow
button next to it to see a complete categorized list of available attributes for the selected element.
The quick graph can also show the contents of a saved graph. To display a saved graph, open the Graphs Manager
(View > Graphs). Select any graph in the list. The graph is displayed in the quick graph window.
The dialog also includes the following buttons:
Open Graph
Opens the full graph for the currently in the Quick Graph display.
Show X Axis
This toggle allows you to turn on/off the X-Axis labels. This is
useful if you are using a time format that takes a lot of vertical
space.
770
Help
Y-Axis Limits
The Y-Axis Limits dialog lets you specify a custom minimum and maximum value for the Y-Axis for Quick Graphs.
To change the minimum and/or maximum values, check the Specify Y-Axis Limits box and enter the values in the
Minimum and Maximum fields.
You can use the Calculate Range button to determine the best minimum and maximum values to use across all elements
of the selected type. Clicking the Calculate Range button opens a menu containing two options; the first is a Full Range
which will determine the actual minimum and maximum value for the selected field. Quick Range uses a quicker and
more approximate approach to determine the minimum and maximum values.
Click one of the following links to learn more about Chart Options dialog box:
771
Series Tab
Use the Series tab to display the series that are associated with the current graph. To show a series, select the check box
next to the series name. To hide a series, clear its check box. The Series tab contains the following controls:
Up/Down arrows
Add
Delete
Title
Clone
Change
Panel Tab
Use the Panel tab to set how your graph appears in the Graph dialog box. The Panel tab includes the following sub-tabs:
Borders Tab
Use the Borders tab to set up a border around your graph. The Borders tab contains the following controls:
Border
Lets you set the border of the graph. The Border Editor
opens, see Border Editor Dialog Box (on page 800).
Bevel Outer
772
Color
Lets you set the color for the bevel effect that you use;
inner and outer bevels can use different color values.
Bevel Inner
Size
Lets you set a thickness for the bevel effect that you use;
inner and outer bevels use the same size value.
Background Tab
Use the Background tab to set a color or image background for your graph. The Background tab contains the following
controls:
Color
Pattern
Transparent
Background Image
Gradient Tab
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your graph. The Gradient tab contains the following
subtabs and controls:
Format Tab
Visible
773
Angle
Colors Tab
Start
Lets you set the starting color for your gradient. Opens
the Color Editor dialog box.
Middle
End
Lets you select the final color for your gradient. Opens
the Color Editor dialog box.
Gamma Correction
Transparency
Options Tab
Sigma
Sigma Focus
Lets you use the options controls. Select this check box to
use the controls in the Options tab.
Sigma Scale
Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for your graph. The Shadow tab contains the following controls:
Visible
774
Size
Color
Lets you set a color for the shadow of your graph. You
might set this to gray but can set it to any other color.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the shadow of your graph. The
Hatch Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor
Dialog Box (on page 803).
Transparency
Axes Tab
Use the Axes tab set how your axes display. It includes the following controls and subtabs:
Visible
Behind
Axes
Do not delete the axes called Custom 0 and Custom 1, as these are reserved axes that are needed by Bentley
SewerCAD .
Scales Tab
Use the Scales tab to define your axes scales. The Scales tab contains the following controls:
Automatic
Visible
Inverted
Change
775
Increment
Logarithmic
Log Base
Minimum Tab
Auto
Change
Offset
Lets you adjust the axis scale to change the location of the
minimum or maximum axis value with respect to the
origin.
Maximum Tab
Auto
Change
Offset
Lets you adjust the axis scale to change the location of the
minimum or maximum axis value with respect to the
origin.
Labels Tab
Use the Labels tab to define your axes text. The Labels tab contains the following subtabs and controls:
Style Tab
Visible
Multi-line
Lets you split labels or values into more than one line if
the text contains a space. Select this check box to enable
multi-line text.
Round first
Label on axis
776
Size
Angle
Min. Separation %
Style
Format Tab
Exponential
Values Format
Lets you set the numbering format for the axis labels.
Default Alignment
Text Tab
Font
Lets you set the font properties for axis labels. This opens
the Windows Font dialog box.
Color
Lets you select the color for the axis label font. Doubleclick the colored square between Font and Fill to open the
Color Editor dialog box (see Color Editor Dialog Box
(on page 802)).
Fill
Lets you set a pattern the axis label font. The Hatch Brush
Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box (on
page 803).
777
Shadow
Ticks Tab
Use the Ticks tab to define the major ticks and their grid lines. The Ticks tab contains the following controls:
Axis
Lets you set the properties of the selected axis. Opens the
Border Editor dialog box.
Grid
Lets you set the properties of the graphs grid lines that
intersect the selected axis. Opens the Border Editor dialog
box.
Ticks
Lets you set the properties of the tick marks that are next
to the labels on the label-side of the selected axis. Opens
the Border Editor dialog box.
Len
Inner
Lets you set the properties of the tick marks that are next
to the labels on the graph-side of the selected axis. Opens
the Border Editor dialog box.
Centered
Lets you align between the grid labels the graphs grid
lines that intersect the selected axis.
At Labels Only
Sets the axis ticks and axis grid to be drawn at labels only.
Otherwise, they are drawn at all axis increment positions.
Title Tab
Use the Title tab to set the axis titles. The Title tab contains the following subtabs and controls:
Style Tab
Title
778
Angle
Size
Visible
Check box that lets you display or hide the axis title.
Text Tab
Font
Lets you set the font properties for axis title. This opens
the Windows Font dialog box.
Color
Lets you select the color for the axis title font. Doubleclick the colored square between Font and Fill to open the
Color Editor dialog box (see Color Editor Dialog Box
(on page 802)).
Fill
Lets you set a pattern the axis title font. The Hatch Brush
Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box (on
page 803)
Shadow
Lets you set a shadow for the axis title. Visible Lets
you display a shadow for the axis title. Select this check
box to display the axis label shadow. Size Lets you set
the location of the shadow. Use larger numbers to offset
the shadow by a large amount. Color Lets you set a
color for the shadow. You might set this to gray but can
set it to any other color. The Color Editor opens. Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the shadow. The Hatch Brush
Editor opens. Transparency Lets you set transparency
for your shadow, where 100 is completely transparent and
0 is completely opaque.
Minor Tab
Use the Minor tab to define those graph ticks that are neither major ticks. The Minor tab contains the following controls
and tabs:
Ticks
Lets you set the properties of the minor tick marks. The
Border Editor opens, see Border Editor Dialog Box (on
page 800).
Length
Grid
Lets you set the properties of grid lines that align with the
minor ticks. The Border Editor opens, see Border Editor
Dialog Box (on page 800).
779
Count
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to set the axes position for your graph. The Position tab contains the following controls:
Position %
Start %
End %
Units
Z%
General Tab
Use the General tab to preview a graph before you print it and set up scrolling and zooming for a graph. It includes the
following controls:
Print Preview
Margins
Lets you specify margins for your graph. There are four
boxes, each corresponding with the top, bottom, left, and
right margins, into which you enter a value that you want
to use for a margin.
Units
Cursor
Zoom Tab
780
Animated
Steps
Pen
Lets you set the thickness of the border for the zoom
window that surrounds the magnified area when you click
and drag. The Border Editor opens, see Border Editor
Dialog Box (on page 800).
Pattern
Minimum pixels
Lets you set the number of pixels that you have to click
and drag before the zoom feature is activated.
Direction
Mouse Button
Lets you set the mouse button that you use to click and
drag when activating the zoom feature.
Scroll Tab
Use the Scroll tab to set up scrolling and panning across a graph. The Scroll tab contains the following controls:
Allow Scroll
Lets you scroll and pan over the graph. Select this check
box to turn on scrolling, clear the check box to turn it off.
Mouse Button
Lets you set the mouse button that you click to use the
scroll feature.
Titles Tab
The Titles tab lets you define titles to use for your graph. It includes the following controls and tabs:
Title: Lets you set the location of the titles you want to use. The Titles sub tabs apply to the Title that is currently
selected in the Title drop-down list.
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to display and create a selected title. Type the text of the title in the text box on the Style tab. The
Style tab contains the following controls:
781
Adjust: Lets you wrap the frame behind the selected title to the size of the title text.
Frame: Each title can have a frame behind it (see Format Tab). By default, this frame is transparent. If you turn off
transparency to see the frame, the frame can be sized to the width of the graph or set to snap to the width of the title
text. Select the Adjust Frame check box to set the width of the frame to the width of the title text; clear this check
box to set the width of the frame to the width of the graph.
Alignment: Lets you set the alignment of the selected title.
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to set the placement of the selected title. The Position tab contains the following controls:
Custom: Lets you set a custom position for the selected title. Select this check box to set a custom position.
Left/Top: Lets you set the location of the selected title relative to the left and top of the graph. If you select the
Custom check box, use these settings to position the selected title.
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format a background shape behind the selected title. The Format tab contains the
following controls:
Color: Lets you set a color for the fill of the shape you create behind the selected title. The Color Editor opens, see
the Color Editor Dialog Box topic.
Frame: Lets you define the outline of the shape you create behind the selected title. The Border Editor opens, see
the Border Editor Dialog Box topic.
Pattern: Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the shape you create behind the selected title. The Hatch Brush Editor
opens, see the Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box topic.
Round Frame: Lets you round the corners of the rectangular shape you create behind the selected title. Select this
check box to round the corners of the shape.
Transparent: Lets you set the fill of the shape you create behind the selected title as transparent. If the shape is
completely transparent, you cannot see it, so clear this check box if you cannot see a shape that you expect to see.
Transparency: Lets you set transparency for the shape, where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is completely
opaque.
Text Tab
Use the Text tab to format the text used in the selected title. The Text tab contains the following controls:
Font: Lets you set the font properties for the text. This opens the Windows Font dialog box.
Color: Lets you select the color for the text. Double-click the colored square between Font and Fill to open the
Color Editor dialog box (see the Color Editor Dialog Box topic).
Fill: Lets you set a pattern for the text.
Shadow: Lets you set a shadow for the text. VisibleLets you display a shadow for the text. Select this check box
to display the axis label shadow. SizeLets you set the location of the shadow. Use larger numbers to offset the
shadow by a large amount. ColorLets you set a color for the shadow. You might set this to gray but can set it to
any other color. The Color Editor opens. PatternLets you set a pattern for the shadow. The Hatch Brush Editor
opens. TransparencyLets you set transparency for your shadow, where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is
completely opaque.
Gradient Tab
Note: To use the Gradient tab, clear the Transparent check box in the Chart > Titles > Format tab.
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your axis title. The Gradient tab contains the following
controls:
782
Visible: Sets whether a gradient displays or not. Select this check box to display a gradient you have set up, clear
this check box to hide the gradient.
Direction: Sets the direction of the gradient. Vertical causes the gradient to display from top to bottom, Horizontal
displays a gradient from right to left, and Backward/Forward diagonal display gradients from the left and right
bottom corners to the opposite corner.
Angle: Lets you customize the direction of the gradient beyond the Direction selections.
Start: Lets you set the starting color for your gradient.
Middle: Lets you select a middle color for your gradient. The Color Editor opens. Select the No Middle Color check
box if you want a two-color gradient.
End: Lets you select the final color for your gradient.
Gamma Correction: Lets you control the brightness with which the background displays to your screen; select or
clear this check box to change the brightness of the background on-screen. This does not affect printed output.
Transparency: Lets you set transparency for your gradient, where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is completely
opaque.
Sigma: Lets you use the options controls. Select this check box to use the controls in the Options tab.
Sigma Focus: Lets you set the location on the chart background of the gradient's end color.
Sigma Scale: Lets you control how much of the gradient's end color is used by the gradient background.
Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the background for the selected title. The Shadow tab contains the following
controls:
Visible: Lets you display a shadow. Select this check box to display the shadow, clear this check box to turn off the
shadow effect.
Size: Set the size of the shadow by increasing or decreasing the numbers for Horizontal and/or Vertical Size.
Color: Lets you set a color for the shadow. You might set this to gray but can set it to any other color.
Pattern: Lets you set a pattern for the shadow.
Transparency: Lets you set transparency for your shadow, where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is completely
opaque.
Bevels Tab
Note: To use the Gradient tab, clear the Transparent check box in the Chart > Titles > Format tab.
Use the Bevels tab to create rounded effects for the background for the selected title. The Bevels tab contains the
following controls:
Bevel Outer: Lets you set a raised or lowered bevel effect, or no bevel effect, for the background for the selected
title.
Color: Lets you set the color for the bevel effect that you use; inner and outer bevels can use different color values.
Bevel Inner: Lets you set a raised or lowered bevel effect, or no bevel effect, for the inside of the background for the
selected title.
Size: Lets you set a thickness for the bevel effect that you use; inner and outer bevels use the same size value.
Walls Tab
Use the Walls tab to set and format the edges of your graph. The Walls tab contains the following subtabs:
Left/Right/Back/Bottom Tabs
783
Border
Pattern
Gradient
Lets you set a color gradient for your walls. The Gradient
Editor opens, see Gradient Editor Dialog Box (on page
801).
Visible
Dark 3D
Size 3D
Transparent
Paging Tab
Use the Paging tab to display your graph over several pages. The Paging tab contains the following controls:
Points per Page
Lets you scale the graph to fit on one or many pages. Set
the number of points you want to display on a single page
of the graph, up to a maximum of 100.
784
Arrows
Legend Tab
Use the Legend tab to display and format a legend for your graph. The Legend tab includes the following controls:
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to set up and display a legend for your graph. The Style tab contains the following controls:
Visible
Inverted
Check boxes
Legend Style
Text Style
Lets you select how the text in the legend is aligned and
what data it contains.
Vert. Spacing
Dividing Lines
Lets you use and define lines that separate columns in the
legend. The Border Editor opens, see Border Editor
Dialog Box (on page 800).
Position Tab
Use the Position tab to control the placement of the legend. The Position tab contains the following controls:
Position
Lets you place the legend on the left, top, right, or bottom
of the chart.
Resize Chart
785
Margin
Lets you set the amount of space between the graph and
the legend.
Position Offset %
Custom
Lets you use the Left and Top settings to control the
placement of the legend. xxxx seems broken
Left/Top
Symbols Tab
Use the Symbols tab to add to the legend symbols that represent the series in the graph. The Symbols tab contains the
following controls:
Visible
Lets you display the series symbol next to the text in the
legend.
Width
Width Units
Lets you set the units that are used to size the width of the
symbol.
Default border
Lets you use the default TeeChart format for the symbol.
If you clear this check box, you can set a custom border
using the Border button.
Border
Lets you set a custom border for the symbols. You must
clear Default Border to use this option. The Border Editor
opens, see Border Editor Dialog Box (on page 800).
Position
Lets you put the symbol to the left or right of its text.
Continuous
Squared
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format the box that contains the legend. The Format tab contains the following controls:
786
Color
Lets you set a color for the fill of the legends box. The
Color Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box (on
page 802).
Frame
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the legends box. The
Hatch Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor
Dialog Box (on page 803).
Round Frame
Lets you round the corners of the legends box. Select this
check box to round the corners of the shape.
Transparent
Transparency
Lets you set transparency for the legends box, where 100
is completely transparent and 0 is completely opaque.
Text Tab
Use the Text tab to format the text used in the legend. The Text tab contains the following controls:
Font
Lets you set the font properties for the text. This opens
the Windows Font dialog box.
Color
Lets you select the color for the text. Double-click the
colored square between Font and Fill to open the Color
Editor dialog box (see Color Editor Dialog Box (on
page 802)).
Fill
Lets you set a pattern for the text. The Hatch Brush Editor
opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box (on page
803).
Shadow
Lets you set a shadow for the text. Visible Lets you
display a shadow for the text. Select this check box to
display the axis label shadow. Size Lets you set the
location of the shadow. Use larger numbers to offset the
shadow by a large amount. Color Lets you set a color
for the shadow. You might set this to gray but can set it to
any other color. The Color Editor opens. Pattern Lets
you set a pattern for the shadow. The Hatch Brush Editor
opens. Transparency Lets you set transparency for your
shadow, where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is
completely opaque.
787
Direction
Angle
Colors Tab
Start
Middle
End
Gamma Correction
Transparency
Options Tab
Sigma
Lets you use the options controls. Select this check box to
use the controls in the Options tab.
Sigma Focus
Sigma Scale
Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the legend. The Shadow tab contains the following controls:
788
Visible
Size
Color
Lets you set a color for the shadow. You might set this to
gray but can set it to any other color. The Color Editor
opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box (on page 802).
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the shadow. The Hatch Brush
Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box (on
page 803).
Transparency
Bevels Tab
Use the Bevels tab to create a rounded effects for the legend. The Bevels tab contains the following controls:
Bevel Outer
Color
Lets you set the color for the bevel effect that you use;
inner and outer bevels can use different color values.
Bevel Inner
Size
Lets you set a thickness for the bevel effect that you use;
inner and outer bevels use the same size value.
3D Tab
Use the 3D tab to add a three-dimensional effect to your graph. The 3D tab contains the following controls:
3 Dimensions
3D %
789
Orthogonal
Zoom Text
Quality
Clip Points
Zoom
Rotation
Elevation
Horiz. Offset
Vert. Offset
Perspective
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set up how the selected series appears. The Format tab contains the following controls:
790
Border
Color
Lets you set a color for the graph of the selected series.
The Color Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box
(on page 802).
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the graph of the selected series.
This might only be visible on a three-dimensional graph
(see 3D Tab (on page 789)). The Hatch Brush Editor
opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box (on page
803).
Dark 3D
Color Each
Clickable
Height 3D
Stack
Transparency
Stairs
Inverted
Outline
Point Tab
Use the Point tab to set up how the points that make up the selected series appear. The Point tab contains the following
controls:
791
Visible
3D
Dark 3D
Inflate Margins
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the points in your series. The
Hatch Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor
Dialog Box (on page 803). You must clear Default to
use this option.
Default
Lets you select the default format for the points in your
series. This overrides any pattern selection.
Color Each
Style
Width/Height
Lets you set a size for the points in the selected series.
Border
Lets you set the outline of the shapes that represent the
points in the selected series. The Border Editor opens, see
Border Editor Dialog Box (on page 800).
Transparency
General Tab
Use the General tab to modify basic formatting and relationships with axes for series in a graph. The General tab
contains the following controls:
Show in Legend
Lets you show the series title in the legend. To use this
feature, the legend style has to be Series or LastValues
(see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box (on page 803)
Style Tab ).
Cursor
792
Depth
Auto
Values
Percents
Horizontal Axis
Vertical Axis
Date Time
Sort
Marks Tab
Use the Marks tab to display labels for points in the selected series. Series-point labels are called marks. The Marks tab
contains the following tabs and controls:
Style Tab
Use the Style tab to set how the marks display. The Style tab contains the following controls:
Visible
Clipped
793
Multi-line
Lets you display marks on more than one line. Select this
check box to enable multi-line marks.
Style
Draw every
Angle
Arrow Tab
Use the Arrow tab to display a leader line on the series graph to indicate where the mark applies. The Arrow tab
contains the following controls:
Border
Lets you set up the leader line. The Border Editor opens,
see Border Editor Dialog Box (on page 800).
Pointer
Lets you set up the arrow head (if any) used by the leader
line. The Pointer dialog box opens, see Pointer Dialog
Box (on page 805).
Arrow head
Lets you select the kind of arrow head you want to add to
the leader line.
Size
Length
Lets you set the size of the leader line and arrow head, or
just the leader line if there is no arrow head.
Distance
Lets you set the distance between the leader line and the
graph of the selected series.
Format Tab
Use the Format tab to set and format the boxes that contains the marks. The Format tab contains the following controls:
Color
Lets you set a color for the fill of the boxes. The Color
Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box (on page
802).
Frame
794
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the boxes. The Hatch
Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box
(on page 803).
Round Frame
Lets you round the corners of the boxes. Select this check
box to round the corners of the shape.
Transparent
Transparency
Text Tab
Use the Text tab to format the text used in the marks. The Text tab contains the following controls:
Font
Lets you set the font properties for the text. This opens
the Windows Font dialog box.
Color
Lets you select the color for the text. Double-click the
colored square between Font and Fill to open the Color
Editor dialog box (see Color Editor Dialog Box (on
page 802)).
Fill
Lets you set a pattern for the text. The Hatch Brush Editor
opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box (on page
803).
Shadow
Lets you set a shadow for the text. Visible Lets you
display a shadow for the text. Select this check box to
display the axis label shadow. Size Lets you set the
location of the shadow. Use larger numbers to offset the
shadow by a large amount. Color Lets you set a color
for the shadow. You might set this to gray but can set it to
any other color. The Color Editor opens. Pattern Lets
you set a pattern for the shadow. The Hatch Brush Editor
opens. Transparency Lets you set transparency for your
shadow, where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is
completely opaque.
Gradient Tab
Use the Gradient tab to create a gradient color background for your marks. The Gradient tab contains the following
subtabs and controls:
Format Tab
795
Visible
Direction
Angle
Colors Tab
Start
Middle
End
Gamma Correction
Transparency
Options Tab
Sigma
Lets you use the options controls. Select this check box to
use the controls in the Options tab.
Sigma Focus
Sigma Scale
Shadow Tab
Use the Shadow tab to create a shadow for the marks. The Shadow tab contains the following controls:
Visible
796
Size
Color
Lets you set a color for the shadow. You might set this to
gray but can set it to any other color. The Color Editor
opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box (on page 802).
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the shadow. The Hatch Brush
Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box (on
page 803).
Transparency
Bevels Tab
Use the Bevels tab to create a rounded effects for your marks. The Bevels tab contains the following controls:
Bevel Outer
Color
Lets you set the color for the bevel effect that you use;
inner and outer bevels can use different color values.
Bevel Inner
Size
Lets you set a thickness for the bevel effect that you use;
inner and outer bevels use the same size value.
Delete
Active
Up/Down arrow
797
Save
Lets you create a new file from the contents of the graph.
Picture Tab
Use the Picture tab to save your graph as a raster image or to copy the graph as an image to the clipboard. The Picture
tab contains the following controls and subtabs:
Format
Lets you select the format of the picture you want to save.
GIF, PNG, and JPEG are supported by the Worldwide
Web, a metafile is a more easily scalable format. A
Bitmap is a Microsoft BMP file that is widely supported
on Windows operating systems, whereas TIFF pictures
are supported on a variety of Microsoft and nonMicrosoft operating systems.
Options Tab
Colors
Size Tab
Width/Height
798
File Size
Data Tab
The Data tab contains the following controls:
Series
Lets you select the series from which you copy data.
Format
Lets you select a file type to which you can save the data.
This is not used by the Copy function.
Include
Text separator
Setup
Page Tab
Orientation
799
Zoom
Margins
Lets you set up top, bottom, left, and right margins that
are used when you print.
Margin Units
Format Tab
Print Background
Quality
Proportional
Lets you change the graph from proportional to nonproportional. When you change this setting, the preview
pane is automatically updated to reflect the change. This
box is checked by default.
Grayscale
Detail Resolution
Preview Pane
Color
Lets you select a color for the border. The Color Editor
dialog box opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box (on
page 802).
Ending
Dash
800
Width
Style
Transparency
Direction
Angle
Colors Tab
Start
Middle
End
Gamma Correction
Transparency
Options Tab
801
Sigma
Lets you use the options controls. Select this check box to
use the controls in the Options tab.
Sigma Focus
Sigma Scale
To access the Gradient Editor dialog box, click Chart Settings in the Graph dialog box, then click the Tools tab. Select
the Axis tab and Color Band tool, then click the Gradient button.
Custom
OK/Cancel
To access the Color Editor dialog box, click a Color button in the Chart Options dialog box.
Custom colors
Color matrix
Color|Solid
Hue/Sat/Lum
Red/Green/Blue
802
To access the Color dialog box, click the Custom button in the Color Editor dialog box.
Custom
OK/Cancel
Background/Foreground
Select the color you want to use for the background and
foreground of the pattern. This opens the Color Editor,
see Color Editor Dialog Box (on page 802).
803
Visible
Direction
Angle
Colors Tab
Start
Middle
End
Gamma Correction
Transparency
Options Tab
Sigma
Lets you use the options controls. Select this check box to
use the controls in the Options tab.
Sigma Focus
Sigma Scale
Lets you navigate to then select the graphic file you want
to use. When selected, the graphic displays in the tab.
804
Style
Lets you define how the graphic is used in the fill. Stretch
Resizes the image to fill the usable space. Tile
Repeats the image to fill the usable space. Center Puts
the image in the horizontal and vertical center. Normal
Puts the image in the top-left corner
3D
Dark 3D
Inflate Margins
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the pointers. The Hatch Brush
Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box (on
page 803). You must clear Default to use this option.
Default
Lets you select the default format for the pointers. This
overrides any pattern selection.
Color Each
Style
Width/Height
Border
Lets you set the outline of the shapes that represent the
pointers. The Border Editor opens, see Border Editor
Dialog Box (on page 800).
Transparency
To access the Pointer dialog box, click Chart Settings in the Graph dialog box, then click Series > Marks > Arrow.
805
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Series Tab (on page 806)
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Axis Tab (on page 809)
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box - Other Tab (on page 811)
Lets you select the series to which you want to apply the
tool.
Style
Snap
Follow Mouse
Pen
Lets you define the cursor tool. The Border Editor opens,
see Border Editor Dialog Box (on page 800).
Drag Marks
Lets you drag series marks. To use this tool, you must display the marks for a selected series, see Marks Tab (on page
793). After you have added the Drag Marks tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:
Series
Lets you select the series to which you want to apply the
tool.
Reset Positions
Drag Point
Lets you drag a series point. After you have added the Drag Point tool to your graph, you can modify the following
settings:
806
Series
Lets you select the series to which you want to apply the
tool.
Style
Mouse Button
Cursor
Draw Line
Lets you draw a line on the graph by dragging. After you have added the Draw Line tool to your graph, you can modify
the following settings:
Series
Lets you select the series to which you want to apply the
tool.
Pen
Lets you define the line. The Border Editor opens, see
Border Editor Dialog Box (on page 800).
Button
Enable Draw
Enables the Draw Line tool. Select this check box to let
you draw lines, clear it to prevent you from drawing lines.
Enable Select
Lets you select and move lines that you have drawn.
Select this check box, then click and drag the line you
want to move. clear this check box if you want to prevent
lines from being moved.
Remove All
Gantt Drag
Lets you move and resize Gantt bars by dragging. This is unused by Bentley SewerCAD .
Image
Displays a picture using the selected series axes as boundaries. After you have added the Image tool to your graph, you
can modify the following settings:
Series
Lets you select the series to which you want to apply the
tool.
Browse
Lets you navigate to and select the image you want to use.
Browse is unavailable when there is a selected image. To
select a new image, first clear the existing one.
807
Clear
Mode
Lets you set up the image you select. Normal Puts the
background image in the top-left corner of the graph.
Stretch Resizes the background image to fill the entire
background of the graph. The image you select conforms
to the series to which you apply it. Center Puts the
background image in the horizontal and vertical center of
the graph. Tile Repeats the background image as many
times as needed to fill the entire background of the graph.
Mark Tips
Displays data in tooltips when you move the cursor over the graph. After you have added the Mark Tips tool to your
graph, you can modify the following settings:
Series
Lets you select the series to which you want to apply the
tool
Style
Action
Delay
Nearest Point
Lets you define and display an indicator when you are near a point in the selected series. After you have added the
Nearest Point tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:
Series
Lets you select the series to which you want to apply the
tool.
Fill
Lets you set the fill for the nearest-point indicator. The
Hatch Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor
Dialog Box (on page 803).
Border
Draw Line
Creates a line from the tip of the cursor to the series point.
Style
808
Size
Pie Slices
Outlines or expands slices of pie charts when you move the cursor or click them. This is unused by Bentley
SewerCAD .
Series Animation
Animates series points. After you have added the Series Animation tool to your graph, you can modify the following
settings:
Series
Lets you select the series to which you want to apply the
tool.
Steps
Lets you select the steps used in the animation. Set this
control towards 100 for smoother animation and away
from 100 for quicker, but less smooth animation.
Start value
Execute!
Border
Lets you set the outline of the arrows. The Border Editor
opens, see Border Editor Dialog Box (on page 800).
Fill
Lets you set the fill for the arrows. The Hatch Brush
Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box (on
page 803).
Length
Inverted Scroll
Lets you change the direction in which the arrows let you
scroll.
809
Scroll
Position
Color Band
Lets you apply a color band to your graph for a range of values you select from an axis. After you have added the Color
Band tool to your graph, you can modify the following settings:
Axis
Select the axis that you want to use to define the range for
the color band.
Border
Lets you set the outline of the color band. The Border
Editor opens, see Border Editor Dialog Box (on page
800).
Pattern
Lets you set the fill of the color band. The Hatch Brush
Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box (on
page 803).
Gradient
Color
Lets you set a solid color for the color band. The Color
Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box (on page
802).
Start Value
End Value
Transparency
Draw Behind
Lets you position the color band behind the graphs. If you
clear this check box, the color band appears in front of
your graphs and hides them, unless you have transparency
set.
Color Line
810
Select the axis that you want to use to define the location
for the line.
Border
Lets you set the outline of the color line. The Border
Editor opens, see Border Editor Dialog Box (on page
800).
Value
Allow Drag
Lets you drag the line or lock the line in place. Select this
check box if you want to permit dragging. clear this check
box if you want the line to be fixed in one location.
Drag Repaint
Lets you smooth the appearance of the line as you drag it.
No Limit Drag
Lets you drag the line beyond the axes of the graph, or
constrain the line to boundaries defined by those axes.
Select this check box to permit unconstrained dragging.
Draw Behind
Lets you position the color line behind the graphs. If you
clear this check box, the color band appears in front of
your graphs. This is more noticeable in 3D graphs.
Draw 3D
Lets you enter the text you want for your annotation.
Text alignment
Cursor
Lets you set the style of the cursor when you move it over
the annotation.
811
Position Tab
Auto
Custom
Left/Top
Lets you set a position from the Left and Top edges of the
graph tab for the annotation.
Callout Tab
Border
Lets you set up the leader line. The Border Editor opens,
see Border Editor Dialog Box (on page 800).
Pointer
Lets you set up the arrow head (if any) used by the leader
line. The Pointer dialog box opens, see Pointer Dialog
Box (on page 805).
Position
Distance
Lets you set the distance between the leader line and the
graph of the selected series.
Arrow head
Lets you select the kind of arrow head you want to add to
the leader line.
Size
Format Tab
Color
Lets you set a color for the fill of the boxes. The Color
Editor opens, see Color Editor Dialog Box (on page
802).
Frame
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the fill of the boxes. The Hatch
Brush Editor opens, see Hatch Brush Editor Dialog Box
(on page 803).
Round Frame
Lets you round the corners of the boxes. Select this check
box to round the corners of the shape.
Transparent
812
Transparency
Text Tab
Font
Lets you set the font properties for text. This opens the
Windows Font dialog box.
Color
Lets you select the color for the text font. Double-click
the colored square between Font and Fill to open the
Color Editor dialog box.
Fill
Lets you set a pattern for the text font. The Hatch Brush
Editor opens.
Shadow
Lets you set a shadow for the text. Visible Lets you
display a shadow for the text. Select this check box to
display the shadow. Size Lets you set the location of
the shadow. Use larger numbers to offset the shadow by a
large amount. Color Lets you set a color for the
shadow. You might set this to gray but can set it to any
other color. The Color Editor opens. Pattern Lets you
set a pattern for the shadow. The Hatch Brush Editor
opens. Transparency Lets you set transparency for your
shadow, where 100 is completely transparent and 0 is
completely opaque.
Gradient Tab
Format
813
Colors
Lets you set the colors used for your gradients. The Start,
Middle, and End selections open the Color Editor, see
Color Editor Dialog Box (on page 802). Start Lets
you set the starting color for your gradient. Middle Lets
you select a middle color for your gradient. The Color
Editor opens. Select the No Middle Color check box if
you want a two-color gradient. End Lets you select the
final color for your gradient. Gamma Correction Lets
you control the brightness with which the background
displays to your screen; select or clear this check box to
change the brightness of the background on-screen. This
does not affect printed output. Transparency Lets you
set transparency for your gradient, where 100 is
completely transparent and 0 is completely opaque.
Options
Lets you control the affect of the start and end colors on
the gradient, the middle color is not used. Sigma Lets
you use the options controls. Select this check box to use
the controls in the Options tab. Sigma Focus Lets you
set the location on the chart background of the gradients
end color. Sigma Scale Lets you control how much of
the gradients end color is used by the gradient
background.
Shadow Tab
Visible
Size
Color
Lets you set a color for the shadow. You might set this to
gray but can set it to any other color. The Color Editor
opens.
Pattern
Lets you set a pattern for the shadow. The Hatch Brush
Editor opens.
Transparency
Bevels Tab
Bevel Outer
Color
Lets you set the color for the bevel effect that you use;
inner and outer bevels can use different color values.
814
Bevel Inner
Size
Lets you set a thickness for the bevel effect that you use;
inner and outer bevels use the same size value.
Page Number
Lets you add a page number annotation. For more information, see Annotation .
Rotate
Lets you rotate the chart by dragging. After you have added the Rotate tool to your graph, you can modify the
following settings:
Inverted
Style
Outline
Lets you set the outline. The Border Editor opens, see
Border Editor Dialog Box (on page 800).
Series
The available series chart designs include:
Standard
Stats
Financial
Extended
3D
Other
View 3DLets you view the chart design in two or three dimensions. Select this check box to view the charts in
3D, clear it to view them in 2D.
SmoothSmooths the display of the charts. Select this check box to smooth the display, clear it to turn off
smoothing.
Functions
The available function chart designs include:
Standard
Financial
815
Stats
Extended
View 3DLets you view the chart design in two or three dimensions. Select this check box to view the charts in
3D, clear it to view them in 2D.
SmoothSmooths the display of the charts. Select this check box to smooth the display, clear it to turn off
smoothing.
Customizing a Graph
816
817
818
819
820
Opens the Print dialog box and lets you print the
document as it appears in the preview pane. You can
change printers in the Print dialog box, if you want.
Copy
Find
Zoom In/Out
Zoom Combo
Previous Page
Next Page
Page
821
Backward/Forward
Contours
You can visually display calculated results for many attributes using contour plots.
The Contours dialog box is where all of the contour definitions associated with a project are stored. Choose View >
Contours to open the Contours dialog box.
The dialog box contains a list pane that displays all of the contours currently contained within the project, along with a
toolbar.
New
Delete
Rename
Edit
Export
Refresh
Shift Up
Shift Down
Help
822
Contour Definition
The Contour Definition dialog box contains the information required to generate contours for a calculated network.
Contour
Field
Selection Set
Minimum
Maximum
Increment
Index Increment
Smooth Contours
Line Weight
823
Color by Range
Color by Index
OK
Initialize
Apply
Cancel
Contour Plot
The Contour Plot window displays the results of a contour map specification as accurate, straight-line contours.
View the changes in the mapped attribute over time by using the animation feature. Choose Analysis > Time Browser
and click the Play button to automatically advance through the time step increments selected in the Increment bar.
The plot can be printed or exported as a .DXF file. Choose File > Export > DXF to export the plot.
Although the straight-line contours generated by this program are accurate, smooth contours are often more desirable
for presentation purposes. You can smooth the contours by clicking Options and selecting Smooth Contours.
Note: Contour line index labels can be manually repositioned in this view before sending the plot to the printer.
The Contour Plot Status pane displays the Z coordinate at the mouse cursor.
824
Get familiar with your data - If you obtained your observed data from an outside source, you should take the time to
get acquainted with it. Be sure to identify units of time and measurement for the data. Be sure to identify what the
data points represent in the model; this helps in naming your line or bar series as it will appear in the graph. Each
property should be in a separate column in your data source file.
Preparing your data - Typically, observed data can be organized as a collection of points in a table. In this case, the
time series data can simply be copied to the clipboard directly from the source and pasted right into the observed
data input table. Ensure that your collection of data points is complete. That is, every value must have an associated
825
time value. Oftentimes data points are stored in tab or comma delimited text files; these two import options are
available as well.
Starting time series data entry - To create a time series data set, click the Component menu and select Time Series
Field Data. Pick the element type (e.g. Pipe, Junction) and select the New button on the top row of the dialog. (You
may also right click on the Element Type Name and click the Add button) You will then see the Select Associated
Modeling Attribute dialog where you select the property (attribute) to be imported. Choose the attribute and click
OK. You may import any number of data sets for any Property and Element. The data set will have the default name
of Property-N (e.g. Flow - 1). To change the name, click the Rename button (third button along the top of the table).
Specifying the characteristics of your data - The following charecteristics must be defined:
You can perform a quick graphical check on the data import by clicking the Graph button at the top of the data table.
If the number of observations is large, it is best to use the Copy/Paste commands. Copy the data from the original
source to the clipboard, then go to the top of the Time from Start or Property (e.g. Flow) column and hit CTRL-V to
paste the values into the appropriate column.
Click the Close button when done.
The data is saved with the model file. If you modify the source data file, the changes will not appear until time series
data is imported again.
To add the time series field data to a graph, first create the graph of the property from an EPS model run (e.g. right
click on element and pick Graph). In the Graph options dialog, select Time Series Field Data and then the name of the
time series (in the Field pane (right pane). The field data will appear in the graph as points (by default) while the model
results will appear as a continuous line. This can be changed using the Chart Settings button at the top of the graph
(third from left).
Terrain Models
A terrain model is a three-dimensional model which contains earth's surface elevations at some points in a large area.
The surface elevation at a point can be interpolated by using the end points of a triangle that contains the point.
In Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT, terrain models allow you to dynamically update node ground elevations and display
surface contours and design conduit inverts using the ground elevation along the whole pipe length.
826
Multiple terrain models can be added to the project and the boundary lines of the terrain models can be shown at the
same time, but only one terrain model can be active. The active terrain model can be used to dynamically update node
ground elevations when existing nodes are moved or when a new node is laid out. If no terrain model is active, node
ground elevation will not be updated.
The boundary of void area in the terrain model are displayed to indicate areas that do not have surface data.
The toolbar consists of the following buttons:
827
New
Delete
Rename
Edit
Downstream Trace
Zoom To
Help
icon next to a terrain model tells you that the data is not available. This issue can occur for
828
The data cannot be read. This can occur if the data source can only be read by a 32 bit version of the software, and
you are currently running the 64 bit version.
Note that the terrain model data is not stored in the project. The path to the data is stored in the project, and the terrain
model data is read when the product is started.
Terrain model management supports 3 terrain model source types: Bentley Terrain Model File, Bentley DGN Terrain
Model and LandXML Terrain Model.
Bentley Terrain Model File Type
If the terrain model source type is set to Bentley DTM File, you can select one of 3 different types of terrain model
files: GEOPAK terrain model file (.tin), InRoads terrain model file (.dtm) and MX terrain model file (.fil).
GEOPAK terrain model file (.tin): GEOPAK terrain model file (.tin) can be used in both Standalone and
MicroStation Storm\Sewer applications. It can be used in both 64 bit build and 32 bit application.
InRoads terrain Model file (.dtm): InRoads terrain model file (.dtm) can only be used in MicroStation platform
Storm\Sewer applications. It can be used in both 64 bit and 32 bit MicroStation applications.
MX terrain model file (.fil): MX terrain model file (.fil) can only be used in 32 bit build application. It can be used
in both Standalone and MicroStation 32 bit build applications. There may be multiple terrain models in an MX
terrain model file. Select one terrain model from the multiple terrain models in the file in the Multiple DTMs
dialog that appears.
829
Catchment Delineation
When the user selects Run Catchment Delineation from the Terrain Modeling Manager, the button for Catchment
Delineation will be placed in the depressed position. At this time, whenever a catch basin is added or moved within the
Digital Terrain Model (DTM) the catchment is identified.
The catchment delineation tool works by first performing an upstream trace from a point at the center of the catch basin
until the trace reaches a high point. Additional traces are then performed until sufficient traces are available to complete
a catchment boundary.
When the user picks Run Catchment Delineation a second time, the catchment delineation tool stops running and the
button is no longer in the depressed position.
The catchment delineation tool cannot identify portions of the catchment that lie outside of the DTM. The boundaries
of this portion of the catchment is must be identified with some other approach as it is considered a separate catchment.
The outflow from this external catchment can be assigned to the same catch basin as that within the DTM. The catch
basin can have two catchments associated with it-one from within the DTM and one from outside the DTM.
The catchment delineation tool is intended to be used with final DTM's of the area to be served. These DTM's should
be sufficiently precise that features such as gutters and swales can be detected by the tool. Gutter elements in the
hydraulic model are not be used in catchment delineation.
There are several parameters that can be adjusted to improve the performance of the automated catchment delineation.
These are described in the Catchment Delineation Settings (on page 830) topic.
830
The default values for these parameters are usually adequate so the user should generally avoid changing them without
good reason. The parameters are described below:
Step Size: Step size is distance from the last found point to the next found point. A smaller search step will generate
more accurate results, but it will increase the total time to search all points in catchment boundary. Range of the
value is from 1 to 3 ft.
Step Angle: Step Angle is the angle to rotate the line from the last found point to next point when trying to find the
next point within the catchment or a point outside of the catchment boundary. Value can be 0.15 radiant / step.
Step reduction angle tolerance: When a point is found in catchment boundary, the bend angle of the last found 3
points is calculated. If the bend angle is larger than the value, the search step will be decreased by half to find a
more accurate point to replace the last found point. The step reduction angle tolerance value can be PI / 16 or 0.196
radiant.
Catchment boundary closure tolerance: When a point within catchment boundary and a point outside of the
catchment boundary are found, bisection method is used to find a point closer to the real catchment boundary. If the
distance between the last found 2 points is smaller than the value, the search for the point will be stopped.
Adjacent catchment gap tolerance: 3 lines with length of this value are drawn to the outside of the catchment
boundary from 3 points in the line between the last found 2 points in catchment boundary (Fig. 9). By checking the
ending points in the downstream trace paths from those 3 extended points, the program can tell if the gap is larger
than gap tolerance. If the gap is larger than the gap tolerance, the search step will be decreased by half to find a
more accurate new point to replace the found last point.
Ignore pit/depression depth less than: We use terrain model downstream trace to check if a point is within the
boundary of the catchment for the inlet. If the depth of the local pit is smaller than the value, the downstream trace
will pass the local pit and continue to the downstream low point. For terrain models on road, the value can be
between 0.01 ft and 0.1 ft. For natural surface, a relatively large value can be used.
Simplify boundary vertices: If the box is checked, maximum perpendicular algorithm is used to reduce the number
of points in catchment boundary.
831
Vertex removal tolerance: When the distance from a point to the line between other 2 points is smaller than the
value, the point can be removed from the catchment boundary point list.
Lay out network links and structures in fully-scaled mode in the same design and drafting environment that you use
to develop your engineering plans.
You will have access to any other third party applications that you currently use, along with any custom MDL
applications.
Use native MicroStation insertion snaps to precisely position Bentley SewerGEMS V8i elements with respect to
other entities in the MicroStation drawing.
Use native MicroStation commands on Bentley SewerGEMS V8i model entities with automatic update and
synchronization with the model database.
Control destination levels for model elements and associated label text and annotation, giving you control over
styles, line types, and visibility of model elements.
MicroStation Environment
The MicroStation environment includes:
832
Full element symbol editing functionality is available through the use of custom cells. All elements and graphical
decorations (flow arrows, control indicators, etc.) are contained within a Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT.cel file.To
do this open the .cel file that's in the WTRG install directory in MSTN (at the first, Open dialog), and then using the
File>models you can select each of the WTRG symbols and change them using normal MSTN commands. Then
when you create a new dgn and start laying out the WTRG elements, the new symbols will be used.
The more powerful Selection tools are in the MicroStation select menu.
Element symbols like junction are circles that are not filled. The user must pick the edge of the circle, not inside the
circle to pick a junction.
The MicroStation background color is found in Workspace>Preferences>View Options. It can also be changed in
Settings>Color Tab.
Zooming and panning are controlled by the MicroStation zooming and panning tools.
Depending on how MicroStation was set up, a single right click will simply clear the last command, while holding
down the right mouse button will bring up the context sensitive menu. There are commands in that menu (e.g.
rotate) that are not available in Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT stand alone.
You can control the appearance and destination of all model elements using the Element Levels command under the
View menu. For example, you can assign a specific level for all outlets, as well as assign the label and annotation text
style to be applied. Element attributes are either defined by the MicroStation Level Manager, using by-level in the
attributes toolbox, or by the active attributes. You can change the element attributes using the change element attributes
tool, located in the change attributes toolbox, located on the MicroStation Main menu.
Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT toolbars are turned off by default when you start. They are found under
View>Toolbars and they can be turned on. By default they will be floating toolbars but they can be docked wherever
the user chooses.
Note: Any MicroStation tool that deletes the target element (such as Trim and IntelliTrim) will also remove the
connection of that element to Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT. After the Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT connection is
removed, the element is no longer a valid wtg link element and will not show properties on the property grid.
The element does not have properties because it is not part of the WTRG model. It's as if the user just used MSTN
tools to layout a rectangle in a WTRG dgn. It's just a dgn drawing element but has nothing to do with the water
model.
Drawing File (.DGN)--The MicroStation drawing file contains the elements that define the model, in addition to the
planimetric base drawing information that serves as the model background.
833
Model File(.stsw)--The model file contains model data specific to StormCAD V8i, including project option settings,
color-coding and annotation settings, etc. Note that the MicroStation .dgn that is associated with a particular model
may not bave the same filename as the models .stsw file.
Database File (.MDB)--The model database file that contains all of the input and output data for the model. Note
that the MicroStation .dgn that is associated with a particular model may not bave the same filename as the
models .mdb file.
To send the model to another user, all three files are required.
It is important to understand that archiving the drawing file is not sufficient to reproduce the model. You must also
preserve the associated .csd and .MDB files.
Element Properties
When working in the MicroStation mode, this feature will display a dialog box containing fields for the currently
selected elements associated properties. To modify an attribute, click each associated grid cell.
You can also review or modify MicroStation drawing information about an element(s), such as its type, attributes, and
geometry, by using the Element Information dialog. To access the Element Information dialog, click the Element
Information button or click the Element menu and select the Information command.
Levels
To control display of elements in the selected levels, use the Level Display dialog box. To access the Level Display
dialog, click the Settings menu and select the Level > Display command.
If you want to freeze elements in levels, select Global Freeze from the View Display menu in the Level Display dialog.
You can create new Levels in the Level Manager. To access the Level Manager, click the Settings menu and select the
Level > Manager command.
To control the display of levels, use level filters. Within MicroStation, you can also create, edit, and save layer filters to
DWG files in the Level Manager. To access the Level Manager, click the Settings menu and select the Level >
Manager command. Layer filters are loaded when a DWG file is opened, and changes are written back when the file is
saved.
834
Text Styles
You can view, edit, and create Text Style settings in MicroStation mode by clicking the Element menu and selecting
the Text Styles command to open the Text Styles dialog.
View Associations
Working with elements includes:
Edit Elements
Elements can be edited in one of two ways in MicroStation mode:
Element Properties Dialog: To access the Element Properties dialog, click the Bentley SewerCAD View menu and
select the Properties command.
FlexTables: To access the FlexTables dialog, click the Bentley SewerCAD View menu and select the FlexTables
command.
Deleting Elements
In MicroStation mode, you can delete elements by clicking on them using the Delete Element tool, or by highlighting
the element to be deleted and clicking your keyboards Delete key.
Note: Any MicroStation tool that deletes the target element (such as Trim and IntelliTrim) will also remove the
connection of that element to Bentley SewerCAD . After the Bentley SewerCAD connection is removed, the
element is no longer a valid link and will not show properties on the property grid.
Modifying Elements
In MicroStation mode, these commands are selected from the shift-right-click shortcut menu (hold down the Shift key
while right-clicking). They are used for scaling and rotating model entities.
835
Edit Elements
In MicroStation mode, this menu command is used to open a spreadsheet FlexTable editor or a selection of one or more
network figures. You are prompted to select figures on which to build a table.
MicroStation Commands
When running in MicroStation mode, Haestad Methods products make use of all the advantages that MicroStation has,
such as plotting capabilities and snap features. Additionally, MicroStation commands can be used as you would with
any design project. For example, our products elements and annotation can be manipulated using common
MicroStation commands.
Moving Elements
When using MicroStation mode, the MicroStation commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror, and Array can be used to
move elements.
To move a node, execute the MicroStation command by either typing it at the command prompt or selecting it. Follow
the MicroStation prompts, and the node and its associated label will move together. The connecting pipes will shrink or
stretch depending on the new location of the node.
836
Snap Menu
When using MicroStation mode, you can enable the Snaps button bar by clicking the Settings menu and selecting the
Snaps > Button Bar command. See the MicroStation documentation for more information about using snaps.
Annotation Display
Some fonts do not correctly display the full range of characters used by Bentley SewerCAD s annotation feature
because of a limited character set. If you are having problems with certain characters displaying improperly or not at
all, try using another font.
837
Layout network links and structures in fully-scaled mode in the same design and drafting environment that you use
to develop your engineering plans. You will have access to any other third party applications that you currently use,
along with any custom LISP, ARX, or VBA applications that you have developed.
Use native AutoCAD insertion snaps to precisely position Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT elements with respect to
other entities in the AutoCAD drawing.
Use native AutoCAD commands such as ERASE, MOVE, and ROTATE on Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT model
entities with automatic update and synchronization with the model database.
Control destination layers for model elements and associated label text and annotation, giving you control over
styles, line types, and visibility of model elements.
Click one of the following links to learn how to use AutoCAD mode:
838
Drawing Setup
When working in the AutoCAD mode, you may work with our products in many different AutoCAD scales and
settings. However, Haestad Methods product elements can only be created and edited in model space.
Symbol Visibility
Note: In AutoCAD, it is possible to delete element label text using the ERASE command. You should not use
ERASE to control visibility of labels. If you desire to control the visibility of a selected group of element labels,
you should move them to another layer that can be frozen or turned off.
In AutoCAD mode, you can control display of element labels using the check box in the Drawing Options dialog box.
Drawing File (.DWG)--The AutoCAD drawing file contains the custom entities that define the model, in addition to
the planimetric base drawing information that serves as the model background.
Model File(.stsw)--The model file contains model data specific to StormCAD V8i, including project option settings,
color-coding and annotation settings, etc.
Database File (.MDB)--The model database file that contains all of the input and output data for the model.
To send the model to another user, all three files are required.
The two files will have the same base name. It is important to understand that archiving the drawing file is not
sufficient to reproduce the model. You must also preserve the associated .stsw and .MDB files.
Since the .stsw file can be run and modified separately from the .DWG file using Stand-Alone Editor, it is quite
possible for the two files to get out of sync. Should you ever modify the model in Stand-Alone Editor mode and then
later load the AutoCAD .DWG file, the StormCAD V8i program will compare file dates, and automatically use the
built-in AutoCAD synchronization routine.
Click one of the following links to learn more about AutoCAD project files and StormCAD V8i:
839
Drawing Synchronization
Whenever you open a Bentley SewerCAD -based drawing file in AutoCAD, the Bentley SewerCAD model server will
start. The first thing that the application will do is load the associated Bentley SewerCAD model (stsw) file. If the time
stamps of the drawing and model file are different, Bentley SewerCAD will automatically perform a synchronization.
This protects against corruption that might otherwise occur from separately editing the Bentley SewerCAD model file
in stand-alone mode, or editing proxy elements at an AutoCAD station where the Bentley SewerCAD application is not
loaded.
The synchronization check will occur in two stages:
First, Bentley SewerCAD will compare the drawing model elements with those in the server model. Any differences
will be listed. Bentley SewerCAD enforces network topological consistency between the server and the drawing
state. If model elements have been deleted or added in the .stsw file during a Bentley SewerCAD session, or if
proxy elements have been deleted, Bentley SewerCAD will force the drawing to be consistent with the native
database by restoring or removing any missing or excess drawing custom entities.
After network topology has been synchronized, Bentley SewerCAD will compare other model and drawing states
such as location, labels, and flow directions.
You can run the Synchronization check at any time using the following command:
STMCSYNCHRONIZECSDWSYNCSERVER
Or by selecting Tools > Database Utilities > Synchronize Drawing.
840
AutoCAD Commands
When running in AutoCAD mode, Haestad Methods products make use of all the advantages that AutoCAD has, such
as plotting capabilities and snap features. Additionally, AutoCAD commands can be used as you would with any design
project. For example, our products elements and annotation can be manipulated using common AutoCAD commands.
Explode Elements
In AutoCAD mode, running the AutoCAD Explode command will transform all custom entities into equivalent
AutoCAD native entities. When a custom entity is exploded, all associated database information is lost. Be certain to
save the exploded drawing under a separate filename.
Use Explode to render a drawing for finalizing exhibits and publishing maps of the model network. You can also
deliver exploded drawings to clients or other individuals who do not own a Bentley Systems Product license, since a
fully exploded drawing will not be comprised of any ObjectARX proxy objects. For more information, see Working
with Proxies (on page 843).
Moving Elements
When using AutoCAD mode, the AutoCAD commands Move, Scale, Rotate, Mirror, and Array can be used to move
elements.
To move a node, execute the AutoCAD command by either typing it at the command prompt or selecting it. Follow the
AutoCAD prompts, and the node and its associated label will move together. The connecting pipes will shrink or
stretch depending on the new location of the node.
841
Snap Menu
When using AutoCAD mode, the Snap menu is a standard AutoCAD menu that provides options for picking an exact
location of an object. See the Autodesk AutoCAD documentation for more information.
Contour Labeling
You can apply contour labels after the contour plot has been exported to the AutoCAD drawing. The labeling
commands are accessed from the Tools menu. The following options are available:
EndAllows you to apply labels to one end, both ends, or any number of selected insertion points. After selecting
this labeling option, AutoCAD will prompt you to Select Contour to label. After selecting the contour to label,
AutoCAD prompts for an Insertion point. Click in the drawing view to place labels at specified points along the
contour. When prompted for an Insertion point, clicking the Enter key once will prompt you to select point nearest
the contour endpoint. Doing so will apply a label to the end of the contour closest to the area where you clicked.
Clicking the Enter key twice when prompted for an Insertion point will apply labels to both ends of the contour.
InteriorThis option applies labels to the interior of a contour line. You will be prompted to select the contour to be
labeled, then to select the points along the contour line where you want the label to be placed. Any number of labels
can be placed inside the contour in this way. Clicking the label grip and dragging will move the label along the
contour line.
Group EndChoosing this option opens the Elevation Increment dialog box. The value entered in this dialog box
determines which of the contours selected will be labeled. If you enter 2, only contours representing a value that is a
multiple of 2 will be labeled, and so on. After clicking OK in this dialog box, you will be prompted to select the
Start point for a line. Contours intersected by the line drawn thusly will have a label applied to both ends, as
modified by the Elevation Increment that was selected.
Group InteriorChoosing this option opens the Elevation Increment dialog box. The value entered in this dialog
box determines which of the contours selected will be labeled. If you enter 2, only contours representing a value that
is a multiple of 2 will be labeled, and so on. After clicking OK in this dialog box, you will be prompted to select the
Start point for a line.
Change SettingsAllows you to change the Style, Display Precision, and Font Height of the contour labels.
Delete LabelPrompts to select the contour from which labels will be deleted, then prompts to select the labels to
be removed.
Delete All LabelsPrompts to select which contours the labels will be removed from, then removes all labels for
the specified contours.
842
Importing Data
When running the software in AutoCAD mode, this command imports a selected data (.stsw) file for use in the current
drawing. The new project file will now correspond to the drawing name, such as, CurrentDrawingName.stsw.
Whenever you save changes to the network model through the software, the associated .stsw data file is updated and
can be loaded into the stand-alone version.
A project can only be imported to a new, empty AutoCAD drawing.
Theory
Click one of the following links to learn about the theory behind the software:
843
time
flow-depth
A0
844
time
gravity constant
So
Sf
Se
Equation 14.1 is known as continuity equation and equation 14.2 is known as momentum equation. The two equations
represent a complete unsteady flow hydrodynamic equation system therefore a dynamic model based on them is known
as dynamic routing model or dynamic model.
Sometimes simplified equations, by neglecting a few terms in the momentum equation, are used in a model and the
model becomes kinematic or diffusion model depending on what terms are neglected. This will be further discussed in
the special consideration section.
845
in which is a weighting factor and the weighted four-point implicit scheme is unconditionally stable for >0.5. The
value of of 0.6-0.8 is found to be optimal in maintaining stability and accuracy for large computational time steps.
This is one of the calculation options which user can modify (NR weighting coefficient). The computation
x and
846
Applying equations 14.3 though 14.5 to the non-linear dynamic equations to each computational
x reach results in a complex matrix of linear system, with all Q and h at every section are unknown. In order to derive
all Q and h, the Newton-Raphson iteration method is used to solve the finite-difference equations (the linear matrix
system). Convergence of the iterative technique is attained when the difference between successive iterations for each
unknown Q and h is less than a specified tolerance which can be modified by user as a calculation option as well (Yiteration tolerance).
Exceptional computational efficiency is achieved by special algorithm to iterate a banded matrix so that a convergence
is mostly obtained within 1-5 iterations for each time step.
Network Algorithms
A sewer network can be as simple as a system of a few dendritic branches or as complicated as a system of hundreds of
branches with many loops and various junctions containing different hydraulic structures and facilities, such as weirs
and pumps. In many situations, the mutual flow interaction must be accounted for to achieve realistic results,
particularly for unsteady flows since those confluence junctions can have significant effects to the traveling dynamic
wave in a sewer system.
In order to simulate any complicated sewer networks using implicit numerical schemes, special algorithms have to be
developed for any efficient and accurate solutions. An extended relaxation technique is used in the implicit dynamic
sewer model to decompose the network of a sewer system into many single branches and solve each individual branch
by the four-point implicit scheme described above. In doing so, it treats the influences of other branches at a junction as
either lateral flows (when other branch joins the junction) or as a stage boundary condition (when the branch
downstream end joins a junction). During the numerical solution process, when each branch is solved by the NewtonRaphson iteration, an assumed lateral inflow or outflow is added at each junction reach to replace the confluence
branch.
The branches are automatically numbered such that the dendritic branches are always treated before the loop branches
and higher order branches (more downstream) are always solved before the lower order branches. This numbering
scheme enables a stage boundary condition at the downstream of a branch to be determined using the average computed
stages at the two confluence cross-sections at the junction which the branch joins. In this way, each branch is
847
q*
q **
Values of between 0.8 and 0.9 provide the most efficient convergence for the relaxation iteration. Extensive tests
have shown that the relaxation iteration convergence is achieved within one to three iterations for almost all situations
using = 0.6 (a default value in the calculation option).
848
A looped branch or split branch is the one linked to a junction node at both upstream and downstream boundaries.
When solving a looped branch for a time step, the implicit solver does the normal relaxation for the downstream
boundary and uses an estimated flow as the upstream boundary condition, the iterative upstream flow is based on the
diversion junction flow distribution factors which are derived by estimating the exiting link dynamic flow capacities.
The relaxation technique retains the super efficiency of solving the St. Venant equations for each individual branch and
applying iterative proper boundary conditions so that it converges very fast for both boundary relaxation and branch
solving.
849
2. In which Q(in) and Q(out) are the flows into and out of the node and
V is the volume change during the time step. If user specifies storage area on the ground, the equation is able to
simulate the storing and draining effect duo to the manhole surcharge caused volume change. The storage areas
above the ground can be represented by either user input table of areas and elevations or by model defined smooth
transition function when there is no surface storage data available, which determines the areas from the junction,
chamber area to about 1200 times that of the chamber area, the empirical storage equation is defined as
3. Sa is the ground storage area (acres) and H is the head above the ground, it also limits to the 1200 times of the
manhole chamber area, Sam. User can also specify that there is no storage above the ground and in this case the
manhole overflow occurs when the manhole HGL is above the ground rim elevation. The street flooding will be
discussed in following section.
4. An energy equation is usually used in sewer manholes or junctions to replace the Momentum equation (Eq.14.2) if
user specifies to add head loss calculation in the manhole. Different methods to calculate the energy loss are
provided. The HGL-based energy equation is generally in the form of
5. in which hi and hi+1 are HGL's in the upstream and downstream sections and ?h is the head loss calculated by
appropriate loss equation. The head loss methods include:
850
7. Qcontl is the flow given by the control structure. For example, a rectangular flow is defined by:
8. Where Cw is the weir flow coefficient (typical value is 3.0 - 3.5 for U.S. customary units and 1.8 - 1.9 for SI units),
the exponent e =1.5 for a inline weir and 1.67 for a side weir which divert flow from the main waterway, H is the
head over the weir, L is the weir crest length. Corrections for end contractions are also considered in rectangular
inline and side weirs. A V-Notch weir flow is defined by:
9. Where
10. Where Ao is the area of the opening and Co is the orifice discharge coefficient and its typical value is 0.6.
11. Other structures are similar with using appropriate equations.
12. In the case of significant slope changes at a junction which results in an apparent flow regime change at the
junction, such as a drop manhole, sometimes the normal flow equation or the critical flow equation, depending on
the flow regime change, is used to replace the momentum equation.
The external boundaries are the most upstream end section or most downstream end section. Mathematically they are
known as boundary conditions. Usually an external upstream boundary condition is a manhole node or open channel
section where there may be a point inflow (either from a linked surface catchment runoff hydrograph or a user input
hydrograph, patterned loads or a flow from a surface gutter). An external downstream boundary condition can be one of
followings:
851
Free outfall
Time-Elevation curve
Flow-Elevation curve
User defined tailwater (a constant h)
Boundary Element (a pond or wet well)
Normal (use normal flow equation)
Where Qover is the overflow discharge, Lw is the overflow length, C is the discharge coefficient and C=3.0 is used, H
is the head over the overflow elevation.
852
Bentley SewerCAD allows you to add a short suction pipe between a pump and a wet well. This is done by connecting
a pressure pipe between the wet well and the pump and making the Is Virtual attribute set to False.
The model will consider the friction loss in the suction pipe and use this loss to modify the pump curve, so that the
pump head is still based on the wet well HGL. The suction loss will not be reflected in its profile although the loss
effect is considered in the calculation as described above.
In order to model complex pumping scenarios with robustness and accuracy, an iterative relaxation technique is used.
At each time step t during the dynamic computation, all pump outflows are simultaneously iterated in a relaxation way
until they converge to a stable value for every pump and its associated pressure sub-network:
in which i represents the outflow from the pump i, k+1 represents an updated value for the next iteration, and *
represents a value determined from the pump curve and current system hydraulic conditions under current k iteration,
i.e., the flow value for Q(t)i* is determined using the head difference across the pump from the previous iteration and
the pump head characteristic curve. The pump flow equations are solved along with simultaneously solving all the
pressure pipe and junction equations in the pressure sub-network. When there are multiple mumps, all the pumps and
their pressure sub-networks are solver simultaneously as well, with some subsystems no longer iterating when a
convergence is achieved during the iteration. The hydraulic conditions are obtained by solving the force main pipes
using current pump outflows, ? is a relaxation factor (0<?<1.0) and ?=0.8 is found to provide robust and fast
converging results and it is used in the pressure solver (not a calculation option).
853
in which is a numerical modifier and its value for every finite-difference box (between xi and xi+1) will be determined
at each time step by the following equation:
in which m is a user specified constant (LPI coefficient in the calculation option) and m 1.0. It is found that smaller
values of m tend to stabilize the solution in some cases while larger values of m provide more accuracy.
Virtual Flow
Dry flow condition is common in the storm and sewer modeling. A zero or near zero flow can cause instability in the
implicit numerical model, in order to overcome this small flow instability a virtual flow method is used. The method
adds a small base flow to every conduit which has a depth < the virtual depth so that the model is stable for low flow
conditions. The virtual flow is determined by a pre-scribed (as a calculation option) virtual depth, the virtual depth is
typically between 0.0 to 0.04 ft and the default value of 0.04 is proven to be stable for almost all conditions. After the
calculation is finished for a time step a filtering algorithm is used to filter out the virtual flow and depth so that the final
results are more accurately presented.
854
This equation is accurate to within 1% over most of its range and no worse than 3%. For Yn/D > 0.94, there are actually
two solutions but the lower one in Figure 1, which compares the equations to an exact theoretical solution, is used as it
is more common.
855
Once the critical depth has been determined, the critical slope can be given by
The use of the term "explicit" in these equations refers to the fact that the equations are solved explicitly, not iteratively
and differs from discussion of the "Explicit" solver which refers to the numerical scheme for solving dynamic wave
equations. These equations are only used in the GVF-convex and GVF-rational solvers because in these, the flow is
calculated before the depth.
A description of the derivation of these equations can be found in Jin, M. and Walski, T., 2011, "Efficient Equations for
Circular Partly-full Pipe Hydraulics", EWRI Conference, palm Springs, Cal.
Excessive catchment runoff inflow above the inlet interception capacity, an inlet can capture all or partial runoff, a
partial runoff is determined by a specified maximum capacity or an inflow-capture curve and other portion of the
flow will go to the surface gutter
Manholes overflow, if the manhole is overflowed and there is a gutter on the ground then the overflow goes to the
gutter and the gutter may flow the overflow into the system, the manhole overflow is lost from the system if there is
no gutter.
Gutter flows are modeled in simple Muskingum-Cunge routing method for flow and Manning equation for depth. The
gutter and its surface network are solved every time after the primary sewer network is solved.
Branches
The implicit dynamic engine solves the St. Venant equations along straight branches of conduit or channel starting at
the most downstream outfall. Branch 1 starts at the outfall and upstream until it reaches the first junction. There it
follows the junction with the largest conduit and/or the conduit with the alignment that matches the outlet pipe
alignment. This continues until the branch reaches the most upstream node. At this point a second branch starts from
856
Section Count
The element property Section Count refers to the number of spatial sections into which the element is divided along its
length by the implicit numerical engine. For any element there will be a minimum of five sections. Depending on the
value of the Computational Distance property, which you set in the Property Editor for Calculation Options, additional
sections are added for longer pipes. The default computational distance is 50 feet so that there will be five sections for
any element up to 250 ft. Beyond that length, a section is added for each 50 ft of length. You can control the number of
sections by increasing or decreasing the computational distance, which will decrease or increase the number of sections
accordingly.
857
Related Topics:
Pressurized Flow
The typical gravity sewer network is dominated by circular pipe segments. These pipes are all closed and characterized
by a converging top where the hydraulic top width approaches zero as flow transitions from free surface to pressure.
The Preissmann slot method is used for simulating pressure or surcharged flows by adapting the conceptualization of
pressurized flow to fit a free surface model. The slot extends vertically from pipe crown to infinity and over the entire
length the pipe, and the width of the slot is usually 1% of the characteristic pipe dimension (diameter for a circular
pipe) but not large than 0.02 ft.
Transition of a Circular Pipe to the Slot
Since a circular conduit width changes dramatically near the crown and in order to maintain a smooth transition
between conduit width and the slot width, the Bentley SewerCAD model adapted a transitional function of the conduit
width:
flow depth
The maximum width allowed in the slot is 0.01 ft. Also, when the flow depth is above the diameter d the area remains
the full circular section area therefore the slot will have no impact on the flow continuity.
The significant advantages in using this hypothetical slot are apparent in simulating the moving transitional interface
between open-channel flow and pressure flow, which can happen anywhere at any time in a sewer system. Since the
model applies a unified set of consistent equations and numerical schemes, it makes no special switches between openchannel flows and pressure flows, giving rise to a robust solution.
Related Topics:
858
in which is a numerical modifier and its value for every finite-difference box (between xi and xi+1) will be
determined at each time step by the following equation:
in which m is a user specified constant and m 1.0. It is found that smaller values of m tend to stabilize the solution in
some cases while larger values of m provide more accuracy.
The LPI technique was developed by Dr. Ming Jin and Dr. Danny Fread and this technique has been adapted by Federal
dynamic models such as NWS Fldwav model, USACE HEC-RAS unsteady flow model and EPA-SWMM model.
Related Topics:
859
Steep Reaches
Unlike a natural river, a storm drainage system can often have pipes of very steep slopes, sometimes more than 30%.
The flows in such steep pipes are overwhelmingly very supercritical. A kinematical treatment is applied on such very
steep pipes in which the Manning equation is used to replace the momentum equation during the solution process.
Related Topics:
Flooding
A unique hydraulic condition in the storm sewer modeling is the overcharged-flow- resulted street surface flooding.
This is the condition in which the drainage flow into the sewer pipe is much larger than the sewer capacity and the
depth is built higher than the ground surface elevation. In addition, at the sewer junctions (manholes) where there may
be open access to the ground, the flow starts to go upward through the manhole openings, overtop the manhole rims.
There are two scenarios after the street flooding occurs:
If there is a surface gutter or channel connected to the manhole, the overflowing water will join the surface gutter or
channel and will be accounted for and simulated as part of the flows in the gutter subsystem. These flows may drain
back to the sewer subsystem somewhere downstream.
If there is no surface gutter or channel connected to the overflowed manhole, the overtopped flows leave the sewer
system and these flows are lost to the system; this will be reflected by a flow volume loss. In this condition, there
may also be a storage area above the ground elevation and below the user-specified overtop elevation. The water
stored in the storage area will drain back to the manhole when the water elevation recesses. Users can specify the
storage areas and the street-flooding-overtop elevation. A default overtop elevation is the ground rim elevation,
assuming there is no storage effects.
The implicit hydraulic engine treats the street overtopping overflow as weir flow and uses a weir equation to determine
the overflow. The weir crest elevation is the user-specified street overtop elevation and the weir length is determined by
an empirical equation:
860
WL
dh
Related Topics:
Convex Routing
Convex routing is a hydrologic routing technique used to calculate the hydrograph at the downstream end of a link,
given its value at the upstream end. It is used in all EPS runs of the GVF-convex solver.
The underlying logic in the convex routing method is that the routed outflow for a time step is based on the inflow and
outflow for the previous time step. Each outflow ordinate is calculated as:
Where:
Ot +
= Outflow at time t +
861
The convex routing coefficient is essentially a ratio of the hydrologic time step and representative flow travel time
through the pipe and is calculated as follows:
Where:
The velocity used to calculate the coefficient is either the normal velocity or full flow velocity generated for a userspecified percentage of the peak of the inflow hydrograph. In other words, if the percentage of the peak flow is greater
than the capacity of the pipe then the full-flow velocity is used. If the percentage of the peak flow is less than the
capacity the flow velocity for normal depth is used.
Note: You can specify the percentage of the peak flow, which is used to calculate the Convex Routing coefficient
for each pipe by entering the value for the property Peak Flow Ratio % in the Calculation options when the GVFconvex solver is the active solver. The values typically range between 50% and 75%.
The higher the percentage of flow the faster the velocity used to calculate the convex routing coefficient, hence the
closer the routed hydrograph will be to a pure translation of the inflow hydrograph.
The user-specified percentage can be modified in the calculation options. A typical value is around 75 % but can be
modified for oddly shaped hydrographs with sharp uncharacteristic peaks or for calibration purposes.
In the case of negative sloping pipe, the convex routing coefficient can be very small and overestimate peak flow
attenuation. In these pipes, there is usually very little peak attenuation. The user can provide a value for C for negative
sloping pipe on the order of 0.3 to 0.5 to achieve more realistic results for this case. The value is entered in the property
"Minimum convex C for negative conduit". The default value is zero.
Note: Known Flows are not routed. Known Flows override other known flows, and are not cumulative going
downstream.
Section Hydraulics
Within the hydraulics solver the decomposed network branches and loops comprise a series of reach segments and/or
structures that are logically ordered from upstream to downstream by the numerical engine. Each reach segment
862
Related Topics:
Conduit Shapes
The supported conduit shapes are shown in Figures 11-2 to 11-21. Each shape is parameterized by one, two, or more
characteristic dimensions as shown in the reference figure. In this model, a conduit is taken to be a prismatic (constantshaped) conveyance segment that is defined by a single shape. Conduits do not have to be closed sections, so prismatic
design channels can be modeled using conduit elements.
The allowable conduit shapes include:
863
Circular Channel
Trapezoidal Channel
Basket Handle
864
Basket-Handle Shape
The required input to define the size of a Basket-Handle Arch is simply its Height or Rise (H). Unique to basket-Handle
shape is the ratio of the bottom width (W) of the Arch to be .99135 of the Height (H). The remaining shape
characteristics are derived based upon internal look up tables to the SWMM implementation. These auxiliary attributes
include:
Ellipse
865
Ellipse Shape
An Elliptical shaped pipe is defined by its Height or Rise (H). The elliptical coefficients of A and B respectively
correspond to H/2 and W/2.
Horseshoe
866
.,
, and
Egg
Egg Shape
The only user input to define a Egg Shaped Arch is its Height or Rise (H). The remaining attributes are derived based
upon tables internal to the SWMM implementation. Its unique cross sectional characteristics are based upon a top
radius equal to one-third of its height. The definition of the bottom portion of the arch is more complex and based upon
internal angles
867
Semi-ellipse
Semi-Ellipse Shape
The required input to define the size of a Semi-Elliptical Arch is simply its Height or Rise (H). Unique to this arch
shape is that characteristic that at its widest dimension, at its base, the width is equal to its height (H). The shape is
geometrically defined with the function of an ellipsis, where the traditional elliptical coefficients of A and B
respectively correspond to H/2 and H.
Arch
868
Arch Shape
The cross sectional shape of an Arch link is loosely defined by its Span and Rise. When computing using the Implicit or
Explicit (SWMM) engine in CivilStorm or SewerGEMS only these two parameters are required. The remaining
attributes are derived based upon internal look-up tables native to the EPA-SWMM computations, and therefore, differs
slightly from the Pipe-Arch-306 (on page 869) conduit shape. The GVF-Rational and GVF-Convex solvers also
support the Arch conduit shape selection.
Pipe-Arch
869
Pipe-Arch Shape
The Pipe-Arch shape originates from FHWA publications, and differs slightly from the more generically defined
Arch-305 (on page 868) shape from SWMM. Currently, a conduit may given a Pipe-Arch conduit shape only when
the conduit type is a conduit catalog reference. Pipe-Arch shape is supported by the GVF-Rational and GVF-Convex
solvers. In addition to Rise and Span, the cross sectional characteristics of a Pipe-Arch include:
Rc = Corner Radius
Rb = Bottom Radius
Rt = Top Radius
B = Bottom Distance
Full Area = cross sectional full flow area of the pipe
870
Semi-Circle
Semi-Circular Shape
A Semi-Circular Arch is sized only by its Rise or Height (H). The semi-circular shape has a radius (R) equal to its
Height (H). At its largest, at its base, its width is twice the Height (H).
Catenary
Catenary Shape
The only user input to define a Catenary Arch is its Height or Rise (H). The shape is principally defined with the cosine
function, where the coefficients a and b are determined within SWMM computations.
Gothic
871
Gothic Shape
A Gothic Arch is well defined based upon its Height or Rise (H). At its greatest width (W) the unique proportion of W
to H is 1.115. Also unique to this arch type is the existence of the equilateral triangle with side lengths of W.
Triangle
872
Triangle Shape
A triangular shaped channel varies in its input requirements. When based solely upon its height (H) and its width (W)
the channels left (SL) and right (SR) side slopes are assumed equivalent. Otherwise the channel could be defined based
upon user provided height (H) and left (SL) and right (SR) side slopes.
Rectangular Channel
873
Rectangular-Rounded
874
Rectangular-Rounded Shape
A Rectangular-Rounded shape is completely defined by three attributes:
H = Height
W = Width
D = Radius of the rounded portion of the channel
Rectangular-Triangular
Rectangular-Triangular Shape
A Rectangular-Triangular shape is completely defined by three attributes:
H1 = Height of the entire cross section
875
Power
Power Shape
A channel defined with the power function requires the input of the exponent (n) to the following general form
equation: y = xn
Parabola
Parabola Shape
A channel defined with a general form parabolic function requires the input of the Height (H), Width (W) and the
quadratic coefficient (a) to the following equation:
y = ax2
876
For natural sections, the engine will automatically insert the required computational sections along the reach by
interpolating a top width versus elevation table that is dynamically built according to the maximum number of input
points that describes either end-section.
Note: The SWMM engine does not support the notion of a natural channel described between two open channels
cross-sections. So, when solving using the SWMM engine, each open channel reach will be modeled using the
upstream section shape. Using a conduit element with an irregular shape will provide computational consistency
between the SWMM and implicit engines.
Related Topics:
Virtual Conduits
User defined conduits can be treated as virtual conduits by setting the Section Type to Virtual. Virtual conduits are not
available in the Conduit Catalog.
In the implicit and explicit solvers, the virtual conduits have length but no diameter/rise and span. In these solvers, the
virtual conduit must have a control structure (e.g. weir, orifice) assigned to it. If a control structure link is imported
from an EPA-SWMM model, a virtual conduit is created with the control structure.
For the GVF solver, virtual conduits can only be used for diversion links. If a control structure is placed on a diversion
link, it will be ignored since the diversion is controlled with the diversion rating table or cutoff value.
When switching between the solvers, it is best to set up two physical alternatives when flow splits are involved. The
one associated with the implicit or explicit solvers will have a control structure while the one with the GVF solvers with
be a diversion link. Both of them can be virtual. It is best to make these links short so that they look like point structures
in profiles.
877
Roughness Models
The Bentley SewerCAD solver uses the Manning's equation to evaluate the friction slope term, Sf , in Equation 11-3:
hydraulic radius
The Mannings n is a user-defined value that introduces the effects of conduit, channel, or gutter roughness. The K that
is actually applied for a segment between two interpolated locations along the computational stream is evaluated by
averaging the K values computed for the two locations.
For more information on the application of this roughness model, see Implementations (on page 879).
878
Implementations
Storm sewer systems are typically designed and constructed for smaller, more frequent storms. Runoff from large, less
frequent events is usually not entirely conveyed by storm sewers; rather, it flows over the land surface in roadways and
in natural and constructed open channels. Therefore storm sewer conveyance networks and surface gutter drainage and
conveyance networks are integrated into a whole urban storm sewer infrastructure system. Bentley SewerCAD is
capable of modeling a complete integrated subsurface storm sewer and surface gutter (channel) drainage system.
Lateral Links
A Bentley modeler has several options for representing incoming tributary flows into a hydraulic network. Especially in
larger models, one advantage to designating the smaller links as laterals is the net decrease in total computational time
of a full network computational run of the GVF solver. When one options to use a lateral link to model either surface
(channel) or piped (conduit) tributary flow, detailed hydraulic calculations are skipped for the link.
The injection point of the lateral flow into the network is modelled with a tap node connection to a carrier pipe
(conduit). In the GVF solvers, the tributary flows modelled in this way are totaled and conservatively enter the network
at the upstream node of the carrier pipe. Another advantage of a lateral link is that the flow addition through a tap node
is a connection type to the carrier pipe that does not split the carrier pipe into multiple hydraulic links.
When employing the EPA-SWMM based solver, lateral flows are inserted into the network at the location of the
corresponding tap node. Only in the case of computed inlet capture at the upstream end of a lateral link, the carrier pipe
must be split at the tap connection into separate hydraulic links. Hydraulic results along the length of the lateral link is
computed in SWMM.
Location of Flows
Although the type of flow is indicative of its origin (for example a rational flow probably comes from a catchment
area), Bentley SewerCAD allows flow to be added from several source locations. Bentley SewerCAD also tracks flows
and flow types as they progress through the system, making it easy to control and observe storm sewer flows.
Flow (and related) results are broken down into different groups in Bentley SewerCAD . The groups are:
System Flows - total flows in the subsurface (conduit) network, on the downstream side of a catch basin, manhole
or transition node. The system flows are equal to the sum of the Local and Upstream flows.
Local Flows - flows that occur at the catch basin where the result is reported. For example the Local Rational Flow
at catch basin is the 'rational flow' (i.e. catchment runoff computed using the Rational Method) generated by
catchments that discharge directly to that catch basin.
Upstream Flows - total flows in the subsurface (conduit) network, on the upstream side of a catch basin, manhole or
transition node.
Intercepted Flows - flows that are intercepted or captured by the inlet at a catch basin node.
Bypass Flows - flows that are not intercepted by the inlet at a catch basin node, and continue on downstream via a
gutter element
Carryover Flows - flows at an inlet that were bypassed, via a gutter, from the inlet upstream.
879
Total Inlet Flows - the sum of the Local and Carryover flows that reach an inlet via the surface network. In other
words, the total flow that reaches an inlet.
In addition, Bentley SewerCAD breaks flows down into different flow types. The types are:
880
881
Although input flow loads such as surface catchment loads and subsurface external loads are only editable for inlets,
calculated loads, such as subsurface total piped load, are computed for all nodes.
882
883
The Simple Average Velocity method does not account for any depth changes between the two ends of the pipe as the
weighted average velocity method does.
Rational Loading
The analysis of storm sewers is usually based on testing the ability of the piping system to appropriately handle peak
flows without flooding roadways or scouring the pipes. The rational method is a popular method for estimating peak
flows, based on the size and runoff coefficient of a watershed, and the intensity of the storm event.
The fundamental rational formula is:
884
Other forms of the rational method are commonly used which incorporate values in different units to make the order of
magnitude of parameters more suitable for hand calculations. For example, the rational formula is often used with
watershed area in acres and rainfall intensity in inches per hour. However, using this formula as-is can result in
common mistakes, such as omitting the required unit conversion from acre- inches per hour to cubic feet per second
(1.008). Conversions such as these are automatically performed within Bentley SewerCAD to give you the most
accurate results possible.
Catchment Areas
A catchment is the geographical area that "catches" the rainfall and directs it towards a common discharge point within
the storm collection network.
Rational Coefficient
The rational C coefficient is the parameter that is the most open to engineering judgment. It is a unitless number
between 0.0 and 1.0 that relates the rate of rainfall over a catchment to the rate of discharge from that catchment. A
value of 0.0 implies that none of the rainfall is discharged from the catchment, while a value of 1.0 implies that all of
the rainfall is immediately discharged from the catchment.
The coefficient is highly dependent on land use and slope approaching 1.0 for impervious ground covers, such as
pavement. For some common C values for various types of land cover and slope, see the Engineer's Reference section
at the end of this appendix.
Composite Catchments
885
Note: Since the rational coefficient is unitless, CA values have units of area. A weighted value for the rational
coefficient can be determined by dividing the catchment's total CA by the total catchment area. Rather than
tracking area and weighted rational coefficients separately, rational loads are often described solely by using the
total CA value. Since the C coefficient and area are multiplied together in the rational formula anyway, there is no
adverse effect of this simplification on flow determination.
Time of Concentration
Some locations within a catchment are hydraulically closer to the discharge point than others. In other words, it may
start raining right now, but it could be several minutes (or even hours) before the water that lands on some parts of the
catchment arrive at the discharge point. Rational method hydrology is based on contributing flow from the entire
catchment area. The time that it takes for water to go from the most hydraulically remote area to reach the discharge
point is the governing time to be used in the Rational Method. This is called the time of concentration.
Note: There are numerous methods for calculating the time of concentration, based on various federal and local
regulations, as well as scientific publications. Although calculation methods vary significantly, they are all based
on similar factors such as ground cover, ground slope, and travel distance.
886
Rainfall Intensity
Rainfall intensity is the measure of how "hard" it is raining. The harder it rains, the higher the intensity. Intensity is
defined as the volume of rainfall that falls for a given time period divided by that time. For any given rainfall storm
event, on average the longer the storm lasts, the lower the overall intensity will be.
This is consistent with what we would intuitively expect. Any given storm may rain hard for a short period of time, but
it builds to that intensity and falls from that intensity over a period of time.
887
Rainfall Tables
Rainfall Equations
Rainfall Tables
Creating rainfall tables is a simple matter of picking values from a set of rainfall curves, and entering them into the
table. For duration values that do not correspond directly to values entered in the table, intensities are linearly
interpolated or extrapolated.
888
Inlet Hydraulics
Bentley SewerCAD considers the following inlet hydraulic principles:
889
E
H
ai
B
= E
ai
+ H
+ H + H
=Initial Access Hole Energy Level. See also: HEC-22 (Third Edition) Entrance Loss (on page 892)
) =Additional loss for benching. See also: HEC-22 (Third Edition) Loss for Benching (on page 892)
H ) =Additional loss for angled inflows. See also: HEC-22 (Third Edition) Loss for Angled Inflow (on page 891)
) = Additional loss for plunging flows. See also: HEC-22 (Third Edition) Loss for Plunging (on page 894)
890
the value of the reported Energy Grade Line (In) ( EGL a ) at the upstream boundary side of the node.
EGL
ai
= Eai + H a
= Initial Access Hole Energy Level. See also: HEC-22 (Third Edition) Entrance Loss (on page 892).
The Total Additional Structure Losses ( H a ) is the combination of all additional structure losses due to benching,
angled inflows, and plunging flows through the structure:
H = H
a
+ H + H
= Additional loss for benching. See also: HEC-22 (Third Edition) Loss for Benching (on page 892)HEC-22
H = Additional loss for angled inflows. See also: HEC-22 (Third Edition) Loss for Angled Inflow (on page 891).
= Additional loss for plunging flows. See also: HEC-22 (Third Edition) Loss for Plunging (on page 894).
E = Relative Entrance Loss (See also: HEC-22 (Third Edition) Entrance Loss (on page 892)).
a
The aggregate coefficient term ( C ) is used in procedural steps for the junction loss at the structure. It is also
secondarily computed for, and reported on, each individual incoming pipe for additional review purposes.
( ) ( )
C = 4.5
Qi
Qo
cos
w
2
891
= C E
B
Ea = Relative Entrance Loss (See also: HEC-22 Third Edition - Entrance Loss (on page 892).
The Third Edition of HEC-22 Manual categorizes five distinct for benching configurations.
Within the calculation option a Bentley user may customize the value of the ( C
benching configuration. The default ( C
For further flexibility, separate ( C
) values are those recommended by Table 7-6 within the HEC-22 manual.
) values may be provided by the user for submerged and unsubmerged conditions.
892
ai
H = E
i
ai
ai
EGL
EGL
ai
E
E
E
aio
ais
aiu
ai
= max (E
aio
,E
ais
,E
aiu
EGL
= EGL + H
i
H = K
i
aio
(V o2)
i
aiu
ais
= D + DI 2
o
893
Q
A
o g Do
aiu
= 1.6A DI 0.67
o
= Discharge Intensity
structure. In fact, Exit Loss results are reported on the incoming pipes themselves.
If the pipe is contributing a plunging inflow to the structure, then the Exit Loss is not computed directly. The loss is
effectively the relative difference between the energy level of the incoming plunging flow ( EGL ) and the
o
previously solved Energy Grade Line (In) that is reported for the structure.
EGL
EGL
= EGL
+ H
In the case that the inflow pipe is not plunging, the Exit Loss ( H ) can be directly be computed.
o
( )
V
H = K
o
o
o 2g
g = Gravity Constant
See also: HEC-22 (Third Edition) Additional Structure Losses (on page 891).
All piped and locally injected inflows to the structure are evaluated to see if plunging conditions exist. If so, and
proportionally, those inflows contribute to the computed additional loss due to plunging ( H ). A piped inflow is
p
894
ai
). (See also:
ai
The additional energy loss contributing to plunging inflows to the structure is the weighted sum of all plunging inflows
to the structure. Generally, a composite plunging inflow coefficient ( C ) is calculated, and then applied against the
p
= C E
p
E = Relative Entrance Loss (See also: HEC-22 (Third Edition) Entrance Loss (on page 892).
a
The coefficient ( C ) is used in the procedural steps for computing the junction loss at the structure. Detailed plunging
p
results are also calculated for each individual inflow pipe into the structure of interest, for reporting reasons.
Cp =
(Q p h p )
Qo
= Plunging Height
hp =
(z p
Eai )
Qo
z = Plunging Elevation
p
895
Inlet Openings
Inlet openings are divided into 4 classifications, as illustrated in the following figure:
896
Inlet Openings
For details on each type of inlet, refer (xxxx reference) to the HEC-22 Manual, Chapter 4 (see Pavement
Drainage-183).
Note: Do not confuse gutter depression and local depression:
The gutter depression is the depression of the gutter relative to the pavement normal cross-slope named a on the figure
below, which shows a gutter and inlet cross section. It is also referred to as a continuously depressed gutter.The local
depression is the depression at the location of the inlet (a in the figure below). It does not exist in the gutter upstream
or downstream of the inlet. It is measured from the gutter slope.
897
a'
a total
Inlets on Grade
Inlets located on a grade (SL > 0) are characterized by an efficiency, E, for a given set of conditions:
Where:
E = Inlet efficiency (unitless)
Q = Total gutter flow (m3/sec, ft3/sec)
Qi = Intercepted flow (m3/sec, ft3/sec)
The flow that is not intercepted is called carryover or bypass flow. It is defined as follows:
Qb = Q - Qi
Where:
Qb = Bypass flow (m3/sec, ft3/sec)
898
899
900
901
Slot Inlet
902
Combination Inlet
HEC-22 distinguishes two cases:
The grate and the curb opening are placed side by side. In this case, the flow interception by the curb opening is
negligible, and the capacity of the combination inlet is identical to that of the grate alone.
The curb opening is extended upstream of the grate in order to intercept debris that could otherwise clog the grate
inlet. The flow intercepted by the combination inlet is calculated as the flow intercepted by the curb opening
upstream of the grate inlet, plus the portion of the remaining flow intercepted by the grate.
Inlets in Sag
Note: Inlets in sag location operate as weirs at low water depth and as orifices at higher depth.
Grate inlets alone are not recommended, as clogging of the grate is likely to occur.
In contrast with inlets on grade, the efficiency of an inlet located in sag is always assumed to be 1.0 (or 100%).
Grate Inlet
The flow Qiw intercepted by a grate inlet operating as a weir is:
903
CW
d1
d2
Qio
The intercepted flow Qi is conservatively calculated at any flow depth by using the lesser of the intercepted flows
computed using the weir or orifice equation:
This accounts for the three stages: weir flow, orifice flow and transitional flow.
Note: The depth of flow over the grate opening could vary significantly with gutter shape and when considering
local depression.
904
Curb Inlet
Curb inlets are divided into 3 categories, based on their throat geometry: horizontal (most common), vertical, and
inclined, as defined in the figure below.
Height of curb-opening
inlet (m, ft)
di
do
905
Weir coefficientvaries
with flow depth and slot
length (typically 1.4 SI,
2.48 U.S. customary)
Orifice Flow
At water depths (measured at the curb) greater than about 0.12 m (0.4 ft), slotted inlets perform as orifices.
The intercepted flow Qio is expressed as:
Qio = 0.8LW(2gd)0.5
W
Transitional Flow
At depths between 0.06 m (measured at the slot from the normal cross slope) and 0.12 m, the flow is in a transition
stage.
The intercepted flow Qi is conservatively calculated in this depth range as:
Qi = min(Qiw, Qio)
906
Perimeter of grate,
disregarding side along curb
(m, ft)
At higher flow depths, both the grate inlet and the curb-opening inlet are operating as orifices.
Note: The clear opening area of the grate depends on the opening ratio of the grate (HEC-22 defines an opening
ratio for each grate type), as well as the clogging factor you specify.
The flow Qio intercepted by the combination inlet operating as an orifice is:
Qio = CoAg(2gd)0.5 + CohL(2gdo)0.5
Co
Orifice coefficient ( C o =
0.67)
Ag
Gravitational acceleration
(9.81 m/sec. 2 , 32.16 ft/sec.
2)
Height of curb-opening
inlet (m, ft)
do
Sweeper Inlet
A sweeper inlet refers to a grate inlet placed at the downstream end of a longer curb opening inlet. A sweeper inlet is
more efficient than an equal length combination inlet in intercepting debris.
Note that since the HEC-22 manual is not very explicit about this type of inlet in sag, some assumptions were made in
order to define the flows for this inlet.
The flow Qi intercepted by a sweeper inlet is the sum of the flow Qie as calculated above for an equal length
combination inlet of length L (where L is the length of the grate) and the flow Qic intercepted by the additional length
L (upstream of the grate) of the curb opening.
Qi = Qie + Qic
907
Transition Flow
At depths between 1.0 and 1.4 times the opening height, the flow is in a transition stage.
This intercepted flow Qi is calculated conservatively in this depth range as:
Qi = min(Qiw, Qio)
Orifice Flow
Weir Flow
908
909
Inlets are designed to have certain drainage capacities, and these capacities play an important role in the interaction
between sewer subsystems and gutter subsystems. There are well-established design procedures to design inlets
based on the design storm data. Once an inlet is set with specific dimensions, its capacity or hydraulic performance
is known. In a Bentley SewerCAD model, the user can optionally input this performance with an inlet capacity
rating curve. You can define the tabular relationship between total catch basin drainage flow and the inlet captured
flow is presented, or a maximum inlet capacity flow amount. The model dynamically determines the inlet flow.
When the inlet capacity is set, the excess water above its capacity will flow in the gutter to a downstream point. The
gutter can also represent an open channel. Bentley SewerCAD lets the user specify the gutter cross section just like
an open channel; it can be a trapezoidal or generic irregular section, and the user would also specify its Mannings
friction coefficient.
The following Gutter Shape Types are defined by HEC-22 methodology: Conventional, Parabolic, V-Shaped, and
Trapezoidal (Median). With the exception of the GVF-Convex solver, these gutter types are supported by each of
our numerical solvers, but differently. HEC-22 Methodology is strictly adhered to for GVF-Rational and Explicit
(SWMM) solvers. However, the Implicit (DW) solver models a gutter link element as channel. Generally,
tcomputed gutter depth and gutter spread at the interface of the gutter and the inlet opening are computed under
assumed uniform flow conditions with the Manning's equation. More specifically, the computed HEC-22 gutter
bypass is used by the Manning's equation to estimate the gutter depth and spread at the inlet.
The gutter link is modeled as a channel in the implicit solver. The channel is internally modeled as a rating table of
<Depth, Width> pairs for every 20% of Maximum Gutter Depth. That is 6 points (including <0,0> and <max gutter
depth value, computed max gutter spread> points). This gutter-as-channel method is used to compute the upstream and
downstream pairs of results: 1) Depth (In) and Spread/Top Width (Start) and 2) Depth (Out) and Spread/Top Width
(Stop). The terms "Spread" and "Top Width" are used interchangeably even though "spread" refers the width of flow in
a gutter, and "top width" is the same measurement but implicitly refers to a channel transect.
This holds true of GVF-Rational, SWMM, and implicit solvers: the software doesn't always compute a Depth and Top
Width/Spread. It will always compute Top Width/Spread and Depth together, that is, if the software can compute the
pair together at the upstream end the it will compute both of them. Otherwise, the software presents N/A for both of
them. At the upstream/start end of gutter link the software computes depth and width of bypass flow in the gutter, right
after inlet interception at the upstream node. If the upstream node of the gutter is a Catch Basin, and a physically
defined HEC-22 type of catalog inlet, then the software computes these 2 results. Otherwise the software does not
attempt to compute them (not having enough physical data to compute them at this time. At the downstream/stop end of
the gutter link element the software will always refer to the gutter depth and gutter spread values at the stop node.
Therefore, the stop node has to be a Catch Basin with a HEC-22 Inlet for these values to be computed and not appear as
N/A.
Conventional Gutters
910
911
912
913
914
where:
Generally for on-grade inlets, spread is iteratively computed. In the case of a V-Shaped gutter, the Sx term considers
the proportion of wet road and gutter surfaces. This is well documented in Example 4-4 on page 4-20 of Hydraulic
Engineering Circular No. 22, Third Edition.
Then V-Shaped gutter depth can be inferred from spread with the following relationship:
d=T*Sx
where:
Conversely, for in sag inlets, the gutter depth is first computed and then the spread.
It should also be noted for V-Shape gutter that its cross sectional gutter flow area is computed geometrically with the
computed on-grade gutter spread. The flow area is used to find the uniform flow velocity at the frontal interface with
the grate inlet opening.
The gutter link is modeled as a channel in the implicit solver. The channel is internally modeled as a rating table of
<Depth, Width> pairs for every 20% of Maximum Gutter Depth. That is 6 points (including <0,0> and <max gutter
915
Flows at Catchbasins
Although the type of flow is indicative of its origin (for example a rational flow probably comes from a catchment
area), the Bentley stormwater products allow flow to be added from several source locations. Bentley SewerCAD also
916
System Flows - total flows in the subsurface (conduit) network, on the downstream side (outlet conduit) of a catch
basin, manhole or transition node. The system flows are equal to the sum of the Local and Upstream flows.
Local Flows - flows that occur at the catch basin inlet where the result is reported. For example the Local Rational
Flow at catch basin is the 'rational flow' (i.e. catchment runoff computed using the Rational Method) generated by
catchments that discharge directly to that catch basin.
Inflow (Collection) - these flows enter at subsurface invert and is treated like carryover flow in the implicit and
explicit sovlers.
Upstream Flows - total flows in the subsurface (conduit) network, on the upstream side of a catch basin, manhole or
transition node.
Intercepted Flows - flows that are intercepted or captured by the inlet at a catch basin node.
Bypass Flows - flows that are not intercepted by the inlet at a catch basin node, and continue on downstream via a
gutter element
Carryover Flows - flows at an inlet that were bypassed, via a gutter, from the inlet upstream.
Total Inlet Flows - the sum of the Local and Carryover flows that reach an inlet via the surface network. In other
words, the total flow that reaches an inlet. It does not include flows that enter the invert from upstream conduits.
In addition, the GVF rational solver from Bentley SewerCAD breaks flows down into different flow types. The types
are:
917
918
Although input flow loads such as surface catchment loads and subsurface external loads are only editable for inlets,
calculated loads, such as subsurface total piped load, are computed for all nodes.
Note: See also: Flow Balance at Junctions-589.
919
920
Known Flow
In order to numerically solve the Saint Venant equations, boundary conditions are needed in the model to provide the
necessary additional equations to form a complete set of equations.
There are two types of hydraulic boundaries:
Hydraulic Boundaries
In order to numerically solve the Saint Venant equations, boundary conditions are needed in the model to provide the
necessary additional equations to form a complete set of equations.
There are two types of hydraulic boundaries:
External Boundaries
External boundaries in a sewer system include outfalls at the downstream ends and very first section at the upstream
ends. For the upstream end boundaries, usually a simple zero flow is used as upstream boundary condition or a flow
time series can be used as upstream boundary condition.
There are a few different boundary conditions users can select for the outfall at the downstream end:
921
A free outfall, which means that the outflow is freely discharged without any anticipated backwater effects. In this
case, the model automatically applies the proper boundary equation, either a normal flow equation or a critical flow
equation, to the outfall boundary based on the dynamic hydraulic condition at the boundary. The normal flow
equation will be used if the flow is in supercritical condition and the critical flow equation will be used if the flow is
subcritical.
In the first three cases, the control elevation h at the downstream boundary (outfall) is determined from the curves at
each time step. It can be replaced by normal or critical flow elevations if it falls below those normal or critical
elevations.
The dynamic model also supports boundary elements, such as ponds or storage nodes, as downstream boundaries even
when there are no further outflow outlets from there. In this case, a storage equation is used as a boundary condition. If
there are no outlets from these boundary elements, then these elements are treated as internal regular elements.
Related Topics:
Internal Boundaries
Along a sewer pipeline, there are hydraulic structures and control devices, such as manholes, weirs, and orifices where
the flow is often rapidly varied rather then gradually varied in space. The Saint-Venant equations are not applicable at
these locations since the gradually varied flow assumption in the Saint-Venant equations derivation is no longer valid.
Instead these locations are treated as hydraulic internal boundaries; usually alternative empirical internal boundary
equations are used for these internal local computational reaches (a computational reach is a link between two
computational sections).
Typical internal boundaries are:
Related Topics:
922
Manholes
Manholes are the most common internal boundaries. Hydraulically they represent significant changes in many
properties such as bottom slope, boundary roughness, and cross section shape. They may have different vertical and
horizontal alignments, such as drop manhole or perched manhole. As a consequence of these significant hydraulic
property changes, the dynamic hydraulic conditions in manholes and junctions are very complicated and modeling
these conditions is one of the most challenging aspects in dynamic modeling.
Usually a manhole has a storage area and may have open access to ground surface (the user would be able to set a
manhole as bolted so that the access to the ground is turned off). CivilStorms dynamic model applies a manhole
storage equation (a form of continuity equation) as one of the internal boundary equations. When the water elevation is
above the ground rim elevation, additional street storage and street flooding may occur. For more information about
flooding, see Flooding (on page 860).
Related Topics:
Standard loss method - a user-defined loss coefficient is used to calculate the head loss based on the velocity head
of the exit conduit. The standard method calculates structure headloss based on the exit pipe's velocity. The exit
velocity head is multiplied by a user-entered coefficient to determine the loss.
For numerical stability reason an empirical velocity filter is used when the velocity is larger than 5.0 ft/s as follows:
v = 5.0 + 0.1*(v -5.0)
in which v is the velocity applied to the head loss equation and v is the original velocity.
Absolute loss method - a user-defined loss amount (relative change in elevation) is used as the head loss.
HEC-22 Energy (Second Edition) method - a procedure of calculating the junction head loss specified in Hydraulic
Engineering Circular No. 22 (HEC-22) Second Edition manual is used to calculate the head loss. See HEC-22
Junction Energy Loss Method-354 (on page 924).
HEC-22 Energy (Third Edition) method - a procedure of calculating the junction head loss specified in Hydraulic
Engineering Circular No. 22, (HEC-22), Third Edition manual is used to calculate the head loss. See HEC-22
Junction Energy Loss Method-354 (on page 924).
Generic loss method - a user defined loss coefficient is used to calculate the head loss based on the velocity head
difference between entry and exit conduits. The loss will be set as zero if the value given by the equation is
negative.
923
When Addition of Entrance Loss Results in Flooding: If the Entrance Loss raises hydraulic grade above the nonbolted rim elevation of the node, entrance loss is reported as the difference between the outflow pipe's HGL In and
the node's rim elevation. The sum of total additional structure losses is reported as zero. The individual values for
loss due to benching, plunging, and angled inflow are reported as N/A, because they cannot be reported accurately.
All of the connected upstream pipes will report zero exit loss so that these incoming pipes can report their HGL
(down) value as equal to the node's rim elevation.
When Addition of Additional Structure Losses Results in Flooding: If the addition of 'total additional structure
losses' raises the node's hydraulic grade to above its non-bolted rim elevation, then the 'total additional structure
losses' is reported as the difference of rim elevation - (outflow pipe's Upstream HGL + exit loss). The individual
values for loss due to benching, plunging, and angled inflow remain unchanged, so the user can validate the sum of
these results relative to rim elevation. All of the connected upstream pipes will report zero exit loss so that these
incoming pipes can report their HGL (down) value as equal to node's rim elevation.
Addition of Exit Loss Results in Flooding: If the Exit Loss raises hydraulic grade above the non-bolted rim
elevation of the node, exit loss is reported as the difference in the nodes rim elevation and the nodes HGL (In).
Exit Loss is computed at the downstream of each incoming pipe into a HEC-22 3rd Edition node. The HGL (down)
on an incoming pipe is computed as the sum of HGL (In) at the downstream node and Exit Loss.
Related Topics:
Minor Losses
Minor losses in pressure pipes are caused by localized areas of increased turbulence that create a drop in the energy and
hydraulic grades at that point in the system. The magnitude of these losses is dependent primarily upon the shape of the
fitting, which directly affects the flow lines in the pipe.
924
hm
Gravitational acceleration
constant (m/s2, ft/s2)
Typical values for the fitting loss coefficient are included in the Fittings Table at the end of this chapter.
Generally speaking, more gradual transitions create smoother flow lines and smaller headlosses. For example, the
figure below shows the effects of a radius on typical pipe entrance flow lines.
Related Topics:
925
Related Topics:
Weirs
Weirs are classified by their flow-diversion purpose as either a side weir or a transverse weir, as described in the
following definitions:
Side weirs or overflow weirs are used to divert extra high flows to overflow waterways. Typically a side weir is a
weir parallel to the main sewer pipe and with enough high crest elevation to prevent any discharge of dry-weather
flow, but it is also low and long enough to discharge required excess of wet weather flow. Weirs in an outlet of a
detention pond can be treated as one of the control elements in the composite outlet control structure. Another
example of a side weir is the emergency overflow weir or spillway at the top of a detention pond. Side weirs are
only used to model flow splits in the implicit or explicit solvers. In the GVF based solvers, flow splits should be
modeled using diversions or a user notification will be issued when the model is run.
Transverse weirs or inline weirs are typically placed directly cross the sewer pipe, perpendicular to the sewer flow
and act like a small dam, to direct the low flow, usually dry weather flow, to diversion pipe such as dry weather
flow interceptor sewer pipe.
Weirs are also classified by their cross section shapes, such as rectangular, V-notch, trapezoidal, and irregular.
Accordingly the computational equations for the weirs are different, the discharge through a rectangular weir is
proportional to the 1.5 exponent of the head above the weir crest, and the exponent for the V-notch weir becomes 2.5.
Bentley SewerCAD users need to specify the weir discharge coefficient. Typically a weir discharge coefficient ranges
between 2.65 and 3.10 (English units). Since the weirs in a sewer system are mostly sharp-crested weirs, a value of 3.0
is a common default assumption without knowing the weir specifics and hydraulic conditions.
Weirs can occur in models either as control structures in conduits or in pond outlet elements. The properties of weirs
are set in the Components under Conduit Control Structures or Composite Outlet Structures. Once they have been
defined, they can be assigned to individual conduit or pond outlet elements.
There are three types of in-line weirs:
926
weir length, L
effective head, L
weir coefficient
The weir coefficient can be further given (for weirs stretching across the channel) by:
927
gravity
be
He
Cv
Note: The weir coefficient required by the program is the C coefficient, not Cv.
Trapezoidal Weir
Where:
Q = flow
L = crest length
h = head above weir
C = weir coefficient
Cs = weir coefficient for the side section
The following illustration assumes that the trapezoidal weir is equivalent to a rectangular channel and a V-notch weir.
928
Side Weir
929
The flow and head for a side weir are determined as:
Q = C L h5/3
The units on the weir discharge coefficient are ft1/3/s when flow is in cfs, and L and h are in ft.
Orifices
Orifices are usually circular or rectangular openings in the wall of a tank or in a plate normal to the axis of the conduit.
Orifices can be oriented in a variety of ways, such as side outlet or bottom outlet. Bentley SewerCAD can also treat an
orifice as one of the controlling elements in a detention pond composite control structure; other controlling elements
within a composite control structure include weirs, risers and culverts.
Orifices are treated the same as weirs to be internal boundaries except that the flow equation of an orifice is used to
calculate the discharge. There are different flow conditions in an orifice and the calculation of the discharge through the
orifice is different:
The discharge through the orifice is proportional to the 0.5 exponent of the head if the orifice is fully submerged.
A weir equation is usually used for unsubmerged conditions of the orifice.
Special treatment is necessary for a smooth transition between unsubmerged and submerged conditions due to the
calculating equation switch.
The orifice discharge coefficients typically range between 0.6 and 0.7 (English units). Without knowing the orifice
specifics, a default value of 0.65 is commonly used.
Related Topics:
930
Rating Curves
Another generic control structure can be a rating curve in which a tabular relationship of discharge and head (or
elevation) for the structure is prepared offline in advance by the user, then assigned to a weir or orifice by simply
specifying that a rating curve is used. In this case, the model uses this rating curve to calculate the discharge at any time
base on the dynamic head.
In general, a rating curve table can be used for any internal control structure to represent its flow-head relationship if
there are no anticipated backwater effects. A single-valued-rating-curve can not be used in cases where there are
backwater effects since the rating curves assumes no such backwater effects.
Related Topics:
Culverts
Culverts are common hydraulic elements in a sewer system. There can be stand-alone culverts under highway
embankments or conduit vaults in detention pond outlet structures. In Bentley SewerCAD , a culvert can be a conduit
specified as a culvert or one of controlling elements in a composite control structure. Since a culvert is a type of
hydraulic structure that transports water as full or partially full, culvert hydraulics is more complicated than other
control structures.
Conduits can be treated as culverts if the "Is culvert?" property is set to True. This can only be done for box and
circular conduits.
Hydraulically a culvert can be under inlet control or outlet control conditions. The computational procedures for these
conditions are very different:
Inlet control - A culvert is under inlet control if the culvert barrel hydraulic capacity is higher than that of the inlet
(entrance) and there is no backwater from downstream. In this condition, the relationship of flow and headwater is
mainly dependent on the inlet configurations.
Outlet control - A culvert is under outlet control when the culvert barrel is not capable of conveying as much flow
as the inlet opening will accept. When the culvert is under outlet control, the flow will depend not only on the
headwater but also the tailwater.
EQT curves - Dynamic culvert conditions are complicated in that the flow can change from inlet control to outlet
control or vice versa. As a result of this complexity, the computation of culverts can be tedious. In Bentley
SewerCAD , a sophisticated procedure has been developed to build up a comprehensive EQT data set for any
culvert configuration. The EQT represents the headwater (E), flow (Q), and tailwater (T) tabular curves in the way it
covers all possible operating ranges of the headwater and tailwater so that any hydraulic conditions are accounted
for by the EQT. The Bentley SewerCAD dynamic engine builds the EQT for every culvert and uses the EQT for
culvert computation dynamically at any time step.
Note: Conduits can be treated as culverts if the "Is culvert?" property is set to True. This can only be Done for box
and circular conduits.
Related Topics:
931
Tap Connections
The injection point of a lateral inflow into the hydraulic network can be modelled with Lateral link connected to a
Conduit via Tap node. A Tap is a non-splitting connection type to its referenced Conduit. With the elevation and invert
options available on both the upstream connected Lateral and the Tap itself, it is possible to model the vertical drop of a
lateral connection. However the head loss through a plunging tributary surface or sub-surface flow is not simulated.
Minor loss or junction loss through a tap connection cannot be modeled or computed.
A tap node can also be considered an internal hydraulic boundary in the model because the hydraulic conditions are not
computed upstream of the tap. Within the GVF solvers, and similar to virtually-shaped sections, computational time is
saved by not performing gradually varied flow analysis through the lateral links. Also, travel time is not accrued for a
lateral rational flow until it reaches the boundary of the tap connection.
932
Rectangular Weirs
In Bentley SewerCAD , a rectangular weir is characterized by two equations: suppressed and contracted.
Suppressed weirs prevent the contraction of the flow through the weir and hence the associated losses. These types of
weirs are usually, but not solely, associated with broad crested weirs, and are defined by the following equation:
length (ft, m)
head (ft, m)
Flow over a contracted weir does contract as it goes over the crest of the weir. These types of weirs are often associated
with the sharp crested types of weirs, and are defined by the following equation:
length (ft, m)
head (ft, m)
Note: For most rectangular weirs at ponds, C is usually 3.2 (US Customary units; for SI units, C is usually 1.8).
Related Topics
V-Notch Weirs
V-Notch weirs are defined in Bentley SewerCAD by the following equation:
933
coefficient of discharge
(US, SI forms)
gravitational constant
H is measured from the water level to the bottom crest of the weir.
Related Topics
Irregular Weirs
Whenever the culvert headwater begins to rise above the minimum elevation of the roadway, overtopping will occur.
The weir x-y structure can be used to model overtopping.
Overtopping flow is modeled as a special type of weir flow expressed by the general broad-crested weir equation.
Note: Do not use the irregular structure to model an overflow channel. The equations which define the irregular
weir are different then channel equations and would result in significantly different flows.
Broad-Crested Weir
A broad-crested weir has a crest that extends horizontally in the direction of flow far enough to support the nappe (sheet
of water flowing over the crest of the weir) so that hydrostatic pressures are fully developed for at least some short
distance.
In order to model Embankment or Roadway overtopping, the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) has developed
a methodology that can be found in the manual FHWA, HDS No. 5, Hydraulic Design of Highway Culverts, 1985,
which uses the general broad-crested weir equation.
equation_FMWTheory_083.eps
934
Cd
Weir coefficient
Hr
Broad-Crested Weir
The overtopping discharge coefficient Cd is a function of the submergence using the equation:
equation_FMWTheory_084.eps
The variables Kt and Cr are defined in the following figures, reproduced from the manual (xxxx reference) FHWA,
HDS No.5, Hydraulic Design of Highway Culverts, 1985. The first two figures are used by Bentley SewerCAD to
derive the base weir coefficient Cr resulting from deep and shallow overtopping, respectively. The submergence
correction Kt is determined implicitly using the third figure.
935
936
Submergence Factor, k
Related Topics
Riser Structures
Risers are represented as a single opening at some elevation above the invert of the pond. The flow from the riser is
then controlled by the flow through the downstream conduit of the pond outlet with which the riser is associated.
A riser can be represented as either a stand pipe or a inlet box. The only distinction between the two is essentially the
open area and perimeter of the opening. In other words, the area and perimeter for a stand pipe are determined from the
input diameter, while the area and perimeter for an inlet box are input directly.
Related Topics
937
Weir Stage
As the pond stage begins to go over the riser crest elevation, flow into the riser acts like a weir with the perimeter of the
opening being the weir length. The following equation dictates the flow into the riser for low pond stages relative to the
crest elevation.
Related Topics
Orifice Stage
As the pond stage rises relative the crest elevation, the riser will then act like an orifice, and the flow is defined by the
following equation.
938
Orifices
There are two types of orifices that are associated with a pond outlets complex outlet structure:
Circular
Orifice area
939
The orifice head, H, is measured as the difference between the water surface elevation and the greater of the center
elevation of the circular orifice or the controlling tailwater elevation.
By inspection it can be seen that the equation is mathematically invalid whenever H is less than zero (i.e., the water
surface is below the centroid during unsubmerged conditions).
Also, for the equation to be applied correctly, assume that the flow area must be fully submerged.
Related Topics
940
unsubmerged discharge
Qt
full discharge at H t
Hu
unsubmerged head
Ht
Heads are measured from the opening invert or from the controlling tailwater, whichever is greater.
Related Topics
Orifice Orientation
Bentley SewerCAD supports modeling area-based orifice openings which are aligned horizontally and vertically,
expressed as oriented parallel or perpendicular to flow direction, respectively. Orifices which are oriented parallel to
flow do not require a datum input (since it is assumed to be equal to the opening invert).
In Bentley SewerCAD , circular orifices are all oriented perpendicular to flow. To model an opening oriented parallel
with flow, use the Orifice-Area option, or a Stand Pipe.
Related Topics
Pumps
Pump Definition Types
There are numerous types of pump definitions in Bentley storm and sanitary sewer models. These are described below.
These pump definitions are established by the user using Components > Pump Definitions. The user can assign these
definitions to any pump elements. Pump definitions contain the pump curves describing pump performance. The only
curves that are mandatory are the pump head curves. Efficiency and motor curves are only used in Bentley water
models.
Some of the definitions are used only in the implicit and explicit dynamic wave solvers while others are only used in
the pressure portion of the GVF-convex solver. The only definition type that is common to all solvers is the Multipoint
pump head curve.
The pump definition dialog is show below and is described in detail in Pump Definitions Dialog Box-181.
941
The individual pump definitions are described below. The suffixes (GVF or DW) indicate whether they are used in the
GVF-convex solver or implicit or explicit dynamic wave solvers.
Volume vs Flow - DW
This pump definition type is best suited for pumps which have either wet wells or ponds as the source element. The
curve relates the volume of water in the source element to the outflow of the pump station. As the volume increases, the
discharge increases.
Depth vs Flow - DW
This pump definition type simply relates the depth of flow of the source element to the outflow of the pump. As the
depth increase, the discharge increases incrementally.
Multipoint - DW and GVF
This is the most standard pump definition type. It relates the head difference between the upstream and downstream
nodes to the discharge of the pump. As the head difference increases, the amount of discharge decreases.
Depth-Flow (Variable Speed) - DW
This pump definition type also relates the depth of the source node to the discharge of the pump. As the depth
increases, the discharge increases continuously.
Constant Power - GVF
When selecting a Constant Power pump, the following attribute must be defined:
Pump Power-Represents the water horsepower, or horsepower that is actually transferred from the pump to the
water. Depending on the pump's efficiency, the actual power consumed (brake horsepower) may vary with flow but
is not accounted for in this type of pump definition.
942
Shutoff - Point at which the pump will have zero discharge. It is typically the maximum head point on a pump
curve.
Design - Point at which the pump was originally intended to operate. It is typically the best efficiency point (BEP)
of the pump. At discharges above or below this point, the pump is not operating under optimum conditions.
Max Operating - Highest discharge for which the pump is actually intended to run. At discharges above this point,
the pump may behave unpredictably, or its performance may decline rapidly.
Shutoff - Point at which the pump will have zero discharge. It is typically the maximum head point on a pump
curve.
Design - Point at which the pump was originally intended to operate. It is typically the best efficiency point (BEP)
of the pump. At discharges above or below this point, the pump is not operating under optimum conditions.
Max Operating - Highest discharge for which the pump is actually intended to run. At discharges above this point,
the pump may behave unpredictably, or its performance may decline rapidly.
Max Extended - Absolute maximum discharge at which the pump can operate, adding zero head to the system. This
value may be computed by the program, or entered as a custom extended point. This value is automatically
calculated for Standard Extended pumps.
Shutoff - Point at which the pump will have zero discharge. It is typically the maximum head point on a pump
curve.
Design - Point at which the pump was originally intended to operate. It is typically the best efficiency point (BEP)
of the pump. At discharges above or below this point, the pump is not operating under optimum conditions.
Max Operating - Highest discharge for which the pump is actually intended to run. At discharges above this point,
the pump may behave unpredictably, or its performance may decline rapidly.
Max Extended - Absolute maximum discharge at which the pump can operate, adding zero head to the system. This
value may be computed by the program, or entered as a custom extended point.
Storage Elements
This section describes how the following volume/storage elements in Bentley SewerCAD are defined:
Wet Wells
The Wet Well volume can be determined by one of the following ways:
943
Depth-Area Curve
Constant area - Circular
Constant area - Non-Circular
Area Function
Variable Volume
Depth-Area Curve
This option allows for the modeling of an irregular shaped volume associated with the wet well. The curve is then
translated to volumes using conic sections.
Constant Area
Sets up the volume using with a constant cross sectional area. The volume is analogous to a cylinder.
Area Function
The Area is determined based on the following function which calculates the surface area for a given depth.
Area
Coeff
Depth
Exp
Constant
Related Topics
Ponds
Pond volumes are defined one of four ways:
Elevation-Area Curve
Elevation-Volume Curve
Functional
Pipe Volume
944
Area
Coeff
Depth
Exp
Constant
Pipe Volume
The Pipe Volume option supports modeling horizontal, vertical, or sloped pipes. Typically, the upsized pipes are
significantly larger than would be required to simply convey the runoff from the site. For this reason upsized pipes will
be terminated by an orifice or small diameter pipe stub which will provide the necessary peak discharge control.
The Pipe option automatically generates the cumulative volume rating table needed for the simulation. It should be
emphasized that in upsized pipe systems the assumption is that the water surface elevation in the upsized pipe is taken
to be level. This means that inflow into the upstream end of the pipe is immediately translated to the downstream end of
the pipe - the standard detention routing assumption.
Related Topics
945
SWMM Hydrology
Bentley Hydrology
When SWMM hydrology is used, the catchment runoff method is set to EPA-SWMM Runoff and a loss method must
be provided. If the SWMM-RTK method is used, no loss method is required and the runoff appears at a manhole node
rather than at a catchment [link SWMM RTK Unit Hydrograph Dialog Box].
When Bentley hydrology is used, the user must first select a hydrograph method which can include Unit Hydrograph,
Modified Ration Method [modified rational method] or User Defined Hydrograph [Runoff hydrograph]. If Unit
Hydrograph method [unit hydrograph methodology] is selected, the user must select one of the Unit Hydrograph types:
the SCS [Soil Conservation Service], RTK [RTK method] or Generic Unit Hydrograph [Generic unit hydrographs].
The SCS and Generic unit hydrograph methods require a loss method (fLoss, Green-Ampt, Horton, or SCS-CN. For
most of the hydrograph methods, storm data is needed in the form of a hyetograph (precipitation vs. time). The
exception is the modified rational method which is driven from IDF storm data [Storm Data and Runoff Methods].
It is also very important to be aware of whether the flow being calculated are to be used as runoff in a stormwater or
combined sewer model or the wet weather inflow/infiltration to a sanitary sewer model. In general, EPA-SWMM and
SCS methods are better for surface runoff while RTK method tend to be preferred for sanitary sewer I&I although a
calibrated generic unit hydrograph is also acceptable.
Catchment hydrology information is stored in the Hydrology Alternative. Storm data is entered under Components >
Storm Data and is stored in the Rainfall-Runoff Alternative.
An outline of the available hydrologic method is given below
Single flow
Hydrograph
Catchment SWMM runoff
SWMM node RTK
Unit Hydrograph
SCS
RTK
Generic
Modified rational
User define hydrograph
946
Hydrograph Methods
In virtually all cases except a sanitary sewer system with no wet weather inflows, it is necessary to directly enter wet
weather flow or perform some type of hydrologic calculation to convert precipitation (or snow melt) into a flow rate.
Methods can be described based on how they handle time, whether they apply to nodes, links or catchments, and
whether they are based on SWMM or Bentley hydrology methods.
The first modeling decision is whether the analysis is to be conducted over time and needs a hydrograph or if it will be
a peak flow analysis using the rational method or a fixed flow.
Calculations for a single flow rate are performed using the rational method [rational method link] in the GVF-rational
solver. Steady flows can be specified as a known flow [known flow link], inflow at any node [inflow help] or in the
GVF-convex solver as an infiltration on a conduit [infiltration help].
The user can directly input a hydrograph at any node [inflow collection dialog box] or in the case of the GVF-convex
solver, along any conduit. These values are independent of and supplemental to precipitation.
To convert precipitation hyetographs into surface flow for a catchment, a variety of hydrologic methods are provide.
Methods to calculate hydrographs can be divided into two categories
SWMM Hydrology
Bentley Hydrology
When SWMM hydrology is used, the catchment runoff method is set to EPA-SWMM Runoff and a loss method must
be provided. If the SWMM-RTK method is used, no loss method is required and the runoff appears at a manhole node
rather than at a catchment [link SWMM RTK Unit Hydrograph Dialog Box].
When Bentley hydrology is used, the user must first select a hydrograph method which can include Unit Hydrograph,
Modified Ration Method [modified rational method] or User Defined Hydrograph [Runoff hydrograph]. If Unit
Hydrograph method [unit hydrograph methodology] is selected, the user must select one of the Unit Hydrograph types:
the SCS [Soil Conservation Service], RTK [RTK method] or Generic Unit Hydrograph [Generic unit hydrographs].
The SCS and Generic unit hydrograph methods require a loss method (fLoss, Green-Ampt, Horton, or SCS-CN. For
most of the hydrograph methods, storm data is needed in the form of a hyetograph (precipitation vs. time). The
exception is the modified rational method which is driven from IDF storm data [Storm Data and Runoff Methods].
It is also very important to be aware of whether the flow being calculated are to be used as runoff in a stormwater or
combined sewer model or the wet weather inflow/infiltration to a sanitary sewer model. In general, EPA-SWMM and
SCS methods are better for surface runoff while RTK method tend to be preferred for sanitary sewer I&I although a
calibrated generic unit hydrograph is also acceptable.
Catchment hydrology information is stored in the Hydrology Alternative. Storm data is entered under Components >
Storm Data and is stored in the Rainfall-Runoff Alternative.
An outline of the available hydrologic method is given below
Single flow
947
Rational
Node inflow
Conduit infiltration
Known flow
Hydrograph
User defined hydrograph (conduit, catchment or node)
SWMM hydrology
Catchment SWMM runoff
SWMM node RTK
Rainfall
Bentley SewerCAD considers rainfall in terms of:
Design Storms
Bentley SewerCAD design storms include:
The I-D-F table method uses a table of duration versus intensity values to describe rainfall events of a particular
frequency (return period).
The e, b, d coefficients method uses a collection of three coefficients (e, b, d) to define a mathematical relationship
between the rainfall intensity and the duration of the rainfall event for a given frequency.
948
I-D-F Data
Intensity-duration-frequency (I-D-F) data includes:
I-D-F Curves
Note: The rainfall intensities that are used with the Rational method are generally determined by regulatory
agencies. Historical rainfall information is analyzed and compiled into I-D-F curves based on the frequency of the
storm data. These curves give the engineer a quick reference to determine the intensity of rainfall that occurs at
given return periods.
I-D-F (Intensity-Duration-Frequency) curves provide the engineer with a way of determining the rainfall intensity for a
given storm frequency and duration.
Reading an I-D-F Curve
800IDFcurve001.wmf
For example, a 5-year frequency, the resulting average intensity is 5 inches an hour for 12 minutes. In other words, if an
average intensity of 5 inches/hour falls for a period lasting 12 minutes, it would be considered a 5-year event.
949
I-D-F Curve
I-D-F Tables
Bentley SewerCAD lets you enter I-D-F data into a table and saves the data so you may use it again for other projects.
Entering the design intensities is a very simple process of looking up data from a graph and entering it into the I-D-F
Table.
950
Related Topics:
I-D-F e, b, d Equation
I-D-F curves can be fit to equations. The most common form of these equations is:
e, b, d
rainfall equation
coefficients
951
Rainfall Curves
Rainfall curves fall into two categories:
Related Topics:
800gauged_rainfall004.wmf
800conditions_two_storms005.wmf
800comparison_two_storms006.wmf
800hydrographs_two_storms007.wmf
A rainfall curve is the measure of total rainfall depth as it varies throughout a gauged storm. A good way to understand
a rainfall curve is to visualize the Y-axis as a rainfall gauge (see Gauged Rainfall Event-390). As the storm
progresses, the gauge begins to fill. The curve describes the gauged rainfall depth at each point during the storm.
A steeper slope on the curve indicates the gauge is filling faster than it would for a less-steep curve; hence, the rate of
rainfall is more intense. The most intense portion of the storm occurs between 0.1 and 0.2 hours and again between 0.5
and 0.6 hours (about 0.6 inches over 0.1 hour = 6 inches-per-hour intensity).
952
953
954
Synthetic Rainfall Distributions (on page 956)Synthetic Rainfall Distributions on page 5-394
Rainfall Tables
Rainfall hydrographs can be represented by tables. The table relates the cumulative rainfall depth to the time from the
beginning of a storm. The following table is an example of a time versus depth rainfall table developed from data taken
from a recording rain gauge.
Time versus Depth
Time (hr.)
0.0
0.00
0.3
0.37
0.6
0.87
0.9
1.40
1.2
1.89
1.5
2.24
955
1.8
2.48
2.1
2.63
2.4
2.70
2.7
2.70
3.0
2.70
3.3
2.71
3.6
2.77
3.9
2.91
4.2
3.20
4.5
3.62
4.8
4.08
5.1x
4.43
5.4
4.70
5.7
4.90
6.0
5.00
Dimensionless DepthThe Y-axis for these distributions range from 0.0 to 1.0 (0% to 100%) of total rainfall depth.
The total storm duration is defined on the X-axis, in units of time.
Dimensionless Depth and TimeThese are similar to dimensionless depth curves, except that the X-axis is also
dimensionless.
Related Topics:
Gauged (Time versus Depth) (on page 952)Gauged (Time versus Depth) on page 5-389
Dimensionless Depth: SCS Distributions (on page 957)Dimensionless Depth: SCS Distributions on page 5-395
Modeling Storms with SCS Distributions (on page 958)Modeling Storms with SCS Distributions on page 5-397
Dimensionless Depth and Time (on page 959)Dimensionless Depth and Time on page 5-398
Synthetic Rainfall Tables (on page 961)Synthetic Rainfall Tables on page 5-400
956
800dimensionless_SCS_010.wmf
800rainfall_distribution_boundaries020.emf
The SCS 24-hr. rainfall distributions are classic examples of dimensionless depth rainfall distributions. The Y-axis is
dimensionless so that different rainfall depths can be applied to the distributions to create rainfall curves for various
storm magnitudes and geographic locations.
The following figure displays four SCS distributions used in the United States (Types I, IA, II, and III).
957
Approximate Boundaries
Related Topics:
Modeling Storms with SCS Distributions (on page 958)Modeling Storms with SCS Distributions on page 5-397
Dimensionless Depth and Time (on page 959)Dimensionless Depth and Time on page 5-398
Synthetic Rainfall Tables (on page 961)Synthetic Rainfall Tables on page 5-400
800SCS_dist_p31_012.wmf
To create a design rainfall curve, multiply the Y-axis by the 24-hour total rainfall depth. The following figure shows
what each distribution looks like when applied to a 24-hour total depth of 3.1 inches. Differences in storm magnitude
and geographic variations can be modeled by changing the total rainfall depth on the Y-axis.
958
Dimensionless Depth: SCS Distributions (on page 957)Dimensionless Depth: SCS Distributions on page 5-395
Dimensionless Depth and Time (on page 959)Dimensionless Depth and Time on page 5-398
Synthetic Rainfall Tables (on page 961)Synthetic Rainfall Tables on page 5-400
800dimensionless_time_depth015.wmf
These rainfall curve distributions are typically developed based on statistical analyses of storm data for different
durations. When developed properly for a specific location, these types of rainfall distributions provide the flexibility of
modeling a variety of storms other than the standard 24-hour event.
The basic philosophy of this approach is that longer-duration storms are expected to behave differently than shorterduration storms. For example, the most intense portion of a 24-hour storm is expected to differ from the most intense
portion of a 1-hour storm.
Typically, these types of curves are dimensionless on both the X and Y axes, so they can be applied to a wide range of
durations and rainfall depths. The following graph displays dimensionless rainfall curves established for different
ranges of durations. To create a rainfall depth curve, select the curve for the desired duration. Then, multiply the X-axis
by total storm duration and multiply the Y-axis by the total rainfall depth for that given duration.
959
Example: Dimensionless Time and Depth Curves (on page 960)Example: Dimensionless Time and Depth
Curves on page 5-399
Dimensionless Depth: SCS Distributions (on page 957)Dimensionless Depth: SCS Distributions on page 5-395
Modeling Storms with SCS Distributions (on page 958)Modeling Storms with SCS Distributions on page 5-397
Synthetic Rainfall Tables (on page 961)Synthetic Rainfall Tables on page 5-400
960
Solution to Example
The figure displays the results of this example. Different curve types (A, B and C from the previous graph) were used
to model different duration storms. Note how the total depth increases, but overall intensity (slope of the curve)
decreases as the duration is lengthened.
Dimensionless Depth: SCS Distributions (on page 957)Dimensionless Depth: SCS Distributions on page 5-395
Modeling Storms with SCS Distributions (on page 958)Modeling Storms with SCS Distributions on page 5-397
Dimensionless Depth and Time (on page 959)Dimensionless Depth and Time on page 5-398
Bulletins 70/71
The following sections describe the use of the data used in rainfall tables:
961
Related Topics:
Rainfall Time-Distribution Information (on page 962)Rainfall Time-Distribution Information on page 5-401
Watershed Area (on page 962)Watershed Area on page 5-402
Rainfall Duration (on page 963)Rainfall Duration on page 5-403
Data Sources (on page 963)Data Sources on page 5-403
Data Format (on page 964)Data Format on page 5-404
Bulletin 70/71 Data (on page 964)Bulletin 70/71 Data on page 5-405
Circular 173 Data (on page 965)Circular 173 Data on page 5-405
Watershed Area
Time-distribution curves vary with the watershed area. Three time distribution types have been presented here
depending on the watershed size:
The curves presented here are applicable only for relatively small watersheds (area less than or equal to 400 square
miles).
Related Topics:
Rainfall Time-Distribution Information (on page 962)Rainfall Time-Distribution Information on page 5-401
Rainfall Duration (on page 963)Rainfall Duration on page 5-403
Data Sources (on page 963)Data Sources on page 5-403
Data Format (on page 964)Data Format on page 5-404
962
Bulletin 70/71 Data (on page 964)Bulletin 70/71 Data on page 5-405
Circular 173 Data (on page 965)Circular 173 Data on page 5-405
Rainfall Duration
Storms with durations of 6 hours or less tend to be associated more often with first-quartile distributions, and those
lasting more than 6 hours and less than or equal to 12 hours are most commonly the second-quartile type. Storms
having durations longer than 12 and less than or equal to 24 hours most commonly follow the third-quartile
distribution. Storms with a duration longer than 24 hours are most frequently associated with the fourth-quartile
distributions. However, a particular storm from any duration may be associated with any of the four quartile types.
We recommend the use of the most common quartile for the design storms. A design storm with a duration less than or
equal to 6 hours should be a first-quartile type storm. The second quartile type design storms should be used for
durations longer than 6 and up to 12 hours. For storms longer than 12 hours in duration and less than or equal to 24
hours, we recommend the use of the third-quartile time distribution. Finally, design storms longer in duration than 24
hours should be modeled using the fourth quartile type.
Related Topics:
Rainfall Time-Distribution Information (on page 962)Rainfall Time-Distribution Information on page 5-401
Watershed Area (on page 962)Watershed Area on page 5-402
Data Sources (on page 963)Data Sources on page 5-403
Data Format (on page 964)Data Format on page 5-404
Bulletin 70/71 Data (on page 964)Bulletin 70/71 Data on page 5-405
Circular 173 Data (on page 965)Circular 173 Data on page 5-405
Data Sources
Used 5% and 1% here instead of spelling out because the precision 0.01% cannot be spelled out, the concept is
scientific, and for consistency.
The rainfall time-distribution data given here are obtained from Circular 173 (Huff 1990). Wherever the tabular data
was available in Circular 173 it was used to develop rainfall tables. However, tabular data in Circular 173 is given only
for every 5% of the time distribution. The tables available in the engineering catalogs give data for every 1% of the
rainfall time duration. The data in between tabular values have been obtained from the figures in Circular 173. Due to
the interpolation procedure used to develop graphs, a slight discordance between tables and figures occurs in the tails of
the distributions. Where this was the case, higher precedence was given to the tabular data.
Additional differences between the data presented here and the Circular 173 tables comes from the precision used in
Circular 173. While Circular 173 rounds the data to the first 1%, the data presented in the Bentley SewerCAD
engineering libraries has a precision of 0.01%. However, due to the statistical nature of the data presented, these
differences are negligible.
Related Topics:
Rainfall Time-Distribution Information (on page 962)Rainfall Time-Distribution Information on page 5-401
Watershed Area (on page 962)Watershed Area on page 5-402
Rainfall Duration (on page 963)Rainfall Duration on page 5-403
Data Format (on page 964)Data Format on page 5-404
Bulletin 70/71 Data (on page 964)Bulletin 70/71 Data on page 5-405
Circular 173 Data (on page 965)Circular 173 Data on page 5-405
963
Data Format
Data presented here is reported in dimensionless (fractional) distributions both in time and rainfall depth space. The
temporal axes starts at 0.0 and ends at 1.0 with a time step of 0.01. Duration Multipliers should be used in Bentley
SewerCAD to convert the dimensionless time to the desired rainstorm duration.
Quartile distributions are identified using the following notation:
Related Topics:
Rainfall Time-Distribution Information (on page 962)Rainfall Time-Distribution Information on page 5-401
Watershed Area (on page 962)Watershed Area on page 5-402
Rainfall Duration (on page 963)Rainfall Duration on page 5-403
Data Sources (on page 963)Data Sources on page 5-403
Bulletin 70/71 Data (on page 964)Bulletin 70/71 Data on page 5-405
Circular 173 Data (on page 965)Circular 173 Data on page 5-405
Rainfall Time-Distribution Information (on page 962)Rainfall Time-Distribution Information on page 5-401
Watershed Area (on page 962)Watershed Area on page 5-402
Rainfall Duration (on page 963)Rainfall Duration on page 5-403
Data Sources (on page 963)Data Sources on page 5-403
Data Format (on page 964)Data Format on page 5-404
Circular 173 Data (on page 965)Circular 173 Data on page 5-405
964
Rainfall Time-Distribution Information (on page 962)Rainfall Time-Distribution Information on page 5-401
Watershed Area (on page 962)Watershed Area on page 5-402
Rainfall Duration (on page 963)Rainfall Duration on page 5-403
Data Sources (on page 963)Data Sources on page 5-403
Data Format (on page 964)Data Format on page 5-404
Bulletin 70/71 Data (on page 964)Bulletin 70/71 Data on page 5-405
Gauged (Time versus Depth) (on page 952)Gauged (Time versus Depth) on page 5-389
Synthetic Rainfall Distributions (on page 956)Synthetic Rainfall Distributions on page 5-394
Bulletins 70/71 (on page 961)Bulletins 70/71 on page 5-401
Snowmelt
The snowmelt routine, available when running the SWMM engine, is a part of the runoff modeling process. It updates
the state of the snow packs associated with each subcatchment by accounting for snow accumulation, snow
redistribution by areal depletion and removal operations, and snow melt via heat budget accounting. Any snowmelt
coming off the pack is treated as an additional rainfall input onto the subcatchment.
At each runoff time step the following computations are made:
1. Air temperature and melt coefficients are updated according to the calendar date.
2. Any precipitation that falls as snow is added to the snow pack.
3. Any excess snow depth on the plowable area of the pack is redistributed according to the removal parameters
established for the pack.
4. Areal coverages of snow on the impervious and pervious areas of the pack are reduced according to the Areal
Depletion Curves defined for the study area.
5. The amount of snow in the pack that melts to liquid water is found using:
1. a heat budget equation for periods with rainfall, where melt rate increases with increasing air temperature, wind
speed, and rainfall intensity
2. a degree-day equation for periods with no rainfall, where melt rate equals the product of a melt coefficient and the
difference between the air temperature and the pack's base melt temperature.
965
Time of Concentration
The time of concentration (Tc) is found by summing the time for each individual flow segment within the drainage
area. Both single and multiple flow segments are modeled with the Tc calculator.
Tc
Ti
Li
966
Vi
The Tc equations provided in Bentley SewerCAD can be categorized into two broad categories:
Equations that solve for velocity, then use velocity to solve for the travel time through a flow segment
Equations that directly solve for the travel time through a flow segment--in these cases, the software back solves for
velocity and includes it in the output report
Note: Some types of Tc equations can apply to flow segments within a multiple-segment Tc calculation (see
preceding diagram). Other Tc methods are equations intended to model the entire average subarea flow distance
and slope in one single flow segment. When combining multiple flow segments to compute Tc, it is up to you to
only combine Tc methods that can be modeled in combination with multiple flow segments.
User-Defined
The user-defined time of concentration (Tc) is a method that allows the direct input of the Tc rather than using an
equation to calculate it. This method would be used when the Tc needs to be calculated using a methodology that is not
supported by Bentley SewerCAD , or when a quick estimate of Tc is sufficient for the analysis.
Related Topics:
967
Carter
Tc
Lm
Sm
Slope (ft/mi)
Related Topics:
Eagleson
Tc
Lf
968
Mannings n
Sf
Slope (ft/ft)
Related Topics:
Espey/Winslow
Tc
Lf
Sf
Slope (ft/ft)
Ip
Related Topics:
969
Length and Velocity (on page 972)Length and Velocity on page 5-416
SCS Lag (on page 973)SCS Lag on page 5-417
TR-55 Sheet Flow (on page 974)TR-55 Sheet Flow on page 5-417
TR-55 Shallow Concentrated Flow (on page 974)TR-55 Shallow Concentrated Flow on page 5-419
TR-55 Channel Flow (on page 975)TR-55 Channel Flow on page 5-420
Tc
Rational C coefficient
Slope (%)
Related Topics:
Kerby/Hathaway
Tc
Lf
970
Mannings n
Sf
Slope (ft/ft)
Related Topics:
Kirpich (PA)
Tc
Lf
Sf
Slope (ft/ft)
Mt
T c Multiplier (T c
adjustment)
Related Topics:
971
TR-55 Sheet Flow (on page 974)TR-55 Sheet Flow on page 5-417
TR-55 Shallow Concentrated Flow (on page 974)TR-55 Shallow Concentrated Flow on page 5-419
TR-55 Channel Flow (on page 975)TR-55 Channel Flow on page 5-420
Kirpich (TN)
Tc
Lf
Sf
Slope (ft/ft)
Mt
T c Multiplier (T c
adjustment)
Related Topics:
Tc
Lf
972
Velocity (ft/sec.)
Related Topics:
SCS Lag
Note: There is a factor of 0.6 built into this equation (in the constant 0.0000877) to convert this equation from a
lag time to a time of concentration.
Tc
Lf
Mannings n
Sf
Slope (ft/ft)
Related Topics:
973
Length and Velocity (on page 972)Length and Velocity on page 5-416
TR-55 Sheet Flow (on page 974)TR-55 Sheet Flow on page 5-417
TR-55 Shallow Concentrated Flow (on page 974)TR-55 Shallow Concentrated Flow on page 5-419
TR-55 Channel Flow (on page 975)TR-55 Channel Flow on page 5-420
Mannings roughness
coefficient from TR-55
table
P2
Sf
Slope (ft/ft)
Related Topics:
974
Unpaved Surfaces
Paved Surfaces
Sf
Tc
Lf
Related Topics:
975
where
Tc
Lf
Sf
Related Topics:
Kerby-Hathaway
This equation is best suited for small sheet flow dominated area of less than 10 acres. It is recommended that small area
should have an overland slope less than 1%, and average Manning's n of less than 0.08.
976
Tc
Slope (ft/ft)
Bransby-Williams
This equation assumes catchment runoff is quickly concentrated into channel flow. It is most applicable where channels
exist, or the drainage area has a steep grade.
Tc
Friends Equation
This equation describes the nomograph constructed from Friend's (1954) study of overland sheet flow times.
Tc
Horton's Roughness n
Slope (%)
977
Tc
Slope (ft/ft)
Manning's Roughness
Tc
978
Slope (%)
Tc
Slope (ft/ft)
Manning's Roughness
979
Tc
n'
Slope (m/m)
Tc
Slope (%)
Rational Method
The Rational method solves for peak discharge based on watershed area, Rational coefficient, and rainfall intensity for
the watershed. The following equation is used to compute flow using the Rational method:
980
Note: A conversion factor of 1.008 acre inches/hour per cfs makes the Rational equation unit-consistent, and is
used by PondPack.
Some localities have C adjustment factors for different storm frequencies.
C, the Rational coefficient, is the parameter that is most open to engineering judgement. In many cases, an area
weighted average of C coefficients is used as the C for the entire drainage area. Bentley SewerCAD calculates the
weighted C for drainage areas.
Related Topics:
Weighting C Values
If the drainage area consists of more than one subarea, a weighted C value for the area must be computed. The
weighted C for a drainage area is computed by dividing the sum of all subarea CAs by the total area, where CA is the
subarea C value multiplied by the area of the subarea.
Example: An engineer wants to compute the weighted C value for the composite drainage area shown below. In this
example the C values are not adjusted for storm frequencies.
There are several assumptions that form the basis for rational method hydrology:
Drainage areas are smaller than 300 acres (120 hectares).
981
Qpeak is determined from the rational method (link to rational method topic)
Q=CiA
When using English units i is intensity in in/hr, A = area, acres, Q = flow, cfs and C is runoff coefficient,
dimensionless.
The time to reach the peak is based on the time of concentration in the catchment which the user can manually enter or
calculate using a variety of methods ( Rational Method (on page 980)).
The length of the recession leg is based on the time of concentration times a recession multiplier which is set in the
calculations options.
The intensity and duration are taken from the IDF curves (tables) based on the duration and frequency (return period) of
the storm.
982
Rainfall (in)
Ia
Initial abstraction
The initial abstraction includes water captured by vegetation, depression storage, evaporation, and infiltration. For any
P, this abstraction must be satisfied before any runoff is possible. The universal default for the initial abstraction is
given by the equation:
983
984
Potential maximum
retention after runoff begins
CN
Curve number
Ia
Potential maximum
retention after runoff begins
The runoff volume is related to the precipitation and the potential maximum runoff as follows:
Rainfall (P >= Q)
Potential maximum
retention after runoff begins
For complex watersheds that consist of several subareas each having a distinct CN, the total actual runoff volume can
be computed in two different ways.
985
The cumulative volume method computes the actual runoff occurring from each subarea individually (using the
individual CNs and areas), and then sums these runoff volumes to determine the total for the watershed.
The composite volume method computes the actual runoff using a composite CN and the total watershed area.
CN Weighting
Note: Figures and tables referred to in this help section are referring to the TR-55 document. The tables are
reproduced, see: Reference Tables (on page 1121) .
These sections are reproduced from TR-55, Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds (U.S. Soil Conservation Service
1986b):
If all of the impervious area is directly connected to the drainage system, but the impervious area percentages or the
pervious land use assumptions in Table B-1: Runoff Curve Numbers for Urban Areason page B-899 are not
applicable, use Figure 2-3 from TR-55, Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds (U.S. Soil Conservation Service 1986b)
to compute a composite CN. For example, Table B-1: Runoff Curve Numbers for Urban Areason page B-899 gives a
CN of 70 for a 1/2-acre lot in HSG B, with an assumed impervious area of 25 percent. However, if the lot has 20
986
TR-55 Graphical Peak Discharge (SCS Graphical Peak) (on page 987)
Related Topics:
The drainage area in acres ( Bentley SewerCAD automatically converts it to sq. mi.)
Amount of pond and swamp areas (percentage of total drainage areas)
The 24-hr. precipitation (P) for the selected return period
The appropriate rainfall distribution (Type I, IA, II, or III)
The time of concentration, Tc
The runoff curve number, CN
Related Topics:
Ia/P Ratio
The initial abstraction (Ia) is divided by the precipitation (P) and printed in this field. For more information on Ia/P, see
TR-55, Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds (U.S. Soil Conservation Service 1986b).
987
qu
Tc
C0, C1, C2
Bentley SewerCAD computes two qu values by selecting C0, C1, C2 coefficients corresponding to the specified
distribution type and the two Ia/P values that are closest to the computed Ia/P for the watershed. Bentley SewerCAD
then linearly interpolates between the two computed qu values to obtain the actual qu used to compute peak discharge.
If the watersheds computed Ia/P ratio exceeds the limits of Table F-1, the limiting value for Ia/P is used to compute qu
(csm).
Runoff, Q (in.)
Runoff (inches) is computed from the CN and precipitation (P). For more information, see Chapter 2 in TR-55, Urban
Hydrology for Small Watersheds (U.S. Soil Conservation Service 1986b).
988
qp
qu
Am
Runoff (in)
Fp
Hydrograph Methods
Hydrograph methods include:
Related Topics:
Q/Qp Hydrographs
800QQp_TTc025.wmf
Note: For some localities, different templates may be used for different ranges of Tc.
This method computes a hydrograph by using a dimensionless hydrograph template that has values for T/Tc versus
Q/Qp. Time for any given ordinate can be computed by:
T/T c
Tc
989
Q/Q p
Qp
990
Hydrograph Flow
T/T c
T (min.)
Q/Q p
Q (cfs)
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
1.00
15.00
0.15
9.00
2.00
30.00
0.20
12.00
3.00
45.00
0.28
17.00
4.00
60.00
0.44
26.00
5.00
75.00
1.00
60.00
6.00
90.00
0.34
20.00
7.00
105.00
0.27
16.00
8.00
120.00
0.19
11.00
9.00
135.00
0.12
7.00
10.00
150.00
0.00
0.00
Related Topics:
991
Qk
Pi
U k-i + 1
The theory behind unit hydrographs is that the volume of water, calculated as the area under the hydrograph curve,
should correspond to 1 inch of excess precipitation over the area. The user needs to check if this is true.
For example, over a 2 acre area, the volume of water calculated under the unit hydrograph should be 2 acre-in (7,260
cubic feet). If there is 1.5 in of excess precipitation (precipitation losses) over this catchment, the volume of water
calculated using the unit hydrograph method should be 3 acre-in (10,890 cubic feet). This runoff volume is displayed
under the Catchment tab of the Detailed Calculation Summary.
992
993
994
995
996
Backwater Analysis
The classic solution of gravity flow hydraulics is via a backwater analysis. This type of analysis starts at the network
outlet under free discharge, submerged, or tailwater control, and proceeds in an upstream direction.
Steep pipes tend to "interrupt" the backwater analysis, and reset the hydraulic control to critical depth at the upstream
end of the steep pipe. A frontwater analysis may be needed for a steep profile (such as an S2), with the backwater
analysis recommencing from the upstream structure.
Free Outfall
This program lets you define the tailwater condition at the outlet as either Free Outfall, Crown Elevation or UserSpecified.
For a pipe with a hydraulically steep slope, the Free Outfall condition will yield a starting depth equal to normal depth
in the pipe. For a pipe with a hydraulically mild slope, the Free Outfall condition will yield a starting depth equal to
critical depth. When an outlet has multiple incoming pipes, the Free Outfall condition yields a starting elevation equal
to the lowest of the individual computed elevations.
The Crown condition should be used when the pipe discharges to an outlet where the water surface elevation is equal to
the elevation of the top of the pipe.
Structure Flooding
Flooding at manholes in SewerCAD and inlets in StormCAD occurs whenever the elevation of water is above the
structure rim elevation. When this occurs, the backwater analysis will continue by resetting the hydraulic grade to the
structure rim elevation or ground elevation, whichever is higher. However, if a structure is defined with a bolted cover,
the hydraulic grade is not reset to the rim elevation.
In actual flooding situations, flows may be diverted away from the junction structure and out of the system, or
attenuated due to surcharged storage. In this program, even though the governing downstream boundary for the next
conduit is artificially lowered to prevent the propagation of an incorrect backwater, the peak discharges at the structure
are conserved and are not reduced by the occurrence of flooding at a junction.
997
For more technical details, see "Chapter 10 Catchment Routing, Engineering Hydrology: Principle and Practice, Victor
M Ponce, Prentice Hall, 1994"
The time area data type can be one of the following three types:
User-defined: user inputs a time and segment area (not cumulative) table
Linear Equation: the total area is linear distributed within the total flow time or time of concentration
998
HEC Equation: a synthetic time area equation was developed by US Army Corps Hydrologic Engineering Center
and this selection will use the equation. Note the equation is for the cumulative area:
The following graph compares the area distributions between the linear equation and HEC equation:
Time-Area Runoff Method, Hydrology Time Step and Time of Concentration Considerations
The time-area method of hydrologic catchment routing transforms an effective storm hyetograph into a runoff
hydrograph. The method accounts for translation only and does not include storage.
Time-area method is based on the concept of time-area histogram, i.e. a histogram of contributing catchment subareas
(segmentations of the catchment). To develop a time-area histogram, the catchment's time of concentration is divided
into a number of time intervals based on the hydrology time step. Cumulative time at the end of each time interval is
used to divide the catchment into segments delimited by isochrones lines, i.e. the loci of points of equal travel time to
the catchment outlet. Based on the end times of each time interval and the area of the corresponding segment the timearea histogram table can be built and used in the hydrologic routing, as shown in the following figure.
As stated above, the method assumes that the hydrology computation has time intervals (time segments) within the time
of concentration of the catchment, and based on these time segments the total area is also divided into corresponding
sub-areas (area segments). In general a minimum of 2 time/area segments are needed for good results, therefore the
hydrology time step should be less than half of the time of concentration. If user specifies a larger time step the model
will give a warning and results are less reliable.
999
1000
Nave Method
A Thiessen polygon of a site, also called a Voronoi region, is the set of points that are closer to the site than to any of
the other sites.
Let P = {p1, p2,pn} be the set of sites and V = {v(p1), v(p2),v(pn)} represent the Voronoi regions or Thiessen
polygons for Pi,which is the intersection of all of the half planes defined by the perpendicular bisectors of pi and the
other sites. Thus, a nave method for constructing Thiessen Polygons can be formulated as follows:
Step 1 For each i such that i = 1, 2,, n, generate n - 1 half planes H(pi,pj), 1 </= j </= n, i <> j, and construct their
common intersection v(pi).
Step 2 Report V = {v(p1), v(p2),v(pn)} as the output and stop.
This nave procedure is, however, very inefficient for generating Thiessen polygons. The computation time increases
exponentially as the number of sites increases. There are many other more competent methods for constructing a
Thiessen polygon.
1001
The sweepline algorithm is an efficient technique for constructing a Thiessen polygon. The computation time required
for the worst case is O(nlog n). It produces a far more competent method than the nave method and provides
satisfactory performance for generating Thiessen polygons for a large number of points.
Storage Chambers
Bentley SewerCAD CONNECT allows you to create and reuse prefabricated storage chambers as a type of pond
volume definition. You can construct complex arrays of storage chambers which can be combined with other standard
pond components to create a single storage entity to be used in the routing analysis.
The following diagrams illustrate the various parameters that are used to define a storage chamber.
Storage System without Header Pipe
1002
1003
1004
1005
1006
ASCE Manuals and Reports on Engineering Practice No. 69, Sulfide in Wastewater Collection and Treatment
Systems
EPA Design Manual EPA/625/I-85, Odor and Corrosion Control in Sanitary Sewerage System and Treatment Plants
The usual equation to predict sulfide formation is the Pomeroy-Parkhurst equation given in English units as:
Where:
1007
The first term in the equation covers creation of sulfide while the second refers to loss. EBOD is essentially a
temperature corrected BOD given by a modified van't Hoff-Arrhenius equation:
EBOD=BOD1.07T-20
Where:
In the case of surcharged pipes or force mains, the sulfide loss term goes away and the recommended equation is:
Where:
Values for coefficient such as M, M' and N depend on velocity, pH, dissolved oxygen concentration, amount of
sediment in pipe, temperature and presence of other chemicals that can catalyze or inhibit the reaction, none of which
are explicitly considered in the equations.
Approximate values of:
but values will vary widely. Values of these empirical coefficients should be calibrated for each model.
At node elements, the conventional mass balance equation is used:
Where:
1008
The above mixing/mass-balacing equation is used to determine a node's outlet concentration for both H2S and BOD,
for the storage type nodes (wet-well and pond), a H2S reaction process is also considered. Using the H2S determined
from above mixing equation as inflow, S(in), a reaction equation is applied to determine an updated outflow H2S
concentration, the reaction equation is:
S(out) = S(in) + dS/dt (dt)
In which:
dS/dt = k C(BOD) 1.07(T-20)
T is the temperature (Celsius), k is a user-specified reaction rate (1/hour), and dt is the detention time of the storage
node.
Calculation assumptions: The Pomeroy equation was developed on steady flow condition. Since most models using
SWMM solver are of dynamic modeling, some assumptions must be made for proper application of the Pomeroy
equation. The primary assumption is that the solver will use the average hydraulic condition for the H2S calculations.
The solver determines the average pipe flow by the total flow volume that has passed through the pipe for the
simulation duration, the node H2S/BOD mixing calculations will also be based on the average flows of incoming and
outlet pipes. The pipe detention time is determined by the pipe length and average flow velocity; the node detention
time is determined by the average node volume and average outlet flow.
As a result of these assumptions the model provides a steady result set for the network which represents the expected
average changes.
For details on running a H2S model, see H2S Modeling Workflow (on page 1009).
Special Considerations
1009
Energy Discontinuity
The program by default uses hydraulic grade as the basis for its hydraulic computations. Energy grade at any given
point is then computed by adding the velocity head to the hydraulic grade. Because of this standard practice, energy
discontinuities may occasionally occur, such as when pipe size decreases in the downstream direction, or pipe slope
increases.
If you want the calculations to be based on the energy grade line you can change it with the Structure Loss Mode
Calculation Option.
Flow discontinuities can also be responsible for energy discontinuities. Since a structure is analyzed based on a
different system time than a pipe, a direct comparison of energy grades is not reasonable.
Design Considerations
As with any automated design, the program's design is intended only as a preliminary step. It will select pipe sizes and
pipe invert elevations based on the input provided, but no computer program can match the skills that an experienced
engineer has. The modeler should always review any automated design, and should make any changes required to
adjust, improve, and otherwise polish the system.
Carrier Pipes
When using either the Rational Method or Modified Rational Method, Bentley SewerCAD has an option to ignore the
time of flow through long lengths of carrier pipes (i.e. pipes with no contributing sub-catchment) when calculating the
system time / time of concentration (see also Calculation Options ). This allows modelers to eliminate the flow
reductions that would otherwise occur as a result of the increased system time.
Note: This definition of the term Carrier Pipe should not be confused with its use to describe a non porous pipe.
The following diagrams show different configurations of carrier and non carrier pipes in a simple network, and their
effect on flow.
1010
The diagram above shows how the system time or time of concentration (ToC) changes through a network when there
are no carrier pipes. At a minimum the ToC increases by the pipe travel time at each node in the network (it may
increase by more if a downstream catchment has a larger time of concentration).
At the junction of branch 2 with branch 1, the longer of the two ToC's is used for the downstream pipe. This is one of
the basic principles of Rational Method hydraulics.
1011
In the diagram above the time in pipe of the carrier pipe is ignored when calculating the flow for the following pipe, so
the running ToC for the downstream node of the carrier pipe is the same as the upstream node.
The next pipe downstream is not a carrier pipe. The ToC at its downstream node therefore includes the previously
ignored travel time in the carrier pipe.
1012
In the diagram above the ToC does not increase in the consecutive carrier pipes.
1013
In the diagram above the ToC does not increase in the consecutive carrier pipes. At the junction branch 1 has the
highest carrier ToC (10.2 minutes), but branch 2 has the highest running ToC (10.9 minutes). Therefore the carrier
pipes downstream of the junction use the carrier ToC from branch 1 (10.2 minutes).
For the first non carrier and subsequent pipes (including any subsequent carrier pipes) the ToC is taken from the
running ToC of branch 2. This is calculated as 10.9 + 0.6 + 0.8 + 0.3 = 12.6 minutes.
Note: the above diagrams are intended to explain the effect of carrier pipes on the node ToC's so subcatchments areas
and the resulting flows have not been shown.
Summary
The rules for system time (time of concentration) in carrier and non-carrier pipe cases are when the 'Ignore Travel Time
in Carrier Pipes' calculation option is set to TRUE are:
When calculating the running ToC for the nodes, the pipe travel time is ignored for carrier pipes.
The running ToC for the downstream node of the carrier pipe is the same as the upstream node.
If the downstream pipe from a carrier pipe is not a carrier pipe, the running ToC will include the `time in pipe' from
the previous carrier pipe(s).
If there are several incoming pipes, and none of them are carrier pipes, then the highest incoming ToC is used as the
ToC for the outgoing pipe.
If there are several incoming pipes and all of them are carrier pipes, and the outgoing pipe is a carrier, then the
highest carrier pipe ToC is used as the ToC for the outgoing pipe.
1014
If there are several incoming pipes and they are a mixture of carrier and non carrier pipes, and the outgoing pipe is a
carrier pipe, then the highest running ToC is used for the ToC for the outgoing pipe.
1015
1016
Catchments
"Correct for Partial Area Effects" = TRUE:
1017
External flow
"Correct for Partial Area Effects" = TRUE:
(The large flow used is the external rational flow)
1018
Gutter
1019
1020
Diversion
"Correct for Partial Area Effects" = TRUE:
1021
1022
1023
Where:
Q = Flow
C = Coefficient
i = Intensity
a = Area
One would think therefore that flow in equals flow out. However, the intensity (i) used for determining the flow into the
manhole will be higher than the intensity of the flow leaving the manhole.
This intensity is calculated using the longest possible flow travel time in order to generate the most conservative value
for peak flow. For example, say a catchment empties into a catch basin and has a Time of Concentration of 10 minutes.
On the other hand the travel time of the piped flow getting to the catch basin is 12 minutes. The rational flow generated
at the catch basin will be generated based on the intensity associated with the 12 minute duration. This way you are
assured that the whole system is contributing to the flow and hence you are using the most conservative peak flow
value at that point.
If you do not wish to have this flow attenuation taken into account, you should specify Known or Additional flows at
the catch basins.
See theSystem Time / Controlling Time / Duration topic for more information.
1024
Pressure Pipe-General
Pressure Pipe-General Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID
Label
Notes
GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, see Adding Hyperlinks to Elements-372.
Node Reversal
1025
Description
Start Node
Stop Node
Pressure Pipe-Geometry
Pressure Pipe-Geometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Geometry
Pressure Pipe-Physical
Pressure Pipe-Physical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Virtual?
Diameter
Material
1026
Description
Mannings n
Hazen-Williams C
Darcy-Weisbach e
Kutters n
Slope
The slope.
Description
1027
Description
Is Active?
Pressure Pipe-Results
Pressure Pipe-Results Attributes
Attribute
Description
Flow
Velocity
Conduit Attributes
The conduit attributes comprise the following categories:
Conduit-General
Conduit-General Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID
1028
Description
Label
Notes
GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, see Adding Hyperlinks to Elements-372.
Node Reversal
Start-node Id
Stop-node Id
Conduit-Geometry
Conduit-Geometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Geometry
1029
Description
Flow (Infiltration)
Hydrograph Curve
Infiltration Pattern
Conduit-Generic
Conduit-Generic Attributes
1030
Description
Roughness Type
Conduit-Output Filter
Conduit-Output Filter Attributes
Attribute
Description
Output Options
Conduit-Physical
Conduit-Physical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Section Type
Station-Elevation Curve
1031
Description
Elevations Modifier
Meander Modifier
The station value (horizontal distance) in the StationDepth table that marks the end of the left overbank (set to
zero or to the minimum station value in the Station-Depth
curve to denote the absence of an overbank). To use this
field, you must set the Section type to Irregular Channel.
Stations Modifier
The station value (horizontal distance) in the StationDepth table that marks the start of the right overbank (set
to the maximum station value in the Station-Depth curve
to denote the absence of an overbank). To use this field,
you must set the Section type to Irregular Channel.
Base Width
Height
1032
Description
Diameter
Fill Depth
Rise
Sidewalls Removed
Span
Number of Barrels
Catalog Pipe
The radius of the circular portion of the RectangularRound section. To use this field, you must set the Section
Type to Rectangular-Round .
The height of the triangular portion of the RectangularTriangle section. To use this field, you must set the
Section Type to Rectangular-Triangle .
Power Exponent
1033
Description
Depth-Width Curve
Material
Channel Mannings n
Mannings n
Mannings n-Flow
Roughness Type
1034
Description
Slope
Roughness Type
Lets you select the roughness type for the conduit. For
more information see Roughness Models-315.
Overbank Channel
Horizontal Segment
1035
Description
Description
Description
Flap Gate?
1036
Description
Description
Is Culvert?
Lets you choose whether or not the section type for the
selected conduit is a culvert. If you select True , the other
Culvert attributes are enabled in the Property Editor. If
you select False , none of the other Culvert attributes are
available in the Property Editor. Note that not this option
is not available for ellipse and pipe arch section types.
Inlet Description
1037
Description
Ke
Lets you define the entrance loss value for the associated
conduit. To use this field, you must set the Section Type
to Circle or Box and Is Culvert? to True .
Kr
Lets you define the reverse flow loss value for the
associated conduit. To use this field, you must set the
Section Type to Circle or Box and Is Culvert? to True .
C-Depth Table
1038
Description
Increment
Conduit-Active Topology
Conduit-Active Topology Attributes
1039
Description
Is Active?
Conduit-Results
The hydraulic grade, flow, and depth/rise presented in the Property Editor are the values associated with the middle
section of the link. Obviously these values don't give you the full sense of what is going on, so the middle, start, and
stop values are also available through the FlexTables, and you can also look at the profile. (For more information, see
Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables (on page 738) and Using Profiles (on page 720).)
Conduit-Result Attributes
Attribute
Description
Flow
Velocity
Depth/Rise
Depth
Is Oveflowing/Surcharged?
Ever Oveflowing/Surcharged?
Froude Number
1040
Description
Sections Results
Flow-Area (Middle)
Flow-Width (Middle)
Pollutants Collection*
Conduit-Results: Capacities
Conduit-Result: Capacity Attributes
Attribute
Description
Capacity (Full)
Capacity (Flow/Design)
1041
Description
Branch
Section Count
Channel Attributes
The channel attributes comprise the following categories:
Channel-General
Channel-General Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID
Label
Notes
GIS-IDs
1042
Description
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, see Adding Hyperlinks to Elements (on page
349).
Node Reversal
Start Node
Stop Node
Channel-Geometry
Channel-Geometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Geometry
Channel-Output Filter
Channel-Output Filter Attributes
1043
Description
Output Options
Channel-Physical
Manning's n is not a property of a channel but a property of the cross-section nodes along the channel. The crosssection defines the shape and other physical properties of the channel (except for length). The properties between two
cross sections are interpolated. For more information, see Cross SectionPhysical (on page 1079).
Channel-Physical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Invert (Start)
Invert (Stop)
Slope
1044
Description
Flap Gate?
Channel-Active Topology
Channel-Active Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?
Channel-Results
The hydraulic grade, flow, and depth/rise presented in the Property Editor are the values associated with the middle
section of the link. Obviously these values don't give you the full sense of what is going on, so the middle, start, and
stop values are also available through the FlexTables, and you can also look at the profile. (For more information, see
Viewing and Editing Data in FlexTables (on page 738) and Using Profiles (on page 720).)
Channel-Result Attributes
1045
Description
Flow
Velocity
Is Overflowing? (Start)
Is Overflowing? (Stop)
Ever Overflowing/Surcharged?
Froude Number
Sections Results
Pollutants Collection
Description
Branch
1046
Description
Section Count
Lateral Attributes
The lateral attributes comprise the following categories:
Lateral-General
Lateral-General Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID
Label
Notes
GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, see Adding Hyperlinks to Elements (on page
349).
1047
Description
Node Reversal
Start Node
Stop Node
Lateral-Geometry
Lateral-Geometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Geometry
Lateral-Active Topology
Lateral-Active Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?
Lateral-Physical
Lateral-Physical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Diameter
1048
Description
Material
Mannings n
Invert (Start)
Invert (Stop)
Length (Scaled)
Length (Unified)
Slope (Calculated)
Lateral-Results
Lateral-Result Attributes
Attribute
Description
Calculation Results
1049
Lateral-Results (Flow)
Lateral-Result (Flow) Attributes
Attribute
Description
Calculation Results
Description
Flow (Maximum)
Gutter Attributes
The gutter attributes comprise the following categories:
Gutter-General
Gutter-General Attributes
1050
Description
ID
Label
Notes
GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, see Adding Hyperlinks to Elements (on page
349).
Node Reversal
Start Node
Stop Node
Gutter-Geometry
Gutter-Geometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Geometry
1051
Description
Gutter-Physical
Gutter-Physical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Gutter Type
Gutter Shape
Catalog Gutter
Depressed Gutter?
If True, the gutter slope differs from the road cross slope.
Length
Width
1052
Description
Irregular Channel
Bottom Width
Gutter Material
Mannings n (Gutter)
Slope
Gutter-Active Topology
Gutter-Active Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?
Gutter-Results
Gutter-Results Attributes
1053
Description
Calculation Messages
Depth/Rise
Hydraulic Grade
Rise (Unified)
Gutter-Results (Flow)
Gutter-Results (Flow) Attributes
Attribute
Description
Flow (Start)
Description
Velocity
Description
Flow (Maximum)
1054
Description
Gutter-Results (Profile)
Attribute
Description
Depth (In)
Depth (Out)
Manhole Attributes
The manhole attributes comprise the following categories:
Manhole-General
Manhole-General Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID
Label
1055
Description
Notes
GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, see Adding Hyperlinks to Elements (on page
349).
Manhole-Geometry
Manhole-Geometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Manhole-Physical
Manhole-Physical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Elevation (Ground)
Elevation (Rim)
Elevation (Invert)
1056
Description
Diameter
Length
Width
Bolted Cover
Description
Headloss Method
Absolute Headloss
1057
Description
Headloss Coefficient
Description
Manhole-Sanitary Loading
ManholeSanitary Loading Attributes
Attribute
Description
Sanitary Loads
1058
Description
Depth (Surcharged)
Depth (Initial)
Apply Treatment?
Treatment Collection
Pollutograph Collection
Manhole-Active Topology
Manhole-Active Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?
Manhole-Inflow
Manhole-Inflow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Inflow Collection
1059
Manhole-Results
Manhole-Results Attributes
Attribute
Description
Hydraulic Grade
Depth (Node)
Is Flooded?
Flow (Overflow)
Pollutants Collection
Description
Branch
Description
Freeboard Height
1060
Description
Depth (Flooding)
Volume
Is Flooded Ever?
Description
Local Inflow?
Tap Attributes
The tap attributes comprise the following categories:
Tap-General
Tap-General Attributes
1061
Description
ID
Label
Notes
GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, see Adding Hyperlinks to Elements (on page
349).
Referenced Link
Tap-Geometry
Tap-Geometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Tap-Active Topology
Tap-Active Topology Attributes
1062
Description
Is Active?
Tap-Physical
Tap-Physical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Elevation Offset
Tap-Results
Attribute
Description
Calculation Messages
Elevation (Connection)
1063
Catch Basin-General
Catch Basin-General Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID
Label
Notes
GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, see Adding Hyperlinks to Elements (on page
349).
Catch Basin-Geometry
Catch Basin-Geometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Catch Basin-Physical
Catch Basin-Physical Attributes
1064
Description
Elevation (Ground)
Elevation (Rim)
Elevation (Invert)
Structure Type
Diameter
Gutter Type
Gutter Shape
Catalog Gutter
1065
Description
Depressed Gutter?
If True, the gutter slope differs from the road cross slope.
Height.
Length
Width
Description
Headloss Method
Absolute Headloss
Headloss Coefficient
1066
Description
Description
Sanitary Loads
Description
Apply Treatment?
1067
Description
Treatment Collection
Pollutograph Collection
Description
Is Active?
Description
Catch Basin-Inlet
Catch Basin-Inlet Attributes
Attribute
Description
Inlet Type
1068
Description
Inflow-Capture Curve
Inlet
Capture Efficiency
Description
Inlet Location
Mannings n (Inlet)
Catch Basin-Results
Catch Basin-Results Attributes
Attribute
Description
Hydraulic Grade
Depth (Node)
1069
Description
Is Flooded?
Flow (Overflow)
Pollutants Collection
Description
Branch
Description
Freeboard Height
Distance between the top of the catch basin and the water
surface. This is a calculated results field and is not
editable.
Depth (Flooding)
Volume
1070
Description
Is Flooded Ever?
Description
Local Inflow?
Description
Flow (Captured)
Capture Efficiency
If the inlet is a ditch inlet this field will display the top
width of the flow through the gutter.
1071
Description
Depth (Ditch)
If the inlet is a ditch inlet this field will display the depth
of the flow through the gutter.
Outfall Attributes
The outfall attributes comprise the following categories:
Outfall-General
Outfall-General Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID
Label
Notes
GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, see Adding Hyperlinks to Elements (on page
349).
Outfall-Geometry
Outfall-Geometry Attributes
1072
Description
Outfall-Boundary Condition
Outfall-Boundary Condition Attributes
Attribute
Description
Tidal Gate?
Time-Elevation Curve
1073
Description
Elevation-Flow Curve
Boundary Element
Outfall-Physical
Outfall-Physical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Elevation (Ground)
Elevation (Invert)
Description
Apply Treatment?
1074
Description
Treatment Collection
Pollutograph Collection
Outfall-Active Topology
Outfall-Active Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?
Outfall-Inflow
Outfall-Inflow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Inflow Collection
Outfall-Results
Outfall-Result Attributes
Attribute
Description
Hydraulic Grade
Depth (Node)
1075
Description
Pollutants Collection
Outfall-Results: Flows
Attribute
Description
Local Inflow?
Description
ID
Label
Notes
GIS-IDs
1076
Description
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, see Adding Hyperlinks to Elements (on page
349).
Description
Description
Upstream Pond
Control Structure
1077
Description
Is Active?
Description
Elevation (Ground)
Description
Pollutants Collection
Cross Section-General
Cross Section-General Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID
1078
Description
Label
Notes
GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, see Adding Hyperlinks to Elements (on page
349).
Cross Section-Geometry
Cross Section-Geometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Cross Section-Generic
Cross Section-Generic Attributes
Attribute
Description
Roughness Type
Cross Section-Physical
Cross Section-Physical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Elevation (Ground)
1079
Description
Section Type
Station-Elevation Curve
Elevations Modifier
Meander Modifier
Stations Modifier
Elevation (Invert)
Bottom Width
1080
Description
Height
Roughness Type
Material
Channel Mannings n
Mannings n
1081
Description
Mannings n-Flow
Transition Type
When you connect a channel to a conduit at a crosssection node, a transition part is added between the
channel cross-section and the conduit cross-section. This
field lets you specify the transition type of the currently
highlighted cross-section node. You can select either
Gradual or Abrupt . If you select Abrupt , the top width of
the channel cross-section node is used as the length of the
transition part. If you select Gradual , the Transition
Length field is made available. If the Transition Length is
larger than the top width of the cross-section node, the
Transition Length value is used as the length of the
transition part.
Note: Transition Type and Transition Length are not
used for cross-section nodes that connect two
channels.
Transition Length
Description
Is Active?
Cross Section-Inflow
Cross Section-Inflow Attributes
1082
Description
Inflow Collection
Cross Section-Results
Cross Section-Result Attributes
Attribute
Description
Hydraulic Grade
Depth (Node)
Flow (Overflow)
Is Flooded?
Pollutants Collection
Description
Branch
1083
Description
Local Inflow?
Pump Attributes
The pump attributes comprise the following categories:
Pump-General
Pump-General Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID
Label
Notes
GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, see Adding Hyperlinks to Elements (on page
349).
1084
Description
Downstream Link
Pump-Geometry
Pump-Geometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Pump-Physical
Pump-Physical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Elevation (Ground)
Suction Element
This field allows you to define the upstream, or suctionside node for the current pump. Select Select Suction
Element from the drop-down menu; your mouse cursor
changes to a Pick Element tool, allowing you to click on
the desired element in the Drawing Pane. After you have
selected the suction-side node, the pump and the node are
connected by a dotted line in your model.
Elevation
Pumps
Pump-Active Topology
Pump-Active Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?
1085
Pump-Results
Pump-Results
Attribute
Description
Head
Flow (Pump)
Pollutants Collection
Description
Branch
1086
Wet Well-General
Wet Well-General Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID
Label
Notes
GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, see Adding Hyperlinks to Elements-372.
Wet Well-Geometry
Wet Well-Geometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Wet Well-Physical
The following illustration shows a typical wet well.
1087
Description
Elevation (Ground)
Section
Lets you choose the method used to define volume for the
currently highlighted element: Constant Area - Circular,
Constant Area - Non-Circular , Variable Volume, Depth
Area, or Area Function . The value chosen here affects the
availability of other attributes.
Area
Coefficient
Exponent
1088
Description
Constant
Elevation (Invert)
Description
Sanitary Loads
Description
Elevation (Initial)
Lets you define the initial water surface elevation for the
currently highlighted element. It is available only when
the User Defined Initial Elevation value is selected for the
Initial Elevation Type attribute.
Description
Evaporation Factor
Apply Treatment?
1089
Description
Treatment Collection
Pollutograph Collection
Description
Is Active?
Wet Well-Inflow
Wet Well-Inflow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Inflow Collection
Wet Well-Results
Wet Well-Results Attributes
Attribute
Description
Hydraulic Grade
Depth (Node)
1090
Description
Is Flooded?
Flow (Overflow)
Pollutants Collection
Description
Freeboard Height
Distance between the top of the wet well and the water
surface. This is a calculated results field and is not
editable.
Depth (Flooding)
Volume
Is Flooded Ever?
Description
Local Inflow?
1091
Description
Section Count
Catchment Attributes
The catchment attributes comprise the following categories:
Catchment-General
Catchment-General Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID
Label
Notes
1092
Description
GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, seeAdding Hyperlinks to Elements (on page
349) .
Catchment-Geometry
Catchment-Geometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Geometry
Scaled Area
Catchment-Catchment
Catchment-Catchment Attributes
Attribute
Description
Area
Outflow Node
Lets you choose the node to which flow flows from the
currently highlighted element. To use this feature, click
Select in the Outfall Node field. Move the cursor over the
drawing pane and click the element you want to select for
the outflow node.
1093
Catchment-Runoff
Catchment-Runoff Attributes
Attribute
Description
Runoff Method
Characteristic Width
Mannings n (Impervious)
Mannings n (Pervious)
Percent Impervious
Slope
Subarea Routing
1094
Description
Percent Routed
Runoff Hydrograph
Lets you define time vs. flow points for the currently
highlighted element. Click the Ellipsis () button in this
field to open the User Defined Hydrograph dialog box
(see Specifying a Time of Concentration (Tc) Method for
a Catchment (on page 218)). This attribute is available
only when the Runoff Method attribute is set to User
Defined Hydrograph .
Loss Method
fLoss
Lets you define the initial infiltration rate at the time that
infiltration begins for the currently highlighted element.
This attribute is active only when the Loss Method
attribute is set to fLoss .
Capillary Suction
Lets you define the capillary suction value for the soil
type associated with the currently highlighted element.
This attribute is active only when the Loss Method
attribute is set to Green and Ampt .
Ks
Moisture Deficit
SCS CN
Lets you set a Cn value for the catchment. You can either
type a value in the field or click the Ellipsis () button to
open the Cn Area Collection dialog box (see Defining CN
Area Collections for Catchments (on page 495)). This
attribute is active only when the Loss Method attribute is
set to SCS CN .
SCS CN (Composite)
1095
Description
fc
fo
Initial Abstraction
Lets you define the initial abstraction (Ia) for the currently
highlighted element. The initial abstraction is a parameter
that accounts for all losses prior to runoff and consists
mainly of interception, infiltration, evaporation, and
surface depression storage. This attribute is active only
when the Loss Method attribute is set to (Generic)
Horton .
Recovery Constant
Maximum Volume
RTK Set
RTK Table
1096
Description
Tc
Tc (Composite)
Lets you define time vs. flow points for the currently
highlighted element. Click the Ellipsis () button in this
field to open the Unit Hydrograph Data dialog box
(Adding Generic Unit Hydrographs (on page 537)). This
field is available only when the Unit Hydrograph Method
is set to Generic Hydrograph .
Lets you define time vs. flow points for the currently
highlighted element. Click the Ellipsis () button in this
field to open the Unit Hydrograph Data dialog box
(Adding Generic Unit Hydrographs (on page 537)). This
field is only available when the Unit Hydrograph Method
is set to Generic Hydrograph .
Shape Factor
Lets you define the time step for the currently highlighted
element. It is available only when the Unit Hydrograph
Method is set to Generic Unit Hydrograph.
Tc Data Collection
Rational C
Description
Soil Type
Specify how to define pervious cover/loss data when using the ILSAX runoff method.
AMC 1 Depth
AMC 2 Depth
1097
Description
AMC 3 Depth
AMC 4 Depth
fo (ILSAX)
fc (ILSAX)
The equilibrium infiltration rate on the Horton infiltration curve, reached once the soil is
saturated.
K (ILSAX)
Description
Curb Length
Land Uses
Apply Groundwater
Aquifer
Surface Elevation
1098
Description
Receiving Node
Catchment-SWMM Results
Catchment-SWMM Results
Attribute
Description
Depth (Snow)
Flow (Groundwater)
Elevation (Groundwater)
Intensity (Rainfall)
Loss Rate
Evaporation Rate
1099
Catchment-Active Topology
Catchment-Active Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?
Catchment-Inflow
Catchment-Inflow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Inflow Collection
Catchment-Rainfall
Catchment-Rainfall Attributes
Attribute
Description
Return Event
Catchment-Results
Catchment-Result Attributes
1100
Description
Pollutants Collection
Description
Precipitation (Cumulative)
Loss (Cumulative)
Precipitation (Incremental)
Loss (Incremental)
Catchment-Results: Flows
Attribute
Description
Local Inflow?
User defined inflow at catchment. This is a calculated results field and is not editable.
Sum of all user defined inflows. This is a calculated results field and is not editable.
The sum of flow from incoming links + Captured flow from the surface + Locally
generated inflow from the inflow and sanitary collections. Bentley SewerCAD
CONNECT Edition Help (on page 6)Flow (Total In) does not include local inflows
when using the GVF Convex solver.
1101
LID Control-General
Catchment-General Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID
Label
Notes
GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, see Adding Hyperlinks to Elements (on page
349).
Parent Catchment
LID Control-Geometry
LID Control-Geometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Geometry
Scaled Area
1102
Description
Is Active?
LID Control-Output
LID Control-Output Attributes
Attribute
Description
Output Options
LID Control-Hydrology
LID Control-Hydrology Attributes
Attribute
Description
If set to True then the LID will occupy the full area of the
LIDs owning catchment.
1103
Description
LID Control-Results
LID Control-Results Attributes
Attribute
Description
Calculation Messages
Evaporation
Inflow
The flow that enters the LID through the Surface layer.
This includes runon from the associated catchment and
precipitation.
Surface Infiltration
Soil Percolation
Bottom Infiltration
Surface Runoff
Drain Outflow
Surface Depth
Soil/Pavement Moisture
Storage Depth
1104
Description
Area (Total)
Pond Attributes
The pond attributes comprise the following categories:
For an overview of the physical characteristics of ponds, see Physical Characteristics of Ponds (on page 225).
Pond-General
Pond-General Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID
Label
Notes
GIS-IDs
1105
Description
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, see Adding Hyperlinks to Elements (on page
349).
Pond-Geometry
Pond-Geometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Geometry
Scaled Area
Pond-Physical
Pond-Physical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Volume Type
Lets you select the volume type that gets used: ElevationArea Curve , Elevation-Volume Curve , Pipe Volume ,
Functional . The value chosen here affects the availability
of other fields.
Elevation-Area Curve
Elevation-Volume Curve
1106
Description
Number of Barrels
Length
Invert (Start)
Invert (Stop)
Pipe Diameter
Pond Coefficient
Pond Exponent
Elevation (Invert)
Pond Constant
1107
Description
Elevation (Initial)
Lets you define the initial water surface elevation for the
currently highlighted element. It is available only when
the User Defined Initial Elevation value is selected for the
Initial Elevation Type attribute.
Description
Evaporation Factor
Apply Treatment?
Treatment Collection
Pollutograph Collection
Pond-Active Topology
Pond-Active Topology Attributes
Attribute
Description
Is Active?
1108
Pond-Inflow
Pond-Inflow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Inflow Collection
Pond-Results
Pond-Results Attributes
Attribute
Description
Hydraulic Grade
Depth (Node)
Is Flooded?
Flow (Overflow)
Pollutants Collection
1109
Description
Branch
Description
Freeboard Height
Depth (Flooding)
Volume
Is Flooded Ever?
Transition Attributes
The junction chamber attributes comprise the following categories:
1110
Transition-General
Attribute
Description
ID
Label
Notes
GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature.
Transition-Geometry
Attribute
Description
Transition-Physical
Attribute
Description
Diameter
Elevation (Ground)
Elevation (Top)
Elevation (Bottom)
1111
Description
Headloss Method
Absolute Headloss
Headloss Coefficient
Transition-Active Topology
Attribute
Description
Is Active?
Transition-Results
Attribute
Description
Hydraulic Grade
Depth (Node)
Maximum HGL
TimeToMaximumHGL
1112
Description
Branch
Transition-Results: Flows
Attribute
Description
Pressure Junction-General
Pressure Junction-General Attributes
Attribute
Description
ID
Label
1113
Description
Notes
GIS-IDs
Hyperlinks
Lets you add, edit, delete, and view external files that are
associated with the element using the Hyperlinks feature.
Click in the field to display an Ellipsis () button, and
click the Ellipsis () button to use the Hyperlinks
feature. For more information about the Hyperlink
Manager, see Adding Hyperlinks to Elements (on page
349).
Pressure Junction-Geometry
Pressure Junction-Geometry Attributes
Attribute
Description
Pressure Junction-Physical
Pressure Junction-Physical Attributes
Attribute
Description
Elevation (Ground)
Elevation
Description
Sanitary Loads
1114
Description
Is Active?
Pressure Junction-Inflow
Pressure Junction-Inflow Attributes
Attribute
Description
Inflow Collection
Pressure Junction-Results
Pressure Junction-Results Attributes
Attribute
Description
Pressure
1115
Description
Branch
Description
Local Inflow?
1116
Software
Bentley Systems, Inc. software includes:
CivilStorm
CivilStorm revolutionizes municipal stormwater management. Whether your concern is a stormwater master plan,
localized flooding, GASB34 requirements, water quality BMPs, NPDES permitting, or just simply being able to do
faster and smarter designs every day, CivilStorm fits your needs. It is the only commercially available software package
that lets you analyze all your system elements in one package. CivilStorm also gives you the ability to perform analyses
using either the SWMM algorithm or CivilStorms own implicit solution of full Saint-Venant equations.
CivilStorm provides numerical solutions for the toughest interconnected pipe, pond, and open channel networks, and
provides stunning graphics and reporting tools for visualizing your storm systems in action.
Use CivilStorm For:
CivilStorm can be run in a MicroStation integrated interface, a Stand-Alone graphical user interface, or an AutoCAD
integrated interface.
SewerGEMS
SewerGEMS is the first and only fully-dynamic, multi-platform (MicroStation, ArcGIS, AutoCAD, and Stand-Alone)
sanitary and combined sewer modeling solution. With SewerGEMS, you will analyze all sanitary and combined sewer
system elements in one package and have the option of performing the analyses with the SWMM algorithm or our own
implicit solution of the full Saint Venant equations.
Simply put, SewerGEMS offers the most comprehensive solution available for optimizing Best Management Practice
(BMP) designs and meeting sanitary sewer overflow (SSO) and combined sewer overflow (CSO) regulations.
With SewerGEMS, you can:
1117
WaterGEMS
WaterGEMS brings the concept of water modeling and GIS integration to the next level. It is the only waterdistribution modeling software that provides full, completely seamless integration with GIS applications. Now the
combined functionality of WaterCAD and GIS can be utilized simultaneously, synthesizing the distinct advantages of
each application to create a modeling tool with an unprecedented level of freedom, power, efficiency, and usability.
You can create, display, edit, run, map, and design water models from within the GIS environment, and view the results
of the simulations as native GIS maps or with traditional Haestad Methods modeling tools. These abilities, in
conjunction with the cross-product functionality provided by the core Unified Data and Object Model architecture,
provide a powerful cutting-edge solution for your modeling projects.
WaterGEMS works within your choice of environments: MicroStation, ArcView, ArcEdit, ArcInfo, AutoCAD, or the
standalone WaterGEMS Modeler interface.
WaterCAD
WaterCAD is the definitive model for complex pressurized-pipe networks, such as municipal water-distribution
systems. You can use WaterCAD to perform a variety of functions, including steady-state and extended-period
simulations of pressure networks with pumps, tanks, control valves, and more.
WaterCADs abilities also extend into public safety and long-term planning issues, with extensive water quality
features, automated fire protection analyses, comprehensive scenario management, and enterprise-wide data-sharing
capabilities.
WaterCAD is available with your choice of a MicroStation integrated interface, Stand-Alone graphical user interface,
and an AutoCAD integrated interface.
SewerCAD
SewerCAD is a powerful design and analysis tool for modeling sanitary sewage collection and pumping systems. With
SewerCAD, you can develop and compute sanitary loads, track and combine loads from dry-weather and wet-weather
sources. You can also simulate the hydraulic response of the entire system (gravity collection and pressure force
mains), observe the effects of overflows and diversions, and even automatically design selected portions of the system.
Output covers everything from customizable tables and detailed reports to plan and profile sheets.
1118
StormCAD
StormCAD is a highly efficient model for the design and analysis of storm sewer collection systems. From graphical
layout and intelligent network connectivity to flexible reports and profiles, StormCAD covers all aspects of stormsewer modeling.
Surface inlet networks are independent of pipe connectivity and inlet hydraulics conform to FHWA HEC-22
methodologies. Gradually varied flow algorithms and a variety of popular junction-loss methods are the foundation of
StormCADs robust gravity piping computations, which handle everything from surcharged pipes and diversions to
hydraulic jumps.
StormCAD can be run in a MicroStation integrated interface, a Stand-Alone graphical user interface, or an AutoCAD
integrated interface.
PondPack
PondPack is a comprehensive, Windows-based hydrologic modeling program that analyzes a tremendous range of
situations, from simple sites to complex networked watersheds. PondPack analyzes pre- and post-developed watershed
conditions and estimates required storage ponds. PondPack performs interconnected pond routing, and also computes
outlet rating curves with tailwater effects, multiple outfalls, pond infiltration, and pond-detention times.
PondPack builds customized reports organized by categories, automatically creating section and page numbers, tables
of contents, and indexes. You can quickly create an executive summary for an entire watershed or build an elaborate
drainage report showing any or all report items. Graphical displays, such as watershed diagrams, rainfall curves, and
hydrographs, are fully compatible with other Windows software.
FlowMaster
FlowMaster is an efficient program for the design and analysis of a wide variety of hydraulic elements, such as pressure
pipes, open channels, weirs, orifices, and inlets. FlowMasters Hydraulics Toolbox can create rating tables and
performance curves for any variables, using popular friction methods. Inlet calculations follow the latest FHWA
guidelines, and weighting of irregular section roughness can be based on any popular techniques.
CulvertMaster
CulvertMaster helps engineers design new culverts and analyze existing culvert hydraulics, from single-barrel crossings
to complex multibarrel culverts with roadway overtopping. CulvertMaster computations use HDS No. 5 methodologies,
allowing you to solve for whatever hydraulic variables you do not know, such as culvert size, peak discharge, and
headwater elevation. Output capabilities include comprehensive detailed reports, rating tables, and performance curves.
HAMMER
HAMMER is the premier software in the world for analyzing hydraulic transients, surge control devices, and water
hammer effects. HAMMER models any hydraulic element, transient source or surge protection devices, including:
1119
HAMMER can easily import steady-state model results from industry-standard models such as WaterCAD,
WaterGEMS, EPANET, or EXTRAN (for line filling). Users can also build their own models using the advanced
graphical interface or robust database connections.
References and Textbooks: Authored by industry-recognized experts, Bentley Institute Press offers a complete line
of reference books for use in both academic and professional settings.
Technical Journals: With an eye towards computer technology, journals like Current Methods address the latest
innovations in water-resources modeling and practical modeling case studies, as well as offering credit towards
certification.
Independent Papers: Bentley Institute Press also provides funding for engineers to write case studies of their
projects, with potential publication in a variety of industry journals and magazines.
Advanced Water Distribution Modeling and Management, first edition; Haestad, Walski, Chase, Savic, Grayman,
Beckwith, and Koelle
Computer Applications in Hydraulic Engineering, fifth edition; Haestad, Walski, Barnard, Durrans, and Meadows
Floodplain Modeling Using HEC-RAS, first edition; Haestad, Dyhouse, Hatchett, and Benn
Proceedings of the First Annual Water Security Summit, first edition; HaestadStormwater Conveyance Modeling
and Design, first edition; Haestad and Durrans
Wastewater Collection System Modeling and Design, first edition; Haestad, Walski, Barnard, Merritt, Harold,
Walker, and Whitman
Water Distribution Modeling, first edition; Haestad, Walski, Chase, and Savic
To order or to receive additional information on these or any other Bentley Institute Press titles, please call
800-727-6555 (U.S. and Canada) or +1-203-755-1666 (worldwide) or visit www.bentley.com/books.
Related Topics
Training
The Bentley Institute manages professional training programs to ensure consistent, high quality, user training for a
variety of Bentley products and varying levels of application experience. Bentley Institute training is developed to
maximize your productivity by using examples relevant to your day-to-day project efforts. Training is developed
1120
Modelers can become certified in a variety of water-related fields, through an assortment of teaching methods
including:
JumpStart Seminars
Comprehensive Workshops
Publication-Based Programs
To obtain more information about Bentley Systems, Inc. certification programs or to see upcoming events in a city near
you, visit http://www.bentley.com.
Related Topics
Accreditations
Bentley Systems has achieved the highest levels of accreditation from both the International Association for Continuing
Education and Training (IACET) and the Professional Development Registry for Engineers and Surveyors (PDRES). In
addition to our own prestigious certifications, these endorsements enable modelers to earn Continuing Education Units
(CEUs) and Professional Development Hours (PDHs) for their satisfactory participation in various training and
educational programs.
Reference Tables
Unsubmerg
ed
Chart No.
Shape and
Material
Nomograp
h Scale
Circular
Concrete
Square
edge with
headwall
0.0098
0.0398
0.67
1121
Submerged
Groove
end with
head wall
0.0018
0.0292
0.74
Groove
end
projecting
0.0045
0.0317
0.69
Headwall
0.0078
0.0379
0.69
Mitered to
slope
0.021
1.33
0.0463
0.75
Projecting
0.034
1.5
0.0553
0.54
Beveled
ring, 45
bevels
0.0018
2.5
0.0300
0.74
Beveled
ring, 33.7
bevels
0.0018
2.5
0.0243
0.83
Rectangula 1
r Box
30 to 75
wingwall
flares
0.026
0.0347
0.81
90 to 15
wingwall
flares
0.061
0.75
0.0400
0.8
0
wingwall
flares
0.061
0.75
0.0423
0.82
Rectangula 1
r Box
45
Wingwall
flare, d=.
0430
0.51
0.667
0.0309
0.80
18-33.7
wingwall
flare, d=.
0830
0.486
0.667
0.0249
0.83
Circular
CMP
Circular
1122
11
12
Submerged
Rectangula 1
r Box
90
headwall
with
chamfers
0.515
0.667
0.0375
0.79
90
headwall
with 45
bevels
0.495
0.667
0.0314
0.82
90
headwall
with 33.7
bevels
0.486
0.667
0.0252
0.865
Rectangula 1
r Box
chamfers; 2
45 skewed
headwall
0.545
0.667
0.0505
0.73
chamfers; 2
30 skewed
headwall
0.533
0.667
0.0425
0.705
chamfers; 2
15 skewed
headwall
0.522
0.667
0.0402
0.68
45 bevels; 2
skewed
headwall
0.498
0.667
0.0327
0.75
45 nonoffset
wingwall
flares
0.497
0.667
0.0339
0.803
18.4 nonoffset
wingwall
flares
0.493
0.667
0.0361
0.806
18.4 nonoffset
wingwall
flares, 30
skewed
barrel
0.495
0.667
0.0386
0.71
Rectangula 1
r Box Chamfers
1123
16-19
29
30
Submerged
Rectangula 1
r Box Top Bevels
45
wingwall
flares offset
0.497
0.667
0.0302
0.835
33.7
wingwall
flares offset
0.495
0.667
0.0252
0.881
18.4
wingwall
flares offset
0.493
0.667
0.0227
0.887
C M Boxes 2
90
headwall
0.0083
0.0379
0.69
Thick wall
projecting
0.0145
1.75
0.0419
0.64
Thin wall
projecting
0.034
1.5
0.0496
0.57
Square
edge with
headwall
0.01
0.0398
0.67
Groove
end with
head wall
0.0018
2.5
0.0292
0.74
Groove
end
projecting
0.0045
0.0317
0.69
Square
edge with
headwall
0.01
0.0398
0.67
Groove
end with
head wall
0.0018
2.5
0.0292
0.74
Groove
end
projecting
0.0095
0.0317
0.69
Horizontal
Ellipse Concrete
Vertical
Ellipse Concrete
1124
35
36
40-42
55
56
Pipe Arch 1
18" Corner
Radius CM
Submerged
90
headwall
0.0083
0.0379
0.69
Mitered to
slope
0.03
0.0463
0.75
Projecting
0.034
1.5
0.0496
0.57
Pipe Arch 1
18" Corner
Radius CM
Projecting
0.0300
1.5
0.0496
0.57
No Bevels
0.0088
0.0368
0.68
33.7
bevels
0.003
0.0269
0.77
Pipe Arch 1
31" Corner
Radius CM
Projecting
0.0300
1.5
0.0496
0.57
No Bevels
0.0088
0.0368
0.68
33.7
bevels
0.003
0.0269
0.77
90
headwall
0.0083
0.0379
0.69
Mitered to
slope
0.03
0.0463
0.75
Thin wall
projecting
0.034
1.5
0.0496
0.57
Smooth
2
tapered
inlet throat
0.534
0.555
0.0196
0.90
Rough
2
tapered
inlet throat
0.519
0.64
0.0210
0.90
Tapered
inlet beveled
edges
0.536
0.622
0.0368
0.83
Arch CM
Circular
Elliptical
Inlet Face
1125
Submerged
Tapered
inlet square
edges
0.5035
0.719
0.0478
0.8
Tapered
inlet - thin
edge
projecting
0.547
0.8
0.0598
0.75
57
Rectangula 1
r
Tapered
2
inlet throat
0.475
0.667
0.0179
0.97
58
Rectangula 1
r Concrete
Side
tapered less
favorable
edges
0.56
0.667
0.0466
0.85
Side
tapered more
favorable
edges
0.56
0.667
0.0378
0.87
Rectangula 1
r Concrete
Slope
tapered less
favorable
edges
0.5
0.667
0.0466
0.65
Slope
tapered more
favorable
edges
0.5
0.667
0.0378
0.71
59
1126
Diagram
Headloss Coefficient
0.5
0.6
0.8
0.8
0.9
1127
Diagram
Headloss Coefficient
1.0
Min.
Normal
Max.
a. Brass, smooth
0.009
0.010
0.013
0.010
0.012
0.014
0.013
0.016
0.017
1. Coated
0.010
0.013
0.014
2. Uncoated
0.011
0.014
0.016
1. Black
0.012
0.014
0.015
2. Galvanized
0.013
0.016
0.017
1. Subdrain
0.017
0.019
0.021
2. Storm drain
0.021
0.024
0.030
b. Steel
c. Cast iron
d. Wrought iron
e. Corrugated metal
1128
Minimum
Normal
Maximum
Brass, smooth
0.009
0.010
0.013
0.010
0.012
0.014
0.013
0.016
0.017
0.010
0.013
0.014
0.011
0.014
0.016
0.012
0.014
0.015
0.013
0.016
0.017
0.019
0.021
0.024
0.030
0.021
Minimum
Normal
Maximum
Lucite
0.008
0.009
0.010
Glass
0.009
0.010
0.013
0.010
0.011
0.013
Cement; Mortar
0.011
0.013
0.015
0.010
0.011
0.013
0.011
0.013
0.014
Concrete; Finished
0.011
0.012
0.014
0.013
0.015
0.017
0.012
0.013
0.014
1129
Minimum
Normal
Maximum
Concrete; Unfinished,
smooth wood form
0.012
0.014
0.016
Concrete; Unfinished,
rough wood form
0.015
0.017
0.020
Wood; Stave
0.010
0.012
0.014
0.015
0.017
0.020
0.013
0.017
0.011
0.014
0.017
0.013
0.015
0.017
0.014
0.016
0.018
Brickwork; Glazed
0.011
0.013
0.015
0.011
0.013
0.015
0.013
0.016
0.019
0.020
0.025
0.030
0.018
Mannings n Coefficients
Mannings n Coefficient Table
Mannings n
Lined Channels
Concrete, with surfaces as
indicated
1130
Formed, no finish
0.013 - 0.017
Trowel finish
0.012 - 0.014
Float finish
0.013 - 0.015
Mannings n
Asphalt
Concrete-lined excavated
rock
0.015 - 0.017
0.016 - 0.019
0.018 - 0.022
0.015 - 0.017
0.017 - 0.020
0.020 - 0.025
0.016 - 0.020
0.020 - 0.030
Formed concrete
0.017 - 0.020
0.020 - 0.023
0.023 - 0.033
Brick
0.014 - 0.017
Smooth
0.013
Rough
0.016
0.011 - 0.013
Good section
0.017 - 0.020
Irregular section
0.022 - 0.027
Unlined Channels
Mannings n
0.016 - 0.018
0.018 - 0.020
1131
0.022 - 0.025
Mannings n
Dragline excavated or
dredged
No vegetation
0.022 - 0.025
0.025 - 0.030
0.030 - 0.035
0.025 - 0.030
0.030 - 0.040
No vegetation
0.028 - 0.033
0.035 - 0.050
0.035
0.035 - 0.040
0.040 - 0.045
0.08 - 0.12
0.05 - 0.08
0.07 - 0.11
0.10 - 0.14
Mannings n
1132
Mowed to 2 in.
0.07 - 0.045
Length 4 to 6 in.
0.09 - 0.05
Mannings n
0.18 - 0.09
0.30 - 0.15
0.14 - 0.08
0.25 - 0.13
Mowed to 2 in.
0.05 - 0.035
Length 4 to 6 in.
0.06 - 0.04
0.12 - 0.07
0.20 - 0.10
0.10 - 0.06
0.17 - 0.09
Gutters
Mannings n
Concrete gutter
Troweled finish
0.012
Asphalt pavement
Smooth texture
0.013
Rough texture
0.016
Smooth
0.013
Rough
0.015
Float finish
0.014
Broom finish
0.016
Concrete pavement
0.002
1133
1134
Index
A
1135
1136
Catchment-SWMM Extended
Data 1098
Catchment-SWMM Results 1099
Catchments 216
Catenary 871
Cell Libraries 397
Change Pipe Widths 836
Change Series Title Dialog Box
805
Changing the Drawing View 270
Channel-Active Topology 1045
Channel-General 1042
Channel-Geometry 1043
Channel-Output Filter 1043
Channel-Physical
Control Structure 1044
Channel-Results
Engine 1046
Chart Options Dialog Box 771
Chart Options Dialog Box - Chart
Tab 772
Chart Options Dialog Box Export Tab 798
Chart Options Dialog Box - Print
Tab 799
Chart Options Dialog Box Series Tab 790
Chart Options Dialog Box - Tools
Tab 797
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box
806
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box Axis Tab 809
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box Other Tab 811
Chart Tools Gallery Dialog Box Series Tab 806
Circular 173 Data 965
Circular Channel 864
CivilStorm 1117
Climate Files 321
Climatology Dialog Box 317
CN Weighting 986
Color Coding Properties That
Are Not In The List of
Field Names 719
Color Coding Your Model 716
1137
Eagleson 968
Edit Elements 835, 836
Edit Toolbar 41
Editing a Hyperlink 351
Editing Alternatives 572
Editing Annotations 711
Editing Attributes in the
Property Editor 1024
Editing Background Layers 702
Editing Color-Coding 719
Editing Element Attributes 264
Editing FlexTables 744
Editing Profiles 726
1138
1139
I-D-F e
b
d Equation 951
I-D-F Tables 950
i-Models 395
Ia/P Ratio 987
IDF Curve Dialog Box 530
IDF Curve Equation Input Dialog
Box 530
IDF Polynomial Log Equation
Dialog Box 531
Image Properties Dialog Box
703
Implementations 879
Implicit Solver Special
Considerations 857
Import Bentley SewerCAD 837
Importing a Bentley InRoads
Storm and Sanitary V8i
Model into Bentley
SewerCad V8i 78
Importing a Submodel 76
Importing Data 843
Importing Data from Bentley
Wastewater 74
Importing Data From Other
Models 74
Importing From GEOPAK 103
Importing from LandXML 95
Importing From MicroDrainage
100
Importing From MX 97
Importing Pressure Pipes 77
In-Line (Rectangular) Weir 926
Infiltration and Inflow
Alternative for Pressure
Junctions 610
Infiltration and Inflow
Alternatives 608
Inflow Alternative for Catch
Basins 609
Inflow Alternative for
Catchments 609
Inflow Alternative for Cross
Section Nodes 610
Inflow Alternative for Manholes
608
1140
1141
Manhole-Results (Extended
Node) 1060
Manhole-Sanitary Loading 1058
Manhole-SWMM Extended Data
1058
Manholes 162, 923
Manholes and Sewer Junctions
922
Manipulating Elements 256
Marks Tab 793
Menus 27
Merge Nodes in Close Proximity
259
Methods for Entering Loads 465
MicroStation Commands 836
MicroStation Environment 832
MicroStation Mode 21
MicroStation Mode Graphical
Layout 832
MicroStation Project Files 833
Minimizing Effort through
Attribute Inheritance
562
Minimizing Effort through
Scenario Inheritance
563
Minimum Time of Concentration
967
Minor Loss Coefficients 287
Minor Losses 924
Miscellaneous SCADAconnect
Operations 460
Mixed (Transcritical) Flow 859
ModelBuilder Data Source
Format 135
ModelBuilder Warnings and
Error Messages 131
ModelBuilder Wizard 120
Modeling Curved Pipes 247
Modeling Storms with SCS
Distributions 958
Modified Basket Handle 872
Modified Rational 549
Modified Rational Method 982
Modifying Elements 835
Moving Element Labels 837, 841
Moving Elements 836, 841
Outfall-General 1072
Outfall-Geometry 1072
Outfall-Inflow 1075
Outfall-Physical 1074
Outfall-Results
Flows 1076
Outfall-SWMM Extended Data
1074
Outfalls 185
Output Alternative for Channels
607
Output Alternative for Conduits
607
Output Alternatives 606
Overflow in the SewerGEMS
Dynamic Wave Solver
165
Overriding Inheritance 561
Overview of GVF-Convex Solver
Network Connectivity
Rules 664
1142
1143
Pump-Results
Engine Parsing Attributes
1086
Pumps 191
Pumps and Force Main
System(s) 852
Pumps and Wet Wells in the
GVF-Rational Solver 209
Pumps Dialog Box 214
Rainfall 948
Rainfall Curve Dictionary Dialog
Box 528
Rainfall Curve Import Settings
Dialog Box 527
Rainfall Curves
Build from I-D-F Data 965
Rainfall Derived Infiltration and
Inflow (RDII) 510
Rainfall Duration 963
Rainfall Runoff Alternative 611
Rainfall Runoff Alternative for
Catchments 612
Rainfall Runoff Alternative for
Global Rainfall 611
Rainfall Runoff Alternative for
Outfalls 611
Rainfall Runoff Alternative for
Ponds 613
Rainfall Runoff Alternative for
Wet Wells 613
Rainfall Tables 955
Rainfall Time-Distribution
Information 962
Rating Curves 931
Rational Method 980
Rational Method IDF Curve
Dialog Box 528
1144
Setting up ProjectWise
integration for
Standalone 68
SewerCAD 1118
SewerGEMS 1117
Shapefile Properties Dialog Box
705
Shared Field Specification
Dialog Box 379
Sharing Engineering Libraries
On a Network 287
Sharing User Data Extensions
Among Element Types
378
Side Weir 929
Signal Mapping 445
Simulating Dry Weather 466
Single Loss Method for EPASWMM Catchments 539
Slot Inlet in Sag 906
Slot Inlet on 902
Snap Menu 837, 842
Snow Pack Parameters Tab 316
Snow Removal Parameters Tab
316
Snowmelt 965
Snowmelt and Groundwater
217
Snowmelt Tab 318
Software 1117
Solvers (Numerical) 663
Sorting and Filtering FlexTable
Data 745
Special Numerical Techniques
853
Specify Datasource Location 120
Specifying a Time of
Concentration (Tc)
Method for a Catchment
218
Specifying Network
Connectivity in
ModelBuilder 134
Speed-Efficiency Curve Dialog
Box 206
Splitting Pipes 258
1145
1146
1147